Home

Vertical MBX IP Description Operations and Programming Guide 1.7

Contents

1. P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 27 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN Door Open A 17 113 82 1 Keypad Facility 83 HE T Net Log In Out 84 586 Universal Answer 85 587 Delete All VM Message 87 681 VM Page Message Record 88 682 Direct VM Transfer 89 683 Loop Key 90 684 Call Log 91 685 ACD Agent Log In Out 92 500 ACD Agent DND 93 501 ACD Agent Word Mode 94 502 ACD Agent Auto Work 95 503 ACD Agent Auto Answer 96 504 ACD Call Indication 97 508 Non ACD Call Indication 98 509 ACD Supervisor Group Forward 99 890 ACD Supervisor Night 100 891 ACD Supervisor Holiday 101 892 ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer 102 893 ACD Supervisor Agent State Check 103 894 ACD Supervisor Silent Monitor 104 895 ACD Supervisor Call Traffic Check 105 896 ACDAnnouncement Play amp Check 106 899 Day Night Timed Mode Change 107 513 DID DISA Restriction 108 685 Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP
2. PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA DND Access A 31 132 4 EN DIS Enable Intrusion Access 5 EN DIS Disable Mobile Extension Access 6 EN DIS Enable Hook Flash Mode 7 0 Flash Normal Flash Normal 1 Flash Ignore 2 Flash Drop 3 Hold Release Auto Pick Up 8 EN DIS Disable STATION DN ATTRIBUTES III A 31 133 CO Queue Access 1 EN DIS Enable Conference Access 2 EN DIS Enable Wake Up Access 3 EN DIS Enable Station Call Back Access 4 EN DIS Enable ACNR Access 5 EN DIS Enable Absence Notice Access 6 EN DIS Enable Call Wait Access 7 JEN DIS Enable Camp On Access 8 EN DIS Enable Voice Over Access 9 EN DIS Disable Prepaid Call Access 10 EN DIS Disable Keypad Facility Usage 11 EN DIS Disable STATION DN ATTRIBUTES IV A 31 134 Speed Access 1 EN DIS Enable Page Access 2 EN DIS Enable Meet Me Page Access A 31 134 3 EN DIS Enable CO Call Duration Restrict 4 EN DIS Disable SLT Block Back Call 5 EN DIS Disable Pilot Hunt Ring 6 EN DIS Enable ACR User 7 1 On 0 Off Off Wake Up Time 8 l Release 1 7 Wve MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP COS ASSIGNMENT
3. P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 31 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA Off Hook On Paged A 27 124 7 Preferred Line Answer 0 Paged 1 Dial Tone Paged Pick Up By DSS Button 1 ON 0 OFF ON CTI IP Address 0 Disable 1 Group Pick Up 2 Direct Pick Up Direct Pick Up 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT A 29 126 Button Type Not Assigned Station DSS CO Number Loop Key CO Group Access Sta Grp Number Dial Number Directory Number Button Type Redial Speed Conference Mute Call Back DND FWD Transfer Flash Ring Option Button Type DirectoryNo PTT Immediate Ring Delay Ring 1 9 No Ring Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP STATION DN ASSIGNMENT STATION DN ATTRIBUTES STATION DN ATTRIBUTES II a Release 1 7 xY April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 33 Appendix C Quick Reference
4. DEFAULT VALUES Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT BOARD DATA BLF Destination System Port 9 0000 9999 9500 Firewall Routing 10 10 OFF 1 ON ON T NET DATA A 143 i available_at this UME pi feature 1S not A 143 A 143 A 144 i ilable at this umer Thisdeature Is not A 145 A 145 H 324 DATA H 323 ROUTING ATTRIBUTE A 146 360 J Digit 1 Max 8 digits Destination IP Address 2 0 0 0 0 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Release 1 7 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP GK ATTRIBUTE a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 97 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SIP CO DATA SIP CO BASIC REGISTRATION WEB ONLY l Main Proxy Address d Main Proxy Port 1024 9999 5060 Main Domain Name l Proxy Type Normal Dacom KT Normal SIP CO ADDITIONAL REGISTRATION WEB ONLY l User ID Start Index l User ID End Index l Main Outbound Proxy Address d Main Outbound Proxy Port 1024 9999 5060 Sub Proxy Address Sub Proxy Port WEB ONLY 1024 9999 5060 Sub Domain Name l
5. PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO TO CO ATTRIBUTES A 60 179 J Station Outgoing Call Transfer 1 EN DIS Enable Attendant Outgoing Call Transfer EN DIS Enable Outgoing Transfer Release Type 3 10 None None 1 Release After Time Outgoing Transfer Release Time 4 000 300 60 Incoming Call Transfer Directly 5 EN DIS Disable Station Incoming Call Transfer 6 EN DIS Enable Attendant Incoming Call Transfer 7 JEN DIS Enable Incoming Transfer Release Type 8 10 None None 1 Release After Time Incoming Transfer Release Time 9 000 300 1sec 60 CO GROUP ACCESS CODE A 61 180 l Access Code Name 1 CO Line choice 2 0 Round Robin Round Robin 1 Last Line 2 First Line Outgoing Group Number 3 101 72 AND Digit 4 ARS Service 5 11 On 0 Off Off ARS Digit 1 6 ARS Digit 2 7 ALTERNATIVE RING TABLE A 63 181 Service Type 1 10 Ring Assign Ring Assign 1 Feature CO Ring Assign 2 Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 51 Appendix C Quick Reference
6. y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 47 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA OUTGOING CO ATTRIBUTES II A 57 171 l CPT Detect 1 1 On 0 Off On Unsupervised Conference Extend 2 1 On 0 Off Off Provide Ring Back Tone 3 1 On 0 Off Off BLF Usage 4 1 On 0 Off On Release Guard Timer 5 00 15 1sec 2 Unsupervised Conference Timer 6 000 255 1min 0 Max Transfer Ring Timer 7 1001 300 sec 120 Outgoing Time Table Index 8 None 1 9 None OUTGOING CO ALTERNATIVE A 57 173 J Day 1 Flex1 Recall No Answer Disconnect Flex2 Transfer No Ans Flex3 No Answer 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring Assign 4 ALT Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot Hunt Group Night 2 Flex1 Recall No Answer Disconnect Flex2 Transfer No Ans Flex3 No Answer 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring Assign 4 ALT Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot Hunt Group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 49 Appendix C Quick Reference
7. INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 39 Camp on Alarm This is provided to station if camp on is requested 40 Conference Alarm This is provided to station if station makes conference call 41 Conference Join This is provided when station adds conference member 42 Call Wait Alarm This is provided to station if call wait is requested 43 Break In Alarm Reserved 44 Conference Room In This is provided when station enters conference room 45 Conference Room Out This is provided when conference member is deleted 46 Call Duration Restriction Alarm This is provided to station with CDR disconnection indication before the forced disconnection 47 Confirm Tone This is confirmation tone 48 Single Error Tone This is provided when stations dials wrong input during programming 49 Transfer Hold Tone This is provided to the external user when he is transferred 50 Transfer Hold Tone Station This is provided to the station when he is transferred 51 Camp On Hold Tone CO This is provided to the external user when they are camped on 52 Camp On Hold Tone Station This is provided to the station when they are camped on 53 Call Wait Hold Tone CO This is provided to the external user when they are waiting 54 Call Wait Hold Tone Station This is provided to the station when they are waiting 55 Normal Hold Tone CO This is provided to the external user in hold 56 Normal Hold Tone Station This is provided t
8. a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7 23 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 15 1 Normal 4 queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for forward 16 000 300 secs 30 destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuingtone 17 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNC This entry defines second queuing 18 001 255 Not Assigned prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 19 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 20 000 100 secs 0 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during second 21 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 22 01 12 none second queuing annc Pause time PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING This entry defines if a call is routed to 1 0 After Greeting After Greeting a destination during greeting tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT This entry defines queue count 2 00 99 00
9. CO Outgoing I nter Digit Timer TRANS PGM 174 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer TRANS PGM 175 A 59 Appendix A System Programming Tables 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 174 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SEIZE WAIT TIME wait time before first digit 1 005 200 100 msec 020 FIRST DGT time limit between first digit and the next digit 2 010 200 100 msec 100 SECOND DGT time limit between second digit and the 3 010 200 100 msec 080 next digit THIRD DGT time limit between third digit and the next 4 010 200 100 msec 070 digit FORTH DGT time limit between forth digit and the next 5 010 200 100 msec 060 digit FIFTH DGT time limit between fifth digit and the next digit 6 010 200 100 msec 050 MORE THAN 6TH time limit between digit and the next 7 010 200 100 msec 040 digit after the sixth digit CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer TRANS PGM 175 When making outgoing CO calls the time interval to send DTMF tones of each digit can be adjusted This feature is useful for the Speed Dial or Redial feature 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 175 2 Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range For a single CO Line enter the same number twice For MBX IP 100 acceptable range is 01 80 for MBX IP 300 the acceptable range is 001 240 3 Press the desired Flex button
10. TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING This entry defines if a call is routed to 1 0 After Greeting After Greeting a destination during greeting tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT This entry defines queue count 2 00 99 00 FORWARD TYPE This entry defines forward type 0 Not 0 Not Used used 1 Unconditional a call is routed to a forward destination 1 Uncond unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow a call is routed to a 2 Q Overflow forward destination when a queue is overflow 3 Tmeout a 3 Time out call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is 4 All expired 4 All a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired APPLY TIME TYPE This entry defines a time to apply 4 0 ALL ALL forward type 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED FWD DESTINATION This entry defines a forward 5 Max 16 digits None destination Trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR This entry defines a wrap up timer A 6 000 600 010 member is available when this timer is expired after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR This entry defines no answer 7 05 60 15 timer about each member If this timer is expired a call is routed to the next member RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 0 timer If this timer is expired a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry
11. a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Group 7 7 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Greeting 4 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce GREETING REPEAT NO Determines the number of times 5 000 100 3 the Greeting will repeat GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the greeting is repeated QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Program
12. Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Table Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Forward Destination Overflow Service 7 25 Chapter 7 Attendants CCR Table PGM260 see details on page A 112 PGM 260 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CCR TABLE The destination of CCR input digit the destination 1 12 Max 8 digits can be a Station number Station group number or Feature code NOTE For Feature codes refer to the Numbering Plan for the applicable codes Forward Destination Overflow Service This can be assigned as Station Hunt Group Telephone Number covering Attendant Call according to the Forward type of the Attendant Group There are 4 kinds of Forward type in an Attendant Group e Unconditional Queuing Overflow e Queuing Timeout Queuing Overflow or Queuing Timeout The Overflow Destination can be programmed as Station Station Group External number NET Destination OPERATION To use the Unconditional Forward Overflow Destination 1 Dial the Attendant Call code 2 The Call is Routed to the Forward Destination To use the Queuing Overflow Forward Destination 1 Dial the Attendant call code 2 The Call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode NOTE The Call will be Routed to the Forward Destination when max queue has been Ov
13. Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages 3 135 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS Alphanumeric characters are displayed as they are entered Display Message is cancelled if the User activates DND or Call Forward Custom Text Display Messages and Display Message status are stored in non volatile memory to protect against loss during power failure Incoming Caller Station will display the message SLTs are notified of an active Display Message with a stutter dial tone while Digital Phones will have a flashing DND button when there is an active Text Display Message Activating a Text Display Message does not affect normal operation of the station Pre defined Messages 01 04 and 06 08 permit the user to input auxiliary information such as time date or number as applicable The Attendant station can activate a Text Display Message for other stations however this feature is not available to an Attendant OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button for Display Messages PRESS TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 Preselected Message TRANS PGM Code HOLD SAVE To activate a Display Message that will be presented to incoming callers 1 a RON D Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 41 Display Message code To scroll through the available messages press VOL UP VOL DOWN button
14. G Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Service Status 10 13 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOLIDAY SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 5 0 Release Release call when group status is Holiday Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST When Holiday Service type is 6 l Forward applied destination can be assigned OVERFLOW SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute 7 0 Release Release ACD call when group status is Overflow Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward OVERFLOW FWD DEST When Overflow Service type is 8 Forward applied destination can be assigned MAX QUEUING COUNT This entry defines MAX queuing 9 00 99 10 call count If queuing ACD Call count is over the max q count ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status QUEUING ANNC STEP This entry defines queuing 10 1 5 1 announcement play service step One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call REPEAT COUNT This entry defines total queuing 11 0 No Repeat No Repeat announcement repeat service count If this entry is defines as 1 One Time One or More Times service Queuing Announcement will be 2 Three Times played from 1st to defined Step And then from Repeat 3 Five Times Position Queuing Announcement will be restarted to defined 4 Ten Times step until Repeat Count 5 Twenty Times REPEAT POSITION This entry defines
15. W verti Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Traffic Analysis CONDITIONS OPERATION System Attendant To print a Tenant Traffic Report To print a Call Type Traffic Report Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 Traffic Analysis 3 251 To print a CO Group Traffic Report 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 023 CO Group Traffic Report code 3 Select Day Information 0 Yesterday 1 Today 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Chapter 3 System Features RS 232 Port Settings TRANS PGM 230 see details on page A 89 TRANS PGM 230 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BAUD RATE Establishes the BAUD rate for the RS 232 serial port 1 1 9600 5 115200 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 PAGE BREAK The system can send a page break command over 2 0 Off 0 Off the serial port at the end of each page 1 On LINE PER PAGE Determines Page length the number of lines the 3 001 199 66 system will send before sending a Page break XON XOFF Enables XON XOFF protocol 4 O XOff 0 XOff 1 XOn Serial Port Function Selections TRANS PGM 231 see details on page A 90 TRANS PGM 231 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ON LINE SMDR Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for 1 0 5 COM the On line SMDR OFF LINE SMDR Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for 2 0 5
16. 5 31 DID DISA Restriction 5 34 CO IP LINE PRESET FORWARD 5 35 CO OWN CODE SERVICE 5 36 CO IP Ring Assignment 5 37 CO Line Release Guard Time 5 41 CO Ring Detect 5 42 CO Transit Service 5 42 Dial Pulse Signaling 5 44 Direct Inward Dial DID 5 45 Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 50 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signal Sending 5 55 H 323 Multi Route Service 5 55 Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID Call Routing 5 57 IP Trunking 5 59 H 323 v4 Service 5 59 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Service 5 61 IP WAN Dialing After Answer 5 62 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 64 ISDN Advice of Charge AOC 5 64 Calling Called Party Identification CLIP COLP 5 68 Keypad Facility 5 69 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN 5 71 ISDN CLI 5 73 ISDN Supplementary Services 5 76 ISDN Call Deflection 5 76 Representat
17. CO Group Access Code Attribute TRANS PGM 180 Each CO Group Access Code allows user to access the CO group using different codes and different options Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Alternate Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 181 A 63 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ARS DGT 2 Second alternate CO Group 8 Max 8 digits Access code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line ARS 2 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 9 Access code is used this field defines if original 41 digits or converted digits are used Off Alternate Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 181 The Supplementary Ring Assignment Table is used for programming alternate ring destinations which can be stations or any feature code stations do not have a delay value 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 181 2 Enter Table index 3 Press the desired Flex button refer to Following Table 4 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 181 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE If set as 0 2 ring option is applied to ring 1 0 All Ring All Ring assigned stations Othe
18. 3 10 Automatic System Daylight Savings Time 3 12 Automatic System Time Synchronization 3 13 Battery Back up Memory 3 14 Call Forward 3 15 Call Forward Pilot Hunt 3 19 Call Forward Preset 3 22 Call Park 3 24 Call Pick Up 3 26 Directed Call Pick Up 3 26 Group Call Pick Up 3 28 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 2 Call Transfer 3 30 Call Transfer Station 3 30 Call Transfer CO IP 3 31 CO IP Access 3 37 CO IP Call Time Restriction 3 40 CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer 3 43 CO IP Queuing 3 45 Conference 3 47 Conference Room 3 47 Multi Party Voice Conference 3 50 Consultation Conference 3 52 Unsupervised Conference 3 53 Customer Site Name 3 55 Data Line Security 3 56 Dela
19. P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 227 Chapter 3 System Features Message Waiting I ndication MWI Message Waiting Indication MWI is the same as Calling Line Indication CLI message wait service On anormal ISDN call a Station can leave a Message Wait for an unavailable station on another node CLI message wait must be enabled MWI is indicated by the CLI message on the Station LCD panel Additionally it can be supported by supplementary service without CLI by pressing the MSG WAIT button when the Net Call Ring Back tone is received CONDITIONS MWI only can be registered at the Station hearing a ring back tone MWI notification is displayed at the Called Station LCD When the System presents the Call Back according to MWI data the CO Line is selected within the Network CO group OPERATION To register and retrieve MWI 1 Initiate a Net Call to another station on another node the caller will hear a Ring Back tone 2 While hearing the Ring Back tone the caller can either a Press the MSG Callbk button OR b Press the TRANS button and dial the Message Wait Register Feature Code 3 MWLis left to the called station and a flashing MSG Callbk button indicates the message waiting 4 At the called Station press the flashing MSG Callbk button the Calling Station number is displayed ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 see de
20. Release 1 7 Aw April 2012 Administration Menu Table A 3 Appendix A System Programming Tables Administration Menu Station VMIB Attribute 145 Mobile Phone Attribute 146 Station Number Data CO IP Group Access 150 Page Zone Access 151 Command Group Access 152 CO Line Attribute 160 163 Incoming CO ATTR 165 166 CO Ring Assignment 167 Normal DISA CO ATTR 168 Incoming CO Alternative 169 CO Line Data Outgoing CO ATTR 170 171 Outgoing CO Alternative 173 CO Inter Digit Timer 174 DTMF Send Interval 175 CO COS Assignment 177 CO to CO Attribute 179 CO Group Access Code 180 Alternative Ring Table 181 Station Group Assign 200 Station Group ATTR 201 202 Voice Mail Group 203 Call Pick Up Group 204 Page Group 205 Station Group Data Command Conference Group 206 PTT Group 208 Interphone Group 209 Pilot Hunt Group 210 211 ACD Group Assignment 212 ACD Group ATTR 213 214 ACD Group Announcement 215 System Timer 222 System Attribute 223 System Data System Password 226 Alarm Attribute 227 External Control Contact 228 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Administration Menu Release 1
21. 4 7 Intercom Transfer 4 8 INTRUSION 4 10 Message Wait Call Back 4 11 Station Message Wait Call Back 4 11 Message Wait Reminder Tone 4 14 Paging 4 15 Internal External amp All Call Page 4 15 Meet Me Page Answer 4 17 VM Paging 4 20 Push To Talk Paging 4 23 Chapter 5 CO IP Alternative Route Selection 5 1 Automatic Network Dialing 5 2 CO Group Access Code 5 3 CO Line Flash 5 5 CO IP Line Groups 5 7 CO Line Service 5 9 Incoming CO Line Option 5 9 Outgoing CO Line Option 5 14 Alternate Incoming CO Service 5 19 Release 1 7 XW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 6 Alternate Outgoing CO Service 5 25 Digit Sending Mode 5 28 CO COS 5 28 DID Name Service 5 29 Incoming CO Line Holiday Service
22. PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION GROUP DATA Greeting Repeat Count A 65 201 5 000 100 3 Greeting Repeat Delay Timer 6 000 100 1sec 0 Queuing Tone Type 7 0 Normal Internal MOH 1 Prompt 2 Announcement 3 Internal MOH 4 External MOH Greeting Queuing Timeout Timer 8 000 300 1sec 30 Queuing Tone Number 9 01 19 Queuing Prompt Announcement Table No 10 Queuing Repeat Count 11 1000 100 3 Queuing Repeat Delay Timer 12 000 100 1sec 0 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES II A 68 202 Call In Greeting 1 0 After Greeting 1 In Greeting Max Queue Count 2 00 99 Forward Type 0 Not Used Not Used 1 Unconditional 2 Queuing Overflow 3 Time Out 4 Queuing Overflow Time Out Apply Time Type 4 0 All All 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed Forward Destination 5 Wrap Up Timer 6 000 600 100msec 10 Member No Answer Timer 50 600 100msec 150 VOICE MAIL GROUP A 69 203 Put Mail Index 1 11 9 1 Get Mail Index 2 1 9 2 Release 1 7 Wve MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 53 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION GROUP DATA D
23. Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 162 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Executive Secretary see page 3 85 Music On Hold see page 3 123 Call Forward see page 3 15 VMIB Integrated see page 3 258 Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 HARDWARE Digital Phone Greeting Queuing Tone Service The System can provide a Greeting tone or Queuing tone when a call is routed to Station Group When a call is routed to Station Group the pre assigned Greeting or Queuing Tone will be provided to the caller The tone will be provided according to the Tone Time Delay Time Repeat counters There are 7 types of Tones NORMAL System Tone 01 19 Tone Freq in TRANS PGM 264 PROMPT VMIB Prompt ANNOUNCEMENT VMIB Announcement INT MOH EXT MOH VMIB MOH 1 4 for MBX IP 300 1 3 for MBX IP 100 SLT MOH 1 5 OPERATION If set Greeting Queuing Tone Service operation is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 163 Chapter 3 System Features Queuing ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 164 Chapter 3 System Features Attendant Group Attribute TRANS PGM 271 272 see details on page A 118 TRANS PGM 271
24. 3 141 Remote Device Zone Management 3 143 Remote Services Managed Net 3 144 Release 1 7 ver tical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 4 Revertible Ring 3 145 Speed Dial 3 146 Speed Dial Pause Insertion 3 146 Station Speed Dial 3 147 System Speed Dial 3 150 Station Call Coverage 3 153 System Groups 3 153 Station Group 3 154 Greeting Queuing Tone Service 3 162 CCR Service with Queuing Announcement 3 168 Forward Destination Overflow Service 3 173 Pilot Hunt Group 3 178 Pick Up Group 3 182 Push To Talk PTT Group 3 183 Command Conference Group 3 184 Interphone Group 3 185 Paging Group 3 186 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 187 Call Cost Display 3 187 SMDR Call Records 3 189 System Admin Programming 3 194 Keyset Administration 3 194 Multi
25. PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE if outgoing 3 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME if an 4 000 300 sec 060 outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after RIs Time Before disconnecting a warning tone is provided INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call STATION INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while stations 6 0 Off On are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the 1 On station can transfer the call to second CO group ATD INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is 7 0 Off On connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the ATD can 1 On transfer the call to second CO group INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE If incoming 8 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME If an 9 000 300 sec 060 incoming CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release
26. CO GROUP ACCESS CODE CO Group Access Code 01 73 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 29 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES II A 25 122 LCD Language Display mode 1 LCD Language Display Mode 2 oO English English oO Italian oO N Finnish oO wo Dutch O A Swedish oO o Danish j O Norwegian oO J Hebrew oO Co Germany jo o French oO Portuguese Spanish e N Korean ow Estonian LCD Date Display Mode _ A Russian English LCD Time Display Mode MMDDYY DDMMYY DDMMYY Backlight Usage 24 Hour Mode 12 Hour Mode 12 Hour Mode IP 8000 Phone Font Always Off Busy Only Always On Busy Only IP 8000 Phone LCD Brightness Times New Roman Gothic O N 0 0 gt 0 Times New Roman Group Queue Display 01 15 07 1 On 0 Off Off Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP
27. PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forward 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 l Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Agent State 10 37 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to define
28. Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants OR PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Table Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Day Night Timed Ring Mode 7 39 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Wednesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 3 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 4 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Friday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 5 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Saturday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 6 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Sunday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 7 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group 1 0 Terminal 0 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line 3 Max4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4
29. All active Stations including SLTs can leave and receive voice messages Individual User Greetings and Voice Mails are protected from loss of AC power OPERATION Remote Caller To leave a voice message 1 After receiving the Greeting and beep on an attempted call record the desired message 2 Hang up to quit recording or dial for further options Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Numbering Plan Station Data P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 263 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO WAY RECORD DEVICE Determines the save location of 5 VM Boards Two Way recorded wav files VM Boards or Phontage When Phontage is selected recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC REC MSG BACKUP STA When station has new voice mail saved 6 l on the VM internal boards this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number Phontage user can backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC BACKUP MSG DELETE When enabled Phontage user can delete 7 0 Disable Disable all voice mail in VM internal boards 1 Enable VMIB MS
30. Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 25 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN Station Speed PGM A 17 113 26 553 Speed Dial 27 555 MWI Register 28 557 MWI Answer 29 558 MWI Cancel 30 559 Call Back Register 31 518 Call Back Cancel 32 519 Group Call Pickup 33 564 Direct Call Pickup 34 7 Walking COS 35 520 Call Parking Location 36 541 PGM Mode Access 37 521 Two Way Record 38 522 VMIB Access 39 523 AME Access 40 524 CO Line Access 41 888 VM MWI Enable 42 8 VM MWI Cancel 43 9 MCID Request 44 0 Unsupervised Conf Extend 45 5 PTT Group Access 46 524 Hot Desk Log In Log Out 47 525 Name Register 48 526 Create Conf Room 49 527 Delete Conf Room 50 528 Wake Up Register 51 529 Wake Up Cancel 52 530 Temporarily COS Down 53 531 Das Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP
31. INIT a TABLE Determines how to initialize the FO Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 202 Chapter 3 System Features amp we _ amp we cS a da TaN ae Y cee AD a page A 145 page A 145 page A 20 Distributed Control Network In the Distributed Control Network each System maintains control over the devices registered to it Networked systems communicate allowing other networked systems access to resources over the network In addition other features and functions as detailed in the following sections of this manual are available to users provided by a distributed network environment The System permits remote access to various resources through registered gateway Modules and Terminals In addition the System will request access to resources of remote systems A user dialed number is analyzed and the call routed according to the NET Numbering Table Should the main path fail to respond the System re routes the call employing the designated Alternative Speed Dial route Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 203 Chapter 3 System Features The System supports 2 standard protocols QSIG over ISDN and H 450 over IP for basic networking functions QSIG employs ISDN PRI channels only with suppor
32. WZ MBX IP Description Programming amp Operations Guide h w Release 1 7 April 2012 Release 1 7 April 2012 Vertical Communications Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content without notice 2011 by Vertical Communications Inc All rights reserved This publication contains proprietary and confidential information of Vertical Communica tions Inc The contents of this document may not be disclosed copied or translated by third parties in any form or by any means known or not now known or conceived without prior explicit written permission from Vertical Communications Inc LIMIT OF LIABILITY DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Vertical Communications Inc makes no representation or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the content of this publication and specifically disclaims any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose and shall not be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage including but not limited to special incidental or consequential TRADEMARKS Vertical Communications and the Vertical Communications logo and combinations thereof are trademarks of Vertical Communications Inc All other brand and product names are used for identification only and are the property of their respective holders RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure of the technical data contained in this document b
33. CALL EXECUTIVE This option is to directly route calls to the 5 0 2 0 Executive station OFF executive calls are routed to secretary FIRST SEC DND the executive receives call when first secretary is in DND ALL SEC DND the executive receives call when all secretaries in DND SECRETARY CHOICE Determines order in which secretary 6 0 1 0 stations will receive calls First Idle Longest Idle MSG WAIT STATION Determines if message wait indication 7 0 Executive 0 is left at Executive Station or Secretary 1 First Secretary EXECUTIVE message left at Executive station FIRST SEC message is left at the first secretary Executive Executive Access TRANS PGM 242 see details on page A 103 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 157 Chapter 3 System Features Station Group TRANS PGM 200 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE this entry defines the type of station group 1 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Terminal 2 Circular 3 Ring 4 Longest Idle 5 Voice Mail GROUP NAME this entry defines the name of a group 2 Max 16 chars TENANT NO this entry assigns a tenant of a station group 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE IDX Time Table index 4 1 9 1 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 0 Disable Disable ot
34. CONDITIONS er TERT Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Intercom Call ICM Call 4 3 Operation Digital Phone To place an Intercom call Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive the ICM dial tone Dial Station number or press the DSS button For Ring Back tone await answer 1 2 3 SLT OR Chapter 4 Intercom For Intercom splash tone speak and await answer To place an intercom call 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone Dial Station number For Ring Back tone await answer OR For Intercom splash tone speak and await answer PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Flexible Station Number TRANS PGM 112 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 112 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION NUMBER 1 Start station number Delete all station numbers and update entered edit by range amp End station number station number range only SINGLE STATION 2 One station number Bin 001 324 MBX IP 300 bin 001 128 MBX NUMBER edit IP 100 1 number per one station port My DNs for each stations Bin 325 648 MBX IP 300 bin 129 256 MBX IP 100 Free station numbers for MADN type or extra SADN type numbers Sub DNs Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom System Data RELAT
35. DEFAULT 05 RELATED FEATURES Station Authorization Code see page 3 5 DND see page 3 77 Dialing Restriction see page 3 63 Station Group see page 3 154 Intercom Signaling Mode see page 6 11 Call Forward Preset see page 3 22 Call Forward Pilot Hunt User may have selected incoming calls in his group to re route to other stations local or networked station groups or VMIIB The user selects the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward code as follows Code 1 Unconditional all calls to the station except recalls are forwarded internally or externally immediately upon receipt Code 2 Busy if the station is busy forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station Code 3 No Answer forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer Code 4 Busy No Answer forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer CONDITIONS Station Call Forward has higher priority than Pilot Hunt Call Forward To assign Pilot Hunt Call forward the Station should be a member of the Pilot Hunt Group An external number cannot be assigned to a Pilot Hunt Forward destination Ifa station assigns the pilot hunt Call Forward the pilot hunt call forward in day mode is changed Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations am
36. Multiple WTIBs may be installed te ort DECT p y ego OPERATION x DECT operation is automatic do configured oy ADMIN PROGRAMMING Na DECT Data K DECT Registg8n 0 DECT Attiutes TRANS PGM 492 HARD Mfes GDC 400B GDC 600B Base stations SH GDC 400H GDC 450H Handsets Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 200 Chapter 3 System Features System Networking Centralized Control T NET LM 5 The System supports Centralized Control T N ransparent Network as a role of the Local Mode LM If the MBX IP System is set for Nall modules and terminals which are physically connected to the System can tanspareggN tess all the features and functions of the central MBX IP as well as connected ee n MBX IP System set to work in Central Mode CM controls all remote modules and als connected to the System as if they are connected transparently without a local NRO System The voice connection provid y cally will not be controlled by a central MBX IP system directly Therefore a VOIP chan ould be configured for voice relay between phones in the Local MBX IP system and thse in the Central office system Under normal cirgan ances the Central MBX IP system controls devices in the Local MBX IP System Howe Should the WAN connection between the Central system and remote devices fail ocal MBX IP System will assume Call Server responsibility for the local devices Loca
37. PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA SYSTEM TIME TABLE A 107 253 System Time Table 1 9 Time Zone Comment 1 Max 32 Chars Time Zone 2 System Time GNT Time Daylight Saving Time 3 1 On 0 Off Off Ring Mode 4 0 Day Day 1 Night 2 Timed Auto Ring Mode 5 1 On 0 Off Off WEEKLY TIME TABLE A 108 254 Monday 1 Flex1 Day Start Time 09 00 Flex2 Night Start Time 18 00 Flex3 Timed Start Time Flex4 Timed End Time Flex5 Work Holiday Workday Tuesday 2 Flex1 Day Start Time 09 00 Flex2 Night Start Time 18 00 Flex3 Timed Start Time Flex4 Timed End Time Flex5 Work Holiday Workday Wednesday 3 Flex1 Day Start Time 09 00 Flex2 Night Start Time 18 00 Flex3 Timed Start Time Flex4 Timed End Time Flex5 Work Holiday Workday Thursday 4 Flex1 Day Start Time 09 00 Flex2 Night Start Time 18 00 Flex3 Timed Start Time Flex4 Timed End Time Flex5 Work Holiday Workday Friday 5 Flex1 Day Start Time 09 00 Flex2 Night Start Time 18 00 Flex3 Timed Start Time Flex4 Timed End Time Flex5 Work Holiday Workday Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 73 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Syst
38. Sub Outbound Proxy Address d Sub Outbound Proxy Port 1024 9999 5060 Connection Mode UDP TCP TLS UDP Registration Timer 60 86400 3600 100rel Support ON OFF OFF Session Timer Support ON OFF OFF Max Session Timer 180 3600 1800 Use 181 Message ON OFF OFF Use RPORT ON OFF OFF P Asserted Identity NOT USE USE NOT USE DTMF Send Mode IN Z OUT RFC2833 RFC2833 SIP CO CODEC WEB ONLY b First Codec Type Not Use G 711A 711 U A 729 723A Second Codec Type Not Use Not Use 711 U A 729 723A Das Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP SIP CO DATA SIP STATION DATA a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 99 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SIP STATION DATA Retry Count 3 10 5 407 Authentication ON OFF OFF 100rel Support ON OFF OFF Session Timer Support ON OFF OFF Max Session Timer 180 3600 1800 Min Session Timer 60 150 90 ZONE DATA ZONE ATTRIBUTE WEB ONLY l Nation Code Same with system nation Memo Codec Type Tenant Codec G 711 Tenant Codec G 723 G729 G722 Not Assign RTP Relay Rule Automatic Follow Relay Automatic Group VOIB
39. 02 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range 3 Press the SAVE button Dial to cancel call forward 5 Replace the handset return to idle Additional Tax Fields Different tax rates can be applied for the various charges in hotel Example Tax 0 10 00 Tax 1 20 00 Tax 2 0 Each bar item in the bar terminal table PGM XXX can have a tax rate index such as TAX 0 TAX 1 TAX 2 and etc Tax rates for call charge and room charge is fixed as the first tax rate entry that is Tax 0 CONDITIONS Tax index for the telephone and room charge is 0 that is Tax 0 will be applied There are up to 5 programmable tax rates 0 to 4 in PGM XXX Every tax rates has 00 00 by default and may have the value from 00 00 to 99 99 Each bar item can have only one index of tax rate The index of tax rate in bar item table is 0 by default Total tax of each item is only the integer part of the result that is calculated by the following equation Equation for tax Total tax INTEGER Charge Tax rate 100 10000 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Guest Name I nfo Display OPERATION Front Desk To display information about guests in talk state Dial One Digit Service CONDITIONS OPERATION Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2
40. 50 Delete Conf Room 528 Conf Room RELATED FEATURES CO IP Access see page 3 37 Hold Recall see page 3 102 Unsupervised Conference see page 3 53 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 50 Chapter 3 System Features Multi Party Voice Conference The system allows multiple internal and external parties to be connected on a call in conference mode CONDITIONS The CONF button will remain illuminated at the phones that are temporarily out of conference for the duration of the conference If the system receives a disconnect signal and no internal parties remain in the conference the conference will be terminated and all remaining parties will be disconnected The normal Hold Recall process is applied to a conference on hold using the Unsupervised Conference Recall timer for recall timing If while setting up a conference a system error tone is received the initiator must press the CONF button SLT must hook flash to regain the Intercom dial tone A station that is busy in DND or other non idle state cannot be added to a conference OPERATION Digital Phone To establish an ad hoc conference 1 2 gt 6 Establish the first call Press the CONF button the LED will light the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives a dial tone Place the second call When connected press
41. Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYS SPD DIAL The System Speed Dial Digits Max 32 digits SYS SPD NAME The System Speed Dial Name Max 16 characters TOLL FREE Assignment to apply toll free 0 Off 0 Off 1 On TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied to the System Speed Access 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 Emergency Code Table Attributes TRANS PGM 258 The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which when dialed will override all COS dialing restrictions An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen 16 digits iPress the TRANS PGM button and dial 258 1 Use the dial pad for the desired Emergency code entry 01 50 2 Press the Flex button 1 3 Flex 1 Dialed Digit Flex 2 Changed Digit To be dialed digits Flex 3 Tenant number 3 Use the dial pad to enter the dialed number Press the SAVE button to store the data entered TRANS PGM 258 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIALED DIGIT The dialed digits from user 1 Max 16 digits CHANGED DIGIT CO Group Access Code and digits to 2 Max 16 digits be sent to PX when user dials the dialed digit TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied when 3 Empty 1 9 MBX user dials emergency code If this field be left empty this entry will be adapted to all tenants IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 The System
42. Fora Station that is part of a non pilot Station Hunt group DID calls will follow the Group Hunt process if the Station is Busy or does not answer the call DID calls are subject to Group Call Pick up and Directed Call Pick up Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION PROGRAMMING Station Data CO Line Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Direct Inward Dial DID 5 47 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected 10 0 DTMF DTMF DTMF Pulse R2MFC 1 PULSE 2 R2 CHARGE MODE If FREE the external call 11 0 Free Report though CO line is not printed saved to SMDR 1 Report even though SMDR is enabled If REPORT the external call though CO line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes METERING TYPE According to PSTN 12 00 None None service type metering type can be selected 01 12KHz among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 02 16KHz can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be 03 50KHz applied to ISDN lines 04 SPR 05 PPR 06 NPR 07 AOC 0 Standard 08 AOC 1 Italy amp Spain 09 AOC 2 Finland 10 AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12
43. Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 10 39 ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting When agents go to log in some of default functions can be set according to admin values And these kinds of values can be defined by an administrator 1 Administrator can define Auto Answer mode when agent goes to log in PGM214 Flex12 If Auto Answer Use When Agent Login option is set when agent goes to log in state this agent s answer mode is set as Auto Answer So when this agent receives the ACD call after first ring agent keyset automatically answer the ACD call Agent cans turn on or turn off Auto Answer function with ACD Agent Auto Answer feature code 2 Administrator can define Auto Work mode when agent goes to log in PGM214 Flex13 If Auto Work Mode Use When Agent Login option is set when agent goes to log in state this agent s auto work mode is s
44. System Info Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 140 Chapter 3 System Features IP Phone Phontage Registration Table TRANS PGM 106 see details on page A 12 TRANS PGM 106 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register an IP Phone to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 105 USER ID Used to register a Phonatge to the System by entering 2 its User ID and Password USER PASSWORD Used to register a Phonatge to the System by 3 entering its User ID and Password STA NUMBER VIEW Once a connection is made to the System 4 the current Station number will be displayed IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the IP Address of the IP 5 phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the Firewall IP Address of the 6 IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security 7 DTIM SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 see details on page A 13 TRANS PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register a DTIM to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 105 STA RANGE VIEW Once a connection is made to the System the 2 Station number assigned to DTIM SLTM will be displayed IP ADDRESS Displays the IP Address
45. To assign a VMAILBOX Flex button To retrieve Voice Mail locally OR voaortiral Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 265 Chapter 3 System Features To attach a memo to the current voice message 1 After message playback dial 7 during or after message option prompt 2 Following the beep record the desired memo 3 Press key to stop recording and store the memo 4 During or after the New Old Option Prompt dial to forward the message and memo Single Line Phone To retrieve Voice Mail locally 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the VMIB Access Feature Code the Mailbox amp Password will be presented sequentially 3 Enter the Mailbox number Station number and corresponding password if entry is valid the Number of Messages prompt will be presented 4 Dial desired option code 1 Play New Messages 2 Play Saved Messages 8 Set Greeting or Password Disconnect 0 Operator 9 Replay Prompt 5 Following selection additional prompts will be presented 6 At completion of session hang up to return to idle To attach a memo to the current voice message 1 After Message Playback dial 7 during or after Message Option Prompt 2 Following the beep record the desired memo 3 Dial to stop recording and store the memo 4 During or after the New Old Option Prompt dial 4 to forward the message and memo Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations a
46. WAKEUP REPEAT enables daily repeating alarm 9 0 Off Off 1 0n BRANCH BRIDGE LINE set branch bridge line feature Branch 10 0 Off Off Conference call by pressing DN button in use Bridge Bridge call by 1 On pressing DN button in use Bridge Softphone Auto bridge if Phontage UC Client s IP bridge is enabled AUTO PRIVACY enables auto privacy feature to restrict the 11 0 Off Off intrusion call wait camp on OHVA in busy station 1 On DID DISA RESTRICTION If set to ON incoming DID or DISA ring 12 0 Off Off to DN is restricted 1 0n Station CLI Attributes TRANS PGM 135 TRANS PGM 135 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLIP DISPLAY Calling Line Identification Presentation 1 0 Off On CLIP an ISDN service sends the number of the calling 1 On party to the system in the call SETUP message If enabled the number will be shown in the Digital phone LCD COLP DISPLAY COLP Connected Line Id 2 0 Off Off Presentation an ISDN service sends the number of the 1 On answering party to the system in the call CONNECT message If enabled the number will be shown in the Digital Phone LCD CLI REDIRECT When an incoming ISDN call is 3 0 CLI CLI redirected the call SETUP message will contain an original 1 Redirect and redirected CLI This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display the original or redirected CLI number i i Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations
47. group Numbering Plan Internal Page Calling Answer Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 15 Internal Page Answer Meet Me Page 547 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Call Cost Display Each SMDR call record includes a Cost field a calculated estimate for the cost of the call When set the call cost will update in real time and display on the Digital Phone LCD in place of the call duration The cost is determined by e Fixed charge per Call Meter Pulse e ISDN Advice of Charge e Estimated cost updated based on the Elapsed Call Timer and any assigned costing The technique selected to determine cost is based on the type of facility analog CO ISDN or VoIP services provided by the carrier and the system database Analog CO When the Call Metering Pulse service is available from the carrier the system will apply the SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse and the SMDR Decimal to Call Metering received to estimate call cost When no Metering Type is selected the system call duration is used with the cost pulse and decimal values to estimate the cost of the call The cost is updated periodically using the Elapsed Call Timer duration ISDN ISDN providers may support Advice of Charge information in the ISDN Facility Message If assigned the system will employ this information to display and output the call cost VoIP For VoIP
48. see details on page A 32 TRANS PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD restricts CO Call Duration to station 4 0 12 digits Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 In Room Indication 3 108 Chapter 3 System Features Hot Desk Agent Number TRANS PGM 131 FLEX 8 see details on page A 32 TRANS PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOTDESK AGENT NUMBER sets wake up time 8 0 Off Off 1 On System Timer Hot Desk Logout Timer TRANS PGM 220 FLEX 2 see details on page A 83 TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOT DESK LOGOUT TMR Determines the amount of time the 2 00 24 hrs 00 attendant receives recall after which the system will disconnect the call RELATED FEATURES Call Forward see page 3 15 HARDWARE Digital Phone In Room I ndication When an Executive is in the office their Secretary can press the programmed LED In Room Indication button signaling other stations of the Executive s status CONDITIONS Set other Station s MADN Flex button Access Option to Disabled Incoming only to make the secretary station the only station able to control the DN state OPERATION To program In Room Indication 1 Using Admin Programming set a MADN type DN number to be used as an In Room Indication button Enter DND Status Change code to register auto dialing digits for the DN 3 Assign a flex button for the DN at
49. 00 00 minute second Supervisor can check all of data with Volume Up Down Key or Up Down in Navigation Key During checking the Group Call Traffic information Supervisor can clear all of Group Call Traffic with SPEED button If Supervisor uses 3 soft keyset Delete menu will be displayed at 3 soft menu Average Call time means average conversation time of all of agent ACD call Busy count means how many times all of agents are busy And Busy time means total accrued Times of Agent s busy state Information about Queued data will be always computed when there are queued ACD calls in Queue 2 Agent Call Traffic Agent s ACD call data will be saved and Traffic data format is just like bellow lists a Total Calls Count b Unanswered Call Count c Average Call Time 00 00 minute second d Average Ring Time 00 00 minute second e Last Log In Time 00 00 00 hour minute second When Supervisor enter Agent Call Traffic feature first agent data will be displayed And Supervisor can check all of agent data with Volume Up Down button or Up Down in Navigation Key During checking the Group Call Traffic information Supervisor can clear all of Group Call Traffic with SPEED button If Supervisor uses 3 soft keyset Delete menu will be displayed at 3 soft menu Average Call time means average conversation time Incase of Last Log In time if check at ACD Group Call Traffic web page in Station Program of Web Admin Log
50. 00 15 0 System Toll Exception Table TRANS PGM 250 see details on page A 104 TRANS PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE allow digits 1 Max 16 digits DENY TABLE deny digits 2 Max 16 digits TENANT Tenant groups to apply the table entry 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 71 Chapter 3 System Features Walking COS A User may temporarily override Toll Restriction at a Station to make Toll Calls from a normally Toll Restricted station An Authorization Code is required in order to activate Walking COS CONDITIONS The Station COS applied for Walking COS is the COS of the station Walking COS applies the temporary COS for only one call terminating the call returns the station to the assigned Station COS The user may reactivate Walking COS to place another call or press the Flash key instead of hook switch at the end of previous call to maintain Walking COS OPERATION Digital Phone To activate Walking COS 1 oe 2S 6 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 33 Walking COS code Enter the Station number Dial the Station Authorization code password Dial end mark Place a call in the normal manner Single Line Phone To activate Walking COS 1 oOo RF wD Dial the SLT Programming code Dial 33 the Walking COS code Enter the Stati
51. 14 480 ipm double flash 30 On Off On amp 70 Off ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes TRANS PGM 235 In addition to remote access via an IP network connection the system database may be accessed remotely via an ISDN connection Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database The system will request a user Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Mobile Attributes TRANS PGM 236 a Release 1 7 April 2012 One Digit Service Attributes TRANS PGM 237 A 101 Appendix A System Programming Tables One Digit Service Attributes TRANS PGM 237 When performing a call transfer from a mobile extension the flash digit and input timer can be assigned 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 237 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to the following Table 3 Used the dial pad to enter desired data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STEP CALL determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable DIGIT 1 when accessing a busy tone User may dial for one of 2 0 N A the one touch services DIGIT 2 3 DIGIT 3 4 0 N A DIGIT 4 5 1 Call Back DIGIT 5 6 2 Camp On DIGIT 6 7 3
52. Assigns Executive station 1 l SECRETARY ASSIGN Assigns Secretary stations enter 2 FLEX 1 3 secretary station range or press FLEX 1 3 and enter station number to assign ICM CALL TO EXEC Determines call forwarding when 3 0 Secretary 0 Secretary Executive Secretary is in use 1 Secretary if SECRETARY all internal calls to the Exec Station except for Executive in DND calls from executives having executive access privilege are routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executive station status SEC IF EXEC IN DND internal calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND CO CALL TO EXEC Determines call forwarding when 4 0 Secretary 0 Secretary Executive Secretary is in use 1 Secretary if SECRETARY all incoming CO calls to the Exec Station are Executive in DND routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executive status SEC IF ECEC DND incoming CO calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND CALL EXECUTIVE This option is to directly route calls to the 5 0 2 0 Executive station OFF executive calls are routed to secretary FIRST SEC DND the executive receives call when first secretary is in DND ALL SEC DND the executive receives call when all secretaries in DND Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 87 Chapter 3 System Features
53. C Call Log Display 6 6 CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10 28 CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7 19 CO COS 5 28 CO Group Access Code 5 3 CO IP Line Groups 5 7 CO IP LINE PRESET FORWARD 5 35 CO IP Ring Assignment 5 37 CO Line Flash 5 5 CO Line Name Display 6 8 CO Line Release Guard Time 5 41 CO Line Service 5 9 CO OWN CODE SERVICE 5 36 CO Ring Detect 5 42 CO Transit Service 5 42 D Day Night Timed Ring Mode 7 37 Dial Pulse Signaling 5 44 DID DISA Restriction 5 34 DID Name Service 5 29 Differential Ring 6 17 Digit Sending Mode 5 28 Direct Inward Dial DID 5 45 Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 50 DSS BLF 4 1 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signal Sending 5 55 E EZ Attendant 7 41 Forward Destination Overflow Service 7 25 pel Release 1 7 AS vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Index IND 3 N Night Attendant Group 7 10 O Off Hook Signaling 6 14 One Time DND 6 9 On Hook Dialing 6 15 Outgoing CO Line Option 5 14 P Prime Line Immediately Delayed 6 16 Push To Talk Paging 4 23 R Representative CLI Service 5 77 S Saved Number Redial SNR 6 18 SIP 3 Party Conference 9 5 Call Forward 9 4 Call Pick Up 9 3 Call Wait Broker Call 9 5 Do Not Disturb DND 9 4 Hold Call 9 3 Name Registration 9 2 Placing Calls 9 2 SMS
54. Chapter 5 CO IP H 323 Routing Attributes PGM 360 see details on page A 146 PGM 360 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT 1 destination numbers associated with the H 323 routing 1 Max 8 digits system DEST IP ADDR destination IP address associated with the H 323 2 0 0 0 0 routing system H 323 Call Setup PGM 361 see details on page A 146 PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SETUP MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 323 1 0 Normal Fash Mode Normal or Fast Start mode 1 Fash Mode TUNNEL MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 245 2 0 Off On Encapsulation Tunneling 1 On DTMF SEND MODE during a connection DTMF digits can be 3 O Inband Inband sent In band or Out of band H 245 1 RFC2833 2 Out DIFF SERV Diffserv pre tagging for Voice packet 4 0 63 4 NOTE High values may cause high packet discard levels G 711A CODEC usage of G 711A Codec Type 5 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 711U CODEC usage of G 711U Codec Type 6 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 729 CODEC usage of G 729 Codec Type 7 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 723 CODEC usage of G 723 1 Codec Type 8 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use GK USED used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used 9 0 Off Off 1 0n YW verti Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Integrated Service Digital Ne
55. Dial conversion Bin No 001 300 Flex 1 Apply Time Type Flex 2 Dialed Digit Flex 3 Unconditional Changed Digit Flex 4 6 Day Night Timed Changed Digit Flex 7 15 LCR Time Day Time Zone Changed Digit Flex 16 17 DNT LCR Time Table Index Flex 18 DID Name Flex 19 Apply Option Use the dial pad to enter the dialed number 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T TYPE The Apply time type to be applied when the 1 0 Unconditional Unconditional dialed digit is dialed 1 Follow DNT 2 Follow LCR DIALED DIGITS The dialed digits 2 Max 16 digits UNCOND CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and 3 Max 16 digits digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is unconditional DAY CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to 4 Max 16 digits be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT NIGHT CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 5 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 6 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT D1 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 7 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply tim
56. Flex 1 Internal Unconditional Flex 2 Internal Busy Flex 3 Internal No Answer Flex 4 External Unconditional Flex 5 External Busy Flex 6 External No Answer 4 Use the dial pad to enter the preset forward destination 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 142 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTERNAL UNCOND The unconditional preset forward 1 Max 32 digits destination of internal intercom call INTERNAL BUSY The busy preset forward destination of 2 Max 32 digits internal intercom call INTERNAL NO ANSWER The no answer preset forward 3 Max 32 digits destination of internal intercom EXTERNAL UNCOND The unconditional preset forward 4 Max 32 digits destination of external call EXTERNAL BUSY The busy preset forward destination of 5 Max 32 digits external call EXTERNAL NO ANSWER The no answer preset forward 6 Max 32 digits destination of external call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Call Forward TRANS PGM 143 Station VMIB Attribute TRANS PGM 145 as Release 1 7 x April 2012 Station VMIB Attribute TRANS PGM 145 A 41 Appendix A System Programming Tables Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 145 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same n
57. INITIALIZATION 499 All Database 1 System Reset 2 Station Data 3 Station Button Data 4 CO Line Data 5 Release 1 7 Ly MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP INITIALIZATION Release 1 7 h S April 2012 USER ENTRY GUIDES C 105 Appendix C Quick Reference USER ENTRY GUIDES Alphanumeric Entry Chart The following guide may be used to enter Customized Messages Speed Dial Numbers or User Names Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Alternate Alphanumeric Entry Chart Appendix C Quick Reference Dial Pad Button Letter Type Release 1 7 h S April 2012 Index ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting 10 39 Agent State 10 33 Basic Feature 10 1 Call Distribution by Priority 10 16 Call Indication 10 44 Call Queuing Service 10 21 Group Call Traffic 10 58 Group Service Status 10 9 Group Supervisor Functions 10 50 Alternate Incoming CO Service 5 19 Outgoing CO Service 5 25 Alternative Route Selection 5 1 Answering Machine Emulation AME 6 30 Attendant Group 7 1 Recall 7 29 Station Program Codes 7 32 Automatic Network Dialing 5 2 Automatic Speaker Select 6 4 Background Music BGM 6 5 Broker Call 8 1
58. Lift handset Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Access 3 39 ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Chapter 3 System Features CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 180 see details on page A 62 TRANS PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACCESS CODE NAME When a CO Grp Access 1 Max 16 chars code is dialed or Flex Button is pressed name is displayed on the station s LCD CO LINE CHOICE Decide to select to CO line 2 0 Round Robin Last Line priority to seize NOTE When Outgoing Group 1 Last Line Number is not assigned this option is not applied 2 First Line OUTGOING GRP NO Determines the CO 3 01 72 MBX IP 300 Not assigned to the Group number used to seize NOTE If not 01 24 MBX IP 100 first access code assigned the access code is used as LOOP key 01 72 MBX IP 300 01 24 MBX IP 100 is assigned sequentially from the second access code AND DGT Automatic Network Dialing AND 4 Max 10 digits digit is sent after CO line seized This feature allows user to initiate CO calls only by dialing CO Group Access Code ARS SERVICE If Alternate Route Selection 5 0 Off Off ARS is set ARS digit is dialed instead of CO 1 On Group Access code when there is no available path ARS DGT 1 Alternate CO Group Access code to 6 Max 8 digits be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find availa
59. OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI If this feature is set 10 0 Off Off to ON and same feature of incoming CO attribute is 1 On also set to ON then Own code of outgoing CO line is inserted to the CLI of transit CO call USE REPRESENTATIVE CLI If this feature is set 11 0 Off Off to ON representative CLI is used to every outgoing 1 On call of selected CO line REPRESENTATIVE CLI When Use Represent 12 Max 16 digits CID PGM170 F 10 is set to ON representative CLI is sent when making outgoing call regardless of other CLI attribute Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 19 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MAX TRANSFER RING TIMER Max Ring Time when 7 001 300 sec 120 outgoing CO is transferred recalled OUTGOING TIME TABLE The time Table index to be applied 8 1 9 none none to outgoing CO Calls Alternate I ncoming CO Service If the system cannot answer for an incoming CO call a programmed service can be provided or it can be routed into a programmed destination This feature is applied by incoming CO Group base Administrator to select the Routing Destination for the Incoming CO line ona case by case basis as follows Busy When calling a Busy User the call can be s
60. SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during 20 0 1 0 second queuing announcement is provided TRANS PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING Determines if call is routed to the 1 0 After Greeting 1 In Greeting Attendant when Greeting Tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT Determines the Queue count 2 00 99 05 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 167 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 3 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 Not used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determi
61. Station Data RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE a Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 71 Chapter 5 CO IP PRIB Multiple Subscriber Number MSN The Multiple Subscriber Number MSN feature enables multiple stations to receive ISDN incoming calls at a specific destination Additionally it enables a station to place an outgoing call using a specific CLI CONDITIONS Ifa CO line uses Representative CLI that information is sent before other CLI options OPERATION If set MSN operation is automatic PROGRAMMING Station Data Station DN Type PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 Station CLI Number PGM 135 FLEX 6 see details on page A 35 PGM 135 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI NUMBER When not restricted FLEX 4 amp 5 above this entry 6 24 digits is added to the number sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT message in place of the station number Station Flex Button Assign PGM 126 see details on page A 29 CO Line Data CO Digit Conv Table Index PGM 160 FLEX 6 see details on page A 45 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DGT CONVERT TBL Set Digit Conversion Table index 6 1 9 2 System Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 AS April 2012 Integrat
62. VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from DKT 1 0 63 26 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from SLT 2 0 63 29 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from DECT 3 0 63 23 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from IPDEV 4 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from Analog CO 5 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from Digital CO 6 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from VMIB 7 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from DTMF 8 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from TONE 9 0 63 32 VMIB RX GAIN VMIB RX gain from MUSIC 10 0 63 32 External Page RX Gain TRANS PGM 407 The RX gain of External Page can be adjusted 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 407 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 407 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from DKT 1 0 63 26 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from SLT 2 0 63 26 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from DECT 3 0 63 26 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from IPDEV 4 0 63 32 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from Analog CO 5 0 63 28 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from Digital CO 6 0 63 37 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from VMIB 7 0 63 37 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from DTMF 8 0 63 32 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from TONE
63. VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Do Not Disturb DND A call to a Station in DND mode can be denied though it is received from a Station on another System the calling party will receive a busy tone CONDITIONS When a Station is in DND mode the Station button of the DND Station will flash BLF manager must be activated OPERATION To use DND in a Networked environment 1 Press the DND button to activate DND mode 2 When a Station on another System calls in to the Station in DND mode the busy tone will be received and DND will display on the LCD Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012
64. ye Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 77 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Digit 0 10 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign TABLE DATA Digit 11 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit A 112 260 12 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign ICLID TABLE A 113 262 ICLID Tble Index 001 250 ICLID Number Max 24 Digits ICLID Name Max 16 Ch ars Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 79 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Forward Call Ring Station 5 18 Ring Port 1 15 5 20d Ri
65. 0 Disable Enable the station 1 Enable RELATED FEATURES Do Not Disturb DND see page 3 77 HARDWARE Digital Phone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Group Listening CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone While on a call using the Handset PROGRAMMING Station Data RELATED FEATURES Da Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 Intercom Signaling Mode 6 11 Chapter 6 Digital Phone HARDWARE Digital Phone Intercom Signaling Mode Each Digital Phone can select the applicable signaling mode used for incoming ICM calls while the station is Idle there are three signaling modes available Call Announce with Hands free Answer Back H When an ICM call is received the User receives a splash tone followed by the ICM caller s voice The user may respond to the Caller without the need to Lift the Handset or press the SPEAKER button Call Announce with Privacy P When an ICM call is received the User will receive a Splash tone followed by the ICM Caller s voice the User must lift the Handset or press the SPEAKER button to connect the call Tone Ring T An ICM call will cause the Digital Phone to provide an audible ICM ring tone the user must lift the handset or press SPEAKER to answer NOTE Digital Phones use Tone Ring Mode as a default and SLTs always function in the Tone Ring M
66. 0 9 0 9 PTT Group Log out 528 Conf Room 529 HH MM Release 1 7 y April 2012 DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN C 11 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 53 Temporarily COS Down 531 531 531 54 Cancel Temp COS Down 532 532 532 55 Password Change 533 533 533 56 Inter Phone Group Access 534 534 534 57 Call Wait Request 535 535 535 58 Preselected MSG PGM 536 536 536 59 Forced Handsfree Call 537 537 537 60 Call Based CLIR 582 582 582 61 CLIR Access 583 583 583 62 COLR Access 584 584 584 63 Pilot Hunt Call 585 585 585 64 Command Call Oneway 581 581 581 65 Command Call Conf 580 580 580 66 Intrude Register 589 589 589 67 Camp On Register 590 590 590 68 OHVO Register 591 591 591 69 Mobile Num Register 592 592 592 70 Mobile CLI Register 593 593 593 71 Mobile Access 594 594 594 72 CCR Access 670 670 670 73 CCR Access And Drop 671 671 671 74 System Hold 560 560 560 75 Return Held CO 8 e 8 76 Sys Memo 675 675 675 77 DISA Tone Service 678 678 678 78 All Feature Cancel 679 679 679 79 Add Conf Member 680 680 680 80 System Alarm Reset 565 565 565 81 Fault Alarm Reset 564 564 564 82 Door Open 1 1 1 83 Keypad Facility HE HE HE 84 T Net Log In Out 586 586 586 Release 1 7 Wv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Refere
67. 1 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 0 CO to CO Attribute TRANS PGM 179 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while stations are 1 O Off On connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group the station 1 On can transfer the call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is connected to 2 0 Off On outgoing CO call of first CO Group the ATD can transfer the 1 On call to second CO group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features P d gt Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 237 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTGOING GRP NO Determines the CO Group 3 01 72 MBX IP 300 Not assigned to the number used to seize NOTE If not assigned the 01 24 MBX IP 100 first access code access code is used as LOOP key 01 72 MBX IP 300 01 24 MBX IP 100 is assigned sequentially from the second access code AND DGT Automatic Network Dialing AND digit 4 Max 10 digits is sent after CO line seized This feature allows user to initiate CO calls only by dialing CO Group Access Code ARS SERVICE If Alternate Route Selection 5 0 Off Off ARS is set AR
68. 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER This entry defines the timer for queuing 8 000 300 secs 30 forward or second queuing announcement QUEUING TONE NO This entry defines queuing tone 9 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal QUEUING PRT ANNC This entry defines queuing prompt 10 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC QUEUING REPEAT NO This entry defines queuing repeat 11 000 100 3 number QUEUING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 12 000 100 secs 0 before queuing repeat QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 14 01 12 none queuing annc Pause time Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 159 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 15 1 Normal 4 queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for forward 16 000 300 secs 30 destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuingtone 17 01 19 Not Assigne
69. 3 Find desired Agent number with or button Left Right in Navigation Key 4 Press Hold Save button for printing data to Information Print Port Agent Call Traffic Format 1 2 3 4 5 cr If Field s Description tilt Means start of ACD statistics and is always located at first column equal Delimiter between each meaningful data 1 Each Agent number 2 Total call counter 3 Unanswered call counter 4 Average ringing time ex 96 1 min 36 sec 5 Average service time ex 96 1 min 36 sec If Line Feed Ox0A cr Carriage Return 0x0D Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution CONDITIONS PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Station Group ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Call Traffic 10 63 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination NIGHT SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 3 0 Release Release call when group status is Night Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward NIGHT FWD DE
70. 3 112 Chapter 3 System Features Least Cost Routing LCR The LCR feature is supported using digit conversion the rule can be set differently according to the Day Night Timed mode or LCR Time If digit conversion is enabled the System will seize the CO IP line after digit conversion is completed Meanwhile the Dummy Dial tone can be provided if programmed CONDITIONS The digit conversion apply rule is applied to bin base of digit conversion table OPERATION Digits are converted automatically based on the Digit Conversion table ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data Digit Conversion Table TRANS PGM 251 see details on page A 104 TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T TYPE The Apply time type to be applied when the 1 0 Unconditional Unconditional dialed digit is dialed 1 Follow DNT 2 Follow LCR DIALED DIGITS The dialed digits 2 Max 16 digits UNCOND CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and 3 Max 16 digits digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is unconditional DAY CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to 4 Max 16 digits be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT NIGHT CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 5 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 6 Max 16 digits
71. 32 Retrieve COS Auth Code required 33 COS Override Walking COS Auth Code required 34 Register Password 35 Call Log Protect 36 SMS Message Protect IP Series LDP6000 Series 41 MSG number xx Set Pre Defined Message 0 9 MBX IP User Custom Deactivation 42 Create a Station User Message 43 Send SMS Message IP Series LDP6000 Series 44 Receive SMS Message IP Series LDP6000 Series Release 1 7 Xv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK ATTENDANT USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES USER PGM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION REMARK 01 SMDR 02 TRAFFIC a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 FIXED FUNCTION USER PROGRAM CODES C 19 Appendix C Quick Reference USER PGM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION REMARK 022 PRINT TRAFFIC CALL TYPE 023 PRINT TRAFFIC CO GRP 03 COS PASSWORD 031 TEMPORARY COS MODE Station Range 032 RETRIEVE COS Station Range 033 REGISTER PASSWORD Station Range 034 CALL LOG PROTECT Station Range 04 DATE TIME 041 SET SYSTEM DATE 042 SET SYSTEM TIME 043 LCD DATE MODE Station Range 044 LCD TIME MODE Station Range 045 SET WAKE UP Station Range 046 RESET WAKE UP Station Range 05 MULTI MESSAGE
72. 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for forward 16 000 300 secs 30 destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuingtone 17 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNC This entry defines second queuing 18 001 255 Not Assigned prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 19 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 20 000 100 secs 0 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during second 21 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 22 01 12 none second queuing annc Pause time TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING This entry defines if a call is routed to 1 0 After Greeting After Greeting a destination during greeting tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT This entry defines queue count 2 00 99 00 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 172 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE This entry defines forward type 0 Not 3 0 Not Used used 1 Unconditiona
73. 6 32 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group 7 1 Night Attendant Group 7 10 Greeting Queuing Tone Service 7 14 CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7 19 Forward Destination Overflow Service 7 25 Attendant Recall 7 29 Attendant Station Program Codes 7 32 Attendant Call Queuing 7 36 Day Night Timed Ring Mode 7 37 DSS DLS Consoles 7 40 Release 1 7 XW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 8 EZ Attendant 7 41 System Clock Set 7 42 USB Upgrade 7 43 USB DB Up Download From To USB _ 7 45 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone Broker Call 8 1 Hook Flash Mode 8 2 Howler Tone 8 3 SLT Message Wait Indication 8 4 SLT Name Registration 8 5 Chapter 9 SIP Phone SIP Terminal Registration 9 1 SIP Name Registration 9 2 SIP Placing Calls 9 2 SIP Call
74. 8 Internal Busy Tone This is provided to external caller through DID DISA when he calls the busy station 9 External Busy Tone This is provided when station makes a external call to telephone in use 10 CO Line Busy Tone This is provided to station when there is no idle CO line 11 Uncompleted Dial Error Tone This is provided when station does not dial within inter digit timer during dialing 12 DOD Restriction Tone This is provided when station dials the toll restriction digits 13 Internal No Answer Tone This is provided when the called station does not answer within Normal Call Ring Time of Ring Table 14 External No Answer Tone This is provided when the called external user does not answer 15 Internal Vacant Error Tone This is provided when stations calls vacant number 16 External Vacant Error one This is provided when stations calls vacant external telephone number 17 Call Duration Restriction Tone Reserved 18 Anonymous Call Restriction Tone Reserved 19 Error Tone All the other cases This is provided in all error cases Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION Release 1 7 b April 2012 Tenant Tone Table TRANS PGM 290 A 137 Appendix A System Programming Tables
75. ACD for an idle station in the group ACD Auto Call Distribution service is to distribute ACD call efficiently to agent Each agent can set own specific state and make ready for gat the ACD call Also supervisor can make ACD group state 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 213 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired ACD Group number 600 619 for the MBX IP 100 and MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired setting refer to the following table Use the dial pad to enter the desired ACD Group data 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 ACD Group Attribute Il TRANS PGM 214 A 79 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FWD AFTER QUEUING This entry defines reroute usage 13 0 Off Off after queuing time over 1 On Q FWD DEST Reroute destination after queuing time over 14 AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state wi
76. AUTO DIAL ATTRIBUTE y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 35 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA PRESET CALL FORWARD A 39 142 l Internal Unconditional 1 l Internal Busy 2 Internal No Answer 3 l External Unconditional 4 l External Busy 5 l External No Answer 6 l CALL FORWARD A 40 143 l Forward Type 1 Not Assigned Not Assigned Unconditional Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Forward Number 2 Forward Apply Time 0 All All 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed Call Forward No Answer Timer 4 000 600 15 Forward Information Display 1 On 0 Off On VMIB ATTRIBUTE A 40 145 l VMIB Access 1 En DIS Disable Prompt Language Index 2 1 First First 2 Second 3 Third Auto Record Service 3 En Dis Disable Two Way Record Access 4 En Dis Disable Two Way Recording Destination 5 l VM Message Backup Phontage Number 6 l VM Message Backup Delete 7 En Dis Disable Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP CO GROUP ACCESS PAGE GROUP ACCESS C
77. C 93 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BIN RANGE DEFAULT ICLID Restrict Tone 68 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 1 Auto Call Answer Alert Tone A 133 290 69 Tone Type Normal Time 1 sec Tone Number 13 VM Interaction Confirm Tone 70 Tone Type Normal Time 1 sec Tone Number 8 Authorization Code Dial Tone 71 Tone Type Prompt Time 10 sec Tone Number 10 TENANT DATA Tenant Dial Tone 72 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 10 Two way Record Warning Tone 73 Tone Type Normal Time 1 sec Tone Number 13 BOARD DATA ISDN BOARD ATTRIBUTES A 138 300 PRIB CRC Check 1 0 Disable 1 Enable Enable PRIB Line Mode 2 0 TE 1 NT TE BRIB TEI Mode Port1 n a 3 0 Fixed 1 Auto Auto BRIB TEI Mode Port2 n a 4 0 Fixed 1 Auto Auto BRIB TEI Mode Port3 n a 5 0 Fixed 1 Auto Auto BRIB TEI Mode Port4 n a 6 0 Fixed 1 Auto Auto ISDN CLOCK PRIORITY A 139 301 ISDN BRD Clock Priority Slot No Net VOIB VMIB BOARD ATTRIBUTES A 140 305 IP Address 1 IP Address 10 10 10 slot number Router IP Address 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Das Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 C 95
78. CONDITIONS Itis recommended to assign CO IP lines and Stations of a Tenant group in the same Device Zone Wake up time is based on the time displayed in the Station LCD OPERATION When set Zone operation is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Zone Data Zone Attributes use Web Admin TRANS PGM 395 Zone RTP Relay Group use Web Admin TRANS PGM 396 Inter Zone Attributes use Web Admin TRANS PGM 397 Station Zone Attributes use Web Admin TRANS PGM 399 XY vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Remote Services Managed Net 3 144 Remote Services Managed Net Chapter 3 System Features IP Phones DTIM and SLTM can run on a System located on a different LAN segment or WAN without the need for additional equipment The System can be assigned with the IP address of the default gateway router running the remote device The system will register the device through the router Using this configuration the device can establish a connection with the system and then establish peer to peer communication with other devices as needed CONDITIONS The managed network must provide appropriate security bandwidth and QoS OPERATION Operation of this feature is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Info IP Phone Phontage Registration Table TRANS PGM 106 see details on page A 12 TRANS PGM 106 BTN RANGE R
79. Chapter 4 Intercom CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button as a PAGE AUTO ANSWER CODE OR INTERNAL PAGE ANSWER CODE button PAGE AUTO ANSWER CODE INTERNAL PAGE ANSWER CODE To answer a Page by the Paging Party OR To answer a Page with Meet Me Page Code from another Station OR vaortiral Release 1 7 x vertical April 2012 Paging 4 19 Chapter 4 Intercom 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial the Auto Page Answer code from a Station after the system locates the appropriate Station Group the call it will be connected to the Paging Station PROGRAMMING System Data Paging Timeout Timer TRANS PGM 220 FLEX 4 see details on page A 83 TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PAGE TIME OUT TMR Determines the maximum duration of a 4 000 300 15 page after which the caller and Page Zone are released secs Station Data Meet Me Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 3 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MEET ME ACCESS enables meet me feature when there is a 3 0 Disable Enable page 1 Enable Numbering Plan Int Page Answer Code TRANS PGM 113 FLEX 15 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 15 Internal Page Answer Meet Me Page 547 Page Auto Answer TRANS PGM 113 FLEX 14 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK
80. Executive Secretary by Exec Sec Assignment 3 85 Chapter 3 System Features Executive Secretary by Exec Sec Assignment Phones can be assigned as Executive Secretary groups By activating DND the Executive also activates Unconditional Call Forward to the Secretary which will forward Executive calls to the Secretary With the CO Call to Secretary option enabled all CO calls to the Executive forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive s station status In addition if the Secretary is in DND or all Secretaries are DND Executive calls sent to the Secretary route back to the Executive if the Call Exec If First Sec in DND or Call Exec if All Sec in DND option is enabled Each Executive access privilege can be assigned If executive access is enabled the call is routed to the executive directly If the ICM Call to Secretary option is enabled all internal calls to the Executive except for calls from the executive having executive access privilege forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive s station status Callers to an Executive can leave a Message Wait indication The message waiting indication is given to the Executive or the first Secretary station assigned as the message wait destination CONDITIONS An Executive can have up to 3 Secretaries Ifthe Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive the caller will receive busy tone If an Executive has multiple Secretaries a Secret
81. External Music source is connected to MPB music source input Network Management System Future Feature The Network Management System NMS is a Web based application for monitoring and managing multiple systems using standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP NMS is an efficient and convenient tool employing standards based protocols and a Web based architecture to permit Administrators remote access to systems using any common Web browser NMS monitors the multiple systems displaying real time detailed status information for the system devices and channels NMS maintains a log of alarm and fault events defined by the administrator and can alert administrators of potential service affecting faults In addition call statistics are maintained and can be reported with various tables and graphs CONDITIONS NMS is subject to the conditions outlined in the NMS Manual OPERATION Once configured the operation of NMS is automatic Administrative operations are covered in the NMS Manual ADMIN PROGRAMMING System SNMP Attributes use Web Admin RELATED FEATURES Diagnostic Maintenance see page 3 60 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Network Security amp Priority 3 127 Chapter 3 System Features Network Security amp Priority The System supports several security and priority protocols Characteristics that can be established are e IEEE 802 1p Q
82. MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution a Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Call Traffic 10 65 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines usage 5 0 Off 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 0n ACD Call GROUP Q CNT DISPLAY This entry defines 6 0 Off 0 Off display of Queuing count of ACD call 1 0n Q CNT INTERVAL This entry defines display 7 0 Real Time 0 Real Time interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec LOGIN PASSWD CHECK This entry defines check 8 0 Off 0 Off the password when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AGENT STATE This entry defines usage of 9 0 Ready state 0 Ready state default Agent State option when agent log in 1 DND state 2 Work state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER This entry defines usage 10 0 Off 0 Off of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AUTO WORK This entry defines usage of 11 0 Off 0 Off Agent Auto Work option when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN HANDSET This entry defines usage of 12 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log in 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode LOGOUT HANDSET This entry defines usage of 13 0 Headset mode 1 Handset
83. None None service type metering type can be selected 01 12KHz among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 02 16KHz can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be 03 50KHz applied to ISDN lines 04 SPR 05 PPR 06 NPR 07 AOC 0 Standard 08 AOC 1 Italy amp Spain 09 AOC 2 Finland 10 AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12 AOC 5 Netherlands Incoming CO Attributes PGM 165 166 see details on page A 48 PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NAME incoming CO line name can be assigned 1 Max 16 chars SCREEN INDICATOR determines if screen indicator 2 0 Off user provided Off will be inserted in ISDN messages not screened 1 On user provided verified and passed Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 13 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI CONV TABLE CLI Conversion Table index 15 1 9 1 HOLIDAY RING INDEX if ring mode is holiday andthis 16 01 80 Not Asg none is assigned an incoming call is routed to the destination of holiday alternative ring index PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PROVIDE DIAL TONE If this feature is set to ON dial tone 1 0 Off Off is provided to networking CO 1 On BLF USAGE If this feature is set to ON flex button
84. RANGE None 12KHz 16KHz 50KHz SPR PPR NPR AOC 0 Standard AOC 1 Italy amp Spain AOC 2 Finland AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12 AOC 5 Netherlands DEFAULT None Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 189 Chapter 3 System Features System Data SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse TRANS PGM 232 FLEX 8 see details on page A 91 TRANS PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CURRENCY UNIT The unit of currency used for call cost can be 8 Max3 identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference characters SMDR Fraction TRANS PGM 232 FLEX 9 see details on page A 91 TRANS PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT COST PER PULSE When metering is provided by the PSTN the 9 6digits 000000 cost per metering pulse can be assigned RELATED FEATURES Station Message Detail Recording SMDR see page 3 187 Traffic Analysis see page 3 250 CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer see page 3 43 HARDWARE RS 323 device to capture SMDR SMDR Call Records SMDR provides detailed information on incoming and outgoing calls Assignable options in the System database permit recording of all calls all outgoing calls or toll calls and calls that exceed a fixed duration Call records are output either upon completion of the call real time or in response to a request from the System
85. System Networking 3 241 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 3 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 4 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 5 0 Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Attendant Call CAS An Attendant Call from any node can be routed to the Centralized Attendant CAS the call will be queued when all Centralized Attendants are busy CONDITIONS A Recall Call is not routed to CAS on the Master System The CAS DN Number can be converted to Attendant Call code using the Digit Conv Table An Attendant Call can be rerouted to
86. TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 45 Unsupervised Conf Extend 5 H RELATED FEATURES Multi Party Voice Conference see page 3 50 HARDWARE Digital Phone to establish Unsupervised Conference Customer Site Name A Customer Name up to 24 characters may be entered into the system database The name will be displayed on the SMDR and database outputs as well as during Admin sessions OPERATION System When a name is assigned operation of this feature is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Info Site Name TRANS PGM 100 see details on page A 8 TRANS PGM 100 BTN RANGE REMARK SITE NAME selects Speakerphone mode Headset mode or 2 24 characters Ear Mic Mode Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Data Line Security 3 56 Chapter 3 System Features Data Line Security Data transmitted over CO lines is subject to distortion and errors if system tones such as Camp On Call Wait and Override are applied during transmission To eliminate such errors stations that use analog data modems or Fax can be assigned to block incoming system tones CONDITIONS Stations or an Attendant attempting to Camp On or Override a station with Data Line Security will receive an error tone When Data Line Security is enabled the system will not apply audio gain to the call OPERATION System When Data Line Security is assigned System tones are autom
87. TRANS PGM 226 BTN RANGE DEFAULT USER PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in Web 1 12 digits none Admin and cannot access Keyset Administration functions ADMIN PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in 2 12digits none Web Admin and can access Keyset Admin MAINT PASSWORD Includes full and unlimited access to 3 12 digits none database and maintenance functions Alarm Attributes TRANS PGM 227 The System can monitor an external contact most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact An Alarm Signal sent to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact is activated refer to the programming table below for a description of the features the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 227 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to the following Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 227 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALARM ENABLE Enables the external contact monitoring circuitry 1 0 Off 0 Off 1 0n ALARM CONTACT Establishes the contact state that will activate 2 0 Open 0 Open the Alarm close or open 1 Close ALARM MODE The contact can be designate
88. To listen to the next Message press 2 To Delete Message press 3 To Forward Message press 4 To Call the Sender press 5 To Skip Message press 6 To return to Main Menu press 9 This process is repeated until the last new message is played and the No Message prompt No Messages is played Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To access a Message Retrieval option Single Line Phone To access a Message Retrieval option voaortiral Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 271 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station VMIB Attributes TRANS PGM 145 page A 40 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS Permits station access to VMIB 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX Selected language type prompt is 2 1 3 1 played to the user when accessing the VMIB AUTO RECORD SERVICE Determines if user can record a 3 0 Disable Disable conversation with another user internal external It can be used 1 Enable without two way record button TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS When allowed the station can 4 O Disable Disable activate the Two way record feature to record a conversation 1 Enable TWO WAY RECORD DEVICE Determines the save location of 5
89. VM Boards Two Way recorded wav files VM Boards or Phontage When Phontage is selected recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC REC MSG BACKUP STA When station has new voice mail saved 6 l on the VM internal boards this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number Phontage user can backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC BACKUP MSG DELETE When enabled Phontage user can delete 7 0 Disable Disable all voice mail in VM internal boards 1 Enable VMIB MSG TYPE Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved 8 0 LIFO LIFO in either a FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in first out order 1 FIFO based on this entry VMIB NEW MSG NO Display the number of new messages 9 l VMIB SAVE MSG NO Display the number of saved messages 10 Numbering Plan VMIB Access Code TRANS PGM 113 page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 39 VMIB Access 523 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE E Mail Notification CONDITIONS The system provides the option of having the VM stored in the VMIB or being deleted from the VMIB when sending as a wav file The system supports SSL security when interfacing with mail servers OPERATION 2
90. YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables rad S AY GK Setup I nfo TRANS Pomesa NO AO KY Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 GAIN amp CADENCE CONTROL TRANS PGM 400 440 A 149 Appendix A System Programming Tables GAIN amp CADENCE CONTROL TRANS PGM 400 440 DKT RX Gain TRANS PGM 400 The RX gain of DKT can be adjusted refer to Table Setting values 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 400 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired dat Yor the attribute setting refer to Table 4 Press the SAVE button to stanghe data entry N TRANS PGM 400 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DKT RX GAIN DKT R in from DKT 1 0 63 26 DKT RX GAIN DK NRX gain from SLT 2 0 63 22 DKT RX GAIN sr RX gain from DECT 3 0 63 26 DKT RX Gat DKT RX gain from IPDEV 4 0 63 26 DAN DKT RX gain from Analog CO 5 0 63 26 DKT RX GAIN DKT RX gain from Digital CO et 6 0 63 33 DKT RX GAIN DKT RX gain from VMIB we 7 0 63 29 DKT RX GAIN DKT RX gain from DTMF oY 8 0 63 08 DKT RX GAIN DKT RX gain from TONE 9 0 63 32 DKT RX GAIN DKT RX gain on 10 0 63 29 SLT RX Gain TRANSLBGM 401 The RX gain of SLT canbe adjusted refer to Table for setting values 1 Pres
91. feature code 3 Upon hook flash a confirmation tone is heard Do No Disturb Registration Cancellation DND Do Not Disturb can be registered canceled from Front Desk Guest Station or PMS to a specific room CONDITIONS Unless a room is checked in it is impossible to register cancel DND Itis possible to register cancel DND individually or entirely from the front desk The existing terminal registers only its own DND but Front Desk registers DND of other rooms Guest station registers cancels its own DND The existing DND procedure is maintained OPERATION Front Desk To register cancel DND 1 Dial DND Register Cancel feature code or PGM button 43 2 Press a phone number or a phone number range of desired room s Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range Press the SAVE button Select DND registration or cancellation 0 Register 1 Cancel Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 7 Otherwise you may hear an error tone Guest Station Digital Phone To apply DND to prime directory number P DN Press the DND button when it is not active DND LED turns on oa amp To remove DND from prime directory number P DN Press the DND button when it is not active DND LED turns on To apply DND to sub directory number S DN Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations am
92. see details on page A 73 TRANS PGM 208 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PTT MEMBER ASG this entry assigns stations as members of a 1 PTT group PTT Group Log In Out TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 46 PTT Group Access 524 PTT Group 0 9 Log out Command Conference Group A Station or external telephone number can be assigned as a member of a Command Conference Group Stations and external contacts up to 12 members can be arranged in groups so that a user may create a conference with all members of the group through a single call Additionally the user can make paging calls with same group There are 2 kinds of Command Conference Groups Command One Way A user can make announcements paging to members of the Command Group Command Conference A user can make conference calls with members of the Command Group On Hook Service An internal user can receive a command call while the Station is On Hook When an internal user receives a command group call and the call goes unanswered the System will make a recall to the user station One or Both Way Busy When an internal user receives command group call while in busy status the command group call is ignored and can be queued When an internal user receives a command group call while in busy status the current call will be disconnected and the command group call automatical
93. to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 10 Max 16 digits D2 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 11 Max 16 digits D2 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 12 Max 16 digits D3 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 13 Max 16 digits D3 T2 CHANGED The digits to be dialed in Day 3 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 14 Max 16 digits D3 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR 15 Max 16 digits DNT TIME INDEX Day Night Timed Time Table Index 16 1 9 none none LCR TIME INDEX LCR Time Table Index 17 1 9 none none Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Do Not Disturb DND 3 77 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NAME When DID destination st
94. to program another entry To assign room rate to rooms 1 Dial the PGM button 82 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range 3 Press the SAVE button 4 LCD displays currently assigned Room Rate Bin No of the first room of selected range For example if selected rooms are 100 105 the LCD will display as follows 100 105 00 0020000 SINGLE 5 Dial a desired room rate bin number 00 19 6 Press SAVE button to update the database permanently Go to step 2 to assign a room rate to another room s Fee For Part Time In case check in and check out happens in a day part time fee may be charged according to the room type or hotel policy Each room type may have up to 6 fields for different part time range and fee There are 32 entries in part time table in which the part time range and associated fee can be programmed Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Example Room type table user defined up to 6 Appendix B Hotel Management room type Charge part time bins GOLD 100 01 03 Example Part time table PGM 507 according to room type Bin part time range 00 s 0l 00 03 hours 50 02 03 04 12 hours 80 04 13 15 hours 90 CONDITIONS Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Fee For Part Time B 33 Appendix B Hotel
95. 000 254 Off usually 1 4 is valid COS APPLY OPTION determine whether the 5 0 SUB DN SUN DN applied COS is the COS of SUB DN or COS of MY DN 1 MY DN when station accesses SUB DN HOOK FLASH WHEN TRANSFER Determine the 6 0 Cancel Transfer Cancel Transfer operation when user press hook flash button while 1 Broker transferring call 2 Conference 0 Cancel transfer drop current call and recover 3 Broker Conf previous call 1 Broker hold current call and recover previous held call 2 Conference establish 3 way conference call 3 Broker Conf Operated Broker and Conference when a user hook flash within 2 sec OFF HOOK ON PAGED when lifting handset while 7 0 Paged Paged listening to paging message user can make another 1 Dial Tone call or continue to listen 0 continue to listen to paging message 1 stop listening seize a remaining DN and hear dial tone User can make a another call PLA Preferred Line Answer enables Ringing Line 8 0 Off On Preference for the station Calls that ring the telephone 1 On are answered by going off hook Reserved PICKUP BY DSS BUTTON this value determines the 9 0 Disable Direct Pickup method of pickup when pressing DSS button 1 Group Pickup 2 Direct Pickup CLI IP ADDRESS CLI IP Address 10 IP Address 0 0 0 0 ACD AGENT PRIORITY when a station is amember 11 01 20 10 of an ACD Group this value will be used for priority as agent Release 1
96. 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ verti Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 67 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Wednesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 3 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 4 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Friday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 5 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Saturday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 6 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Sunday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 7 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Holiday Time Table TRANS PGM 256 see details on page A 110 TRANS PGM 256 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALENDAR TYPE Defines Calendar Type for Holiday Table 1 Lunar Gregorian Gregorian HOLIDAY DATE Defines Holiday Date for Holiday Table 2 MM DD None Toll Exception Table TRANS PGM 250 see details on page A 104 TRANS PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE allow digits Max 16 digits DENY TABLE deny digits Max 16 digits TENANT Tenant groups to apply
97. 1 Dial the DID number of the station the system will check the CLI information answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone 2 Place internal or external call as normal To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the system 1 Dial Mobile Flash code 2 Dial the desired extension the call is transferred and the mobile phone returns to idle NOTE The mobile phone may reconnect by dialing the Mobile Flash Code System Incoming DID calls are sent to active mobile phones automatically ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Mobile Attributes TRANS PGM 236 see details on page A 100 TRANS PGM 236 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FLASH DIGIT The flash digit from mobile extension 1 Max 2 digits INPUT TIMER The inter digit timer of the mobile flash digit 1 01 20 seconds 05 2 sec Station Data Mobile Extension Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 6 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MOBILE EXT ACCESS enables mobile extension ability 6 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Mobile Extension 3 119 Chapter 3 System Features Mobile Extension Number Attributes TRANS PGM 146 see details on page A 42 TRANS PGM 146 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MOBILE EXT 1 ENABLE Enables mobile extension 1 0 Off Off ability 1 On MOBILE EXT 1 NUM
98. 14 Page Auto Answer 546 RELATED FEATURES Internal External amp All Call Page see page 4 15 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom VM Paging VM Paging Dial Codes Page Type MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To record a VM Message To delete a recorded VM Message To make a VM Page To make a Announcement Page by Attendant Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 Paging 4 21 N ou kw SLT Chapter 4 Intercom Lift the handset Dial the desired paging code or press a ANNOUNCEMENT PAGE FOR ATTENDANT button Dial page group number Dial desired Announcement number If assigned after the Page Ring VM message will be played Replace the handset go on hook To make a page 1 ak wn Lift the handset Dial the appropriate paging code Dial page group number If assigned after the Page Ring make announcement or hear VM message Replace the handset go on hook PROGRAMMING Station Data Internal Page Group Access TRANS PGM 151 see details on page A 43 Station Group Data Page Group TRANS PGM 205 see details on page A 71 Tenant Data Page Tone use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 33 see page A 43 System Data Paging Timeout Timer TRANS PGM 220 FLEX 4 see page A 83 TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAUL
99. 16 digits UNCOND CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and Max 16 digits digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is unconditional DAY CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to 4 Max 16 digits be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT NIGHT CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 5 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 6 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 31 Chapter 5 CO IP Incoming CO Line Holiday Service When Ring Mode is Holiday mode incoming CO call can be routed to Alternative Ring destination by a programmed holiday ring table index The destination of alternative ring table can be station or feature code OPERATION If set CO Line Holiday Service operation is automatic PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Incoming CO Line Attributes PGM 165 166 see details on page A 48 PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NAME incoming CO line name can be assigned 1 Max 16 cha
100. 2 is Forward queued call to some of destination 7 If dial some of Tel Number and then press hold or button first queued call will be rerouted PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Group ACD Group Assignment PGM 212 see details on page A 76 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forward 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 5 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution G Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Queuing Service 10 25 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FWD AFTER QUEUING This entry defines reroute usage 13 0 Off Off after queuing time over 1 On Q FWD DEST Reroute destination after queuing time ov
101. 24 VDC shown in Table 2 2 4 1 When assigned to activate as LBC CO Incoming ring and Intercom calls to the assigned station will activate the contacts Dummy Station for Hot Desk cannot be used as LBC Station OPERATION System When set relay Operation is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System External Contact Control TRANS PGM 228 see details on page A 87 RELATED FEATURES Door Open see page 3 79 HARDWARE External Control Contact connected to an external loud bell Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Mobile Extension 3 117 Chapter 3 System Features Mobile Extension A mobile phone may be registered to a station allowing the mobile phone to place and receive calls through the system DID calls are sent to the user s Phone and the active registered mobile phone simultaneously Mobile phone users can access the facilities of the system to place internal and external calls as well as activate access features To access system facilities and resources the mobile user calls the DID number of the corresponding Phone When the call is received the system matches the CLI to the mobile phone and provides the mobile user with a system dial tone One station can have up to 2 external numbers for their mobile extension If a mobile extension is being used the station is in busy state and the LED is flash steady ON CONDITIONS When the mobile phone places a
102. 258 Emergency Code Table Emergency Code Table 259 Announcement Table Announcement Table 260 Custom Call Routing CCR Table 262 ICLID Table ICLID Table 263 CLI Conversion Table CLI Conversion Table Web Tone Only Frequency Cadence Web Ring Table Only Web Ring Only Frequency Cadence 269 Voice Mail Dial Table TENANT DATA 270 Attendant Group Assignment Attendant Group Assignment 271 Attendant Group Greeting Queuing Attribute Attendant Group Attribute 272 Attendant Group Attribute 275 Night Attendant Group Assignment Night Attendant Group Assignment 276 Night Attendant Group Greeting Queuing Attribute Night Attendant Group Attribute 277 Night Attendant Group Attribute 280 Tenant Attribute 1 Tenant Attribute 281 Tenant Attribute 2 283 Tenant Group Access Tenant Group Access 284 Call Restriction Restriction 1 CO Call Restriction 285 Call Restriction Restriction 2 286 Local Call Prefix Table Local Call Prefix Table 287 Long Call Prefix Table Long Call Prefix Table 288 International Call Prefix Table International Call Prefix Table 290 Tenant Tone Table Tone Table Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM CODE PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU as Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DATABASE INDEX C 7 Appendix
103. 270 272 A 119 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 271 Appendix A System Programming Tables 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired attribute refer to Table Use the dial pad to enter the desired attendant group attributes data refer to the Table 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered TRANS PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE Determines the type of Greeting Tone 1 1 Normal 1 Normal to be used 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING PLAY Determines the Greeting Play time 2 000 180 sec 000 GREETING TONE NO Determines the Greeting Tone 3 01 19 04 number when greeting type is set to Normal GREETING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Greeting 4 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce GREETING REPEAT NO Determines the number of times 5 000 100 3 the Greeting will repeat GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the greeting is repeated Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y
104. 3 245 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 3 0 Off Off 1 0n NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0 Off Off message
105. 7 do April 2012 Administration Menu Table A 5 Appendix A System Programming Tables Administration Menu CO Call Restriction 284 285 Local Call Prefix Table 286 Tenant Data Long Call Prefix Table 287 International Call Prefix 288 Tone Table 290 ISDN Board Attribute 300 ISDN Clock Priority 301 Board Data VOIB VMIB Board Attr 305 Reset Board 310 Voice Network Networking Attr 320 Networking Numbering 321 St this umer c not a Aare This feature i H 323 Routing Attribute 360 H 323 VOIB Attribute 361 H 324 Data H 323 Incoming Attr 362 GK Attribute 363 SIP User ID Data 370 SIP CO Service 371 SIP Data SIP Station Attribute 380 SIP STA Service ATTR 381 Zone Attribute 395 Zone RTP Relay Group 396 Zone Data Inter Zone Attribute 397 Station Zone Attribute 399 SNMP Data SNMP Data DECT Data DECT Registration O DECT Attribute 490 Green Mode Green Mode Activation Green Mode Time Setting Initialization Initialization 499 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 S W Upgrade Appendix A System Programming Tables S W Upgrade System Management System Menu a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Sta
106. 8 at max MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code Flexible Station Number TRANS PGM 112 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 112 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION NUMBER 1 Start station number Delete all station numbers and update entered edit by range amp End station number station number range only SINGLE STATION 2 One station number Bin 001 324 MBX IP 300 bin 001 128 MBX NUMBER edit IP 100 1 number per one station port My DNs for each stations Bin 325 648 MBX IP 300 bin 129 256 MBX IP 100 Free station numbers for MADN type or extra SADN type numbers Sub DNs Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 114 see details on page A 21 TRANS PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit By Range 1 Start CO Grp Access Code amp End CO Grp Access Code CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit 2 CO Grp Access Code Station Group Number TRANS PGM 115 see details on page A 22 TRANS PGM 115 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION GROUP RANGE Edit by Range 1 Start Station Group Number amp End Station Group Number STATION GROUP NUMBER Edit 2 Station Group Number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Green Power Save 3 99 Chapter 3 System Features Green Power Save The system can disable the power of a
107. 9 0 63 32 EXT PAGE RX GAIN External PAGE RX gain from MUSIC 10 0 63 32 Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables DSP RX Gain TRANS PGM 415 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 420 426 y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 420 426 A 155 Appendix A System Programming Tables SLTM RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 420 TRANS PGM 420 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from IP PHONE HS 4 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from IP PHONE HF 5 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 SLTM RX RTP GAIN SLTM RX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 DTI M HS RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 421 TRANS PGM 421 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain from IP PHONE HS 4 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain from IP PHONE HF 5 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS R
108. 9 MBX IP 300 1 Speed Access 1 5 MBX IP 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 150 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Dial by Name see page 3 60 Last Number Redial LNR see page 3 110 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover see page 3 62 Saved Number Redial SNR see page 6 18 Speed Dial Pause Insertion see page 3 146 System Speed Dial see page 3 150 System Speed Dial Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator using Web Admin for easy access to Stations allowed use of System Speed Dial bins Each Speed Dial number can be up to 24 characters in length and may include special instruction codes Special instruction codes are Flash as 1st digit Activates dial tone detect Pause CALLBACK Inserts a pause dialing command not 1st digit Switches from Pulse to DTMF dialing Digital Phone users may assign a Flex button for One Touch access to a specific System Speed Dial bin CONDITIONS Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return an error tone Speed Dial numbers can reference a specific CO IP Group entered by the user If the assigned line is busy a line from the same group will be selected If all lines in the group are busy the user may queue for the next available line All Speed Dial numbers are stored in protected memory in case of power loss A name can be entered fo
109. 9 5 Terminal Registration 9 1 Transfer Call 9 3 Video Call 9 6 Voice Mail Notification 9 6 SLT Message Wait Indication 8 4 SLT Name Registration 8 5 Auto Release of 6 4 Speakerphone 6 19 Station ICLID Call Routing 6 23 Message Wait Call Back 4 11 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012
110. 99 Headset Compatibility 3 99 Hold 3 101 Hold Recall 3 102 Automatic Hold 3 104 Hot Desk 3 106 In Room Indication 3 108 IP Trans coding 3 109 Last Number Redial LNR 3 110 Least Cost Routing LCR 3 112 Linked Station Pairs Group 3 114 Loud Bell Control LBC 3 116 Mobile Extension 3 117 Multiple Language Selection 3 120 Multiple Voice Mailbox Support 3 122 Music On Hold MOH 3 123 Network Management System Future Feature 3 126 Network Security amp Priority 3 127 One Digit Service 3 128 Camp On 3 128 Call Wait 3 129 Outcall Notification 3 131 Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages 3 134 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 137 Registration with MAC Address 3 137 Registration with ID Password 3 139 Registration with Station Number
111. A 33 TRANS PGM 133 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONFERENCE ACCESS enable Conference call 2 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable CO Line Data Unsupervised Conference Timer TRANS PGM 166 FLEX 9 see details on page A 50 TRANS PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT UNSUP CONF TIMER Incoming CO when there is 9 000 255 min 000 conference call without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected Unsupervised Conference Timer TRANS PGM 171 FLEX 6 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT UNSUP CONF TIMER Outgoing CO when there is 6 000 255 min 000 conference call without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after the timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Customer Site Name 3 55 Chapter 3 System Features Unsupervised Conference Extend TRANS PGM 171 FLEX 2 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT UNSUP CONF EXTEND if this feature is set to ON 2 0 Off Off Unsupervised Conf Timer can be extended by dialing feature 1 On code after warning tone is heard Numbering Data Unsupervised Conference Extend Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 19 BTN FEATURE
112. April 2012 Do Not Disturb DND 3 78 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To activate DND for a P DN Prime Directory Number Press the DND button the DND button LED illuminates To remove DND for a P DN Prime Directory Number Press the DND button the DND button LED extinguishes To activate DND for a S DN Sub Directory Number 1 Press S DN button 2 Dial the DND Feature Code the S DN button LED illuminates To remove DND for a S DN Sub Directory Number 1 Press S Line button 2 Dial the DND Feature Code the S DN button LED extinguishes Single Line Phone To activate DND Dial the DND feature code a confirmation tone is received To remove DND Dial the DND feature code a confirmation tone is received ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data DND Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 4 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DND ACCESS enables DND to be activated by the station 4 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable System Data LED Color Flash TRANS PGM 234 see details on page A 95 to A 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Door Open 3 79 Chapter 3 System Features Door Open The hardware is equipped with a relay that activates an External Control Contact The contact can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open Contact the contact is connected to a door lo
113. Attendant SMDR may be sent periodically via e mail to a defined e mail address The various fields or items for a Call Record are e 8 digit Station call originator terminating for incoming filed e 3 digit used CO line field e 8 digit call duration field HH MM SS e 8 digit year month and day YY MM DD e 7 digit time of day call originator field e 1 digit call identification digit first digit in digit dial field e 24 digit collected dialed digit field Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 190 Chapter 3 System Features e 5 digit pulse metering count field e 10 digit call cost field e 12 digit account code field OPERATION System For real time SMDR records are output after completion of the call System Attendant To print SMDR records based on Station range 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 011 SMDR Print code 3 Enter the desired station range 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To delete stored SMDR records based on Station range 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 012 SMDR delete code 3 Enter the desired station range 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print Non Station Based SMDR records 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 013 SMDR Print code 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To delete Non Station Based SMDR records 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 014 SMDR delete
114. Attributes programs define settings that affect System wide features and functions Generally these entries will turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable Refer to the following table for a description of the Attributes and the data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 223 for System Attributes 2 Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute refer to the following Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 223 BIN RANGE DEFAULT WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION The Web Admin password can 1 0 Off 0 Off be encrypted for security using RC 6 block encryption A Java VM 1 On must be installed on the user s PC PULSE DIAL BREAK RATIO The break make ratio for pulse dialing 2 0 60 40 1 66 33 through analog CO line 1 66 33 2 50 50 VM SMDI ENABLE If it is set to ON system interfaces SMDI 3 0 Off 0 Off protocol with external Voice Mail If OFF system interfaces In band 1 On message with external Voice Mail Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables System Password TRANS PGM 226 NOTE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Alarm Attributes TRANS PGM 227 A 87 Appendix A System Programming Tables 4 Press the SAVE button to store the password entry
115. Authorization Code 1 12 digits 4 Dial or press the HOLD SAVE button to save Single Line Phone To assign a Station Authorization code 1 Lift the handset Dial SLT Program Mode Entry code Dial Station User Program code 34 Dial Authorization Code 1 12 digits Dial ak wh Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Auto Call Release 3 6 Chapter 3 System Features System Attendant To assign an Authorization Code 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial Attendant Station Program Code 033 3 Dial station number or range of stations If one 1 station is to be programmed enter that station number twice Dial the Authorization Code Press the HOLD SAVE button ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Password TRANS PGM 131 FLEX 4 see details on page A 32 TRANS PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD Password is employed to control access to the 4 0 Disable Disable system resources and facilities Walking COS CO IP Group access 1 Enable DISA callers and certain Call Forward types may require the input of a valid password Auto Call Release Intercom calls except Hands free Ring Back will be released automatically if the called party does not answer during the pre set time CONDITIONS When the handset is used to place a call the user will receive an error tone for 30 seconds followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone and the station i
116. BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE Determines the type of Greeting Tone 1 1 Normal 1 Normal to be used 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING PLAY Determines the Greeting Play time 2 000 180 sec 000 GREETING TONE NO Determines the Greeting Tone 01 19 04 number when greeting type is set to Normal GREETING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Greeting 4 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce GREETING REPEAT NO Determines the number of times 5 000 100 3 the Greeting will repeat GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the greeting is repeated Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 165 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set
117. Back tone before playback of a VMIB announcement The Attendant Station must Save a recording before returning to the on hook state otherwise the existing recording is used and new recording will be lost To record or delete an Auto Attendant message all of the VMIB channels must be in the idle state The external caller may dial at any time during an Auto Attendant announcement and must dial prior to the expiration of the CCR Analysis timer If the external caller dials an invalid selection or station the System will present the Invalid Entry prompt and initiate a re entry according to the DISA Retry Counter If the external caller dials more than a single digit the call is routed based on the System Numbering Plan Calls answered by an Auto Attendant CCR Announcement are interactive DISA calls and are subject to conditions of a DISA call A CCR Announcement may be programmed to disconnect the call after playing The Auto Attendant Announcement feature is supported for DISA and DID calls To allow back tracking in call routing assign one of the CCR destinations of a current step as the CCR announcement number for the previous step The remote Caller s voice mailbox access can be supported by assigning the VMIB Access Code to a CCR destination OPERATION System Attendant To record an Auto Attendant Announcement Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012
118. CO LINE DATA Block After Clear Forward Waiting Time A 50 166 4 1 On 0 Off Off CPT Detect 5 1 On 0 Off On Answer to Waiting Call 6 1 On 0 Off Off Universal Answer 7 1 On 0 Off Off Release Guard Time 8 100 15 1sec 1 Unsupervised Conference Timer 9 000 255 1min 0 Clear Forward Waiting Timer 10 1001 300 1sec 300 Max Ring Time 11 015 300 1sec 120 DISA Supervision Timer 12 1 9 1sec 2 VMIB Play Delay Timer 13 0 9 1sec 0 Incoming Time Table Index 14 None 1 9 None CO RING ASSIGNMENT A 51 167 l Day 1 Flex1 Service Type 0 Ring Assign Ring Assign 1 Feature Code Flex2 Feature Not Assigned Not Assigned CCR CCR Drop DISA Tone Digits Flex3 Feature Delay Delay 0 Flex4 Member Display Flex5 Member Assign Member 100 Release 1 7 Ave MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 43 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Night A 52 168 2 Timed Flex1 CO Access From DISA 1 On 0 Off Flex2 DISA Acct Code 1 On 0 Off Flex3 DISA Retry Count 1 9 Flex4 Preset Fwd Time 0 20 1sec Flex5 Preset Fwd Ring Table Index 1 80 OFF OFF Flex1 CO Access From DISA 1 On 0 Off Flex2 DISA Acct Code 1 On 0
119. COM Off line SMDR SMDI Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the SMDI 3 0 5 COM1 output CALL INFO Defines the serial port or TCP channel used to receive 4 0 5 COM Call Information output Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE System Time Management OPERATION System y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Time Management 3 253 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data System Time Table TRANS PGM 253 see details on page A 107 TRANS PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT defines the comment of the Time 1 32 characters none Table SYSTEM TIME ZONE defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0 73 0 Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS defines Daylight Saving Time of Time 3 On Off Off Table RING MODE defines the ring mode of Time Table 4 0 Day 0 Day 1 Night 2 Timed AUTO RING MODE defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time 5 On Off Off Table Weekly Time Table TRANS PGM 254 see details on page A 108 TRANS PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 1 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Tuesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 2 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Ni
120. CONF the new call is placed on exclusive hold Repeat steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties up to 13 total per conference Press the CONF button to establish conference To establish an ad hoc conference Conference Member Manual Add is set to OFF 7 8 11 Establish the first call Press the CONF button the LED will light the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives a dial tone Place the second call When connected the called party is put into conference and calling party also returns to conference Repeat steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties up to 13 total per conference Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 51 Chapter 3 System Features To get out from a conference temporarily Press the CONF button the CONF button LED will flash To return to a conference call Press the flashing CONF button Single Line Phone To establish an ad hoc conference Conference Member Manual Ada is set ON 1 Establish the first call 2 Press the hook switch the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives a dial tone 3 Dial the Conference Member Add Code Place the second call 5 When connected repeat steps 2 4 above to add additional parties Conference Member Add Code should be dialed at least once 6 When completed adding p
121. Chapter 3 System Features To delete a recording ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tables HARDWARE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 261 Chapter 3 System Features VMIB Voice Mail Message Storage When a station activates Call Forward to the VMIB Access Feature Code the call is transferred to a VMIB mailbox or a transferred call recalls to the VMIB the call is handled by the System s Voice Mail application The caller can connect with the called Station User Greeting followed by a beep tone A remote Caller can record a message and hang up or dial for further options When disconnected the VM application will store the message in the Called User Voice Mailbox and activates the Message Waiting Indication MWI at the User Station If VM back up is assigned at the back up station Phontage or UCS Client is also notified CONDITIONS Two timers are provided to control voice message length VMIB Message Minimum Record Timer establishes the minimum voice message length voice messages shorter than this timer are not stored VMIB Message Maximum Record Timer establishes the maximum voice message length when the VMIB Message Maximum Record Timer expires while a voice message is being recorded a confirmation tone is heard and the message is saved for the destination station Ifall VMIB channels are in use a Ring Back tone is provided until a VMIB channel is available
122. Chapter 4 Intercom Numbering Plan RELATED FEATURES Intercom Lock out CONDITIONS OPERATION System a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Intercom Step Call 4 7 Chapter 4 Intercom PROGRAMMING Station Data Howler Tone TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 7 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGN 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOWLING TONE sets Anonymous Call Restrict service 7 0 Off On 1 On Tenant Data Dial Tone use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 1 2 Intercom Step Call When the Busy Tone is received on a dialed Intercom call the User may place a call to another Station by dialing the last digit of the Station number The System replaces the last digit of the previously dialed Busy Station with the dialed digit and places an Intercom call to the new Station number CONDITIONS Ifthe user dials the last digit of the Busy Station Camp On will be activated After receiving a Busy tone if the user takes no action for the Busy Tone Timer 7sec the System will start the Intercom Lockout procedure f programmed Step call is supported OPERATION Digital Phone To activate Step call 1 While receiving Busy notification on a dialed ICM call dial a digit other than the last digit of the busy Station intercom number 2 The System will attempt an ICM call to the new Station PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Internal Busy Tone use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FL
123. Code 111 TRANS PGM 118 BTN RANGE REMARK ACD GROUP RANGE ACD Group Number edit 1 Start ACD Group Number amp by range End ACD Group Number ACD GROUP NO ACD Group Number edit 2 ACD Group Number STATION DATA TRANS PGM Codes 120 152 Station Type TRANS PGM 120 Each station has its own station type according to its terminal type This station type is used by the system to recognize the station s capabilities In addition this station type defines DSS BLF consoles which can be connected to a station Maximum 5 DSS BLF consoles can be connected to a station Especially in IP 8000 Series maximum 4 serial DSS BLF consoles can be connected For DSS BLF consoles the associated father station number is displayed To set the terminal type 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 120 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station number 3 Select the desired Flex button FLEX 1 to display current station type or to set SLT station type DTMF normal DTMF MSG wait PULSE normal PULSE MSG wait FLEX 2 to connect DSS BLF consoles to a station or to display father station number of a DSS BLF console FLEX 3 to restart IP Phone 4 For Flex button 1 TYPE to view station type Only for SLT station station s type can be modified To modify SLT station type use the dial pad button 1 to 4 1 DTMF Normal 2 DTMF Msg wait 3 Pulse Normal 4 Pulse Msg Wait Press the SAVE button to sto
124. Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color 60 IPM RED 60 IPM AMBER 60IPM AMBER 60 IPM RED 60 IPM RED 60 IPM RED Steady RED 60 IPM RED Steady GREEN Steady RED Off RED 60 IPM GREEN 60 IPM AMBER Off RED Steady GREEN Steady RED 60 IPM AMBER eR a Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Reserved a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes TRANS PGM 235 A 99 Appendix A System Programming Tables Color Table COLOR DESCRIPTION 1 RED 2 GREEN 3 AMBER Flash Rate Table FLASH RATE DESCRIPTION 00 Flash OFF 01 Steady On 02 30 ipm flash 30 On 03 60 ipm flash 30 On 04 60 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 70 On 05 240 ipm flash 30 On 06 240 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 07 480 ipm flash 30 On 08 480 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 09 15 ipm flash 30 On 10 120 ipm flash 30 On 11 120 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 12 30 ipm double flash 30 On Off On amp 70 Off 13 480 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 70 On
125. DATE sets the system date 2 MMDDYY Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Automatic System Time Synchronization 3 13 Chapter 3 System Features DST Enable TRANS PGM 233 FLEX 3 see details on page A 94 DST Start amp End Time use Web Admin TRANS PGM 233 TRANS PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DST START TIME the DST start time Web See DST Table 2nd Sunday of March Only at 2 00 AM DST END TIME the DST end time Web See DST Table 1st Sunday of Only November at 2 00 AM RELATED FEATURES Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Automatic System Time Synchronization see page 3 13 System Clock Set see page 7 42 Automatic System Time Synchronization When enabled the system automatically determines and sets the time of day employing Network Time Protocol NTP or ISDN time messages When using NTP the system requests and receives GMT time at ten minute intervals from the specified NTP time server This feature allows the System Time to synchronize with the NTP time server automatically If the time deviates more than two seconds the system clock is adjusted to match the NTP server When using ISDN the system receives the time of day in ISDN messages and automatically adjusts the time if the system time deviates from the ISDN time CONDITIONS NTP packets are expected over UDP port 123 verify the port is open and av
126. DEFAULT NO ANSWER TONE If destination is set to Tone the 5 Error Busy tone is heard NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP The CO call is 6 routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination NO ANSWER RING The call is routed to the same 7 destination again NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred 8 station again Only possible for Transfer No Answer case Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 PGM 270 ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group BTN RANGE 0 Terminal 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle DEFAULT 0 ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line Max 4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group First Station RELATED FEATURES Hold see page 3 101 Call Transfer see page 3 30 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Station Program Codes NOTE p i Release 1 7 fal April 2012 Attendant Station Program Codes 7 33 Chapter 7 Attendants Example of User Program Code Chart User PGM Code Item Description Remark 01 SMDR 011 PRINT STATION SMDR Station Range 012 DELETE STATION SMDR Station Range 013 PRINT FAILED CALL S
127. DID OUTGOING GRP NO Set CO Group 3 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to outgoing calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 INCOMING GRP NO Set CO Group 4 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to incoming calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 TENANT NO Set Tenant group number to 5 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 apply to CO lines 1 3 MBX IP 100 DGT CONVERT TBL Set Digit Conversion 6 1 9 2 Table index SIGNAL TYPE Set Answer Signal Type 7 0 No Signal No Signal 1 Send Wink IC 2 Wait Seize Ack OG 3 Send Wink amp Wait Sz Ack 4 Send amp Wait Sans 5 Send Wink amp Send Answer IC 6 Wait Ack amp Send Answer OG 7 Send All amp Wait All RLS TIMING If Release Timing is set to first 8 0 First Release First RLS release CO line is released when one party 1 Caller Release release the call If Caller or Called Release is 2 Called Release set CO line is released when caller or called party released the call INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected 10 0 DTMF DTMF DTMF Pulse R2MFC 1 PULSE 2 R2 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO Attributes II TRANS PGM 161 a Release 1 7 x Apr
128. DN number type as SADN Hot Desk Agent the Hot Desk Agent Number option will automatically be set to ON Assign a password for the Hot Desk agent station if needed Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hot Desk 3 107 Chapter 3 System Features To login to the System through an inactive Hot Desk Station 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial the Hot Desk Feature Code 3 Dial the Agent s Station number and password 4 Dial or press HOLD SAVE button the agent will be logged in To logout through the active Hot Desk 1 Dial the Hot Desk Feature Code 2 Dial the call forward destination for Agent calls Dial to delete existing a call forward destination 3 Dial or press HOLD SAVE button the Hot Desk Station will return to inactive ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Hot Desk Feature Code TRANS PGM 113 see page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 47 Hot Desk Log In Log Out 525 Station Dummy Terminal TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 8 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DUMMY TERMINAL this item defines whether a station is used for 8 0 Off Off hot desk terminal If you want to use a station as hot desk this field 1 On must be set to ON Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 Station Password TRANS PGM 131 FLEX 4
129. Day COS Flex button 2 Night COS Flex button 3 Timed COS 4 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Station COS refer to the Restrictions Table below for each COS service 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS Station s COS in Day mode 1 00 15 1 NIGHT COS Station s COS in Night mode 00 15 1 TIMED COS Station s COS in Timed mode 00 15 1 Release 1 z W verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables STATION COS RESTRICTIONS Station Auto Attributes TRANS PGM 138 Release 1 7 A April 2012 Station Preset Call Forward TRANS PGM 142 A 39 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Preset Call Forward TRANS PGM 142 This assignment allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre determined destination Preset Call Forward can be assigned separately for Internal Unconditional Internal Busy Internal No Answer External Unconditional External Busy External No Answer preset forwarding to any Station Hunt group or External Telephone No 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 142 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 Fora single station enter the same number twice 3 Press Flex button number 1 6 for the desired type of forward
130. Dial the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang Up the MWI is activated To retrieve a Station Message Wait Dial the Message Wait Call Back Answer code To leave a Call Back queue for a station 1 While receiving a Busy Signal press the hook switch 2 Dial the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang up and return to Idle To respond to a Call Back Recall 1 When the Busy Station returns to Idle the System initiates a Call Back 2 Lift the handset or press the Speaker button 3 The previously Busy Station is called PROGRAMMING System Data Message Reminder Tone Timer TRANS PGM 222 FLEX 2 see details on page A 84 TRANS PGM 222 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MSG WIT ALERT TONE TMR A phone user will receive periodic 2 00 60 00 reminder tones of a message waiting at intervals based on this timer minutes Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom Message Wait Reminder Tone CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING System Data HARDWARE Da Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 Paging 4 15 Paging Internal External amp All Call Page A Station that is set up for using the Page features can connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all of the System Internal External Page Zones Stations are grouped into Zones to receive Pages directed at each Zone Stations not assigned to any
131. FLEX 6 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PILOT HUNT RING permits station to receive pilot hunt ring 6 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 179 Chapter 3 System Features Busy Service TRANS PGM 131 FLEX 5 see details on page A 32 TRANS PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BUSY SVC when an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO call 5 0 Busy Tone Busy Tone to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released 1 Camp on 2 Call Wait 3 Pilot Hunt CO Line Data Incoming CO Alternate TRANS PGM 169 see details on page A 53 TRANS PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive 1 F1 Busy Disconnect DAY F2 No Answer 1 sec NIGHT 2 FS Invalid Disconnect F4 Transfer No Answer 1 sec TIMED 3 F5 Recall No Answer pigeonnaeke 5 F6 DND saa F7 Out Of Service F8 Error 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring 4 Alt Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot HuntGroup Outgoing CO Alternate TRANS PGM 173 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ALT DEST Abnormal case can be selected as error type F1 Recall No Answer F2 Transfer No Answer F3 No Answer NO ANSWER DISCONNECT The CO call is disconnected Every destination is set to Disconnect 1 as by default NO ANSWER ATTENDANT
132. First Station group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants RELATED FEATURES DSS DLS Consoles CONDITIONS y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 EZ Attendant 7 41 Chapter 7 Attendants PROGRAMMING Station Data Station Type PGM 120 see details on page A 23 Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group 1 0 Terminal 0 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line 3 Max4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4 First Station group RELATED FEATURES Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 DSS BLF see page 4 1 EZ Attendant The ez Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of Features and Functions including Call Display and User and System status ez Attendant operates in conjunction with the Attendant Digital Phone to simplify overall operation refer to ez Attendant Installation and User Guide OPERATION Attendant Operation of the ez Attendant is described in detail in the ez Attendant Installation and User Guide COND
133. Group Access Code PGM 114 see details on page A 21 PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit By Range 1 Start CO Grp Access Code amp End CO Grp Access Code CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit 2 CO Grp Access Code CO Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 9 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ARS SERVICE If Alternate Route Selection 5 0 Off Off ARS is set ARS digit is dialed instead of CO 1 On Group Access code when there is no available path ARS DGT 1 Alternate CO Group Access code 6 Max 8 digits to be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find available CO line ARS 1 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 7 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used ARS DGT 2 Second alternate CO Group 8 Max 8 digits Access code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line ARS 2 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 9 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used CO Line Service The System can set Service attributes and several options according to each CO Line Incoming CO Line Op
134. Guest Info Name Change Room Data Room Status Inspect Clean Dirty Voice Mail Notification Charge Posting Call Charge Posting Classification of local call long distance call international call and mobile call Mini Bar Charge Posting Fidelio Hotel Feature Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Fidelio Hotel Feature optional with license B 49 Appendix B Hotel Management Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Release 1 7 April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference This appendix contains Quick Reference tables for the following types of information Database Index on page C 1 Default Numbering Plan on page C 8 Fixed Function User Program Codes on page C 17 Default Values on page C 21 Alpha numeric Entry Charts on page C 105 DATABASE I NDEX The Database index is divided into groups of PROGRAMS based on specific characteristics associated with the data such as Numbering Plans Station oriented database entries or CO Line oriented values These groupings are identified as the Program Group in Web Admin The individual PROGRAMS are identified in the Table with the ADMIN STATION PROGRAM CODE PGM Code and a corresponding Web sub menu and description PROGR
135. Hunt Call Camp On Camp On is used to notify a Busy Station that a call is waiting to be answered The busy station is notified of the waiting call by a Camp On tone The camp on station is placed in the Hold state while waiting CONDITIONS The user may only Camp On to a station in the busy mode a user may not Camp On to a station in DND conference or receiving a Page etc _ACamp On tone is sent each time the calling user presses the Camp On button OPERATION Digital Phone Single Line Phone To activate a Camp On while receiving an Intercom busy tone Press the Camp On button both the called and calling stations will receive Camp On tone ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Camp On Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 8 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 133 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CAMP ON ACCESS enable camp on feature 8 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 One Digit Service 3 129 Chapter 3 System Features Tenant Data Intercom Busy One Digit Attributes TRANS PGM 237 FLEX 1 see details on page A 101 TRANS PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTERCOM BUSY ONE DIGIT SERVICE determines if step call is 1 O Disable Disable enabled or disabled 1 Enable Call Wait Call Wait is used to notify a busy station that a call is waiting to be answered The busy station is notified of the waiting call by a Cal
136. In date also can be checked 2 ACD Group Call Traffic web page in Station Program Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Group Tots Cole Cred ere wered Cate aA Agee Parry Come aega Minges Time Arago Denice Tore Tatsi Al Apert Guay Tire Cate Oseas n Curent Longri Queued Cat Tree rege Qeeeet Cat Tore on Mre Mron De Man vee t ss t uy na Periodic Print ACD Group Call Traffic Format Sree Ibe Ire Jre Ime Ive IAA Seen whe Sane Wee eam Field s DESCRIPTION Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 ACD Group Call Traffic 10 61 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Average call service time ex 25 0 min 25 sec Total busy time ex 64 1 min 04 sec Number of current queued calls Longest queued time CO O CO NI Q Average queued time If Line Feed 0x0A cr Carriage Return 0x0D Supervisor or Sub Supervisor can print Group Call Traffic data at Information Print port manually 1 Press ACD Supervisor Traffic Check feature code 2 Choose Group Traffic data 3 Press Hold Save button for printing data to Information Print Port Supervisor or Sub Supervisor can print Agent Call Traffic data at Information Print port 1 Press ACD Supervisor Traffic Check feature code 2 Choose Agent Traffic data
137. LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM at the time the LM registers with the CM The port counts define the ports which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM The number of ports defined in the database of each LM must be equal or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM refer to TRANS PGM 332 in order to register properly 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 331 2 Press the Flex button 1 6 for the desired setting refer to Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter the required data refer to Table 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Board TNET Attributes TRANS PGM 334 A 145 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 333 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ENABLE FoPSTN Determines if Fail over operation is 1 0 Off enabled or disabled from the CM or LM 1 On INIT FoPSTN TABLE Determines how to initialize the FO 2 Table FoPSTN Attributes 3 1 100 MBX IP 100 1 200 MBX IP 300 FoPSTN NUM PLAN Station numbers associated with 3 1 Max 16 the remote System FoPSTN CO GROUP Determines the CO Group of the 3 2 1 24 MBX IP 100 Local System that will be used to place calls to the stations 1 72 MBX IP 300 entered in the FO
138. Level Admin Access 3 195 Web Adminibtiatfopture is not availableat this time 3 197 Web User Manual 3 199 System Networking This feature 4s notavailable at this ume 3 200 Centralized Control T NET LM 3 200 Distributed Control Network 3 202 Traffic Analysis 3 250 System Time Management 3 252 System Database Backup To USB 3 255 Tenant Group 3 255 Universal Answer UA 3 257 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 5 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 258 VMIB 3 258 VMIB Auto Attendant 3 258 VMIB Voice Mail 3 261 System Voice Memo 3 280 Wake up Alarm 3 283 Chapter 4 Intercom Direct Station Select Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF 4 1 Intercom Call ICM Call 4 2 Intercom Call Hold 4 4 Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling 4 5 Intercom Lock out 4 6 Intercom Step Call
139. Max 6 digits LCD will show room no mini bar cost the name of item If you dial the cost becomes a minus value The value is toggled between minus and plus by dialing Plus is the default sign Press the SAVE button to save the cost If it is successful you may hear a service set tone And mini bar cost is registered and SMDR Information for the mini bar cost will be printed through RS 232C Otherwise you may hear an error tone Guest Station Digital Phone To register bar or mini bar charge Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Guest Station Single Line Telephone To register bar or mini bar charge Call Rate Call Charge Rate Register Assign CONDITIONS Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Call Charge Rate Register Assign B 37 Appendix B Hotel Management Ifa room ora service station is not assigned a call charge rate 100 percent of SMDR call cost is charged Itis optional to program the call charge rate type OPERATION Front Desk Register or change an entry in call charge rate table 1 Dial the PGM button 91 LCD will display the call charge rate of the first entry in table CALL CHARGE RATE 0 000 3 2 Diala desired room rate bin number 0 5 if you want to program another entry LCD will display the call charge rate of the selected entry 3 Press Flex but
140. NO This entry defines greeting repeat 5 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 6 000 100 secs 0 before greeting repeat Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 175 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE This entry defines the type of queuing tone 7 1 Normal 3 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER This entry defines the timer for queuing 8 000 300 secs 30 forward or second queuing announcement QUEUING TONE NO This entry defines queuing tone 9 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal QUEUING PRT ANNC This entry defines queuing prompt 10 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC QUEUING REPEAT NO This entry defines queuing repeat 11 000 100 3 number QUEUING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 12 000 100 secs 0 before queuing repeat QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 14 01 12 none queuing annc Pause time Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Progr
141. NORMAL CO LINE Determines call restriction for 1 0 No Restriction 0 No Restriction Normal CO line 1 All Calls 2 Long International 3 Internationa DEDICATED LINE Determines the call restriction 2 0 No restriction 0 No Restriction for TIE line 1 Restriction LOCAL CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 3 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of Local calls after the Restriction timer 1 Repeat tone expires 2 Single tone amp Drop LONG CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 4 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of Long Distance calls after the Restriction 1 Repeat tone timer expires 2 Single tone amp Drop INTERNAT AFTER R TIMEDetermines the 5 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of International calls after the Restriction 1 Repeat tone timer expires 2 Single tone amp Drop DEDICATED CALL AFTER R TM Determines the 6 0 Single tone 0 Single tone 1 2 expires Single tone amp Drop Call Duration Restriction lI TRANS PGM 285 Each tenant has available attributes relating to the CDR timer according to call types refer to the table below for a description of the functions and the data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 285 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System
142. Name Display CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To display the CO IP Line Name while calling PROGRAMMING CO Line Data HARDWARE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 One Time DND 6 9 Chapter 6 Digital Phone One Time DND While a Station is ringing or receiving an Off Hook Muted Ring the User can press the DND button to reject the call and terminate Ringing When the Station returns to the Idle status DND is automatically cancelled and the DND LED is extinguished If the DND button is pressed while on a call any ringing to the Station regardless of destination DN will be rejected and will not ring CONDITIONS Ifthe DND button is pressed while on an active call subsequent calls will not be received for the duration of that call One Time DND operates regardless of DND Access privilege Ifthe DND button is pressed when Delayed Ring Service is enabled the Station will continue to receive Incoming Call Ringing CO IP recalls will override One Time DND OPERATION Digital Phone To activate One Time DND while on a call Press the DND button the DND LED lights station goes to DND state System Deactivation When the Station returns to Idle DND automatically is cancelled and the DND LED will extinguish PROGRAMMING Station Data DND Access PGM 132 FLEX 4 see details on page A 33 PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DND ACCESS enables DND to be activated by 4
143. Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Sunday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 7 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ LCR Time Table Attributes TRANS PGM 255 The LCR Time Tables provide a mechanism to define the database with Digit Conversion Table PGM251 252 which will route outgoing calls particularly long distance using the most cost effective route Additionally days of the week are grouped into zones Day Zones and the time of day can be set into three groups Time Zones The TRANS PGM 255 table provides general descriptive information and input ranges 1 Press the TRANS PGM Button and dial 255 2 Press Flex button 1 4 refer to the Table 3 For LCR Time Zones use the dial pad to enter desired data Refer to the Table for input ranges Flex 1 7 to select the day of week 1 Monday 7 Sunday Enter the desired Day Zone 1 3 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Holiday Time Table TRANS PGM 256 System Speed Table TRANS PGM 257 y 4 Release 1 7 April 2012 Emergency Code Table Attributes TRANS PGM 258 A 111 Flex 4 Tenant No 4 Use the dial pad to enter the dialed number 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered
144. OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution G Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Queuing Service 10 27 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO DATA PRINT This entry defines usage of 16 0 Off 0 Off ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not 1 On Information Traffic data will be printed at Information Print Port INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Group Announcement PGM 215 see details on page A 81 PGM 215 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TONE TYPE designates the tone type 1 01 Normal Tone 01 Normal Tone 02 VMIB Prompt 03 VMIB Announcement 04 Internal MOH 05 External MOH 06 09 VMIB MOH 1 2 3 4 10 14 SLT MOH 1 5 TONE TIME determincs the amount of time 2 1 600 10 tone is provided TONE PORT tone port index of PGM 264 The 3 1 19 cadence of tone port may be changed by using Web Admin PROMPT ANNC NO The VMIB Prompt or 4 1 255 Announcement number when
145. Off Digital Phone until explicitly sent by the user When sent all dialed 1 On digits are sent to the system in a block Enblock mode is only available to Digital Phones with soft keys ICM ANSWER MODE selects Handsfree Privacy or Tone ring 5 1 Handsfree Tone ICM Signaling mode 2 Tone 3 Privacy DATA SECURITY disables override and camp on tones to the 6 0 Off Off station to avoid occurring error when sending data 1 On PROGRESS INDICATOR if this value is set to ON Progress 7 0 Off Off Indicator Information is included to Setup message Origin is 1 On non ISDN FAX MODE if this value is set to ON Bearer Capability 8 0 Off Off information with 3 1Khz is provided to PX 1 On DTMF WHEN REDIAL if this value is set to ON DTMF tone is 9 0 Off On heard to the station user while redial Reserved 1 On MUTE RING SERVICE if this value is setto MUTE RING system 10 0 Mute Ring Mute Ring provides MUTE RING to user 1 No Ring AUTO IDLE SERVICE If this value is set to AUTO system 11 0 Auto Auto provides Auto Idle service 1 Manual Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hot Desk 3 106 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Hold Recall see page 3 102 Hot Desk Digital Phones can be assigned as Hot Desk Dummy Terminal phones allowing Users Agents to login to the System The Hot Desk will become activ
146. Outgoing Inter Digit Timer TRANS PGM 174 A 58 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer TRANS PGM 175 A 59 CO COS Assignment TRANS PGM 177 A 60 CO to CO Transfer Attributes TRANS PGM 179 A 60 CO Group Access Code Attribute TRANS PGM 180 A 61 Alternate Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 181 A 63 SYSTEM GROUP DATA TRANS PGM 200 215 A 63 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 11 Station Group TRANS PGM 200 A 64 Station Group Greeting Queuing Attributes TRANS PGM 2071 A 65 Station Group Attributes TRANS PGM 202 A 68 Voice Mail Group Attributes TRANS PGM 203 A 69 Pick Up Group TRANS PGM 204 A 70 Page Group TRANS PGM 205 A 71 Command Call Group TRANS PGM 206 A 72 PTT Group TRANS PGM 208 A 73 Interphone Group TRANS PGM 209 A 73 Pilot Hunt Group TRANS PGM 210 A 74 Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute TRANS PGM 211 A 75 ACD Group TRANS PGM 212 A 76 ACD Group Attribute TRANS PGM 213 A 77 ACD Group Attribute Il TRANS PGM 214 A 79 ACD Group Announcement TRANS PGM 215 A 81 SYSTEM DATA TRANS PGM 220 242 A 82 System Timers TRANS PGM 220 A 83 System T
147. PHONE that can be registered to the System 2 BTN RANGE REMARK 32 Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 142 Chapter 3 System Features IP Address Plan TRANS PGM 101 see details on page A 11 TRANS PGM 101 BTN RANGE REMARK SLOT ASSIGNMENT refer to Board Type Code table below 1 SLOT 02 enter device port number 2 Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 103 see details on page A 11 TRANS PGM 103 BTN RANGE REMARK CO LINE BOARD 1 l STATION BOARD 2 88 SIP Phone 99 IP Phone or Phontage VMIB BOARD 3 l System Attribute TRANS PGM 223 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION The Web Admin password can 1 0 Off 0 Off be encrypted for security using RC 6 block encryption A Java VM 1 On must be installed on the user s PC PULSE DIAL BREAK RATIO The break make ratio for pulse dialing 2 0 60 40 1 66 33 through analog CO line 1 66 33 2 50 50 VM SMDI ENABLE If it is set to ON system interfaces SMDI 3 0 Off 0 Off protocol with external Voice Mail If OFF system interfaces In band 1 0n message with external Voice Mail VMIB SMTP PORT SMTP Port for VMIB message e mail sending 4 0000 9999 0025 NETWORK DATE TIME USE If set to ON the System update
148. PTT groups The Phone user may log in or log out of any one or all PTT groups to which it is assigned Once logged in the user may place or receive one way page announcements to from other users who are logged in to the same PTT group Additionally each user can log in or log out PTT group using the PTT Group Log In Out Feature Code CONDITIONS Only a SADN can be assigned as a member of Paging Group PTT Group SIP Stations cannot be assigned to Paging Groups PTT Group O is a specific PTT Group so if a member of the PTT group 0 tries to make a PTT announcement all of the members in all of groups will receive the announcement Additionally each group member can make PTT calls then all members of Group 0 will receive the announcement OPERATION Log in PTT Group with Feature Code 1 Dial the PTT Group Log In Out Feature Code the PTT Group status and registration will be displayed 2 Dial a PTT Group Number Log out PTT Group with Feature Code 1 Dial PTT Group Log In Out Feature Code the PTT Group status and registration will be displayed 2 Dial Log Out Code To make a PTT Group Call 1 Press the programmed PTT button 2 When finished press the PTT button to end the call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 184 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Group PTT Group TRANS PGM 208 Numbering Plan
149. Pick Up 9 3 SIP Hold Call 9 3 SIP Transfer Call 9 3 SIP Call Forward 9 4 SIP Do Not Disturb DND 9 4 SIP 3 Party Conference 9 5 SIP Call Wait Broker Call 9 5 SIP SMS 9 5 SIP Voice Mail Notification 9 6 SIP Video Call 9 6 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Basic Feature 10 1 ACD Group Service Status 10 9 ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10 16 ACD Call Queuing Service 10 21 CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10 28 ACD Agent State 10 33 ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting 10 39 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 9 ACD Call Indication 10 44 ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10 50 ACD Group Call Traffic 10 58 Appendix A System Programming Tables Initialization A 1 Program Menu Structure A 2 Administration Me
150. Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 181 Chapter 3 System Features Pilot Group Forward Attributes TRANS PGM 211 see details on page A 17 TRANS PGM 211 DAY FORWARD TYPE determines Day time seting for Call Forward type BTN 1 RANGE 0 Not Used 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans DEFAULT Not Used DAY FORWARD DESTINATION determines Day time seting for Forward destination Max 8 digits NIGHT FORWARD TYPE determines the Night time seting for Call Forward type 0 Not Used 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans Not Used NIGHT FORWARD DESTINATION determines the Night time seting for Forward destination Max 8 digits TIMED FORWARD TYPE determines the Timed seting for Forward type 0 Not Used 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans Not Used TIMED FWD DESTINATION determines the Timed seting for Forward destination Max 8 digits Table Data Ring Table use Web Admin TRANS PGM 265 RELATED FEATURES Call Forward Pilot Hunt see page 3 19 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 182 Pick Up Group Chapter 3 System Features A Station can be assigned to a Call Pick Up group and may pick up answer calls to other stations in the group employing the System s Group Call Pick Up feature Station Gro
151. QUEUE ACCESS enable CO Queuing 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Numbering Data CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 114 see details on page A 21 TRANS PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit By Range 1 Start CO Grp Access Code amp End CO Grp Access Code CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit 2 CO Grp Access Code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 47 RELATED FEATURES CO IP Access see page 3 37 Conference Chapter 3 System Features Conference supports communication between multiple parties up to 13 per conference The following table lists conference capacities for the MBX IP 100 300 systems NOTE There are 133 extra TDM channels for the Conference feature Conference Type Total number of conferences 3 way conference No limit 4 way conference 33 5 way conference 19 6 way conference 13 7 way conference 12 8 way conference 9 9 way conference 5 10 way conference 4 11 way conference 4 12 way conference 3 13 way conference 3 Conference Room In addition to ad hoc conferencing users may establish a Conference Room Both internal and external parties can be invited to a conference room and can join a conference room without further action by the user that established the Conference Room A user can transfer an active call to a Conference Room A Conference Room can be password pr
152. RELATED FEATURES Speakerphone see page 6 19 Intercom Call ICM Call see page 4 2 Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 Differential Ring The User can select one of 14 Ring tones so that the MBX IP Phone ring can be distinguished from other nearby phones Up to 8 Ring tones can be stored in the MBX IP Phone permanent memory the first 4 tones are fixed and the other Ring tones can be downloaded from a library of 10 Ring tones stored in the System protected memory After downloading a tone from System memory it can be selected as the Differential Ring Tone CONDITIONS The downloadable Ring tone files are stored in System memory as wav files with a maximum length of 4 seconds These files can be replaced as desired using the Web Upload function Ring tone download is only supported at LIP series terminals OPERATION MBX IP Phone To download a Ring Tone from System memory Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 To select the downloaded Ring Tone RELATED FEATURES Saved Number Redial SNR CONDITIONS Chapter 6 Digital Phone r Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Speakerphone 6 19 Chapter 6 Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To save a Dialed number while on a CO IP Call After dialing but before hanging up press the SPEED button twice the dialed number will be stored in the SNR buffer To dial a Saved number 1 Lift th
153. Room Charge Display Print Front desk can see total charge of a single room or multiple rooms on LCD display and can print SMDR records of the room s through RS 232C port CONDITIONS SMDR MAX record message number is 5000 alarm message is automatically received at the Attendant Station if recorded number is 4000 or 4500 Total number of Bar Records is 7000 in MBX IP 300 and 3000 in MBX IP 100 alarm message is automatically received at the Attendant Station if recorded number is 6000 or 6500 in MBX IP 300 and 2000 or 2500 in MBX IP 100 SMDR and BAR detailed record and total room charge for the room is deleted upon check out for the next guest After printing system sends a Form Feed The information print of Guest Room can be blocked by Admin XXX OPERATION Front Desk To display and print Room Charge Information total charge only or detailed information 1 2 Dial the PGM button 71 Dial station number Then LCD will show the total charge of that station Digit is the end mark of station number Dial station number again if you want to enter another station number LCD will display the summation of total charge of those stations In this case system does not support room range input Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Printing Format Echo Mode RM 0100 PRE PAID 20000 CHARGED 53000 3300
154. SLT Ring Cadence TRANS PGM 440 A 160 ACNR Tone Cadence TRANS PGM 441 A 162 DB INITIALIZATION TRANS PGM 499 A 162 Release 1 7 cal MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 14 Appendix B Hotel Management System Capacity and License B 1 Hotel Service Type B 3 Multiple Front Desks B 7 Check In B 7 Check Out B 9 Call Barring B 11 CO Call Barring Room Cut B 11 ICM Call Barring B 12 One Time CO Call Use B 13 Room Setting B 14 Wake Up Registration Cancellation B 14 Do No Disturb Registration Cancellation B 17 Message Wait Registration Cancellation B 18 Bath Alarm B 20 Register Change Authorization Code B 21 Register Change Prepaid Money B 22 Room Swapping B 23 Maid Status B 23 Room Charge Status Print B 25 Room Charge Display Print B 25 Print Room Status through RS 232C B 29 De
155. Single Line Phone To activate Temporary COS 1 oe OS Press the hook switch Dial the SLT Programming code Dial 31 Temp COS code Dial the applicable Authorization Code Press the hook switch To restore the assigned COS 1 2 3 4 2 Press the hook switch Dial the SLT Programming code Dial 32 Restore COS code Dial Authorization Code Press the hook switch System Attendant To activate Temporary COS 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 031 Temp COS code Enter the Station range Press the HOLD SAVE button To restore the assigned COS 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 032 Restore COS code Enter the Station range Press the HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 70 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station COS TRANS PGM 137 see details on page A 37 TRANS PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS Station s COS in Day mode 1 00 15 1 NIGHT COS Station s COS in Night mode 2 00 15 1 TIMED COS Station s COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 1 CO IP CO COS TRANS PGM 177 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Day mode 1 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 3
156. Slot for RTP Relay VOIB Slot VMIB Slot VMIB Slot Peer To Peer Disable Enable Enable ZONE RTP RELAY GROUP WEB ONLY l Force To RTP Relay 00 63 32 INTER ZONE ATTRIBUTE WEB ONLY l Codec Type Station Codec G 711 Station Codec G 723 G 729 RTP Rule If Need Always Not If Need Forced To Do Src RTP Relay VOIB Slot Dest RTP Relay VOIB Slot STATION ZONE ATTRIBUTE WEB ONLY l Zone No 1 9 1 Das Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP ZONE DATA SNMP DATA GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 101 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL TONE 9 00 63 32 38 37 32 37 3 2 32 32 MUSIC 10 00 63 29 40 29 29 37 3 2 32 32 DSP RX GAIN A 154 415 DTMF A 1 100 63 32 DTMF D 2 00 63 32 CPT 3 00 63 32 CID FSK 4 00 63 32 CID D 5 00 63 32 CID RUS 6 00 63 32 SMS TRK 7 00 63 32 SMS SLT 8 00 63 32 DEVICE A 154 420 SLTM DTIM HS DTIM HF IP PHONE HS 426 IP PHONE HF WIT VOIB RX RTP GAIN SLTM 1 100 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 DTIM HF 2 00 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 DTIM HS 3 100 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 IP Phone HS 4 0
157. Speed can be assigned refer to Tables Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Customer Call Routing Table TRANS PGM 260 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Customer Call Routing Table TRANS PGM 262 A 113 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 260 CCR TABLE The destination of CCR input digit the destination can be a Station number Station group number or Feature code NOTE For Feature codes refer to the Numbering Plan for the applicable codes BTN RANGE 1 12 Max 8 digits DEFAULT Customer Call Routing Table TRANS PGM 262 The system can employ Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID to determine the routing of incoming external calls Each CO IP Line may be assigned to employ ICLID routing The System will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table and if a match is found the System will route the call to the destination indicated by the index bin number TRANS PGM 181 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 260 2 Use the dial pad to select a CCR Table index 001 100 The index number is the index of Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 3 Press a Flex button 1 12 10 0 11 12 to assign a route for the associated CCR dialed digit Use the dial pad for Destination 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered TRANS PGM 2
158. TRANS PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECRETARY CHOICE Determines order in which secretary 6 0 1 0 stations will receive calls First Idle Longest Idle MSG WAIT STATION Determines if message wait indication 7 0 Executive 0 is left at Executive Station or Secretary 1 First Secretary EXECUTIVE message left at Executive station FIRST SEC message is left at the first secretary Executive Executive Access TRANS PGM 242 see details on page A 103 HARDWARE Digital Phone External Auto Attendant Voice Mail AA VM Group The system provides support for an adjunct Auto Attendant Voice Mail system via connection to SLT ports When a call arrives for the External AA VM Group the system will search the group for an idle port and deliver the call Signaling information between the system and AA VM system may be assigned for in band DTMF signaling or the Simplified Message Desk Interface SMDI signaling protocol over the assigned system RS 232 port CONDITIONS Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be selected in Admin Programming refer to Admin Programming Manual Only one AA VM Group can be defined in the system multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation OPERATION System The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Groups Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 201
159. TRANSFER Determine the 6 0 Cancel Transfer Cancel Transfer operation when user press hook flash button while 1 Broker transferring call 2 Conference 0 Cancel transfer drop current call and recover 3 Broker Conf previous call 1 Broker hold current call and recover previous held call 2 Conference establish 3 way conference call 3 Broker Conf Operated Broker and Conference when a user hook flash within 2 sec OFF HOOK ON PAGED when lifting handset while 7 0 Paged Paged listening to paging message user can make another 1 Dial Tone call or continue to listen 0 continue to listen to paging message 1 stop listening seize a remaining DN and hear dial tone User can make a another call PLA Preferred Line Answer enables Ringing Line 8 0 Off On Preference for the station Calls that ring the telephone 1 On are answered by going off hook Reserved PICKUP BY DSS BUTTON this value determines the 9 0 Disable Direct Pickup method of pickup when pressing DSS button 1 Group Pickup 2 Direct Pickup CLI IP ADDRESS CLI IP Address 10 IP Address 0 0 0 0 ACD AGENT PRIORITY when a station is amember 11 01 20 10 of an ACD Group this value will be used for priority as agent Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Station Group
160. Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10 31 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state will be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute2 PGM 214 see details on page A 79 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD C
161. The MAC Address of MPB 1 PROTOCOL PORT UDP Port for communicating between MPB 2 and Boards or IP Phone PRIVATE NET MASK APP RLS VERSION System Version APP RLS DATE The released Date of System software BOOT VERSION System Boot Version BOOT RLS DATE The released Date of System Booting application NI oOo By Ww 1 i NUMBERI NG PLAN DATA TRANS PGM Codes 110 to 116 Numbering Plan Type TRANS PGM 110 The MBX IP system provides default Numbering plan set One of any numbering plans can be installed or every numbering plan can be cleared If numbering plan type 7 is selected all numbering codes are deleted After deleting the user should then assign the System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 After configuring the System Numbering Plan the user can assign the other numbering plan code This is useful when the user wants to reconfigure all the numbering codes without default values 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 110 2 Press Flex Btn 1 and select one of the default numbering plans If numbering plan type 7 is selected all numbering codes are deleted After deleting the user should first assign the prefix numbering plan After configuring the prefix the user can assign the others like station number CO Group Access Code Extra Numbering and Feature Code This is useful when a user wants to reconfigure all numbering codes 3 Press the SAVE button
162. Tone 10 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 17 Uncompleted Dial Error Tone 11 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 DOD Restriction Tone 12 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 Ave Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 89 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Relative Out of Order 24 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 External Relative Out of Order A 133 290 25 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 External Relative Outgoing Restriction 26 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 Relative Hot Desk Logout 27 Tone Type Normal Time 20 sec Tone Number 1 TENANT DATA Howling Tone 28 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 19 18 Ring Back Tone 29 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 4 and Ring Back Tone 30 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 4 CO Ring Back Tone 31 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 4 Recall Ring Back Tone 32 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 4 Zone Paging Call Ring Back Tone 33 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 4 Command Call Ring Back Tone 34 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 4 Release 1 7 Y MBX I
163. Y April 2012 Representative CLI Service 5 77 Chapter 5 CO IP CONDITIONS The ISDN must support Call Deflection Supplementary Service as defined by the ETS300 202 206 207 Standard protocol ISDN lines that support Call Deflection must be assigned in the System database OPERATION Digital Phone To activate ISDN Call Deflection for an External Phone Number 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial Forward condition 1 4 or 4 Dial CO Access Code and desired External Phone Number 5 Replace the handset and return to idle To deactivate ISDN Call Deflection Press flashing FWD button Call Forward will deactivate and the FWD button LED will be extinguished PROGRAMMING CO Line Data ISDN CD PGM 161 FLEX 9 see details on page A 46 PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GAIN TABLE IDX Determines Gain Table for CO line 9 1 3 1 HARDWARE ISDN Line Digital Phone Representative CLI Service If a user makes a CO Call the System can send Representative CLI instead of Individual CLI CONDITIONS This feature can be set for each CO Line Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION PROGRAMMING CO Line Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 6 1 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Chapter 6 Digital Phone The foll
164. Zone will not receive a Page including All Call Pages A Page Ring will be provided to the Page Zone s prior to the Audio Connection The User is allowed to continue the Page for the specified Page Time out Timer after which the User is disconnected and the Page Zone s is returned to idle The default Page Zone Dial codes are Chapter 4 Intercom Paging Dial Codes Page Type MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Internal Page Zones 543 Group Number 543 Group Number Internal All Call Page 543 00 543 00 External Page Zone 548 548 All Call Page 549 549 Flexible buttons of a Digital Phone may be assigned to access a Page Zone as a PAGE ZONE button CONDITIONS Stations that are not enabled to Page will receive an Error tone when any Page Access code is dialed Stations in DND or Busy will not receive Page announcements A Station accessing a Page Zone is considered Busy Stations that are not included in any Internal Page Zone will not receive any page including All Call For External Paging an External Amplifier and Speaker s are required The System External Control Contacts may be assigned to activate when External Page is accessed Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button as a PAGE ZONE button To initiate a Page SLT To initiate a Pa
165. activated when Code Refer to there is an incoming call PGM115 NOTE Feature Code is not applied to rerouted calls FEATURE DELAY If Service type is set to Feature code it 4 00 30 secs 00 can be delayed Alternate Outgoing CO Service A User can place an outgoing CO call and then can Hold or Transfer the Call to another User If the System cannot answer for an external Outgoing Call a programmed service can be provided or it can be routed into a programmed destination This feature is applied by CO Line Group by the Administrator Recall No Answer Station does not answer the Hold Recall the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone or Pilot Hunt Transfer No Answer Transferred call goes unanswered the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone Pilot Hunt or Transfer Station No Answer If an incoming call goes unanswered the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone or Pilot Hunt Operation If set Alternate Outgoing CO Service is automatic CONDITIONS This feature can be set for each CO line If attendant is not assigned and it calls an incoming CO call it plays error tone If there is no voice mail resource or all voice mail channels are busy it plays error tone The destination is set differently according to Day Night and Time
166. are dialed they are compared to entries in the appropriate Toll Table Based on the Allow and Deny entries the system applies the following rules to allow or deny the call Rule 1 If a table has no entries no restrictions are applied Rule 2 If there are only Deny entries restrictions are provided as Deny only Rule 3 If there are both Allow and Deny entries the Deny entries are searched If the dialed number matches a Deny entry the call is restricted if no match is found the call is allowed Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 64 CONDITIONS Chapter 3 System Features There are 16 different COS Stations and CO Lines can each have a different COS according to the Station grade and CO Line type Toll Exception can be programmed differently according to the Day Night Timed Mode If COS is set to 0 the DN can make intercom calls only CO line access is disabled If COS is set to 1 the DN can make any call no exception OPERATION System The assigned COS is applied automatically by the system ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station COS TRANS PGM 137 see details on page A 37 TRANS PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS Station s COS in Day mode 1 00 15 NIGHT COS Station s COS in Night mode 2 00 15 TIMED COS Station s COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 CO IP
167. automatic to manual Refer to the following table for a description of the funtions the LCD displays and date entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 253 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table range 3 Press the Flex button for the desired setting refer to the following Table 4 Use the dial pad to enter the desired flexible button 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT defines the comment of the Time 1 32 characters none Table SYSTEM TIME ZONE defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0 73 0 Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS defines Daylight Saving Time of Time 3 On Off Off Table Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Weekly Time Table TRANS PGM 254 a Release 1 7 xY April 2012 LCR Time Table Attributes TRANS PGM 255 A 109 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 4 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Friday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 5 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Saturday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 6 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times
168. be assigned and edited in TRANS PGM 113 Appendix B provides the default values for each of the eight base Numbering Plans Select the default Numbering Plan in TRANS PGM 110 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 115 2 Select the desired index 01 108 refer to the following table 3 Press the SAVE button to store the new Numbering Plan data Check if newly entered number is available according to Prefix Code plan TRANS PGM 111 Feature Numbering Codes BIN FEATURE REMARK 1 Attendant Call 0 2 Conference Room 1 571 3 Conference Room 2 572 4 Conference Room 3 573 5 Conference Room 4 574 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN TRANS PGM 113 A 19 Appendix A System Programming Tables BTN FEATURE REMARK 36 Call Parking Location 541 xx Parking Location 00 49 37 TRANS PGM Mode Access 521 38 Two Way Record 522 39 VMIB Access 523 40 AME Access 524 41 CO Line Access 888 CO Line 001 200 MBX IP 300 01 80 MBX IP 100 42 VM MWI Enable 8 43 VM MWI Cancel 9 44 MCID Request 0 45 Unsupervised Conf Extend 5 H 46 P
169. calls are forwarded to the selected station No Answer forwards all calls to the selected station when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer CONDITIONS A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station Calls cannot be forwarded to a station in DND error tone is returned Manual forward has a higher priority than Preset Forward and overrides any Preset Forward setting Preset call forward status is not shown on the Station LCD display Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward Preset 3 23 Chapter 3 System Features No Answer Forward employs the Station No Answer Forward timer If Station No Answer Preset Call Forward and CO Preset Forward Ring Table is set the same the CO Preset Forward Ring Table precedes Station Preset Call Forward OPERATION System When enabled operation of Preset Call Forward is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Preset Call Forward TRANS PGM 142 see details on page A 39 TRANS PGM 142 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTERNAL UNCOND The unconditional preset forward 1 Max 32 digits destination of internal intercom call INTERNAL BUSY The busy preset forward destination of 2 Max 32 digits internal intercom call INTERNAL NO ANSWER The no answer preset forward 3 Max 32 digits destination of internal intercom EXTERNAL UNCOND
170. code Dial the number to be stored Press the HOLD SAVE button If desired enter a name refer to the Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press HOLD SAVE button Single Line Phone To dial using Station Speed Dial 1 Lift handset 2 Dial SLT Speed Dial access code 3 Dial the desired bin number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 149 To program a Station Speed Dial number 1 Dial SLT Programming code Dial SLT Speed Dial access code Dial the Speed Dial bin number Dial the CO IP Group Access code Dial the number to be stored Press for hook switch 2 NOAAR WH Press for hook switch ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Chapter 3 System Features Speed Access TRANS PGM 134 BTN 1 see details on page A 34 If desired enter a name refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SPEED ACCESS gives station speed dial bins access authority 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Table Data System Speed Dial Table TRANS PGM 257 see details on page A 110 TRANS PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYS SPD DIAL The System Speed Dial Digits 1 Max 32 digits SYS SPD NAME The System Speed Dial Name 2 Max 16 characters TOLL FREE Assignment to apply toll free 3 0 Off 0 Off 1 On TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied to the System 4 1
171. conversation To intrude in a call when Branch Line is enabled Press a busy lit steady DN button the user is connected to the call with the existing internal station user ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Branch Line TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 10 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BRANCH BRIDGE LINE Set branch bridge line feature 10 0 Off Off Branch Conference call by pressing DN button in use 1 On Bridge Bridge call by pressing DN button in use Bridge Softphone Auto bridge if Phontage UC Client s IP bridge is enabled Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Automatic Privacy Branch Line 3 9 Chapter 3 System Features Auto Privacy TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 11 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 AUTO PRIVACY Enables auto privacy feature to restrict the intrusion call wait camp on OHVA in busy station BTN RANGE 11 0 Off 1 On DEFAULT Off System Data Intercom Busy One Digit Service TRANS PGM 237 see details on page A 101 TRANS PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STEP CALL determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable DIGIT 1 when accessing a busy tone user may dial for one of 2 0 N A the one touch services DIGIT 2 3 DIGIT 3 4 0 N A DIGIT 4 5 1 Call Back DIGIT 5 6 2 Camp On D
172. defines if system answer the 9 0 With Answer With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W o Answer Voice Mail Group Attributes TRANS PGM 203 Voice Mail group has available attributes relating to dialing service as put mail get mail etc The following table provides descriptions for the attributes and data entries required Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Pick Up Group TRANS PGM 204 Station Pick up Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Release 1 7 b April 2012 Page Group TRANS PGM 205 A 71 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 204 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group 01 50 for the MBX IP 100 and 001 100 for the MBX IP 300 The system will display the attribute of pickup group 3 NOTE for group members enter a station or station range For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number For a range enter the first and last station number in the range 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 204 PICK UP CONDITION this entry defines pick up condition All Internal External BTN RANGE O All Cal
173. destination when a timeout timer is 4 All expired 4 All a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired APPLY TIME TYPE This entry defines a time to apply 4 0 ALL ALL forward type 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED FWD DESTINATION This entry defines a forward 5 Max 16 digits None destination Trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR This entry defines a wrap up timer A 6 000 600 010 member is available when this timer is expired after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR This entry defines no answer 7 05 60 15 timer about each member If this timer is expired a call is routed to the next member RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 0 timer If this timer is expired a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 9 0 With Answer With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W o Answer VM Group Attributes TRANS PGM 203 see details on page A 69 TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM PUT MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 1 1 9 1 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Put Mail dial code VM GET MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 2 1 9 2 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Get Mail dial code VM BUSY INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an inde
174. digits are hidden 12 0 Left 1 Right 1 Right TRANSFER CHARGE MODE 1 INDIVIDUAL When a call is transferred to another station the transferred call is charged to two stations respectively 2 INTEGRATE XFERING When a call is transferred to another station the call is charged to the transferring station 3 INTEGRATE XFERED When a call is transferred to another station the call is charged to the transferred station 13 0 Individual 1 Integrate Xfering 2 Integrate Xfered 0 Individual Release 1 7 WY vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 193 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 232 TRANSFER CHARGE 1 NORMAL CHARGING When Attendant make outgoing call and transfer this call to another station the transferred will follow the Transfer Charge Mode 2 ATD CHARGING When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station the call is charged to the Attendant 3 XFERED CHARGING When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station the call is charged to the transferred station BTN 14 RANGE 0 Normal Charging 1 Atd Charging 2 Xfered Charging DEFAULT 0 Normal Charging WARNING TONE SVC if this option is enabled andSMDR service type is off line the system check free records space And if free space is less than 1000 warnin
175. in 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode LOGOUT HANDSET This entry defines usage of 13 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log out 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode 4 Logon Mode LOGOUT RESTRICTION This entry defines 14 0 Not use 0 Not use restriction of Logout State Agent 1 CO outgoing 2 All call CO ANSWER TIME This entry defines when the 15 0 Queued to group 0 Queued to group ACK message is sent to caller party 1 Agent Answer INFO DATA PRINT This entry defines usage of 16 0 Off 0 Off ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not 1 On Information Traffic data will be printed at Information Print Port Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Call Distribution by Priority CONDITIONS OPERATIONS Change Priority of agents by Supervisor or Sub Supervisor PROGRAMMING Station Group a Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10 17 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Assignment PGM 212 see details on page A 76 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forwa
176. is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after Rls Time Before disconnected warning tone is provided Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Voice Network y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 215 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 4 10digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 5 0 Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Identification Service When a user make
177. is provided Night Attendant Group Attribute PGM 277 see details on page A 126 PGM 277 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING Determines if call is routed to the 1 0 After Greeting 1 In Greeting Attendant when Greeting Tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT Determines the Queue count 2 00 99 05 Release 1 7 QW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Greeting Queuing Tone Service a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Greeting Queuing Tone Service 7 15 Chapter 7 Attendants INT MOH EXT MOH VMIB MOH 1 4 for MBX IP 300 1 3 for MBX IP 100 e SLT MOH 1 5 CONDITIONS If Greeting Play timer is expired RBT is provided During Announcement delay time MOH or RBT can be provided by PGM If queuing announcement forward timer is expired second queuing announcement can be provided If Second queuing announcement forward timer is not assigned a call is routed to the forward destination after first queuing announcement forward timer is expired OPERATION If set Greeting Queuing Tone Service operation is automatic Queuing PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Greeting Queuing Tone Service 7 17
178. it will be 2 Flash Drop operated normal case flow 1 FLASH IGNORE Hook Flash 3 Hold Release cannot be detected All of hook flash will be ignored at any time 2 FLASH DROP When Hook Flash is detected the line will be disconnected 3 HOLD RELEASE Drop the holding line if system detects Hook Flash and then On Hook during dialing state AUTO PICKUP if a group member is ringing another 8 0 Disable Disable member of the Group can Pick Up a call ringing at another 1 Enable member by simply going Off hook Station Number Attributes IlI TRANS PGM 133 TRANS PGM 133 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO QUEUE ACCESS enable CO Queuing 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable CONFERENCE ACCESS enable Conference call 2 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes I V TRANS PGM 134 a Release 1 7 xY April 2012 Station Number Attributes TRANS PGM 131 135 A 35 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PILOT HUNT RING permits station to receive pilot hunt ring 6 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable ACR USER sets Anonymous Call Restrict service 7 0 Off Off 1 0n WAKE UP SET sets wake up time 8 HH MM
179. maid status and registers basic information of the guest s individually or entirely This feature is available from PMS Property Management System and Front Desk CONDITIONS System checks if a room to check in is set to provide WAKE UP Call Forward DND Absence and Message Wait If they are registered all those features are canceled When check in is registered from PMS guest grade language ID COS name PMS group number and expected check out time must be entered If check in to a new room is confirmed by the front desk without programming any data system processes the check in with default values Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Chk In ROOM CHECK_IN GUEST_NAME COS ICM GRP WAKE AUTH PRE PAID Call RT CHARGE 0100 12 29 18 000 11 No 2 No 0 0 Changed ROOM CHECK_IN GUEST_NAME COS ICM GRP WAKE AUTH PRE PAID Call RT CHARGE 0100 12 29 18 C H Lee 11 Yes 01 06 00 Yes 20000 14 20000 NOTE OPERATION Front Desk To check in an empty room Release 1 7 WY vertical April 2012 Check Out B 9 ONO Appendix B Hotel Management Designate digit restriction class Designate digit conversion class Designate guest name PMS group setting Expected check out date and time Confirm check in completion OMAN DA A Press a desired value of each sub menu and press the SAVE button When completing
180. make time interval for Queued call count display PGM 214 Flex 9 If ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature code is saved at Supervisor s or Sub Supervisor s flex button this button color will be steady on when there are queued ACD call At that time Supervisor or Sub Supervisor can answer the first queued ACD call or can forward to registered destination Administrator can make Queuing Announcement Scenario with Repeat Announcements Count and Repeat Announcements Start Position in PGM 213 Flex 9 10 After Queuing Announcement Service Step if Repeat Announcements Count is set queuing announcement will be restarted from Repeat Announcements Start Position CONDITIONS Each Queuing Announcement playtime is max 600sec If there is not registered forward destination after queuing announcement ACD call will be released Supervisor Sub Supervisor and all of Agents can check and listen all of ACD Group Announcement with ACD Announce Play feature code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution OPERATIONS ACD Call Operation when All of agents are not ready OR Queuing Announcement Repeat Scenario First Queued Call Answer by Supervisor or Sub Supervisor OR voaortiral Release 1 7 AS vertical April 2012 ACD Call Queuing Service 10 23 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution OR 6 Press
181. multiplier the system will then extend the timer based on the dialed digit multiple of the Timer For example if the Unsupervised Conference timer is 5 minutes and the user dials the digit 4 the timer will extend to 20 minutes 4 multiplied by 5 minutes CONDITIONS The Unsupervised Conference Timer will also apply to an external call placed by a DISA user An Unsupervised conference will be terminated if the system receives a disconnect signal or the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires An Unsupervised Conference will not recall at the user Station OPERATION Digital Phone To set up an Unsupervised Conference 1 Establish a conference by the normal procedure 2 Goes On Hook then remained External users can communicate without Supervisor To set up a Supervised Conference Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 54 Chapter 3 System Features 1 Establish a conference by the normal procedure 2 Press the CONF button the button LED will flash to indicate the Supervised Conference activation once set up the conference supervisor must re enter the conference To reenter the Supervised Conference Press the flashing CONF button Conf Party To extend the Unsupervised Conference from a connected party Dial the Timer extension multiplier 1 9 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Conference Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 2 see details on page
182. name that is sent by the System to the 2 16 characters destination for the ICLID routed call INC CO GROUP NO The CO Group Number to apply ICLID 3 1 72 route if not assigned ICLID is applied to all CO Groups DAY RING INDEX The index to be routed in Day the 4 1 80 Alternative Ring Index PGM 181 NIGHT RING INDEX The index to be routed in Night the 5 1 80 Alternative Ring Index PGM 181 TIMED RING INDEX The index to be routed in Timed the 6 1 80 Alternative Ring Index PGM 181 TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied the ICLID 7 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 IP Trunking H 323 v4 Service When assigned to support H 323 protocol VoIP channels provide protocol conversion between H 323 v4 and SIP This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external H 323 networks or Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION System PROGRAMMING H 323 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 IP Trunking 5 61 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT G 711A CODEC usage of G 711A Codec Type 5 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 711U CODEC usage of G 711U Codec Type 6 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 729 CODEC usage of G 729 Codec Type 7 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 723 CODEC usage of G 723 1 Codec Type 8 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use GK USED u
183. not activated when destination is a Station Group or CCR CO IP Line Preset Forward will override Call Forward No Answer at a Station If Destination Station has an External No Answer Preset Call Forward destination set and the timer is same as CO Preset Forward Timer CO Preset Call Forward will take priority Otherwise the timer that expires first will be applied and Forward Destination will be applied according to the expired timer CO IP line Preset Forward is disabled if the Preset Forward Timer is set to 0 CO IP line Preset Forward destination cannot be a VM Group CO IP line Preset Forward is not applied to the DID line OPERATION System If set CO IP Line Preset Forward is automatic PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Service Type PGM 160 FLEX 2 see details on page A 45 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SVC TYPE Set CO line type as DID or Normal 2 0 Normal Normal 1 DID Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP RELATED FEATURES CO OWN CODE SERVI CE a Release 1 7 AS April 2012 CO IP Ring Assignment 5 37 Chapter 5 CO IP makes an Outgoing CO Call The CO Own Code is sent adding ahead of station number or received CLI CONDITIONS This feature can be set for each outgoing incoming CO line The outgoing CO own code and the incoming CO own code are independ
184. not available a user can pre select a text message to be shown on the LCD of an incoming caller s Digital Phone display When a user activates Text Display Messages incoming intercom calls will signal the user with normal ringing and the LCD of the calling station will display the selected message There are ten Pre defined messages 01 10 ten System wide Custom messages and one User defined Custom message Several of the ten Pre defined messages allow for auxiliary information such as a time date or number System level Custom Messages may be entered from the Attendant or Administrator s phone or via the Web Admin The User s Custom Message can be assigned from their own Station phone as well as at the Attendant or the Administrator Digital Phone users may assign a Flex button as a Preselected Message TRANS PGM button The Pre defined messages are Message Display Comment Number 01 LUNCH RETURN AT hh mm hh mm can be set with return time 02 ON VACATION RETURN AT DATE mm dd can be set with return date mm dd 03 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME hh mm can be set with return time hh mm 04 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT DATE mm dd can be set with return date mm dd 05 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN 06 CALL enter up to 24 digits Can be set with destination to call 07 IN OFFICE STA xxxx Xxxx is set with station number 08 IN MEETING RETURN AT TIME hh mm_ hh mm can be set with return time 09 AT HOME 10 AT BRANCH OFFICE
185. of gain tables per station 10 1 3 1 SLT LINE LENGTH this feature is used to distinguish the line length 11 0 Short Short when the distance between SLT station and SLIB board is too variable 1 Long Short 0km Long 0 3km Far 3 7 5km 2 Far ALARM enable to receive system alarm signal 12 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable DOOR OPEN enable to use door open feature 13 O0 Disable Disable 1 Enable Station Attributes II TRANS PGM 122 LLCD LANGUAGE SELECTION TRANS PGM 122 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LCD LANGUAGE sets the Language used in the 1 00 14 00 English Station s LCD LCD DATE MODE sets the Station s Date display as 2 0 DDMMYY DDMMYY month day or day month 1 MMDDYY Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Attributes IlI TRANS PGM 123 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Station Port Attributes TRANS PGM 121 124 A 27 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 123 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PRIME NUMBER BTN among My DN and several Sub DNs 1 01 48 01 which are assigned to station flex buttons determines the first seized DN when the user initiates a call If prime button is not set of invalid the system scans sequentially from fle
186. places a 911 call the button will light and an audible ring will be heard The system will log the station date time the call was made Press the flashing button to access the log Use the softkeys to review delete entries ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data Emergency Code Table TRANS PGM 258 see details on page A 111 TRANS PGM 258 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIALED DIGIT The dialed digits from user 1 Max 16 digits Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Executive Secretary by DN Directory Number 3 83 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 258 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CHANGED DIGIT CO Group Access Code and digits to 2 Max 16 digits be sent to PX when user dials the dialed digit TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied when 3 Empty 1 9 MBX 1 user dials emergency code If this field be left empty this IP 300 entry will be adapted to all tenants 1 5 MBX IP 100 Executive Secretary by DN Directory Number Executive Secretary feature can be achieved by utilizing the DN Directory Number feature of the system refer to DN For example when a DN is set as MADN calls for an Executive can be routed to that DN The DN can be programmed on a flex button at the Executive station with a no ring option At the Secretary station the DN is stored on a flex button with an immediate ring option In this case the calls for the executive will ri
187. power fail the system will initialize the database on power up Refer to the MBX IP Hardware and Installation Guide for more details The Lithium battery is not field replaceable OPERATION System When enabled operation is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward 3 15 Chapter 3 System Features Call Forward User may have selected incoming calls re route to other stations local or networked station groups the VMIIB or over a system CO IP line Off Net The user selects the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward code as follows Code 0 Remote Call Forward forwards all calls to the station except recalls activated from a remote station Call Forward Follow me Code 1 Unconditional all calls to the station except recalls are forwarded internally or externally immediately upon receipt Code 2 Busy if the station is busy forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station Code 3 No Answer forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer Code 4 Busy No Answer forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer CONDITIONS A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station A station denied the use of Call Forward will
188. presented to the call parties notifying that the Warning Tone Timer is about to expire CONDITIONS Warning tone is received 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer and can be repeated every tone repeat time OPERATION System If enabled operation of this feature is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Call Duration Restrict Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 4 see details on page A 34 Tenant Data Call Duration Restriction TRANS PGM 284 285 see details on page A 131 operation of Long Distance calls after the Restriction Repeat tone TRANS PGM 284 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NORMAL CO LINE Determines call restriction for 1 0 No Restriction 0 No Restriction Normal CO line 1 All Calls 2 Long International 3 Internationa DEDICATED LINE Determines the call restriction 2 0 No restriction 0 No Restriction for TIE line 1 Restriction LOCAL CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 3 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of Local calls after the Restriction timer 1 Repeat tone expires 2 Single tone amp Drop LONG CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 4 0 Single tone 0 Single tone 1 2 timer expires Single tone amp Drop YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer 3 44 Chapter 3 System Features TRAN
189. receive an error tone in response to attempts to activate Call Forward A forwarded intercom call will signal the receiving station in Tone Signaling mode regardless of the Intercom Signaling Mode at the station Attempting activation of Call Forward will automatically deactivate any activated Display Text Message Active Call Back or Queue requests do not cancel When Call Forward is active a Station can make outgoing calls internal or external For CO IP calls when Call Forward is manually activated it will override any Preset Call Forward assigned for the station or CO IP line Call Forward status is maintained in the System s non volatile memory for protection from power outage Off Net Call Forward of incoming CO IP calls is essentially an automated DISA call which will establish an Unsupervised Conference such calls are subject to the conditions of a DISA call and Unsupervised Conference and may require entry of an Authorization Code Off Net Forward calls are not answered until the system completes dialing of the external call The call internal or external is then connected to the Off Premise call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward 3 16 Chapter 3 System Features An unlimited number of stations may be set up in a Call Forward chain forwarding calls from one station to the next However the Call Forward service counter is restricted
190. received from the CO IP Line must be a telephone number to match an ICLID Route Table entry If ICLID routing is enabled for a DID line DID Call Wait is disabled Beside the System ICLID Table each station can have up to 10 individual ICLID numbers OPERATION System The System will implement routing automatically based on database entries and the received ICLID PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 IP Trunking 5 59 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT 100 0 Assigned station and delay value can 4 be displayed Volume Up Down key is used to scroll data MEMBER ASSIGN To change station s ring 5 Start Station amp End assign status enter desired station range Max Station 30 stations can be assigned DELAY Enter delay value if delay is 0 station 5 1 0 9 Sta 100 Port 0 delay 0 will start to ring immediately If delay value is Others not assigned deleted the station will not ring Otherwise if delay is 1 9 the station will start to ring after delay time 3 times of delay value Table ICLID Table PGM 262 see details on page A 113 PGM 262 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICLID NUMBER ICLID used to match the index 1 24 digits None ICLID NAME ICLID
191. ringing OPERATION System At detection of contact operation the Alarm Door Bell signal is sent to assigned station Digital Phone To assign a Flex button as an ALARM STOP button Press TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 Sys Alarm Reset Feature Code HOLD SAVE Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Alarm Signal Door Bell 3 4 Chapter 3 System Features To terminate an Alarm Signal while idle Dial the Sys Alarm Reset Feature Code a confirmation tone is received and the Alarm Signal is terminated OR Press the programmed ALARM STOP Flex button NOTE If the alarm condition is cleared the system will automatically rearm the alarm monitoring ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Alarm TRANS PGM 121 FLEX12 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALARM enable to receive system alarm signal 12 1 3 1 System Alarm TRANS PGM 121 FLEX12 see details on page A 87 TRANS PGM 227 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALARM ENABLE enables the external contact monitoring circuitry 1 0 Off Off 1 On ALARM CONTACT TYPE establishes the contact state that will 2 0 Open Open activate the Alarm close or open 1 Close ALARM MODE the contact can be designated to function as a 3 0 Bell Alarm doorbell instead of an alarm 1 Alarm ALARM SIGNAL MODE the assigned stations will receive a 4 0 Once Rep
192. seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Group Announcement PGM 215 see details on page A 81 ACD Agent State When administrator assigns the agents all of agents are log out state If agents want to receive the ACD call agents have to go to log in state Agents can go to log in state with ACD Agent Login Logout feature code And also log in agents can change their state from Ready state to DND state and Work state So each agent can have 4 types of state Log Out Log In Ready Log In DND Log In Work 1 Log Out State Agent is only assigned for ACD member Agents cannot receive ACD call If Call Restriction When Agent Logout admin is set as All Call Restriction agents cannot make call 2 Log In Ready State Agent is logged in and ready to receive the ACD call 3 Log In Work State Agent is log in state but agent can work without any ACD call during Work Mode Expired Timer Work Mode Expired Timer can be changed at admin PGM 214 Flex 3 After this timer agent s state is changed to ready state automatically 1 Agents can set own state to Work state with ACD Agent Work Mode feature code 2 If agent dial ACD Agent Work Mode feature code or press flex button registered as ACD Agent Work Mode feature code agent state goes to Ready State 3 Also agents can set Auto W
193. see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SPEED ACCESS gives station speed dial bins access authority 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Table Data System Speed Dial Table TRANS PGM 257 see details on page A 110 TRANS PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYS SPD DIAL The System Speed Dial Digits 1 Max 32 digits SYS SPD NAME The System Speed Dial Name 2 Max 16 characters Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 147 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TOLL FREE Assignment to apply toll free 3 0 Off 0 Off 1 On TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied to the System 4 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 Speed Access 1 5 MBX IP 100 RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 System Speed Dial see page 3 150 Station Speed Dial Each User can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins Each Station has access to 50 Speed Dial numbers Each Speed Dial number can be up to 24 digits in length and may include special instruction codes Special instruction codes are e Flash as 1st digit Activates dial tone detect e Pause CALLBACK Inserts a pause dialing command e not 1st digit Switches from Pulse to DTMF dialing Digital Phone users may assign a Flex button for One Touch access to a specific Speed Dial bin CON
194. setting of all values dial 9 to finish check in Select Check In Confirmation and press the SAVE button 0 Confirm 1 Cancel When check in is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD When check in fails you may hear an error tone Check Out It registers check out of hotel guests individually or entirely from PMS Property Management System and Front Desk CONDITIONS Upon check out guest name is deleted and it is restored to be ROOM Language ID and the COS are changed into values programmed in hotel general information PGM XXX When check out is performed maid status of the room is changed to DIRTY To be cleaned And the followings are automatically cleared or set Fields that are cleared Absence message and Message Wait Guest Name DND Wake Up Time Call Forward Status Authorization Code Maid Status Station COS Prepaid Money Voice mail Fields that are set ICM disable LCD language PGM XXX Prompt language PGM XXX Room to room Call Group Call charge rate default call charge rate assigned at PGM XXX Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN ROOM 100 Guest Name Check In 94 12 26 18 Check Out 94 12 31 11 5 days Start Time CO Duration Dialed No Count Call Caost Remark 12 27 13 10 01 00 00 3
195. signaling over the audio channel or SMDI protocol with a signaling connection to the System RS 232 channel Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 155 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS Station Group calls are not routed to member stations that are in DND A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not initiate the Transfer Recall process Calls to a Station Group receive either a ring back tone or MOH while queued to the group Calls can be routed to the defined Overflow destination according to Forward type Station Group etc If Forward type is set to NOT USED the call is dropped about each Forward case Stations can be a member of one or more Station Groups Multiple Member Assignment A User can program Queue Count for each member of the Station group 0 99 The System can provide a call to a group member during the Greeting according to the Call in Greeting option A User can assign a Group Name for each Station Group OPERATION When programmed Station Group operation is automatic To pick up a call that comes in to the Station Group 1 When a call is ringing in to the Group lift handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Stations can be set to be Disabled receive All calls receive Intercom calls or to receive External calls ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station DND Access TRANS
196. the required data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 0n NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 0n called party Stations display based on the programming NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 3 0 Off Off 1 0n NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with MBX IP systems for Voce Networking Reserved Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Net Numbering Plan Tab
197. the system will initiate the Power up routine During the Power Up routine the system will check the database default switch 1st position of the MPB DIP switch refer to the MBX IP Hardware and Installation Guide If the switch is in the ON position the system will perform a simple Power Up routine clear all scratch pad memory load run time programs establish communications with each registered board and DTIM SLTM gateway Module and MBX IP terminal send RESTART commands and load appropriate settings to the Modules and terminals If a Module or terminal does not respond after several attempts the system places the device in an out of service mode but maintains the database settings Once the Power up routine is complete the system will conduct normal operations If the database default switch is in the OFF position in place of the Power Up routine the system will perform the full Initialization procedure The initialization procedure will set the system database except DECT registration data to default values refer to Initialization section Once initialization is complete set the initialization switch to the ON position to protect the database Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Program Menu Structure Administration Menu Table Appendix A System Programming Tables Administration Menu
198. the table entry 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 68 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 Class of Service see page 3 63 Temporary Station COS Lock see page 3 68 Walking COS see page 3 71 Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Day Night Timed Ring Mode see page 7 37 Temporary Station COS Lock A User or an Attendant can temporarily change the Station COS preventing unauthorized toll dialing from the station ex locking the station When locked the station will still be allowed to place internal calls and Emergency number calls CONDITIONS The Station is restored to the Station COS as appropriate for the active service mode Day Night or Timed OPERATION Digital Phone To activate Temporary COS 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 31 Temporary COS code Dial the applicable Authorization Code Press the HOLD SAVE button To restore the assigned COS To restore the assigned COS 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 32 Restore COS code Dial the applicable Authorization Code Press the HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 69 Chapter 3 System Features
199. to 90 seconds This allows other stations assigned for immediate ringing the opportunity to be answered before the call is routed to the Auto Attendant CONDITIONS CO Ring Assignment must be set for service type Ring Assign and the Feature Code Delay Counter TRANS PGM 167 must be enabled including the desired VM announcement When Delayed Auto Attendant Ring is assigned following expiration of the delay the call will no longer ring at the assigned stations and will be routed to the VMIB Auto Attendant If no delay is entered the call will ring to the ring assigned station immediately and delayed auto attendant is not operated To assign a Delayed Attendant ring at least one station must be assigned for immediate ringing OPERATION System When assigned operation of this feature is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Delayed Auto Attendant 3 59 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Chapter 3 System Features CO Line DataCO Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 167 see details on page A 51 TRANS PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE If service type is set as 0 2 1 0 Ring Assign All Ring ring option is applied to ring assigned stations 1 Feature Otherwise if service type is set to 3 feature code 2 Circular is activated on incoming call The service type determines where the incoming call will ring first Options are ring to a station s or ring
200. to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 166 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 14 1 Normal 4 INT MOH queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for 15 000 300 seconds 30 forward destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuing 16 01 19 Not Asg tone number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNCThis entry defines second queuing 17 001 255 Not Asg prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 18 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 19 000 100 seconds 0 before second queuing repeat
201. to store the data entry Tenant Tone Table TRANS PGM 290 The system provides 71 tones that can be assigned for use as the normal tone VMIB prompt Announcement or internal external music 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 290 2 Enter tenant range using dial pad For a single tenant group just enter the same number twice 3 To program tone dial tone index 01 73 Refer to the Tone Index Table of Web Admin TRANS PGM 264 4 Press the Flex button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Tone Index Table INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION Release 1 7 b April 2012 Tenant Tone Table TRANS PGM 290 A 135 Appendix A System Programming Tables INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 2 2nd Dial Tone This is provided when station presses TRANS button during conversation to transfer the call 3 CO Dial Tone This is provided to transit CO line if he accesses CO line which does not provide CO Dial Tone 4 DISA Dial Tone This is provided to external caller through DISA LCR Virtual Tone Reserved 6 Digit Conversion Virtual Tone This is provided when station dials Dummy Dial Tone Digit in TRANS PGM 240 7 Password Dial Tone This is provided when station dials conference room number having password
202. to update all numbering plan codes with selected default value System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 To assign a numbering plan code the type should be matched with one of the System Numbering Plans provided which consists of a Prefix and More digits Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables NOTE To Change To delete Flexible Station Number TRANS PGM 112 OR Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN TRANS PGM 113 A 17 Appendix A System Programming Tables Use the Volume Up Down buttons for data of the next previous index Enter station number to update 5 Press the SAVE button to update changed data Check if newly entered number is available number according to Prefix Code plan TRANS PGM Code 111 TRANS PGM 112 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION NUMBER 1 Start station number Delete all station numbers and update entered edit by range amp End station number station number range only SINGLE STATION 2 One station number Bin 001 324 MBX IP 300 bin 001 128 MBX NUMBER edit IP 100 1 number per one station port My DNs for each stations Bin 325 648 MBX IP 300 bin 129 256 MBX IP 100 Free station numbers for MADN type or extra SADN type numbers Sub DNs FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN TRANS PGM 113 Feature Numbering codes for the system can
203. toggle CO IP Group access LED on group access allowed LED off group access not allowed Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Internal Page Group Access TRANS PGM 151 Each Digital Phone can be enabled internal page group access allowing Stations the ability to make announcements to each Internal Page Group 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 151 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice 3 Press desired Flex button number 1 2 Flex 1 to access for page zone 1 to 24 Flex 2 to access for page zone 25 to 30 4 Press the desired Flex button to toggle Internal Page Zone assignments LED ON station makes announcement LED OFF station does not make announcement 5 Press the SAVE button to store the Page Zone data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Command Group Access TRANS PGM 152 CO LINE DATA TRANS PGM 160 181 CO Attribute I I1 111 TRANS PGM 160 162 Da Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 CO Attribute Il III TRANS PGM 160 162 A 45 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO Attributes TRANS PGM 160 TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE Displays physical line type of 1 Display Only selected CO line SVC TYPE Set CO line type as DID or 2 0 Normal Normal Normal 1
204. tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement PROMPT ANNC RPT The VMIB Prompt or 5 0 100 1 Announcement Repeat number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement PROMPT ANNC INTVL The VMIB Prompt or 6 0 100 0 Announcement Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt or announcement Repeat is assigned CCR USE This option is defined during 7 0 Off 0 Off announcement will be played usage of CCR 1 On feature Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution CCR Service During ACD Announcement CONDITIONS OPERATIONS CCR Operation During Queuing Announcement Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10 29 5 Defined rule will be operated PROGRAMMING Station Group Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Assignment PGM 212 see details on page A 76 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forward 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time
205. vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP PROGRAMMING H 323 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID Call Routing 5 57 Chapter 5 CO IP H 323 Incoming Attributes PGM 362 see details on page A 147 PGM 362 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FROM IP IP address associated with H 323 incoming calls 1 0 0 0 0 INCOMING CO GRP NUM CO group number associated with 2 01 72 H 323 incoming calls Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID Call Routing The system can employ Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID to determine the routing of Incoming external calls Each CO IP Line including DID Lines may be assigned to employ ICLID routing The System will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Routing Table If a match is found the call will be routed to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table Destinations can be the VMIB an external Voice Mail a Station or a Station Group CONDITIONS If the received ICLID does not match an entry in the ICLID Route Table the call is routed according to CO Ring Assign Table For analog CO Lines the System will await receipt of a valid ICLID for the ICLID Ring Timer At expiration of the timer if ICLID is not received the call is routed based on the type and other programming Ring assignments etc CO IP Line The ICLID
206. when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT D1 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 7 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D1 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 8 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D1 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 9 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 10 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 11 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 12 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Voice Network P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking
207. 0 allowed for the User Greeting in the system s VMIB CALL WAIT WARN TMR Determine the call wait indication 9 010 1800 secs 030 tone repeat time CAMP ON WARN TMR Determine the camp on indication 10 010 1800 secs 030 tone repeat time Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables System Timers I TRANS PGM 221 System Timers I TRANS PGM 222 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 System Attributes TRANS PGM 223 A 85 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 222 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTER DIGIT TMR Sets the maximum allowed time 3 00 300 seconds 015 between user dialed digits at expiration the user will receive an error tone INC CO INTER DIGIT TMR Sets the maximum allowed 4 01 60 seconds 15 time between dialed digits from the Incoming CO NORMAL NO ANSWER TMR No answer timer for normal 5 001 600 seconds 30 CO ring DID NO ANSWER TMR No answer timer for DID CO ring 6 001 600 seconds 30 CO RECALL NO ANS TMR No answer timer for recall CO 7 001 600 seconds 30 ring CO FWD NO ANSWER TMR No answer timer for forward 8 001 600 seconds 30 CO ring CO XFER NO ANSWER TMR No answer timer for transfer 9 001 600 seconds 30 CO ring System Attributes TRANS PGM 223 System
208. 0 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 IP Phone HF 5 00 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 WIT 6 00 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 VOIB 7 00 63 34 34 34 34 34 3 4 34 Release 1 7 h MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL DEVICE 430 SLTM DTIM HS DTIM HF IP PHONE HS IP PHONE HF WIT VOIB TX RTP GAIN 430 DECT DATA O a Release 1 7 x April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 103 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT DECT DATA PARK view 4 Wtu User Authenticate 5 Station Number Park 6 Wtu Subs All Data Erase 7 Wtu Subscription Erase 8 Station Number Wtu Un Subscription Range view 9 DECT Mobility 10 Station Number WTIM DECT ATTRIBUTE A 162 492 Auto Call RIs 1 ON OFF OFF Base Fault Alarm 2 Enable Disable Disable GREEN MODE GREEN MODE ACTIVATION WEB Only Power Save Mode Enable Disable Disable GREEN MODE TIME SETTING WEB Only Monday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Tuesday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Wednesday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Thursday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Friday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Saturday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 Sunday Power ON OFF Time 0000 2359 INITIALIZATION
209. 00 RM 0102 PRE PAID 20000 CHARGED 14600 5400 RM_SUMS PRE PAID 40000 CHARGED 67600 27600 Non Echo Mode amp SMO00100 20000 63000 330000 amp SM000102 20000 14600 amp SM01 40000 67600 27600 5400 IN NON ECHO MODE amp SM00 MEANS THE STRING IS ABOUT STATION AND amp SM01 MEANS TOTAL INFORMATION Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Room Charge Display Print B 27 Appendix B Hotel Management HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN ROOM Guest Name Check In 94 12 26 16 Current time 94 12 31 11 5 days Start Time Q Duration Dialed No Count Call Cost Remark 12 27 13 10 01 00 00 32 000182343507951 D Q Unanswered 2 27 13 30 01 00 01 25 000182343507951 3 1500 12 28 21 22 02 00 10 18 000182343507953 314 15500 Charge Time Charged STA Item Bar C ost tax 12 28 21 32 COFFEE SHOP COFFEE 5000 100 12 29 10 10 FRONT DESK COKE 3000 30 ltem Charge Tax rate Sum 1 ROOM CHARGE 300000 30000 10 00 330000 rate 02 GOLD 2 CALL CHARGE 17000 170 10 00 17170 3 BAR CHARGE 8000 130 6130 4 PRE PAID 20000 Method of payment VISA TOTAL 335300 WON NOTE Currency Unit SMDR Fraction depends on Admin Programming 232 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN ROOM 102 f Guest Name Check In 94 12 26 18 Current time 94 12 31 11 5 days St
210. 00 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired attribute refer to the Table Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Night Attendant Group TRANS PGM 275 277 A 123 Appendix A System Programming Tables Night Attendant Group TRANS PGM 275 277 Night Attendant Group covers a call while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode or system goes to night mode Night Attendant Group Assign TRANS PGM 275 Stations can be grouped as night attendant group so that calls will search for an idle station in the night attendant group The system allows assignment of processes Circular Terminal Ring and Longest Idle Refer to the table below for a description of the functions and the data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 275 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired setting refer to the following Table 4 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attendant Group data NOTE For group members enter an attendant number or attendant range For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the attendant number For a range enter the first and last station
211. 012 Room Monitor Baby Listening B 41 Appendix B Hotel Management Guest Station To use Dial One Digit Service 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial one digit registered 3 After a certain period of time a call is made Room Monitor Baby Listening It allows guests to monitor their rooms outside of the rooms in a hotel In order to perform this function an extension to be monitored must be set to room monitor mode If monitoring is activated all sounds of the monitored station can be heard from the monitoring extension But the monitoring party s sounds are not delivered to the monitored extension CONDITIONS This feature is available only for extension call in the system Monitor mode can be set only from a checked in guest station If the monitored extension is called DND rejection tone is heard In this case step call and camp on cannot be performed but message wait redial and pilot hunt can be performed If a 3rd party calls the extension currently being monitored busy tone is heard Then the 3rd party can perform step call and call back External caller cannot monitor internal stations That is the extension currently being monitored cannot perform CO transfer SIP extension cannot be monitored OPERATION Guest Station To put an extension into monitor mode 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial Hotel Room Monitor feature code 3 Service
212. 051 PRESELECTED MESSAGE Station Range MSG No 052 SET USER MESSAGE Station Range 06 VMIB ANNOUNCEMENT 061 LISTEN VM ANNOUCEMENT 062 RECORD VM ANNOUCEMENT 07 USER PROGRAM 071 STATION NAME Station Range 072 LANGUAGE PROGRAM Station Range 073 PREPAID CALL Station Range Release 1 7 Yv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference USER PGM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION REMARK 08 SYSTEM 09 USB 0 WTU SUBSCRIBE y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 21 DEFAULT VALUES Appendix C Quick Reference The following Tables are divided based on PROGRAM groups and provide the default values assigned to all Admin entries Prior to changing an entry during programming assure you have an understanding of the PROGRAM and its purpose PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT PRE PROGRAMM ED DATA PRE PROGRAMMED DATA Nation Code Site Name 100 1 max 4 digits max 24 chars SLOT ASSIGNMENT A 11 Slot DEVS 101 2 digits 2 digits LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGN A 11 COL STA VMIB 103 DECT IP SIP Max Port Max No of DECT Max No of IP Phone Max No of SIP Phone 104 8 000 192 32 000 324 32 999 324 IP PHONE PHONTAGE REG MAC Address User ID User P
213. 07 15 07 which exceed the assigned LD Digit count are considered long distance calls for SMDR CURRENCY UNIT The unit of currency used 8 Max 3 characters for call cost can be identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 67 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 232 WARNING TONE SVC if this option is enabled andSMDR service type is off line the system check free records space And if free space is less than 1000 warning tone will be served as alarm to Attendant BTN 15 RANGE 0 Off 1 0n DEFAULT 0 Off SMDR CONN TYPE This assigns port to be used for SMDR Interface SMDR Interface is served through LAN or SIO 16 0 SIO 1 LAN 0 SIO SMTP MAIL SERVER ADDRESS SMTP Mail Server IP Address Web Only SMTP MAIL SERVER PORT SMTP Mail Server Port Number SMDR REPORTED MAIL ADDRESS SMDR User Mail Address Max 64 characters SMDR SMTP MAIL SERVER ID SMTP Mail Server User ID SMDR SMTP MAIL SERVER PASSWORD SMTP Mail Server User Password SMDR SMTP SENDER ADD Sender Address of Reported SMDR E Mail Max 64 characters SMDR SMTP SEND WEEKLY SET Select SMDR Mail Send Day N A M
214. 15 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES A 85 223 J Web Admin Password Encryption 1 1 On 0 Off Off Pulse Dial Break Make Ratio 2 0 60 40 60 40 1 66 33 2 50 50 Voice Mail SMDI Interface 1 On 0 Off Off VMIB SMTP Port 0000 9999 25 Network Time Date 0 Disable Disable 1 ISND Clock 2 NTP CLI Print 6 1 On 0 Off Off TLS for Web 7 1 On 0 Off Off Web Server Port 8 00001 65535 80 Database Auto USB Download 9 1 On 0 Off Off Database Auto USB Download Hour 10 00 23 0 UC Server IP Address 11 IP Addr 0 0 0 0 CTI Server IP Address 12 IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Modem Associated CO Line 13 CO Number 0 IP Phone Registration by STA Number 14 1 On 0 Off Off Analog Line Busy Tone Detection Times 15 3 9 Analog Line Error Tone Detection Times 16 13 9 PSU Fan Alarm 17 11 On 0 Off On Line Fault Alarm 18 11 On 0 Off On Traffic Operation 19 11 On 0 Off Off Enhanced VM Features 20 1 On 0 Off On SYSTEM PASSWORD A 86 226 J ar Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 57 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA Internal Music Type A 88 229 2 Romance Romance Turkish March Green Sleeves Fur Eli
215. 2 OPERATION Digital Phone While connected to an Analog CO line ee i Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP SLT While connected to an Analog CO line PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan CO Group as Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO IP Line Groups 5 7 Chapter 5 CO IP RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 CO IP Line Groups All CO Lines are included on one Outgoing CO Group and one Incoming CO Group individually One CO Line cannot be a member of several CO Groups at the same time The CO IP Lines in the System can be placed together into Groups for assigning access by Stations and common Access Dial codes up to 24 Groups on MBX IP 100 and 72 Groups on MBX IP 300 CONDITIONS Outgoing CO Line Groups and Incoming CO Line Groups are separated CO IP Lines in each CO Group can also be accessed individually by dialing the CO Line Access Feature Code and the CO IP Line number The System will select a CO IP Line from a group based on the Round Robin First Choice or Last Choice determined by database assignments Multiple CO Group Access Code can be assigned to a CO Group If a CO Line is not included in an outgoing CO line group this line has to be seized using a Flex button or System feature code PROGRAMMING System Data CO
216. 2 Call Forward 3 17 Chapter 3 System Features Single Line Phone To activate Call Forward Unconditional Busy No Answer 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lift the handset to receive Dial tone Dial Call Forward feature code Dial 1 4 Call Forward code as desired Dial station or station group to receive calls OR Dial the CO Group Access code and the desired external phone number Press hook switch to save Replace the handset return to idle To activate Call Forward Remote Follow me 1 oak wh 7 8 Lift the handset Dial Call Forward code Dial 0 Remote Forward code Enter the Station number Station Authorization Code Password Dial 0 Remote Forward condition Dial the destination station or station group OR Dial CO Group Access code and desired external phone number Press hook switch to save Replace handset return to idle To deactivate the Call forward 1 2 3 Lift the handset to receive a stutter Dial tone Dial Call Forward feature code as desired Dial to cancel Call Forward Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward 3 18 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Call Forward Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 2 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL FORWARD ACCESS enables Call Forward to be activated 2 0 Disable Enable by the station 1
217. 2 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 88 Chapter 3 System Features VM Group Assignment TRANS PGM 200 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE this entry defines the type of station group 1 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Terminal 2 Circular 3 Ring 4 Longest Idle 5 Voice Mail GROUP NAME this entry defines the name of a group 2 Max 16 chars TENANT NO this entry assigns a tenant of a station group 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE IDX Time Table index 4 1 9 1 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 5 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External MEMBER ASSIGN this entry assigns stations as members 6 l of a station group VM Group Attribute TRANS PGM 203 see details on page A 69 TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM PUT MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 1 1 9 1 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Put Mail dial code VM GET MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 2 1 9 2 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Get Mail dial code VM BUSY INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an index 3 1 9 3 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Busy dial code VM NO ANSWER INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups 4 1 9 4 an index to the Voi
218. 2 000182343507951 0 0 Unanswered 12 27 13 30 01 00 01 23 O00 182343507951 3 1500 12 28 21 22 02 00 10 18 000182343507953 31 15500 Charge Time Charged STA Item Bar C ost tax 12 28 21 32 COFFEE SHOP COFFEE 5000 100 12 29 10 10 FRONT DESK COKE 3000 30 ltem Charge Tax rate Sum 1 ROOM CHARGE 300000 30000 10 00 330000 rate 02 GOLD 2 CALL CHARGE 17000 170 10 00 17170 3 BAR CHARGE a000 130 8130 4 PRE PAID 20000 Method of payment VISA TOTAL 335300 WON NOTE OPERATION Front Desk To check out a room Release 1 7 W vertical April 2012 Call Barring B 11 Appendix B Hotel Management 1 Dial the PGM button 2 Press a phone number or a phone number range of desired room s Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range Press the SAVE button Select Check Out Confirm 0 Confirm 1 Cancel Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 7 When check out fails you may hear an error tone N oa Fw Call Barring CO Call Barring Room Cut The use of CO lines from guest stations can be allowed or denied from Front Desk or PMS CONDITIONS Itis possible to register or cancel room cut individually or entirely from PMS If room cut off is registered from PMS registered room number cut off status and input location must be entered If C O line is accessed for an outgoing c
219. 2 NUM SET 3 1 Attendant Call 0 9 0 2 Conference Room 1 571 571 571 3 Conference Room 2 572 572 572 4 Conference Room 3 573 573 573 5 Conference Room 4 574 574 574 6 Conference Room 5 575 575 575 7 Conference Room 6 576 576 576 8 Conference Room 7 577 577 577 9 Conference Room 8 578 578 578 10 Conference Room 9 579 579 579 11 Internal Page 543 543 543 543 00 xx 00 All Call Page Xx Page Group 12 Personal VM Page 544 544 544 13 Announcement Page For Attendant 545 545 545 14 Page Auto Answer 546 546 546 15 Internal Page Answer Meet Me Page 547 547 547 16 External Page 548 548 548 17 Internal External Page All 549 549 549 18 Call Forward Register 554 554 554 554 Type Destination 19 Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register 514 514 514 554 Type Destination 20 Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel 515 515 515 21 DND Status Change 516 516 516 22 DND Delete 517 517 517 23 Account Code 550 550 550 24 CO Flash 551 551 551 25 Last Number Redial 552 552 552 26 Station Speed PGM 553 553 553 27 Speed Dial 555 555 555 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 541 xx Xx Parking Location 00 49 88 xxx Xxx CO Line 001 200 MBX IP 300 01 80 MBX IP 100 524
220. 2 Transfer No Answer F3 No Answer NO ANSWER DISCONNECT The CO call is 1 l disconnected Every destination is set to Disconnect by default NO ANSWER ATTENDANT The CO call is routed to 2 l Attendant NO ANSWER CO RING ASSIGN The CO call is 3 l routed according to Ring Assign Table see TRANS PGM 167 NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL If destination is set to 4 01 80 Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table See TRANS PGM 181 NO ANSWER TONE If destination is set to Tone the 5 Error Busy tone is heard Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 36 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 173 NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER RING The call is routed to the same destination again NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred station again Only possible for Transfer No Answer case CO to CO Transfer Timer TRANS PGM 220 see details on page A 83 TRANS PGM 220 CO CO TRANS TMR Determines the answer waiting time when CO line is transferred to another CO line If not answered in this time transferred CO call is disconnected BTN RANGE 000 300 secs DEFAULT 030 HOT DESK LOGOUT TMR D
221. 3 0 Off Off 1 On ee j Release 1 7 v vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 204 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 On TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 10 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Voice Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8 digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Net
222. 3 1 9 3 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Busy dial code VM NO ANSWER INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups 4 1 9 4 an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the No answer dial code VM DISCONNECT For external analog Voice Mail groups an index 5 1 9 9 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Disconnect dial code SMDI TYPE This entry defines SMDI Type 6 0 Type1 Type 1 1 Type 2 SMDI CLI INFO This entry defines SMDI CLI Information 7 0 Off Off If this is enable system sends SMDI with CLI 1 On Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 92 Table Chapter 3 System Features Voice Mail Dialing Table TRANS PGM 269 see details on page A 116 TRANS PGM 269 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOICE MAIL 1 Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive 1 0 Prefix P call to record a message 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 2 Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 2 0 Prefix PHH playback recorded messages 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 3 Busy Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 3 0 Prefix P 3P receive a call while the user is busy 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 4 DND Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 4 0 Prefix P 4P receive a call while the user is in DND 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 5 No Answer Mail code s
223. 3 38 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from Digital CO 6 0 63 33 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from VMIB 7 0 63 29 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from DTMF 8 0 63 8 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from TONE 9 0 63 37 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from MUSIC 10 0 63 29 Analog CO RX Gain TRANS PGM 404 The RX gain of Analog CO can be adjusted 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 404 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 404 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from DKT 1 0 63 40 ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from SLT 2 0 63 32 ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from DECT 3 0 63 31 ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from IPDEV 4 0 63 33 ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from Analog CO 5 0 63 32 ACO RX GAIN ACO RX gain from Digital CO 6 0 63 38 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Digital CO RX Gain TRANS PGM 405 VMIB RX Gain TRANS PGM 406 y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 External Page RX Gain TRANS PGM 407 A 153 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 406 BTN RANGE DEFAULT
224. 3 6 for MPB300 3 5 for MPB100 01 70 SLT MOH assigns the SLT ports for SLT MOH 7 11 for MPB300 6 10 for MPB100 RS 232 Port Settings TRANS PGM 230 The system has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB Certain characteristics of the port are programmable Baud rate RS 232 control and Page settings refer to Table for a description of the settings the data entries required and LCD displays 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 230 2 Select the desired Flex button refer to the following Table Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Serial Port Function Selections TRANS PGM 231 NOTE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 SMDR Attributes TRANS PGM 232 A 91 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 231 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ON LINE SMDR Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for 1 0 5 COM the On line SMDR OFF LINE SMDR Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for 2 0 5 COM Off line SMDR SMDI Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the SMDI 3 0 5 COM1 output CALL INFO Defines the serial port or TCP channel used to receive 4 0 5 COM Call Information output TRAFFIC Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the 5 0 5 COM TRAFFIC report output TRACE Defines the serial port or TCP channel u
225. 300 1sec 30 Queuing Tone No 9 01 19 Queuing Prompt Announcement Table No 10 001 255 Queuing Repeat Count 11 1000 100 Queuing Repeat Delay Timer 12 000 100 1sec 0 Night ATD Group Attributes II A 126 277 Call In Greeting 1 0 After Greeting In Greeting 1 In Greeting Max Queue Count 2 00 99 5 Forward Type 0 Not Used Not Used 1 Uncond 2 Q Overflow 3 Time Out 4 All Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 85 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Backlight Option A 128 281 7 0 All Off All Off 1 Day On 2 Night On 3 Timed On 4 D N On 5 D T On 6 N T On 7 All On TENANT GROUP ACCESS A 130 283 Between Tenant Group Access EN DIS All DISABLE CO CALL RESTRICTION A 131 284 TENANT DATA Restriction Normal CO Line 1 0 No Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call Restriction Dedicated CO Line 2 0 No Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call Svc After Restriction Time Local Call 3 10 No Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call Svc After Restriction Time Long Dist Call 4 0 No
226. 32 The SMDR print out will show the following NO STA CO TIME START DIALED CNT COST REMARK 0009 101 01 00 04 13 06 95 12 47 0123 1 0 10 0010 101 01 00 15 13 06 95 12 50 001444872014 0 0 00 UNANSWERED Alphabet small o in the DIALED field means unanswered outgoing call using ISDN line CONDITIONS Release 1 7 XX vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management NOTE Form Feed Button CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To make a FORM FEED button To print out form feed VI P Guest Call Release 1 7 fe April 2012 VIP Guest Wake Up Call B 45 Appendix B Hotel Management call answer is sequential in the order of call s entrance into the queue If prioritized queuing of VIP guest call is set calls from VIP guests are firstly answered by an operator CONDITIONS This feature is only available for attendants VIP guests are determined depending on guest grade designated upon check in VI P Guest Wake Up Call It allows an attendant to be informed of VIP guests wake up call and provide wake up call service When it is wake up call time designated for VIP guest room the attendant is alerted for the wake up of the guest The attendant can see VIP guest s room number and extension status together with the alarm If the attendant dials VIP Wake Up feature code the list of wake up calls for VIP guests are shown and a call can be made to t
227. 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Attendant Group TRANS PGM 270 272 A 121 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 14 1 Normal 4 INT MOH queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for 15 000 300 seconds 30 forward destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuing 16 01 19 Not Asg tone number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNCThis entry defines second queuing 17 001 255 Not Asg prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 18 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 19 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during 20 0 1 0 second queuing announcement is provided 000 100 seconds 0 Attendant Group Attributes TRANS PGM 272 Each attendant group has available attributes relating to announcements timers forward etc The table below provides descriptions for the attributes and dthe ata entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 272 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number 1 5 for the MBX IP 1
228. 46 TRANS PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO SERVICE MODE Determines if SIP PRI H 323 BRI 1 1 SIP PRI SIP PRI or Qsig is selected for each VOIP or ISDN lines 2 H 323 3 Qsig 4 T1 PRI 5 T1 Qsig DROP TYPE LCO line drop type 2 0 Loop Loop 1 Polarity Reverse FLASH TYPE LCO line Flash type 3 0 Loop Loop 1 Ground FLASH TMR CO Flash Timer 001 300 050 OPEN LOOP TMR Open Loop Timer 00 20 00 100ms base LINE LENGTH LCO line length 6 0 0km Okm 1 3km 2 5km 3 7km ZONE NO Zone number of CO lines 7 1 9 1 PROMPT LANGUAGE VMIB Prompt Index 8 1 3 1 GAIN TABLE IDX Determines Gain Table for CO line 9 1 3 1 Station CO IP Group Access TRANS PGM 150 see details on page A 43 Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 see details on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 0n NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming YW verti Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 210 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 3 0
229. 62 BTN ICLID NUMBER ICLID used to match the index 1 RANGE 24 digits DEFAULT None ICLID NAME ICLID name that is sent by the System to the 2 destination for the ICLID routed call 16 characters INC CO GROUP NO The CO Group Number to apply ICLID 3 1 72 route if not assigned ICLID is applied to all CO Groups DAY RING INDEX The index to be routed in Day the 4 1 80 Alternative Ring Index TRANS PGM 181 NIGHT RING INDEX The index to be routed in Night the 5 1 80 Alternative Ring Index TRANS PGM 181 TIMED RING INDEX The index to be routed in Timed the 6 1 80 Alternative Ring Index TRANS PGM 181 TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied the ICLID 7 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CLI Conversion Table TRANS PGM 263 Appendix A System Programming Tables CLI Conversion Table TRANS PGM 264 INDEX FREQUENCY FREQ 1 FREQ 2 CADENCE REPEAT a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Ring Table TRANS PGM 265 A 115 Appendix A System Programming Tables 13 950 0 100 ms ON 200 ms OFF 2 14 425 200 ms ON 200 ms OFF 200 msec ON 255 Cont 3400 msec OFF 15 620 0 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF 255 Cont 16 425 620 500 ms ON 500 ms
230. 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Station Group G Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Indication 10 47 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOLIDAY SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 5 0 Release Release call when group status is Holiday Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST When Holiday Service type is 6 l Forward applied destination can be assigned OVERFLOW SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute 7 0 Release Release ACD call when group status is Overflow Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward OVERFLOW FWD DEST When Overflow Service type is 8 Forward applied destination can be assigned MAX QUEUING COUNT This entry defines MAX queuing 9 00 99 10 call count If queuing ACD Call count is over the max q count ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status QUEUING ANNC STEP This entry defines queuing 10 1 5 1 announcement play service step One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call REPEAT COUNT This entry defines total queuing 11 0 No Repeat No Repeat announcement repeat service count If this entry is defines as 1 One Time One or More Times service Queuing Announcement will be 2 Three Times played from 1s
231. AM GROUP PGM PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU CODE PRE PROGRAMMED 100 Location Program Location Program DATA 102 Slot Assignment Slot Assignment 103 Logical Slot Assignment 104 DECT IP SIP MAX Port 106 IP Phone Phontage Registration Logical Slot Assignment DECT IP SIP MAX Port IP Phone Phontage Registration DTIM SLTM Registration IP Address Plan 107 DTIM SLTM Registration 108 IP Address Plan 109 System Info Display NUMBERING PLAN 110 Numbering Plan Type Numbering Plan Type DATA 111 System Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan 112 Flexible Station Number Flexible Station Number 113 Feature Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan Release 1 7 Wve MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM CODE PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU a Release 1 7 x April 2012 DATABASE INDEX C 3 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU CODE CO LINE DATA 162 CO Line Attribute 3 163 CO CID Attribute 165 Incoming CO Attribute 1 Incoming CO Attribute 166 Incoming CO Attribute 2 167 CO Ring Assignment CO Ring Assignment 168 Incoming CO Normal DISA Attribute Normal DISA CO Attribute 169 Incoming CO Altern
232. ANS PGM 166 UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected BTN 9 RANGE 000 255 min DEFAULT 000 Unsupervised Conference Timer TRANS PGM 171 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 171 UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after the timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected BTN 6 RANGE 000 255 min DEFAULT 000 Release 1 7 WY vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 35 Chapter 3 System Features Incoming CO Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 169 see details on page A 54 TRANS PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive 1 F1 Busy Disconnect DAY F2 No Answer 1 sec NIGHT 2 F3 Invalid Disconnect F4 Transfer No Answer 1 sec TIMED F5 Recall No Answer Ppieccee E 3 F6 DND ei F7 Out Of Service F8 Error 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring 4 Alt Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot HuntGroup Outgoing CO Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 173 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ALT DEST Abnormal case can be selected as F1 Recall No Answer error type F
233. ANSWER If this feature is set to ON any 7 0 Off Off station to answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal 1 On Answer feature code RLS GUARD TIME If CO release signaling is not completed 8 00 15 sec 01 successfully CO line is disconnected when timer expires UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call 9 000 255 min 000 without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected WAIT CLRFWD TIME Clear Forward Waiting Time 10 001 300 sec 300 MAX RING TIME Max Ring Time for when incoming CO 11 015 300 sec 120 calls are transferred recalled DISA SUPERVISION TMR DISA Supervision Timer 12 1 9 sec 2 VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR Determines the amount of time 13 0 9 sec paused before playing VMIB announcement INCOMING TIME TABLE The time Table index to be applied 14 1 9 none none to incoming CO Call CO DELAY ANSWER TMR For Incoming calls on the ISDN 15 0 100 100msec 0 Line this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message OFFNET FWD USAGE ISDN lines can be set to use Call 16 O Join Join Deflection Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these 1 Call Deflection feature 2 Call Rerouting Alternative CO Ring Table PGM 181 see details on page A 63 PGM 181 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE If set as 0 2 ring option is applied to ring 1 0 All Ring All Ri
234. AOC 5 Netherlands Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Numbering Plan Table Data a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Direct Inward Dial DID 5 49 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 6 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT D1 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 7 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D1 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 8 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D1 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 9 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 10 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 11 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Co
235. AVE button to stop recording and save the message ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data Tone Table use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 49 61 System Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Music On Hold MOH 3 125 Chapter 3 System Features Music Source TRANS PGM 229 see details on page A 88 TRANS PGM 229 BTN RANGE ICM BOX MUSIC CH assigns the music 1 00 NO BGM source for ICM BOX me e 01 Internal Music ms a 02 External Music ple a 03 VMIB BGM 1 04 VMIB BGM 2 1S 05 VMIB BGM 3 nte ats 06 VMIB BGM 4 Tus 07 SLT MOH 1 08 SLT MOH 2 09 SLT MOH 3 10 SLT MOH 4 11 SLT MOH 5 DEFAULT 1 INT MOH TYPE assigns the music for internal 2 00 Romance MOH 01 Turkish March 02 Green Sleeves 03 Fur Elise 04 Carmem 05 Waltz 06 Pavane 07 Sichiliano 08 Sonata e e 09 Spring is ume 10 Campanella 11 Badinerie at x alabe 12 Blue Dance VMIB MOH gone IB Promptindex of 3 6 for MPB300 01 70 VMI Sigh f F VMIB MOH X 3 5 for MPB100 Ths T MOH assigns the SLT ports for SLT 7 11 for MPB300 MOH 6 10 for MPB100 RELATED FEATURES Hold see page 3 101 Multiple Language Support see page 3 120 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Network Management System Future Feature 3 126 Chapter 3 System Features HARDWARE
236. Any digits VOICE MAIL 2 Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 2 0 Prefix PHH playback recorded messages 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 3 Busy Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 3 0 Prefix P 3P receive a call while the user is busy 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 4 DND Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 4 0 Prefix P 4P receive a call while the user is in DND 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 5 No Answer Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 5 0 Prefix P 5P receive a call when the user did not answer 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 6 Error Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 6 0 Prefix P 6P receive a call when a dialing error exists 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 7 7 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 8 8 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 9 Disconnect Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 9 0 Prefix ens disconnect a call 1 Suffix Any digits TENANTS DATA TRANS PGM 270 290 Each tenant on the System can have an Attendant Group An Attendant group can have up to 5 Attendants Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Attendant Group TRANS PGM 270 272 Attendant Group TRANS PGM 270 NOTE Attendant Group Greeting Queuing TRANS PGM 271 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Group TRANS PGM
237. Any digits VOICE MAIL 6 Error Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 6 0 Prefix P 6P receive a call when a dialing error exists 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 7 7 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 8 8 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 9 Disconnect Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 9 0 Prefix AERE disconnect a call 1 Suffix Any digits Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 90 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES In band DTMF Signaling page 3 90 SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface page 3 93 HARDWARE External AA VM system In band DTMF Signaling The system may employ in band signaling to communicate with an External AA VM system When a call is routed to the AA VM SLT port the system will send DTMF signals informing the AA VM of the characteristics of the call DTMF digit strings are assigned to various functions allowing the AA VM to respond appropriately to the call These definitions are entered in the Voice Mail Dialing Table CONDITIONS Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be selected in Admin Programming Only one AA VM Group can be defined in the system multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation OPERATION System The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments ADMIN PROGRAMMING St
238. April 2012 Call Pick Up 3 27 Chapter 3 System Features Single Line Phone To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Directed Call Pick up code 3 Dial the number of the ringing station ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Group Data Station Data Pickup by DSS TRANS PGM 124 FLEX 9 see details on page A 27 TRANS PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICKUP BY DSS BUTTON this value determines the 9 0 Disable Direct Pickup method of pickup when pressing DSS button 1 Group Pickup 2 Direct Pickup Station Group Attributes Pick up Option TRANS PGM 200 FLEX 5 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 5 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External Call Pick up Group Attributes TRANS PGM 204 see details on page A 70 TRANS PGM 204 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICK UP CONDITION this entry defines pick up condition 1 0 All Call All Call All Internal External 1 Int Call 2 Ext Call PICK UP MEMBER ASG assigns stations as members of a station 2 l pickup group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Pick Up 3 28 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Intercom Signa
239. BER Mobile extension number 2 Max 24 digits MOBILE EXT 1 CLI Mobile extension CLI number Max 24 digits MOBILE EXT 2 ENABLE Enables Second mobile 4 0 Off Off extension ability 1 On MOBILE EXT 2 NUMBER Second Mobile extension 5 Max 24 digits number MOBILE EXT 2 CLI Second Mobile extension CLI 6 Max 24 digits number MOBILE SERVICE MODE Select Mobile Service Mode 7 0 All Call All Call 1 Service CLI Only MOBILE SERVICE CLI 1 CLI 1 for Mobile Service 8 Max 24 digits MOBILE SERVICE CLI 2 CLI 2for Mobile Service 9 Max 24 digits MOBILE SERVICE CLI 3 CLI 3for Mobile Service 10 Max 24 digits MOBILE SERVICE CLI 4 CLI 4for Mobile Service 11 Max 24 digits MOBILE SERVICE CLI 5 CLI 5for Mobile Service 12 Max 24 digits RELATED FEATURES Do Not Disturb DND see page 3 77 Station Message Wait Call Back see page 4 11 Attendant Recall see page 7 29 Distributed Control Network see page 3 202 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Multiple Language Selection 3 120 Chapter 3 System Features Multiple Language Selection With the VMIB the system can support three 3 languages simultaneously Prompts in the desired languages are loaded into the VMIB memory along with the Language Selection prompts To assure the proper language is employed the Language Selection prompt is played w
240. BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features CO Transit Out P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 235 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS To use CO transit out the Sub System User must seize the CO Line The Original Station COS will receive toll restriction as configured The Outside Caller will hear a busy tone if a Networking Path is not available during the Transit Out attempt OPERATION To use CO Transit Out perform the following 1 A Station of a Sub System seizes a CO line 2 The Dummy CO Dial tone PRl real dial tone is provided from the Main System or the Sub System according to the CO Dial Send Mode En Block or Overlap the origination of the CO Dial tone is determined 3 Dial the Telephone number of Public Network User the Called Station will receive the ringing and Station placing the call will hear the Ring Back tone 4 When Call is answered the public network telephone and the station of sub system will be connected ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO COS TRANS PGM 177 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Day mode
241. BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE REMARK PREFIX CODE leading preceding digits of some 1 1 8digits Prefix code length more numbering plan code digit can be 8 at max MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features System Data Net Conference CONDITIONS OPERATION To perform Net Conference a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 225 Make a Net Call to another Station on another node ak w amp Press the CONF button when the 3rd party answers Chapter 3 System Features The second call is placed on Hold and an ICM Dial tone is provided 6 Press the CONF button again at the Master Station all parties will be connected To clear a Net C
242. BX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 177 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE This entry defines forward type 0 Not 3 JO Not Used used 1 Unconditional a call is routed to a forward destination 1 Uncond unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow a call is routed to a 2 Q Overflow forward destination when a queue is overflow 3 Tmeout a 3 Time out call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is 4 All expired 4 All a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired APPLY TIME TYPE This entry defines a time to apply 4 0 ALL ALL forward type 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED FWD DESTINATION This entry defines a forward 5 Max 16 digits None destination Trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR This entry defines a wrap up timer A 6 000 600 010 member is available when this timer is expired after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR This entry defines no answer 7 05 60 15 timer about each member If this timer is expired a call is routed to the next member RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 0 timer If this timer is expired a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 9 0 With Answer With Answer call when a greeting or queuing ann
243. C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU CODE ZONE DATA Web Zone RTP Relay Group Only Web Inter Zone Attribute Only SNMP DATA Web SNMP Data Only DECT DATA Web DECT Registration Only 491 DECT Attribute DECT Attribute GREEN MODE Web Green Mode Activation Only Web Green Mode Time Only Setting NATION SPECIFIC 400 DKT RX Gain TDM Gain 401 SLT RX Gain 402 DECT RX Gain 403 IP Phone RX Gain 404 ACO RX Gain 405 DCO RX Gain 406 VMIB RX Gain 407 External Page RX Gain 415 DSP RX Gain DSP Gain 420 SLTM RX RTP Gain RTP Gain 421 DTIM RX Handset RTP Gain 422 DTIM RX Handsfree RTP Gain 423 LIP RX Handset RTP Gain 424 LIP RX Handsfree RTP Gain 425 WIT RX RTP Gain 426 VOIB RX RTP Gain 440 SLT Ring Cadence SLT Ring Cadence 441 ACNR Tone Cadence ACNR Tone Cadence INITIALIZATION 499 Initialization Initialization Release 1 7 Xv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN BASIC NUMBER No Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 No Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN C 9 Appendix C Quick Reference FEATURE CODE No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET
244. C S RJA If user dials digits they are processed as listed 1 Converted 2 Seize CO Line 3 Apply toll Restriction to all digits including CO access code 2 TYPE 3 C S R E If user dials digits digit are processed as listed 1 Converted 2 Seize CO Line 3 Apply Toll Restriction external phone number 0 Type 1 1 Type 2 2 Type 3 XFER TO COS 0 STA This entry allows transfer to COS 0 station 0 Off 1 On Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Tenant Group Access TRANS PGM 283 CO Call Restriction TRANS PGM 284 285 y 4 Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Call Restriction TRANS PGM 284 285 A 131 Appendix A System Programming Tables Call Duration Restriction TRANS PGM 284 Each tenant has attributes relating Call Duration Restriction CDR according to call types refer to the following table for a description of the functions and data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 284 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired setting refer to Table Press the SAVE button to store the data entry operation of TIE calls after the Restriction timer Repeat tone TRANS PGM 284 BTN RANGE DEFAULT
245. CAS according to the Forward type and Destination Ifall Attendants press DND button CAS will be covered by the Night Attendant Group If the Forward Destination of Night Attendant group is CAS the Attendant Call will be routed to CAS Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 243 Chapter 3 System Features Digit Conv Table TRANS PGM 251 TRANS PGM 252 see details on page A 104 TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T TYPE The Apply time type to be applied when the 1 0 Unconditional Unconditional dialed digit is dialed 1 Follow DNT 2 Follow LCR DIALED DIGITS The dialed digits 2 Max 16 digits UNCOND CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and 3 Max 16 digits digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is unconditional DAY CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to 4 Max 16 digits be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT NIGHT CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 5 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 6 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Timed
246. CD Agent State Check With Web Admin 1 Daey 7 Connect Web Admin Page of MBX IP System Choose Station Program Menu Enter Supervisor Number and Password ACD Group Management Menu will be displayed on the Left Menu List Supervisor can change each Group Status rules and Destination Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can check Agent Log In Out Ready DND Work State And also Agent s Priority can be displayed Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can change Agent s State and Priority ACD Group Call or Agent Traffic Check with Web Admin 1 aR WN Connect Web Admin Page of MBX IP System Choose Station Program Menu Enter Supervisor Number and Password ACD Group Traffic Menu will be displayed on the Left Menu List Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can check Group Call Traffic and Agent Traffic Data Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can Clear Group Call Traffic and Agent Traffic Data First Queued Call Answer or Reroute by Supervisor 1 2 3 If there are queued calls ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature code is saved at flex button Flex button s color will be changed to steady on Dial ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature code OR Press flex button registered as ACD S Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature code Choose sub menu then First Queued Call CLI will be display Press 1 then queued call will be routed to Supervisor OR Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Program
247. CO COS TRANS PGM 177 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Day mode 1 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 0 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 65 Chapter 3 System Features Incoming CO Group Access Outgoing CO Group IC Call Transfer Directly TRANS PGM 179 FLEX 5 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call CO Line Data Toll Exception Table TRANS PGM 250 see details on page A 103 TRANS PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE allow digits 1 Max 16 digits DENY TABLE deny digits 2 Max 16 digits TENANT Tenant groups to apply the table entry 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 RELATED FEATURES Temporary Station COS Lock see page 3 68 Walking COS see page 3 71 Day Timed amp Night Station COS CO Line Toll Exception can be applied differently in Day Night Timed mode at each Station The service mode is generally controlled by the Attendant group member and based on the mode appropriate dialing privileges are established CONDITION e If COS is set to 0 only intercom calls can be pl
248. COUNT CODE button prior to making a call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the account code button Intercom dial tone is heard 3 Place the CO IP call as normal Using an ACCOUNT CODE button during a call 1 Press the account code button CO line is held and the station hears dial tone 2 Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits 3 Press Station is re connected with CO line Single Line Phone To enter an Account Code prior to placing a call 1 Lift the handset Dial the Account Code Feature Code Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits Press Place the CO IP call as normal OF By OS To enter an Account Code during a call 1 Press for Hook switch 2 Dial Account Code Feature Code 3 Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits 4 Press ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 page A 17 RELATED FEATURES Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR see page 3 187 Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Alarm Signal Door Bell 3 3 Chapter 3 System Features Alarm Signal Door Bell The system can be configured to recognize the status of an external contact normally open or closed The system will signal the assigned station when the contact activates This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Door Bell signals to the us
249. Call Wait 4 Voice Over DIGIT 7 8 5 Intrusion DIGIT 8 g 6 Hunt DIGIT 9 10 DIGIT 0 11 DIGIT 12 Call Wait DIGIT 13 Voice Over Dummy Dial Tone Digit TRANS PGM 240 When digit conversion is programmed the CO line is seized after digit conversion is completed When programmed in the event a user cannot obtain the CO dial tone from PX a dummy dial tone can be provided 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 240 2 Dial bin no 3 Used the dial pad to enter desired data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Executive Secretary Assign TRANS PGM 241 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Executive Executive Access TRANS PGM 242 A 103 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL EXECUTIVE This option is to directly route calls to the 5 0 2 0 Executive station OFF executive calls are routed to secretary FIRST SEC DND the executive receives call when first secretary is in DND ALL SEC DND the executive receives call when all secretaries in DND SECRETARY CHOICE Determines order in which secretary 6 0 1 0 stations will receive calls First Idle Longest Idle MSG WAIT STATION Determines if message wait indication 7 0 Executive 0 is le
250. Chapter 3 System Features Call Pick Up Directed Call Pick Up A station may answer Pick Up incoming and transferred intercom CO and IP calls ringing at another station All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick up except queued Callbacks Digital phone users may assign a Flex button as a DIRECTED CALL PICK UP button CONDITIONS To pick up a CO IP call the station must have an idle appearance button When several calls are ringing at a station simultaneously Call Pick up will connect the first call received Queue callback calls are not subject to Call Pick up receives an error tone Only ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick up Intercom calls announced hands free cannot be picked up by another station OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a directed call pick up button Press TRANS PGM Flex Button Feature Type 1 Direct Pickup Feature Code HOLD SAVE To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER 2 Dial Directed Call Pick up code 3 Dial the intercom number of the ringing station You may also pick up the call by pressing the DSS button of the ringing station See the pickup by DSS button option on the next page OR Lift the handset or press SPEAKER Press the DIRECTED CALL PICK UP button Dial the intercom number of the ringing station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide
251. Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7 19 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 3 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 Not used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing ove
252. Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM MUTE COS Change 5 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 120 IPM Flash Off On IPM DND DND 6 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM DND One Time 7 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 63 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA RING ICM Ring A 95 234 16 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM RING CO Ring 17 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM RING MSG Wait 18 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM HEADSET Headset 19 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM HEADSET Bluetooth 20 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM DN Use 21 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM DN Other Use 22 Flex1 Color RE
253. D Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM DN DND 23 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash off Flash Off On IPM Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 65 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BIN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA DSS DND A 95 234 32 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash off Flash Off On IPM DSS Call Forward 33 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash off Flash Off On IPM DSS Handset Lift 34 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash off Flash Off On IPM DSS Preselected MSG 35 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash off Flash Off On IPM DSS Hold 36 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM CO Call Setup 37 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 60 IPM Flash Off On IPM CO Co Talk 38 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash Flash Steady Flash Off On IPM DN VM Message Wait 39 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 120 IPM Flash Off On IPM R
254. D CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of 12 001 100 003 Dedicated Line calls Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Queuing 3 45 Chapter 3 System Features Local Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 286 see details on page A 132 Long Distance Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 287 see details on page A 133 International Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 288 see details on page A 133 RELATED FEATURES CO IP Call Time Restriction see page 3 40 CO I P Queuing When CO IP lines are busy permitted users can request to be placed in queue awaiting availability of the CO IP line or a CO IP line in the same group When an appropriate CO IP line becomes available the system calls the waiting station on a First In First Out FIFO basis CONDITIONS ACO IP line can have any number of simultaneous queue requests A Station may only have a single active CO IP queue request activating a new queue request will replace cancel an existing queue A Queue recall will always notify the station with a tone ring ignoring the station s assigned Intercom Signaling mode Queue recall will signal a station for 15 seconds if unanswered the station is removed from the queue Ifa station requests CO Queuing on a busy CO line the requesting station checks the busy CO line s status every 5 seconds and receives CO Queue Recall Ring when the status check timer expir
255. D FEATURES Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover see page 3 62 Direct nward Dial DI D A Carrier Service known as Direct Inward Dial DID sends digits to the System so that the call may be routed directly to a Specific Station or System Facility DID service is available over digital and packet networks ISDN lines can provide two way incoming DID and normal Outgoing Service and requires no special signaling After collecting the digits from the Carrier the System routes the Call to the Destination e Incoming DID number is compared with Digit Conversion Table If matched received DID number is converted according to the Table Separate Digit Conversion can be applied according to DAY Night Timed Ring Mode e DID Destination is decided with the converted DID number e Destination can be Station Station Group Outgoing CO Call Voice Mail Net Station Paging or Conference Room CONDITIONS If ICLID routing is assigned for the CO IP Line the received Caller ID is first compared to the ICLID Table for routing If Caller ID does not match an entry in the ICLID Table the normal DID call processes are used DID calls that encounter a Busy signal are not answered in the DID DISA No Answer Timer or are received at a Vacant or Invalid number can be routed to the Attendant Tone Station Group or VMIB announcement When the Attendant receives such calls the call is appropriately identified by the Attendant Digital Phone Display
256. DE TRANS PGM CODE 131 button 7 11 0 9 HIDDEN DGT POSITION When HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT is enabled button 12 above this field determines if leading or trailing digits are hidden 12 O Left 1 Right 1 Right TRANSFER CHARGE MODE 1 INDIVIDUAL When a call is transferred to another station the transferred call is charged to two stations respectively 2 INTEGRATE XFERING When a call is transferred to another station the call is charged to the transferring station 3 INTEGRATE XFERED When a call is transferred to another station the call is charged to the transferred station 13 0 Individual 1 Integrate Xfering 2 Integrate Xfered 0 Individual TRANSFER CHARGE 1 NORMAL CHARGING When Attendant make outgoing call and transfer this call to another station the transferred will follow the Transfer Charge Mode 2 ATD CHARGING When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station the call is charged to the Attendant 3 XFERED CHARGING When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station the call is charged to the transferred station 14 0 Normal Charging 1 Atd Charging 2 Xfered Charging 0 Normal Charging WARNING TONE SVC if this option is enabled andSMDR service type is off line the system check free records space And if free space is less than 1000 warning tone will be served as alarm to Attendant 15 0 O
257. DEFAULT SYSREM DATA Digit Service 12 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Call Back 2 Camp On 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over 5 Intrusion 6 Hunt Digit Service A 101 237 13 10 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Call Back 2 Camp On 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over 5 Intrusion 6 Hunt DIAL TONE DIGIT TABLE A 101 240 Dummy Dial Tone Digit Max 6 Digits EXECUTIVE SECRETARY ASSIGN A 102 241 Executive Number 1 Station Secretary 1 3 2 1 3 Station ICM Call to Exec 0 Secretary Secretary 1 Sec if Exec DND CO Call To Exec 4 0 Secretary Secretary 1 Sec if Exec DND Call Executive 5 10 Off Off 1 First Sec DND 2 All Sec DND Sec Choice 6 O First Idle First Idle 1 Longest Idle Message Wait Station 7 0 Executive Executive 1 First Secretary EXECUTIVE ACCESS A 103 242 Executive Executive Access Each Exec EN DIS All Disable PPTP ATTRIBUTES Web Only Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE DIGIT CONVERSION OPTION P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 71 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG
258. DGT Automatic Network Dialing AND digit is sent after CO 4 Max 10 line seized This feature allows user to initiate CO calls only by dialing digits CO Group Access Code CO Group Access Code The CO Group Access code can be set dynamically for each Outgoing CO Group One Outgoing CO Group can have several access codes Additionally there are various kinds of services for each access code e Access Code Name Access code name can be displayed when a user seizes a CO line with CO Group Access code e CO Line Choice There are 3 ways to seize a CO line Round First Last e Outgoing CO Group When a user dials a CO Group Access code the System will seize a CO Line with the Outgoing CO Group e AND When using CO Group Access code it can add max 10 digits to be able to send towards PX automatically e ARS Service When a selected path is not available for some reasons all busy line fault etc this feature connects a call using another path which is preset automatically CONDITIONS This feature can be set for each Outgoing CO Group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Station Data CO Data a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Line Flash 5 5 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ARS SERVICE If Alternate Route Selecti
259. DITIONS Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return an error tone Speed Dial numbers can reference a specific CO IP Group entered by the user If the assigned line is busy a line from the same group will be selected If all lines in the group are busy the user may queue for the next available line All Speed Dial numbers are stored in protected memory in case of power loss A name can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial by Name directory OPERATION Digital Phone To dial using a Station Speed Dial 1 Lift handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the desired bin number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 148 Chapter 3 System Features To program a Station Speed Dial number 1 NOOR WN Press the TRANS PGM button Press the SPEED button Dial the Speed Dial bin number Dial CO IP Line Group Access code Enter the number to be stored Press the HOLD SAVE button If desired enter a name refer to the Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press the HOLD SAVE button To program a Station Speed Dial number using the 3 soft key LCD display phones 1 PO NOTA WN 9 Press the DIR Soft key Dial 1 or Press the OK Soft key Press the ADD Soft key Dial the Speed Dial bin number or Press the OK button Dial the CO IP Group Access
260. Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward Pilot Hunt 3 21 Station Group Data Chapter 3 System Features Pilot Hunt Group TRANS PGM 210 211 see details on page A 74 TRANS PGM 210 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONDITION Determines call coverage condition for Pilot Hunt 1 0 ALL All group 1 Intercom 2 External SERVICE TYPE This entry defines Service Type 2 0 Terminal Terminal Terminal Circular 1 Circular TIME TABLE INDEX Time Table index 1 9 1 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of a Pilot Hunt group TRANS PGM 211 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY FORWARD TYPE determines Day time seting for Call 1 0 Not Used Not Used Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans DAY FORWARD DESTINATION determines Day time seting 2 Max 8 digits for Forward destination NIGHT FORWARD TYPE determines the Night time seting 3 0 Not Used Not Used for Call Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans NIGHT FORWARD DESTINATION determines the Night 4 Max 8 digits time seting for Forward destination TIMED FORWARD TYPE determines the Timed seting for 5 0 Not Used Not Used Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans TIMED FWD DESTINATION determines the Timed seting for 6 Max 8 digits Forward destination YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Opera
261. Dial the Message number 0 9 or for User s Custom Message Enter auxiliary input hh mm mm dd etc as needed Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel an active Display Message 1 ak wD Press the flashing DND button OR Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 41 Display Message code Press the key Press the HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages 3 136 Chapter 3 System Features To define the User Custom Text Message 1 2 3 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 42 Custom Message program code Enter the Message contents up to 16 characters refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press the HOLD SAVE button confirmation tone is heard and the new User Custom Text Display Message is stored NOTE Alphanumeric characters may be entered using the following guides as shown in the Quick Reference chapter on page C 105 Single Line Phone To activate a Display Message 1 ak wh 6 Lift the handset Dial SLT Programming code Dial 41 Display Message code Dial the Message number 0 9 or for User s Custom Message Enter auxiliary input hh mm mm dd etc as needed Press the hook switch confirmation tone is heard To cancel an active Display Message 1 2 Lift the handset Dial SLT Feature Cancel code To enter the User Cu
262. Differential Ring Differential Ring provides one of 4 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to a Digital Phone allowing users to determine which phone is ringing and the type of call Intercom or CO IP When the phone receives an incoming call the designated ring signal is provided over the speaker Different selections are assigned for Intercom and CO IP calls CONDITIONS Each DN and CO line can be set to have one of 9 digit conversion Tables There are 300 entries for each digit conversion table The Digit Conversion Table allows up to 16 digits to be programmed as dialed digit and converted digit The following features have higher priority over digit conversion AND Automatic Network Dialing Automatic CO seize In Call log dialed digit is displayed on the station s LCD OPERATION Digital Phone To select the desired ring tone 1 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 2 Ring Selection Dial 1 Intercom or 2 CO IP ring Dial 1 Ring Source Dial Ring Tone selection 1 4 Digit Phone 1 8 IP Phone Ring Tone is presented Press the HOLD SAVE button N D Slee O Y Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Digit Conversion 3 74 A Chapter 3 System Features DMIN PROGRAMMING Station Differential Ring TRANS PGM 124 FLEX 3 4 see details on page A 27 TRANS PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM DIFF RING ID set the int
263. Digital Phone or SLT Single Line Telephone installed in the DTIB SLIB DSIU at night or during holiday mode The power On Off can be controlled by Web Admin manually or automatically according to the assigned power On Off time CONDITIONS SLT Single Line Telephone is supported on DSIU while Digital Phone is not supported f phone power is disabled calls cannot be placed and received Inthe event of system reset power is enabled OPERATION System Operation of this feature is either automatic when programmed or by Web Admin ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Green Power Save Time use Web Admin Green Power Save Enable use Web Admin Headset Compatibility An industry standard headset can be connected to a Digital Phone in place of or in addition to the handset The Station must be set for Headset operation In Headset mode pressing the SPEAKER button will send audio to the Headset instead of the speakerphone Additionally when in the Headset mode ring signals can be delivered to the speaker or the headset as defined in the System database CONDITIONS The Intercom Signaling Mode can be set in the Headset mode as with the Speakerphone mode Although the phone is in the Headset mode the system will monitor hook switch status if the user lifts the handset to go off hook audio automatically is delivered to the handset Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide Ap
264. E To stop Two Way Record OR PROGRAMMING Station p i Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Two Way Record 6 29 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Two way Record Access PGM 145 Btn 4 see details on page A 40 PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS when allowed 4 0 Disable Disable the station can activate the Two way record 1 Enable feature to record a conversation Two way Record Device PGM 145 Btn 5 see details on page A 40 PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO WAY RECORD DEVICE determines the 5 VM Boards save location of Two Way recorded wav files VM Boards or Phontage When Phontage is selected recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC System Tone Table PGM 290 see details on page A 133 PGM 290 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TONE TYPE Designates the Tone type 1 01 Normal Tone 01 Normal Tone 02 VMIB Prompt 03 VMIB Announcement 04 Internal MOH 05 External MOH 06 09 VMIB MOH 1 2 3 4 10 14 SLT MOH 1 5 TONE TIME Determines the amount of time 2 1 600 10 tone is provided TONE PORT Tone port index of PGM 264 The 3 1 19 cadence of tone port may be changed by using Web Admin PROMPT ANNC NO The VMIB Prompt or 4 1 255 Announcement number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programmi
265. E incoming CO line name can be assigned 1 Max 16 chars SCREEN INDICATOR determines if screen indicator 2 0 Off user provided Off will be inserted in ISDN messages not screened 1 On user provided verified and passed Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 23 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI CONV TABLE CLI Conversion Table index 15 1 9 1 HOLIDAY RING INDEX if ring mode is holiday andthis 16 01 80 Not Asg none is assigned an incoming call is routed to the destination of holiday alternative ring index PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PROVIDE DIAL TONE If this feature is set to ON dial tone 1 0 Off Off is provided to networking CO 1 On BLF USAGE If this feature is set to ON flex button LED will 2 0 Off On be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button 1 On UNSUP CONF ENTEND If this feature is set to ON 3 0 Disable Disable unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial 1 Enable feature code after warning tone is heard BLOCK IN CLRFWD TMR If this feature is set to ON CO line 4 0 Off Off is blocked after clear forward waiting time 1 On CPT DETECT If this feature is set to ON Call processing 5 0 Off
266. E RPT Determines the Repeat timer of 4 010 254 020 Dedicated Line calls LOCAL CALL DISC TMR Determines entry defines Disconnect 5 10 60 15 timer of Local calls LONG CALL DISC TMR Determines the disconnect timer of Long 6 10 60 15 Distance calls INTERNATIONAL DISC TMR Determines the Disconnect timer of 7 10 60 15 International calls DEDICATED CALL DISC TMR Determines the Disconnect timer of 8 10 60 15 Dedicated Line calls LOCAL CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of Local 9 001 100 003 calls LONG CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of Long 10 001 100 003 Distance calls INTERNATIONAL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of 11 001 100 003 International calls DEDICATED CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of 12 001 100 003 Dedicated Line calls Local Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 286 see details on page A 132 Long Distance Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 287 see details on page A 133 International Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 288 see details on page A 133 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer 3 43 CO 1 P Call Warning Tone Timer Chapter 3 System Features Stations can receive a tone indicating the elapsed time of a CO IP call has reached the CO Warning Tone time timer expiration A warning tone is
267. EAKER button to return to Idle When the Speakerphone is used the Microphone is active unless the MUTE button is pressed and the MUTE button LED is On OPERATION Digital Phone To activate On Hook Dialing 1 Press the SPEAKER button and Dial tone is received the SPEAKER button LED will illuminate 2 Dial the desired number ICM number or select CO IP path and dial PROGRAMMING Station Data Auto Speaker Selection PGM 121 FLEX 1 see details on page A 24 PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO SPKR enables SPEAKER activation 1 0 Off On when a CO IP DSS or other feature button is 1 On pressed handsfree RELATED FEATURES Mute see page 6 13 Speakerphone see page 6 19 Automatic Speaker Select see page 6 4 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Prime Line I mmediately Delayed CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To access the Station Prime Line Chapter 6 Digital Phone Mo Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Differential Ring 6 17 Chapter 6 Digital Phone PROGRAMMING Station Data Auto Dial Digit PGM 138 FLEX 1 see details on page A 38 PGM 138 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO DIAL DGT Digits will be dialed automatically 1 Max 16 digits Auto Dial Pause Time PGM 138 FLEX 2 see details on page A 38 PGM 138 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME Auto dial pause time 2 00 30 0
268. ED FEATURES Intercom Call Hold CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To place an active call on Hold To retrieve the held call SLT To place an active ICM Call on Hold Da Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling 4 5 Chapter 4 Intercom 3 Replace the handset To retrieve the held ICM call Lift the handset station is connected with the Held party PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 RELATED FEATURES Music On Hold MOH see page 3 123 Intercom Call ICM Call see page 4 2 Hold see page 3 101 Hold Recall see page 3 102 Intercom Caller Controlled I CM Signaling A User can change the Signaling mode of an ICM call from Tone ring to Voice announce CONDITIONS The ICM Signal mode cannot be changed if the Called Station number is MADN If the Signaling mode is changed the Call is not subject to Call Forward No Answer The Signaling mode for a specific Intercom call can only be changed once and cannot be changed back to the original Signaling mode Changing the Signaling mode does not affect privacy at the Called Station OPERATION To change the ICM Signaling mode 1 Dial Force HF Calling Code 2 Place intercom call OR 1 Place intercom call 2 Dial Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 PROGRAMMING Station Data
269. EMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register an IP Phone to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 105 USER ID Used to register a Phonatge to the System by entering 2 its User ID and Password USER PASSWORD Used to register a Phonatge to the System by 3 entering its User ID and Password STA NUMBER VIEW Once a connection is made to the System 4 the current Station number will be displayed IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the IP Address of the IP 5 phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the Firewall IP Address of the 6 IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security 7 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Revertible Ring 3 145 Chapter 3 System Features DTIM SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 see details on page A 13 TRANS PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register a DTIM to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 105 STA RANGE VIEW Once a connection is made to the System the 2 Station number assigned to DTIM SLTM will be displayed IP ADDRESS Displays the IP Address of the IP phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security Logical Slot Assignme
270. ERATION To perform a CCBS Call Back OR ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Chapter 3 System Features Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 219 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 4 10digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0
271. ESS VIEW Displays the IP Address of the IP phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security DTI M SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 107 Enter slot number to be assigned Press the Flex button 1 5 and enter the desired data Press the SAVE button to store TRANS PGM 107 MAC ADDRESS Used to register a DTIM to the System by entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 1 BTN RANGE REMARK STA RANGE VIEW Once aconnection is made to the System the Station number assigned to DTIM SLTM will be displayed IP ADDRESS Displays the IP Address of the IP phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables IP Address Plan TRANS PGM 108 System I nformation TRANS PGM 109 a Release 1 7 xY April 2012 NUMBERING PLAN DATA TRANS PGM Codes 110 to 116 A 15 Appendix A System Programming Tables 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 109 2 Select the desired button 1 7 TRANS PGM 109 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDR
272. EX 8 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom Intercom Transfer CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To perform a Screened ICM transfer while on an ICM call OR Da Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 Intercom Transfer 4 9 Chapter 4 Intercom While on an Intercom call to perform an Unscreened call transfer 1 Press the TRANS button 2 Dial the Station to receive the call 3 Hang up and return to Idle OR 1 Press the DSS BLF button for the desired Station Hang up and return to Idle SLT To perform a Screened transfer of an active Intercom call 1 Press the Hook switch 2 Dial the Station to receive the call 3 When answered or on Splash tone announce the call 4 Hang up and return to Idle While on an Intercom call to perform an Unscreened call transfer 1 Press the Hook switch 2 Dial the Station to receive the call 3 Hang up and return to Idle RELATED FEATURES Hold Recall see page 3 102 Do Not Disturb DND see page 3 77 Call Transfer see page 3 30 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom INTRUSION CONDITIONS OPERATION To perform an Intrusion PROGRAMMING Station Data RELATED FEATURES a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Message Wait Call Back 4 11 C
273. Enable OffNet Call Forward Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 3 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OFFNET CALL FORWARD ACCESS a station must be allowed Off 3 0 Disable Enable Net Fwd to forward external incoming calls outside the system or 1 Enable otherwise establish a CO to CO connection Call Forward Assignment TRANS PGM 143 see details on page A 40 TRANS PGM 143 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE specify call forward type 1 0 Not Assigned Not Assigned 1 Unconditional 2 Busy 3 No Answer 4 Busy or No Answer FORWARD NUMBER specify Call Forward 2 Max 32 digits Destination by entering dial digits FORWARD APPLY TIME specify Call Forward 3 O All All Applying Time 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIMER if the station 4 0 600 sec 15 sec does not respond during the CFW NO ANS TMR timer the call is forwarded to Call Forward Destination FORWARD DISPLAY enables the Forward Display 5 0 Off On Option to check forward information in idle state 1 On Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward Pilot Hunt 3 19 Tenant Data Multi Call Forward Service Center see page A 128 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 280 MULTI CALL FORWARD SERVICE COUNTER determines the Multi Call forward count BIN RANGE 01 10
274. Executive s Secretary for calls 2 Register a DN flex button at the Secretary Station and Executive Station 3 Set the DN flex button Ring option as No Ring or Delayed Ring at the Executive Station 4 Enable the Forced Hands free Access option at the Executive and Secretary Stations 5 Assign the Executive station flex button as telephone number Forced Hands free code Secretary Station number for use when Executive intercom calls the Secretary 6 Assign Secretary station flex button as Telephone number Forced Hands free code Executive station number to use when Secretary Intercom calls the Executive ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Forced Handsfree Code TRANS PGM 113 see page A 19 FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 BTN REMARK Forced Handsfree Call 59 537 Station Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 Flex Button Assign TRANS PGM 126 see details on page A 29 DN Button Ring Option TRANS PGM 126 FLEX 2 see details on page A 30 Forced Handsfree Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 1 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORCED HANDFREE ACCESS when placing an intercom call a 1 0 Disable Disable user can change the ICM signaling mode Tone Ring to Hands free 1 Enable answer mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012
275. FAULT ACNR ACCESS enable ACNR feature 5 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable RELATED FEATURES Last Number Redial LNR see page 3 110 Speakerphone see page 6 19 Mute see page 6 13 HARDWARE Digital Phone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Auto Release of Speaker CONDITIONS OPERATION System RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Automatic Speaker Select OPERATION Digital Phone Chapter 6 Digital Phone Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Background Music BGM 6 5 CONDITIONS Chapter 6 Digital Phone This feature does not apply to Digital Phones not equipped assigned with Speakerphone the User must lift the Handset Paging while on the Speakerphone may cause feedback from Paging Equipment if Auto Speaker is enabled and a PAGE ZONE button is pressed the display will show LIFT THE HANDSET To complete the page User must lift the Handset within the predefined 5 second period or the phone will return to Idle PROGRAMMING Station Data Auto Speaker Selection PGM 121 FLEX 1 see details on page A 24 PGM 121 BTN AUTO SPKR enables SPEAKER activation 1 when a CO IP DSS or other feature button is pressed handsfree 0 Off 1 On RANGE DEFAULT On HARDWARE Digital Phone Background Music BGM A Digital Phone can receive audio generally music from an Internal or External S
276. FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Call Completion There are two kinds of Call Completion Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers CCBS After calling a User on another System using basic call and encountering a busy tone a Station user can be notified when the busy destination of another system becomes idle If the user wants to make a Call to the destination when that notification is received the call can be reinitiated to the destination of the other system again Completion of Calls on No Reply CCNR After calling a User in another System using basic call and encountering No Reply No Answer the caller can set to be notified when the destination becomes idle again If the caller wants to make a call to the destination when notification is received the call can be reinitiated to the destination on the other System again CONDITIONS A stand alone IP Phone that supports H 450 can activate Call Completion A station can leave or have only one callback message and a new request will be left as a message wait indication on the busy Station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 OP
277. G TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Night Attendant Group Attributes TRANS PGM 277 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Tenant Attributes TRANS PGM 280 281 A 127 Appendix A System Programming Tables 4 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Attendant group attributes data refer to Table 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 277 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING Determines if call is routed to the 1 0 After Greeting 1 In Greeting Attendant when Greeting Tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT Determines the Queue count 00 99 05 FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 No
278. G TYPE Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved 8 0 LIFO LIFO in either a FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in first out order 1 FIFO based on this entry VMIB NEW MSG NO Display the number of new messages 9 l VMIB SAVE MSG NO Display the number of saved messages 10 l HARDWARE VMIB Message Retrieval A user can access their Mailbox locally from a Digital Phone by dialing the VIMB Access Feature Code by pressing the MSG CALLBK button or by pressing a pre assigned VMAILBOX Flex button when Off Hook receiving Intercom dial tone Prompts are presented to guide the User in the Voice Mailbox operation The User must enter a Mailbox number Station number and a corresponding password in response to the Request for Mailbox number Please enter your Mailbox number and Request for Password Please enter your password code prompts Additional prompts and mailbox operation is described in Operation or refer to your Phone or Voice Mail User Guide CONDITIONS f no new old messages are available pressing 1 or 2 is an invalid operation and the User receives the Invalid Entry prompt or No Message prompt If the dialed number is not recognized the Invalid Entry prompt is played after the second invalid entry the User is disconnected Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone
279. GOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE if outgoing 3 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME if an 4 000 300 sec 060 outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after RIs Time Before disconnecting a warning tone is provided INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call STATION INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while stations 6 0 Off On are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the 1 On station can transfer the call to second CO group Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Dial Pulse Signaling CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING CO Line Data System Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Direct Inward Dial DID 5 45 Chapter 5 CO IP Pulse Dial Break Ratio PGM 223 FLEX 2 see details on page A 85 PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PULSE DIAL BREAK RATIO The break make ratio for pulse dialing 2 0 60 40 1 66 33 through analog CO line 1 66 33 2 50 50 RELATE
280. Group Number TRANS PGM 118 A 22 STATION DATA TRANS PGM Codes 120 152 A 23 Station Type TRANS PGM 120 A 23 Station Port Attributes TRANS PGM 121 124 A 24 Station Flexible Button Assignment TRANS PGM 126 A 29 Station Number Information TRANS PGM 130 A 31 Station Number Attributes TRANS PGM 131 135 A 31 Station Class of Service TRANS PGM 137 A 37 Station Auto Attributes TRANS PGM 138 A 38 Station Preset Call Forward TRANS PGM 142 A 39 Station Call Forward TRANS PGM 143 A 40 Station VMIB Attribute TRANS PGM 145 A 40 Station Mobile Phone Attribute TRANS PGM 146 A 42 CO IP Group Access TRANS PGM 150 A 43 Internal Page Group Access TRANS PGM 151 A 43 Command Group Access TRANS PGM 152 A 44 CO LINE DATA TRANS PGM 160 181 A 44 CO Attribute Il Ill TRANS PGM 160 162 A 44 CO CID Attributes TRANS PGM 163 A 48 CO Incoming Attribute I Il TRANS PGM 165 166 A 48 CO Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 167 A 51 Incoming CO Normal DISA Attributes TRANS PGM 168 A 52 CO Incoming Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 169 A 53 CO Outgoing Attributes TRANS PGM 170 A 54 CO Outgoing Attributes Il TRANS PGM 171 A 57 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 173 A 57 CO
281. H 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER This entry defines the timer for queuing 8 000 300 secs 30 forward or second queuing announcement QUEUING TONE NO This entry defines queuing tone 9 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal QUEUING PRT ANNC This entry defines queuing prompt 10 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC QUEUING REPEAT NO This entry defines queuing repeat 11 000 100 3 number QUEUING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 12 000 100 secs 0 before queuing repeat QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 14 01 12 none queuing annc Pause time Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Group Attributes TRANS PGM 202 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Voice Mail Group Attributes TRANS PGM 203 A 69 Appendix A System Programming Tables 3 Press the Flex button for the desired attribute refer to the following Table 4 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Group Attributes data refer to the following Table 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry
282. HECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 On change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL after conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines usage 5 0 Off 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 0n ACD Call Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Agent State 10 33 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval
283. I CLI Information 7 0 Off Off If this is enable system sends SMDI with CLI 1 On System Voice Mail Interface Select TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 3 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM SMDI ENABLE if it is set to ON system interfaces SMDI protocol 3 0 Off 0 Off with external Voice Mail If OFF system interfaces In band message 1 On with external Voice Mail RELATED FEATURES AA VM Group see page 3 87 In band DTMF Signaling see page 3 90 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 HARDWARE External AA VM system Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Flexible Numbering Plan 3 97 Chapter 3 System Features Flexible Numbering Plan User access to System resources and features is accomplished using Feature codes or Flexible buttons The Administrator can select from one of seven different standard Numbering Plans and if desired can assign codes for individual functions in the Flexible Numbering Plan The feature codes are defined in the System s Flexible Numbering Plan refer to Appendix B CONDITIONS The System can support up to 8 digit numbering for Station numbers or Feature codes To assign a Numbering Plan code it should be matched type with a Prefix Numbering Plan consisting of a prefix and additional digits The selected Prefix Numbering Plan cannot conflict ex if a prefix consi
284. IB MSG TYPE Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved 8 0 LIFO LIFO in either a FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in first out order 1 FIFO based on this entry VMIB NEW MSG NO Display the number of new messages 9 l VMIB SAVE MSG NO Display the number of saved messages 10 l YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Mobile Phone Attribute TRANS PGM 146 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO IP Group Access TRANS PGM 150 A 43 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 146 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MOBILE SERVICE CLI 4 CLI 4for Mobile Service 11 Max 24 digits MOBILE SERVICE CLI 5 CLI 5for Mobile Service 12 Max 24 digits CO IP Group Access TRANS PGM 150 Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group refer to CO Line Attributes TRANS PGM CODE 160 button 2 3 As a default all stations are allowed access to CO IP group 1 1 2 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 150 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 Fora single station enter the same number twice Press desired Flex button number 1 3 Flex 1 to access for CO line 1 to 24 Flex 2 to access for CO line 25 to 48 Flex 3 to access for CO line 49 to 72 Press the desired Flex button to
285. IGIT 6 7 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over DIGIT 7 8 5 Intrusion DIGIT 8 g 6 Hunt DIGIT 9 10 DIGIT 0 11 DIGIT 12 Call Wait DIGIT 13 Voice Over RELATED FEATURES Multi Party Voice Conference see page 3 50 Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 YW verti Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Auto Service Mode Control 3 10 Auto Service Mode Control Chapter 3 System Features The service mode defines different ring assignments COS and answering privileges for the system The service mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table which defines the time of day for Day Night and Timed shift modes The Attendant may change the system mode selection from automatic to manual CONDITIONS Ifthe system has Holiday information and current mode is Holiday service mode is operated as Night mode OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data System Time Table TRANS PGM 253 see details on page A 107 TRANS PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT defines the comment of the Time 1 32 characters none Table SYSTEM TIME ZONE defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0 73 0 Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS defines Daylight Saving Time of Time 3 On Off Off Table RING MODE defines the ring mode of Tim
286. IP Phone can place an Active Call on Hold CONDITIONS Ifthe SIP phone has a Call Hold Function it will not operate correctly if the Hold message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System OPERATION To place an Exclusive Hold While on an Active Call press the HOLD button the Call will be placed on Exclusive Hold and will not be able to be accessed by other Stations SIP Transfer Call The SIP phone can Transfer an Active Call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CONDITIONS OPERATION To Transfer an Active Call SIP Call Forward CONDITIONS OPERATION SIP Do Not Disturb DND CONDITIONS OPERATION To Activate DND Chapter 9 SIP Phone PAo Release 1 7 Y April 2012 SIP 3 Party Conference 9 5 Chapter 9 SIP Phone SI P 3 Party Conference The SIP phone can make a 3 party conference CONDITIONS Ifthe SIP phone has a Conference Function it will not operate correctly if the Conference message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System OPERATION Refer to the Phone User Guide to set up a Conference SI P Call Wait Broker Call The SIP phone can initiate Broker Call when the SIP Phone User receives Call Wait indication CONDITIONS Ifthe SIP phone has a Call Wait Broker Call Function it will not operate correctly if the Call Wait Broker Call message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and th
287. ITIONS ez Attendant requires installation of a System Lock key Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data System Clock Set OPERATION Attendant To set the System Date To set the System Time PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Das 5 Release 1 7 ad April 2012 USB Upgrade 7 43 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 System Data see details on page A 118 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group 1 0 Terminal 0 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line Max 4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4 First Station group System Date amp Time PGM233 see details on page A 94 PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SET SYSTEM TIME DATE Sets the system time 1 HH MM SET SYSTEM TIME DATE Sets the system date 2 MMDDYY DST ENABLE MODE Enables DST feature for System 0 Off 0 Off Time 1 0n DST START TIME The DST start time Web See DST Table 2nd Sunday of Only March at 2 00 AM DST END TIME The DST end time See DST Table 1st Sunday in Nov at 2 00 AM RELATED FEATURES Least Cost Routing LCR see page 3 112 Station Me
288. In order to use hotel features stations must be programmed to have hotel service types like guest station front desk and service station One station can have only one hotel service type It is impossible to have a station that is a front desk and also a service station For another example office station cannot be a front desk Office Station It is not possible to use hospitality features like check in check out maid status and etc from an office station But all the basic telephony services are available in an office station CONDITIONS Office station is the default hotel service type in the MBX IP system The calls from office stations to hotel stations guest station front desk and service station can be allowed or denied Guest Station A Guest station is a terminal that is in a hotel guest room and used by the hotel guest From the guest station it is possible to use hotel specific features like room monitor maid status and etc In addition all the basic telephony services like DN Directory Number features system features Transfer Forward Speed Dial VM features CO features DID DISA are available CONDITIONS Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Program Menu Menu Sub Menu Release 1 7 A S April 2012 Hotel Service Type B 5 Appendix B Hote
289. LED will 2 0 Off On be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button 1 On UNSUP CONF ENTEND If this feature is set to ON 3 0 Disable Disable unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial 1 Enable feature code after warning tone is heard BLOCK IN CLRFWD TMR If this feature is set to ON CO line 4 0 Off Off is blocked after clear forward waiting time 1 On CPT DETECT If this feature is set to ON Call processing 5 0 Off On tone is detected to disconnect LCO line 1 On ABSWER WAITING CALL If this feature is set to ON system 6 0 Off Off sends answer when call is waited 1 On UNIVERSAL ANSWER If this feature is set to ON any 7 0 Off Off station to answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal 1 On Answer feature code RLS GUARD TIME If CO release signaling is not completed 8 00 15 sec 01 successfully CO line is disconnected when timer expires UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call 9 000 255 min 000 without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected WAIT CLRFWD TIME Clear Forward Waiting Time 10 001 300 sec 300 MAX RING TIME Max Ring Time for when incoming CO 11 015 300 sec 120 calls are transferred recalled DISA SUPERVISION TMR DISA Supervision Timer 12 1 9 sec 2 VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR Determines the amount of time 13 0 9 sec paused before playin
290. M devices with matching MAC addresses to register regardless of the Database Protection Switch DPS position OPERATION Registration is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 138 A DMIN PROGRAMMING System Info IP Phone Phontage Registration Table TRANS PGM 106 see details on page A 12 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 106 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register an IP Phone to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 105 USER ID Used to register a Phonatge to the System by entering 2 its User ID and Password USER PASSWORD Used to register a Phonatge to the System by 3 entering its User ID and Password STA NUMBER VIEW Once a connection is made to the System 4 the current Station number will be displayed IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the IP Address of the IP 5 phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS VIEW Displays the Firewall IP Address of the 6 IP phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security 7 DTIM SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 see details on page A 13 TRANS PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS Used to register a DTIM to the System by 1 entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial P
291. MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE IDX Time Table index 4 1 9 1 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 5 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External MEMBER ASSIGN this entry assigns stations as members 6 l of a station group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 96 Chapter 3 System Features VM Group Attribute Assignment TRANS PGM 203 see details on page A 69 TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM PUT MAIL INDEX for external analog Voice Mail groups an index 1 1 9 1 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Put Mail dial code VM GET MAIL INDEX for external analog Voice Mail groups an index 2 1 9 2 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Get Mail dial code VM BUSY INDEX for external analog Voice Mail groups an index to 3 1 9 3 the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Busy dial code VM NO ANSWER INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 4 1 9 4 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the No answer dial code VM DISCONNECT for external analog Voice Mail groups an index to 5 1 9 9 the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Disconnect dial code SMDI TYPE this entry defines SMDI Type 6 0 Type 1 Type 1 1 Type 2 SMDI CLI INFO this entry defines SMD
292. MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Tenant Attributes TRANS PGM 280 Tenant Attributes II TRANS PGM 281 y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Tenant Attributes TRANS PGM 280 281 A 129 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 281 CONF MEMBER MANUAL ADD Determines if conf member manual add will be used when set to ON each CONF member can be added using the CONF button when set to OFF each CONF member will be added automatically BTN RANGE DEFAULT 1 On REDIAL METHOD This entry defines the redial method when the User presses the REDIAL button 1 One Touch Call When REDIAL button is pressed the phone will redial the previously called number 2 One Touch Log Phone When REDIAL button is pressed on phone with 3 soft button redialing can be initiated if phone does not have 3 soft button a redial list will be displayed 3 List Dial When the REDIAL button is pressed redial list is displayed and user can select which number to redial 0 One Touch Dial 1 One Touch Log Phone 2 List Dial 2 List Dial DIAL DIGIT PROCESS This entry defines the dial digit processing method 0 TYPE 1 R C S If user dials digits digit are process as listed 1 Apply Toll Restriction to all digits including CO access code 2 Converted 3 Seize CO Line 1 TYPE 2
293. MDR 014 DELETE FAILED CALL SMDR 015 DELETE ALL SMDR 016 ABORT PRINTING 02 TRAFFIC 021 PRINT TRAFFIC TENANT 022 PRINT TRAFFIC CALL TYPE 023 PRINT TRAFFIC CO GRP 03 COS PASSWORD 031 TEMPORARY COS MODE Station Range 032 RETRIEVE COS Station Range 033 REGISTER PASSWORD Station Range 034 CALL LOG PROTECT Station Range 04 DATE TIME 041 SET SYSTEM DATE 042 SET SYSTEM TIME 043 LCD DATE MODE Station Range 044 LCD TIME MODE Station Range 045 SET WAKE UP Station Range 046 RESET WAKE UP Station Range 05 MULTI MESSAGE 051 PRESELECTED MESSAGE Station Range MSG No 052 SET USER MESSAGE Station Range a Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants User PGM Code Item Description Remark OPERATION Attendant To activate an Attendant Station Program Code Feature or Function as Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Attendant Station Program Codes 7 35 Enter the desired code OR Pon gt desired menu item and enter the desired code 5 Enter any additional inputs if required PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 Press the PGM button the Attendant Stati
294. MIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Chapter 3 System Features Station VMIB Prompt Language Index TRANS PGM 145 see details on page A 40 TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX Selected language type prompt is 2 1 3 played to the user when accessing the VMIB DEFAULT 1 CO Data CO VMIB Prompt Language Index TRANS PGM 161 FLEX 8 see details on page A 46 TRANS PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PROMPT LANGUAGE VMIB Prompt Index 8 1 3 1 Table Data Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 see details on page A 111 TRANS PGM 259 BTN RANGE DEFAULT The VMIB slot amp Prompt No to be used for playing the VMIB 1 4 VMIB Slot 00 18 amp Announcement No Prompt No 01 70 CCR Index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No 5 1 100 RELATED FEATURES VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 HARDWARE VMIB Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Multiple Voice Mailbox Support 3 122 Chapter 3 System Features Multiple Voice Mailbox Support A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the VMIB Access code the mailbox number and password Phone users may assign one or more Flex buttons to access a specific mailbox OPERATION Digital Phone For Multiple Mailbox Access 1 Change the station that you want tobe able tolog in as to a MADN TRANS PGM 130 EXAMPLE 100 from SAD
295. MING CO Line Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO IP Ring Assignment 5 39 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MEMBER ASSIGN To change station s ring 5 Start Station amp End assign status enter desired station range Max Station 30 stations can be assigned DELAY Enter delay value if delay is 0 station 5 1 0 9 will start to ring immediately If delay value is deleted the station will not ring Otherwise if delay is 1 9 the station will start to ring after delay time 3 times of delay value Sta 100 Port 0 delay 0 Others not assigned Table Data System Time Table PGM 253 see details on page A 107 PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT defines the comment of the Time 1 32 characters none Table SYSTEM TIME ZONE defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0 73 0 Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS defines Daylight Saving Time of Time On Off Off Table RING MODE defines the ring mode of Time Table 4 0 Day 0 Day 1 Night 2 Timed AUTO RING MODE defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time 5 On Off Off Table Weekly Time Table PGM 254 see details on page A 108 PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Tuesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end ti
296. Management Lower number entries will be referenced first in part time table That is if the different entries include the same duration lowest entry will be applied The duration of stay denotes the elapsed time from check in to check out And only hour information is meaningful so that minute data is just ignored If nothing is programmed in part time table one day charge will be applied OPERATION Front Desk Register and change fee for part time table 1 Dial the PGM button 83 LCD will display the duration of stay and its fee of the first entry in part time table RATE 00 01 03 050 Dial a desired room rate bin number 00 31 if you want to program another entry LCD will display the duration of the stay and its fee of the selected entry Press Flex button 1 and dial the duration of stay 4 digits Press SPEED button to erase the data Press Flex button 2 and dial the associated rate 000 100 Press SAVE button to update the database permanently Go to step 2 to program another entry Upon check out for the part time stay the guest bill will look similar to the following Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN ROOM 100 GuestName Check In 94 12 26 13 Check Out 94 1 2 26 20 7 hours NOTE Star Time CO Duration Dialed No Count Call Cost
297. Mobility Chapter 3 System Features When one DECT is registered to more than two networked systems at the same time and the user of DECT moves to another networked system the incoming call to DECT will be routed to the appropriate networked system automatically CONDITIONS DECT mobility information is sent through the LAN port of MPB The physical port number of the DECT should be same as on whole systems DECT must be registered to more than two systems for this functionality to work refer to the Vertical DECT Installation Manual OPERATION DECT Mobility is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 FLEX 6 10 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 999 9000 Manager 9 UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 999 9001 Manager 9 DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Network Numbering Plan Table TRANS PGM 321 FLEX 8 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking
298. Mode Agent Headset option when agent log out 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode 4 Logon Mode LOGOUT RESTRICTION This entry defines 14 0 Not use 0 Not use restriction of Logout State Agent 1 CO outgoing 2 All call CO ANSWER TIME This entry defines when the 15 0 Queued to group 0 Queued to group ACK message is sent to caller party 1 Agent Answer Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables The MBX IP system can be programmed to meet each customer s individual needs System programming may be accomplished by entering the PROGRAM MODE at an assigned Admin Station or using the Web Admin refer to the MBX IP Web Administration Guide This section provides general information Other sections include e Section 2 provides a description for data entry using the Admin Station NOTE Some parameters are available through Web Admin and not the Keyset Admin e Appendix B provides an index to database entries default value charts for the Flexible Numbering Plan Fixed Function dial codes and the entire database Indices and charts are helpful references when entering data into the system database Initialization When power is applied to the system or the MPB Reset button is pressed
299. N normal to MADN 2 Give the station that needs access a MADN button for the station TRANS PGM 130 EXAMPLE Add 101 to 100 list and assign to Flex Button 5 3 In Flexible Button Programming for the station that needs access program a 523 and the station you want MWI for TRANS PGM 126 EXAMPLE Station 101 flex buttons change button 4 to a Dial Number with a value of 523100 4 Now when a message is left in 100 station 101 button 4 flashes to indicate a new message 5 To login to mailbox 100 from 101 press Button 5 DN for 100 and the call back button You are prompted for the mailbox password 6 Enter the password for mailbox 100 followed by the sign To assign a VMAILBOX Flex button TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 VMIB Access Code Mailbox station number HOLD SAVE To access a Voice Mailbox using the VMAILBOX Flex button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER 2 Press the VMAILBOX Flex button 3 Dial the Mailbox password RELATED FEATURES VMIB Voice Mail see page 3 261 HARDWARE Phone VMIB Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Music On Hold MOH 3 123 Chapter 3 System Features Music On Hold MOH When a call is placed on Hold the System will deliver audio from the defined MOH source In this way the connected user can determine that the connection is still active The system has connections for one m
300. NET MASK Used to register a Phonatge to the System by 2 255 255 0 0 entering its User ID and Password ROUTER IP ADDR IP Address of router for external network 3 10 10 10 254 WAN IP access Required for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access FIREWALL IP ADDR When the system is installed behind a NAPT 4 0 0 0 0 server the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field Also use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 198 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK DNS IP ADDR IP Address of Domain Name Server which MBX 5 0 0 0 0 IP will use to resolve URLs to an IP address The DNS provides the resolution after receiving the name from MBX IP H 323 PORT H 323 UDP Port 6 1720 SIP PORT SIP UDP Port 5060 DHCP USAGE If this field is set to ON the system gets the 8 Off IP address from the DHCP Server when it is booting DIFFSERV Diff Serv pretag value 9 04 System WEB Password Encryption TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 1 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION The Web Admin password can 1 be encrypted for security using RC 6 block encryption A Java VM must be installed on the user s PC RANGE 0 Off 1
301. NS OPERATION CO Line programming ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data a Release 1 7 April 2012 System Networking 3 233 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 0 Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 see details on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 On NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 3 0 Off Off 1 On NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 On TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the
302. NTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Release 1 7 April 2012 Direct Station Select Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF 4 1 Chapter 4 Intercom Chapter 4 Intercom This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the Intercom features available in the MBX IP System Software Direct Station Select Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF When a Flex button on a Digital Phone or DSS Console is assigned as a DSS button it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field BLF The LED indicates the status of the associated Station or System facility DSS button indicates the following conditions In use at Station In use by another Station DND Receive Incoming Call Hold Call Forward Conference at Station Conference by another Station Conference Initiator Lifted handset Leave pre selected custom message CONDITIONS A Station receiving an ICM call is considered Busy and associated station LEDs will flash at all other stations A Station receiving an ICM call will receive visual LED Flex button indication flashing associated with the Calling Station The LED Flash Rate can be adjusted by Admin Programming Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a DSS button to a Flex button on a Digital Phone or a DSS Console PROGRAMMING Station Data System Data RELATED FEATURES Intercom Call 1I CM Call
303. Numbering Plan should a WAN failure occur FoPSTN TEL NUMBER Determines the telephone 3 3 Max 10 number the System should dial to place a call to the Stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan should WAN failure occur Board TNET Attributes TRANS PGM 334 When a board or MBX IP gateway module is to be connected in a Centralized Control network TNET the TNET operation of board or MBX IP gateway module can be enabled or disabled a ON gt I P Phone TNET Attributes TRANS PGM 335 Press the TRANS PG M button and dial 334 Enter Slot No Use the dial pad to enable or disable TNET Central Control networking Press the SAVE button to store the new data When an IP Phone is to be connected in a Centralized Control network TNET the TNET operation of the IP Phone can be enabled or disabled 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 335 2 Enter Bin No of IP Phone 001 108 for MBX IP 100 001 324 for MBX IP 300 3 Use the dial pad to enable or disable TNET Central Control networking 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables H 323 DATA TRANS PGM 360 363 H 323 Routing Attributes TRANS PGM 360 H 323 Call Setup I nfo TRANS PGM 361 y 4 Release 1 7 April 2012 H 323 Incoming Attributes TRANS PGM 362 A 147 Ap
304. OFF 255 Cont 17 350 0 1 sec ON 255 Cont 18 425 0 200 ms ON 200 ms OFF 200msON 1 1400 ms OFF 19 1260 1633 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF 255 Cont Ring Table TRANS PGM 265 Each Ring can have 4 different types among 15 Ring After 4 different ring index programmed CO line or Station may select one of 4 types INDEX RING NAME 1 Normal Call Ring Station 2 Normal Call Ring CO 3 Recall Ring Station 4 Recall Ring CO 5 Forward Call Ring Station 6 Forward Call Ring CO 7 Transfer Call Ring Station 8 Transfer Call Ring CO 9 Call Back Indication Ring 10 Wakeup Indication Ring 11 Revertible Ring 12 Paging Call Ring 13 Handsfree Answer Ring 14 Command Call Ring 15 Alert Ring 16 Alarm Ring 17 Fault Ring Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Ring Freq Cadence Table TRANS PGM 266 INDEX FREQUENCY FREQ 1 FREQ 2 CADENCE REPEAT Voice Mail Dialing Table TRANS PGM 269 Release 1 7 h S April 2012 TENANTS DATA TRANS PGM 270 290 A 117 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 269 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOICE MAIL 1 Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive 1 0 Prefix P call to record a message 1 Suffix
305. OMMAND GROUP ACCESS P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 37 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO LINE ATTRIBUTES A 45 160 CO Line Type 1 Service Type 2 0 Normal Normal 1 DID Outgoing Group Number 01 72 01 Incoming Group Number 4 01 72 01 Tenant Number 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 Digit Conversion Table 6 1 9 1 Signal Type 0 No Signal No Signal 1 Send Wink 2 Wait Seize Ack 3 Send Wink amp Wait Seize Ack 4 Send Sub Answer amp Wait Sub Answer 5 Send Wink amp Send Sub Ans 6 Wait Ack amp Wait Sub Answer 7 Send Wink and Sub Answer amp Wait Wink and Sub Ans Release Timing 8 0 First Release First Release 1 Caller Release 2 Called Release Incoming Outgoing Mode 9 0 Incoming Both 1 Outgoing 2 Both Dialing Type 10 0 DTMF DTMF 1 Pulse 2 R2 Charge Mode 11 0 Free Report 1 Report Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 39 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG
306. ONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone Placing a Voice Over OHVO while receiving a Busy signal OR Responding to a Voice Over announcement PROGRAMMING Station Data p i Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Voice Over 6 33 Chapter 6 Digital Phone System Data Intercom Busy One Digit Service PGM 237 see details on page A 101 PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STEP CALL determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable DIGIT 1 when accessing a busy tone User may dial for one of 2 0 N A the one touch services DIGIT 2 3 DIGIT 3 4 0 N A DIGIT 4 5 1 Call Back DIGIT 5 6 2 Camp On DIGIT 6 7 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over DIGIT 7 8 5 Intrusion DIGIT 8 g 6 Hunt DIGIT 9 10 DIGIT 0 11 DIGIT 12 Call Wait DIGIT 13 Voice Over HARDWARE Digital Phone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Release 1 7 WX vertical April 2012 Attendant Group 7 1 Chapter 7 Attendants Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group The System can have an Attendant Group up to 5 Attendants per Tenant Each Attendant position must be equipped with a multi button Phone and may include multiple DSS Consoles There are 2 different destinations to cover Attendant duties in a Tenant as follows e Night Atte
307. ONS Admin Access Authority is defined only in Web Admin it cannot be defined using Keyset Admin Admin Access Authority applies to all Admin access whether accessed via a Digital Phone ISDN or IP channels OPERATION Detailed operation of Admin access and assigning access authority for each level is given in the Admin Programming Manual ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Keyset Admin TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 5 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT KEYSET ADMIN when an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO 5 0 Disable Disable call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released 1 Enable System Admin Access Authority use Web Admin System Password TRANS PGM 226 see details on page A 91 TRANS PGM 226 BTN RANGE DEFAULT USER PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in Web 1 12 digits none Admin and cannot access Keyset Administration functions ADMIN PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in 2 12digits none Web Admin and can access Keyset Admin MAINT PASSWORD Includes full and unlimited access to 3 12digits none database and maintenance functions RELATED FEATURES Web Administration see page 3 197 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 197 Chapter 3 System Features Web Administration The System database can be acces
308. Off Flex3 DISA Retry Count 1 9 Flex4 Preset Fwd Time 0 20 1sec Flex5 Preset Fwd Ring Table Index 1 80 OFF OFF Wve Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 45 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Timed A 53 169 3 Flex1 Busy Disconnect Flex2 No Answer Flex3 Vacant Number Flex4 Trans No Answer Flex5 Recall No Answer Flex6 DND Flex7 Handset Lifted Flex8 Error 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring Assign 4 ALT Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot Hunt Group OUTGOING CO ATTRIBUTES ISDN Screen Indicator Sending Caller Number Calling Type Calling No Plan Identification A 54 170 User Provided Not Screened User Provided Verified and Passed User Provided Not Screened On 0 Off On Unknown International National Subscriber Not Used National OIAR WDNR OO Unknown 1 ISDN Telephy No Plan 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National Standard 5 Private Unknown Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP
309. Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Numbering Plan System P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 221 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT 1 when accessing a busy tone User may dial for one of 2 0 N A the one touch services DIGIT 2 3 DIGIT 3 4 0 N A DIGIT 4 5 1 Call Back DIGIT 5 6 2 Camp On 7 3 Call Wait DIGITS 4 Voice Over DIGIT 7 8 5 Intrusion DIGIT 8 g 6 Hunt DIGIT 9 10 DIGIT 0 11 DIGIT 12 Call Wait DIGIT 13 Voice Over Call Offer A busy user on one node can be given notification that another call is waiting from another node It is similar to the Camp On function CONDITIONS Call Offer is only applied to a Station that in Busy status During Conference or Paging Call Offer is not activated The System does not support the stand
310. Off Off 1 0n NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0 Off Off message or not 1 0n DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operat
311. On DEFAULT 0 Off RELATED FEATURES Keyset Administration see page 3 194 Multi Level Admin Access see page 3 195 Admin Access Authority use Web Admin Release 1 7 WY vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 199 Chapter 3 System Features Web User Manual The Web Admin User Guide is available on line as part of Web services The main Web page permits access to the Web User guide The guide i is an HTML document which can be modified by replacing the HTML ROM image in the Systemayith an external ROM image in accordance with the appropriate LG Nortel R amp D STI KS CONDITIONS a Access to the User Guide is not passwort protected To support local languages the ROM image of a translated Web User guide may be loaded into System mexsory OPERATION a Operation is detailed in uO Ramin Programming Manual RELATED FEATURES SS Web Adminis k amp n see page 3 197 The MBX IRsestem supports office building mobility employing Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommurmecations DECT The DECT Base stations GDC 400B GDC 600B connect to the Wireless Telephone Interface Module WTIB The WTIB manages up to 8 base stations up to 2 WTIBs may be installed in the System DECT handsets GDC 400H and GDC 450H can roam and maintain uninterrupted communications link to features and resources through the base station to the WTIB CONDITIONS
312. On connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the ATD can 1 On transfer the call to second CO group INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE If incoming 8 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME If an 9 000 300 sec 060 incoming CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after RIs Time Before disconnected warning tone is provided Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 34 Chapter 3 System Features Unsupervised Conference Extend TRANS PGM 166 see details on page A 50 TRANS PGM 166 UNSUP CONF ENTEND If this feature is set to ON unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial feature code after warning tone is heard BTN 3 RANGE 0 Disable 1 Enable DEFAULT Disable Unsupervised Conference Extend TRANS PGM 171 see details on page A 57 TRANS PGM 171 UNSUP CONF EXTEND If this feature is set to ON Unsupervised Conf Timer can be extended by dialing feature code after warning tone is heard BTN RANGE 0 Off 1 On DEFAULT Off Unsupervised Conference Timer TRANS PGM 166 see details on page A 50 TR
313. On tone is detected to disconnect LCO line 1 On ABSWER WAITING CALL If this feature is set to ON system 6 0 Off Off sends answer when call is waited 1 On UNIVERSAL ANSWER If this feature is set to ON any 7 0 Off Off station to answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal 1 On Answer feature code RLS GUARD TIME If CO release signaling is not completed 8 00 15 sec 01 successfully CO line is disconnected when timer expires UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call 9 000 255 min 000 without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected WAIT CLRFWD TIME Clear Forward Waiting Time 10 001 300 sec 300 MAX RING TIME Max Ring Time for when incoming CO 11 015 300 sec 120 calls are transferred recalled DISA SUPERVISION TMR DISA Supervision Timer 12 1 9 sec 2 VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR Determines the amount of time 13 0 9 sec paused before playing VMIB announcement Release 1 7 XX vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 25 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 181 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FEATURE CODE If set to Feature Code and valid feature 3 Valid Feature code is assigned then assigned feature is
314. Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting 10 43 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q CNT DISPLAY This entry defines 6 0 Off 0 Off display of Queuing count of ACD call 1 On Q CNT INTERVAL This entry defines display 7 0 Real Time 0 Real Time interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec LOGIN PASSWD CHECK This entry defines check 8 0 Off 0 Off the password when agent log in 1 On LOGIN AGENT STATE This entry defines usage of 9 0 Ready state 0 Ready state default Agent State option when agent log in 1 DND state 2 Work state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER This entry defines usage 10 0 Off 0 Off of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AUTO WORK This entry defines usage of 11 0 Off 0 Off Agent Auto Work option when agent log in 1 On LOGIN HANDSET This entry defines usage of 12 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log in 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode LOGOUT HANDSET This entry defines usage of 13 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log out 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode 4 Logon Mode LOGOUT RESTRIC
315. P Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 91 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Call Duration Restriction Alarm 46 Tone Type Normal Time 1 sec Tone Number 13 Confirm Tone A 133 290 47 Tone Type Normal Time 1 sec Tone Number 8 Single Error Tone 48 Tone Type Normal Time 3 sec Tone Number 9 Transfer Hold Tone 49 Tone Type Internal Time MOH Tone Number 30 sec TENANT DATA Transfer Hold Tone Station 50 Tone Type Internal MOH Time 30 sec Tone Number Camp On Hold Tone CO 51 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 14 Camp On Hold Tone Station 52 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 14 Call Wait Hold Tone CO 53 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 14 Call Wait Hold Tone Station 54 Tone Type Normal Time 30 sec Tone Number 14 Normal Hold Tone CO 55 Tone Type Internal MOH Time 30 sec Tone Number Normal Hold Tone Station 56 Tone Type Internal MOH Time 30 sec Tone Number Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES
316. P Gain TRANS PGM 433 TRANS PGM 433 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from IP PHONE 4 0 63 34 HS LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from IP PHONE 5 0 63 34 HF LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN IP PHONE HS TX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 1P Phone HF TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 434 TRANS PGM 434 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from IP PHONE 4 0 63 34 HS LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from IP PHONE 5 0 63 34 HF LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 LIP TX HF RTP GAIN IP PHONE HF TX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 WIT TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 435 TRANS PGM 435 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WIT TX RTP GAIN WIT TX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 WIT TX RTP GAIN WIT TX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 WIT TX RTP GAIN WIT TX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 WIT TX RTP GAIN WIT TX gain fr
317. PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO LINE ATTRIBUTES III A 47 162 CO Access Mode 1 10 Blocked Line Normal CO Line 1 Normal CO Line 2 Dedicated Line Digit Sending Mode 2 Overlap Overlap Enblock Max Digit Length 3 100 32 32 Min Digit Length for Overlap Mode 4 00 32 00 Check Password 5 11 On 0 Off Off R2 Connect Mode 6 0 End to End End to End 1 Link by Link R2MFC Backward Value 7 01 15 01 Dummy Dial Tone Service 8 1 On 0 Off Off CO LINE ATTRIBUTES IV A 48 163 CID Mode 1 10 Disable Disable 1 FSK 2 DTAS FSK 3 DTMF 4 Russia CID Russia CID Detect 2 1 All 0 Local Alll Russia CID Request 3 1 Auto 0 User Auto Russia CID Digit Number 4 04 10 7 Russia CID No Answer Timer 5 001 300 1sec 20 Russia CID Request Count 6 1 3 1 Russia CID Request First Delay Timer 7 010 150 10msec 030 Russia CID Request Retry Delay Timer 8 10 30 10msec 10 Ave Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP INCOMING CO ATTRIBUTES INCOMING CO ATTRIBUTES II y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 41 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT
318. PGM 100 BTN RANGE REMARK NATION CODE enables SPEAKER activation when a CO IP 1 4 digits 1 DSS or other feature button is pressed handsfree SITE NAME selects Speakerphone mode Headset mode or 2 24 characters Ear Mic Mode Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Nation Codes Appendix A System Programming Tables NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE Default 1 U S A Release 1 7 b April 2012 Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 A 11 Appendix A System Programming Tables Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 101 2 Enter Slot number 3 To change board type press the Flex button 1 and dial board Refer to NOTE2 Board Type Code To change device number press the Flex button 2 and dial device 5 To store the location data press the SAVE button Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 BTN RANGE REMARK SLOT ASSIGNMENT refer to Board Type Code table below 1 SLOT 02 enter device port number 2 NOTE Ifthe DIP switch of the manual board detection the 1st DIP Switch is ON system will detect the installed board type automatically If the 1st DIP switch is OFF the board type code must be entered at each slot After manually setting Rack Slot as
319. PGM 132 FLEX 4 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DND ACCESS enables DND to be activated by the station 4 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 156 Chapter 3 System Features Station Group Executive Secretary Assign TRANS PGM 241 see details on page A 102 TRANS PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXECUTIVE NUMBER Assigns Executive station 1 l SECRETARY ASSIGN Assigns Secretary stations enter 2 FLEX 1 3 secretary station range or press FLEX 1 3 and enter station number to assign ICM CALL TO EXEC Determines call forwarding when 3 0 Secretary 0 Secretary Executive Secretary is in use 1 Secretary if SECRETARY all internal calls to the Exec Station except for Executive in DND calls from executives having executive access privilege are routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executive station status SEC IF EXEC IN DND internal calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND CO CALL TO EXEC Determines call forwarding when 4 0 Secretary 0 Secretary Executive Secretary is in use 1 Secretary if SECRETARY all incoming CO calls to the Exec Station are Executive in DND routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executive status SEC IF ECEC DND incoming CO calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND
320. PGM 310 A 140 NETWORKING DATA TRANS PGM 320 321 A 141 Net Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 A 141 Net Numbering Plan Table TRANS PGM 321 A 142 TNET CENTRALIZED NETWORKING TRANS PGM 330 335 A 143 eas ane TNET Basic Attributes f RANSIPGM 330 A 143 TNET CM Atiribiites TRANS PGM 331 A 143 aPN Attributes TRANS PGM 333 A 144 oard TNET Attributes TRANS PGM 334 A 145 IP Phone TNET Attributes TRANS PGM 335 A 145 H 323 DATA TRANS PGM 360 363 A 146 H 323 Routing Attributes TRANS PGM 360 A 146 H 323 Call Setup Info TRANS PGM 361 A 146 H 323 Incoming Attributes TRANS PGM 362 A 147 GK Setup Info TRANS PGM 363 A 148 GAIN amp CADENCE CONTROL TRANS PGM 400 440 A 149 DKT RX Gain TRANS PGM 400 A 149 SLT RX Gain TRANS PGM 401 A 149 DECT RX Gain TRANS PGM 402 A 150 IP Phone RX Gain TRANS PGM 403 A 150 Analog CO RX Gain TRANS PGM 404 A 151 Digital CO RX Gain TRANS PGM 405 A 152 VMIB RX Gain TRANS PGM 406 A 152 External Page RX Gain TRANS PGM 407 A 153 DSP RX Gain TRANS PGM 415 A 154 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 420 426 A 154 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 430 436 A 157
321. Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more Push To Talk groups The PTT Group capacities for the MBX IP system are shown in the table below PTT Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 10 10 Members in a Group 50 50 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 208 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Page Group 0 9 for the MBX IP 100 and the MBX IP 300 The system will display the member of PTT group NOTE For group members enter a station or station range For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number For a range enter the first and last station number in the range 3 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 208 BTN PTT MEMBER ASG this entry assigns stations as members of a 1 PTT group RANGE DEFAULT Interphone Group TRANS PGM 209 To call the stations using only one or two digits some stations can be gathered to the same Interphone Group refer to TRANS PGM 209 for a description of the functions and data entries required Interphone Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 10 10 Members in a Group 10 10 Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables NOTE Pilot Hunt G
322. Press the SAVE button to store Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Button LED Flash Rate TRANS PGM 234 A 97 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 234 BTN HOLD button LED status while Paging 13 HOLD button LED status when in Voice over mode 14 HOLD Reserved 15 RING LED status when receiving an intercom call 16 RING LED status when receiving an incoming CO 17 call RING LED status when a message is left 18 HEADSET LED status when the headset is used 19 LIP 8000 Phone HEADSET LED status when Bluetooth is used 20 IP 8000 Phone DN button LED status when use is active 21 DN button LED status when another station is in use 22 DN button LED when status in DND 23 DN button LED status when receiving an intercom 24 call DN button LED status when call is in Held state 25 DN button LED status when Call forward is set 26 DN button LED status when am in conference 27 DN button LED status when another station is in 28 conference mode DN button LED status when active conference 29 supervisor RANGE Color 1 3 Flashing Rate 00 14 DEFAULT Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash Color Flash
323. Programming Tables Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 286 288 Local Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 286 as Release 1 7 x April 2012 Tenant Tone Table TRANS PGM 290 A 133 4 Appendix A System Programming Tables Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 286 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number up to 4 digits can be assigned for local call prefix index Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Long Distance Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 287 Each tenant has a Long Distance Call Prefix Table relating to CDR 1 2 4 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 287 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number up to 4 digits can be assigned for the Long Distance call prefix index Press the SAVE button to store the data entry International Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 288 Each tenant has an International Call Prefix Table relating to CDR 1 2 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 288 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range 1 5 for the MBX IP 100 and 1 9 for MBX IP 300 Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin number up to 4 digits can be assigned for the International call prefix index Press the SAVE button
324. Register 557 556 556 Release 1 7 Wv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 541 xx Xx Parking Location 00 49 88 xxx Xxx CO Line 001 200 MBX IP 300 01 80 MBX IP 100 524 0 9 0 9 PTT Group Log out 527 Conf Room 528 Conf Room 529 HH MM Release 1 7 y April 2012 DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN C 15 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 54 Cancel Temp COS Down 532 532 532 55 Password Change 533 533 533 56 Inter Phone Group Access 534 534 534 57 Call Wait Request 535 535 535 58 Preselected MSG PGM 536 536 536 59 Forced Handsfree Call 537 537 537 60 Call Based CLIR 582 582 582 61 CLIR Access 583 583 583 62 COLR Access 584 584 584 63 Pilot Hunt Call 585 585 585 64 Command Call Oneway 581 581 581 65 Command Call Conf 580 580 580 66 Intrude Register 589 589 589 67 Camp On Register 590 590 590 68 OHVO Register 591 591 591 69 Mobile Num Register 592 592 592 70 Mobile CLI Register 593 593 593 71 Mobile Access 594 594 594 72 CCR Access 670 670 670 73 CCR Access And Drop 671 671 671 74 System Hold 560 560 560 75 Return Hel
325. Remark 12 26 13 10 01 00 00 32 000182343507951 1 0 Unanswered 12 27 13 30 01 00 01 23 000182343507951 3 150 Charge Time Charged STA Item Bar Cost tax 4 2 26 19 32 COFFEE SHOP COFFEE 500 10 Item Charge Taxfrate Sum 1 ROOM CHARGE 80 8 10 00 88 rate 02 GOLD 2 CALLCHARGE 150 15 10 00 165 3 BAR CHARGE 4500 10 510 4 PRE PAID 200 Method of payment VISA TOTAL z 475 Register Bar and Mini bar Charge CONDITIONS Release 1 7 L vertical April 2012 Register Bar and Mini bar Charge B 35 Appendix B Hotel Management OPERATION Front Desk To register bar or mini bar charge 1 ak wn Dial the PGM button 84 Dial the guest room number Dial product code 00 99 Press the SAVE button Dial mini bar cost Max 6 digits LCD will show room no mini bar cost the name of item If you dial the cost becomes a minus value The value is toggled between minus and plus by dialing Plus is the default sign Press the SAVE button to save the cost If it is successful you may hear a service set tone And mini bar cost is registered and SMDR Information for the mini bar cost will be printed through RS 232C Otherwise you may hear an error tone Service Station To register bar or mini bar charge 1 or ON Dial Hotel Mini bar Register feature code Dial the guest room number Dial product code 00 99 Press the SAVE button Dial mini bar cost
326. Repeat 12 1 5 1 Announcement Start Position FWD AFTER QUEUING This entry defines reroute usage 13 0 Off Off after queuing time over 1 On Q FWD DEST Reroute destination after queuing time over 14 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Service Status 10 15 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q CNT DISPLAY This entry defines 6 0 Off 0 Off display of Queuing count of ACD call 1 On Q CNT INTERVAL This entry defines display 7 0 Real Time 0 Real Time interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec LOGIN PASSWD CHECK This entry defines check 8 0 Off 0 Off the password when agent log in 1 On LOGIN AGENT STATE This entry defines usage of 9 0 Ready state 0 Ready state default Agent State option when agent log in 1 DND state 2 Work state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER This entry defines usage 10 0 Off 0 Off of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AUTO WORK This entry defines usage of 11 0 Off 0 Off Agent Auto Work option when agent log in 1 On LOGIN HANDSET This entry defines usage of 12 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log
327. Restriction 0 No Restriction Normal CO line 1 All Calls 2 Long International 3 Internationa DEDICATED LINE Determines the call restriction 2 0 No restriction 0 No Restriction for TIE line 1 Restriction LOCAL CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 3 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of Local calls after the Restriction timer 1 Repeat tone expires 2 Single tone amp Drop LONG CALL AFTER R TIME Determines the 4 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of Long Distance calls after the Restriction 1 Repeat tone timer expires 2 Single tone amp Drop INTERNAT AFTER R TIMEDetermines the 5 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of International calls after the Restriction 1 Repeat tone timer expires 2 Single tone amp Drop DEDICATED CALL AFTER R TM Determines the 6 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of TIE calls after the Restriction timer 1 Repeat tone expires 2 Single tone amp Drop Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Call Time Restriction 3 42 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 285 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOCAL CALL TONE RPT TIMER Determines the Tone Repeat 1 010 254 020 timer of Local calls LONG CALL TONE RPT TMR Determines the Tone Repeat timer of 2 010 254 020 Long Distance calls INTNATION CALL TONE RPT Determines the Tone Repeat timer 3 010 254 020 of International calls DEDICATED CALL TON
328. Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call Svc After Restriction Time Internatl Call 5 0 No Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call Svc After Restriction Time Dedicated Call 6 0 No Restriction No Restriction 1 All Call 2 Long International Call CO CALL RESTRICTION II A 131 285 Tone Repeat Time Local Call 1 10 254 1sec 20 Tone Repeat Time Long Call 2 10 254 1sec 20 Tone Repeat Time International Call 10 254 1sec 20 Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 87 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 2nd Dial Tone 2 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 11 CO Dial Tone A 133 290 3 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 17 DISA Dial Tone 4 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 10 LCR Virtual Tone 5 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 17 TENANT DATA Digit Conversion Virtual Tone 6 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 17 Password Dial Tone 7 Tone Type Prompt Time 10 sec Tone Number 10 Internal Busy Tone 8 Tone Type Prompt Time 10 sec Tone Number 11 External Busy Tone 9 Tone Type Normal Time 10 sec Tone Number 16 CO Line Busy
329. S PGM 284 BIN RANGE DEFAULT INTERNAT AFTER R TIMEDetermines the 5 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of International calls after the Restriction 1 Repeat tone timer expires 2 Single tone amp Drop DEDICATED CALL AFTER R TM Determines the 6 0 Single tone 0 Single tone operation of TIE calls after the Restriction timer 1 Repeat tone expires 2 Single tone amp Drop TRANS PGM 285 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOCAL CALL TONE RPT TIMER Determines the Tone Repeat 1 010 254 020 timer of Local calls LONG CALL TONE RPT TMR Determines the Tone Repeat timer of 2 010 254 020 Long Distance calls INTNATION CALL TONE RPT Determines the Tone Repeat timer 3 010 254 020 of International calls DEDICATED CALL TONE RPT Determines the Repeat timer of 4 010 254 020 Dedicated Line calls LOCAL CALL DISC TMR Determines entry defines Disconnect 5 10 60 15 timer of Local calls LONG CALL DISC TMR Determines the disconnect timer of Long 6 10 60 15 Distance calls INTERNATIONAL DISC TMR Determines the Disconnect timer of 7 10 60 15 International calls DEDICATED CALL DISC TMR Determines the Disconnect timer of 8 10 60 15 Dedicated Line calls LOCAL CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of Local 9 001 100 003 calls LONG CALL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of Long 10 001 100 003 Distance calls INTERNATIONAL REST TMR Determines the Restriction timer of 11 001 100 003 International calls DEDICATE
330. S digit is dialed instead of CO 1 On Group Access code when there is no available path ARS DGT 1 Alternate CO Group Access code to 6 Max 8 digits be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find available CO line ARS 1 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 7 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used ARS DGT 2 Second alternate CO Group Access 8 Max 8 digits code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line ARS 2 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 9 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 see details on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 On NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming Release 1 7 XY vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features P d p Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 239 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT
331. ST When Night Service type is Forward 4 applied destination can be assigned HOLIDAY SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 5 0 Release Release call when group status is Holiday Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST When Holiday Service type is 6 l Forward applied destination can be assigned OVERFLOW SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute 7 0 Release Release ACD call when group status is Overflow Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward OVERFLOW FWD DEST When Overflow Service type is 8 l Forward applied destination can be assigned MAX QUEUING COUNT This entry defines MAX queuing 9 00 99 10 call count If queuing ACD Call count is over the max q count ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status QUEUING ANNC STEP This entry defines queuing 10 1 5 1 announcement play service step One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call REPEAT COUNT This entry defines total queuing 11 0 No Repeat No Repeat announcement repeat service count If this entry is defines as 1 One Time One or More Times service Queuing Announcement will be 2 Three Times played from 1st to defined Step And then from Repeat 3 Five Times Position Queuing Announcement will be restarted to defined 4 Ten Times step until Repeat Count 5 Twenty Times REPEAT POSITION This entry defines Repeat Announcement Start Position 12 1 5 Release 1 7 YW vertical
332. Station Numbering Plan P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 269 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Message Retrieval Options see page 3 269 VMIB Auto Attendant see page 3 258 Message Retrieval see page 3 263 HARDWARE VMIB Message Retrieval Options The user may dial the digit 9 to receive the VM Long Options prompt while in the Voice Mailbox including during or after a Voice Message or System Prompt except when an option has been selected that requires user dialing The VM Long Options prompt is To play New Messages press 1 To play Saved Messages press 2 To set Station Forwarding press 7 available only for remote access To set Greeting or Password press 8 To Disconnect press Press 0 for the Operator Press 9 to hear this message again The VMIB Voice Mail will respond to incoming digits as shown in the following table VMIB Voice Mail Input Digit Function Prompt 1 Play New Msg 2 Play Saved Msg 7 Set Cancel Fwd 8 Mail Box Setting Mailbox Settings greeting password 9 VM Long Options VM Long Options Drop Goodbye 0 Attendant Group Call Call to System Attendant When the user responds by dialing 1 the first New Message is played At the end of message playback the New Message option prompt is presented To Replay Message press 1
333. System Groups 3 170 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE This entry defines the type of queuing tone 7 1 Normal 3 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER This entry defines the timer for queuing 8 000 300 secs 30 forward or second queuing announcement QUEUING TONE NO This entry defines queuing tone 9 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal QUEUING PRT ANNC This entry defines queuing prompt 10 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC QUEUING REPEAT NO This entry defines queuing repeat 11 000 100 3 number QUEUING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 12 000 100 secs 0 before queuing repeat QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 14 01 12 none queuing annc Pause time Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 171 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 15 1 Normal 4 queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH
334. T PAGE TIME OUT TMR Determines the maximum duration of a 4 000 300 15 page after which the caller and Page Zone are released secs Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom Numbering Plan RELATED FEATURES a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Push To Talk Paging 4 23 Chapter 4 Intercom Push To Talk Paging Digital Phone can be assigned as a member of one of the System s Push To Talk PTT Page Groups The Digital Phone User may log in or log out of any one or all PTT Groups it is a member of Once logged in the User may place or receive One Way Page announcements to from other Users who are logged in to the same PTT group To place a PTT Page announcement the User must press and hold the PTT Flex button An Attendant may log in out other Stations to from PTT groups CONDITIONS e Conditions associated with Internal External amp All Call Page apply to PTT Paging e To access PTT Paging the Station must be permitted access to System Paging If allowed access to all PTT Groups a Station may log into all Groups PTT Group 0 to place announcements to all Groups simultaneously and receive announcements from any group e A Station can only Log In to PTT groups to which it is assigned as a member e The Station must have a PTT button to place or receive PTT announcements by
335. TION This entry defines 14 0 Not use 0 Not use restriction of Logout State Agent 1 CO outgoing 2 All call CO ANSWER TIME This entry defines when the 15 0 Queued to group 0 Queued to group ACK message is sent to caller party 1 Agent Answer INFO DATA PRINT This entry defines usage of 16 0 Off 0 Off ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not 1 On Information Traffic data will be printed at Information Print Port Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Call I ndication OPERATIONS Agent Assign ACD Call Indication feature code Agent Assign NON ACD Call Indication feature code PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Indication 10 45 Station Port Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Station Port Attribute PGM 124 see details on page A 27 PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MSG WAIT INDICATION this menu determines the 1 01 48 MW Remind Tone way to notify a station to wait message APPLY DIFF RING determine user s differential ring 2 1 9 All Ring mode Applying to all ring mode or normal ring mode ICM DIFF RING ID set the intercom differential ring 3 000 254 On ID usually 1 4 is valid CO DIFF RING ID set the CO line differential ring ID 4
336. TION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button as a UA button Press TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 UA Feature Code HOLD SAVE To access an incoming UA call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial UA Feature Code the UA call is connected OR 3 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 4 Press the UA button the UA call is connected Single Line Phone To access an incoming UA call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial UA Feature Code ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Universal Answer Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 20 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 85 Universal Answer 587 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO Line Data Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES VMI B Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail VMIB VMI B Auto Attendant y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 259 Chapter 3 System Features Conference Room Net number Company directory Re record VMIB announcement Direct VM transfer VM access In addition the System will monitor digits for a Station number if the User dials a Station number the Auto Attendant will complete an unsupervised call transfer to the station CONDITIONS There are no individual time limits on Auto Attendant announcements The external caller may experience a Ring
337. TT Group Access 524 PTT Group 0 9 Log out 47 Hot Desk Log In Log Out 525 48 Name Register 526 49 Create Conf Room 527 Conf Room 50 Delete Conf Room 528 Conf Room 51 Wake Up Register 529 HH MM 52 Wake Up Cancel 530 53 Temporarily COS Down 531 54 Cancel Temp COS Down 532 55 Password Change 533 56 Inter Phone Group Access 534 57 Call Wait Request 535 58 Preselected MSG TRANS PGM 536 59 Forced Handsfree Call 537 60 Call Based CLIR 582 61 CLIR Access 583 62 COLR Access 584 63 Pilot Hunt Call 585 64 Command Call Oneway 581 Release 1 7 Wv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 114 A 21 Appendix A System Programming Tables BTN FEATURE REMARK 95 ACD Agent Auto Work 503 96 ACD Agent Auto Answer 504 97 ACD Call Indication 508 98 Non ACD Call Indication 509 99 ACD Supervisor Group Forward 890 100 ACD Supervisor Night 891 101 ACD Supervisor Holiday 892 102 ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer 893 103 ACD Supervisor Agent State Check 894 104 ACD Supervisor Silent Monitor 895 105 ACD Supervisor Call Traffic Check 896 106 ACDAnnouncement Play amp Check 899 107 Day Night T
338. The CO call is routed to 2 Attendant Release 1 7 WY verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 180 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER CO RING ASSIGN The CO call is 3 l routed according to Ring Assign Table see TRANS PGM 167 NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL If destination is set to 4 01 80 Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table See TRANS PGM 181 NO ANSWER TONE If destination is set to Tone the 5 Error Busy tone is heard NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP The CO call is 6 routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination NO ANSWER RING The call is routed to the same 7 destination again NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred 8 l station again Only possible for Transfer No Answer case Station Group Pilot Hunt Group TRANS PGM 210 see details on page A 74 TRANS PGM 210 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONDITION Determines call coverage condition for Pilot Hunt 1 0 ALL All group 1 Intercom 2 External SERVICE TYPE This entry defines Service Type 2 0 Terminal Terminal Terminal Circular 1 Circular TIME TABLE INDEX Time Table index 3 1 9 1 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of a Pilot Hunt 4 group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp
339. The unconditional preset forward 4 Max 32 digits destination of external call EXTERNAL BUSY The busy preset forward destination of 5 Max 32 digits external call EXTERNAL NO ANSWER The no answer preset forward 6 Max 32 digits destination of external call Call Forward No Answer Timer TRANS PGM 143 FLEX 4 see details on page A 40 TRANS PGM 143 CFW NO ANS TMR Busy or No Answer employs this CFW NO ANS TMR timer If the station does not respond during the CFW NO ANS TMR timer Call is forwarded to Call Forward Destination BTN RANGE 0 600 secs DEFAULT 15 secs er Release 1 7 Y Vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Park 3 24 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Call Forward see page 3 15 DND see page 3 77 Auto Attendant see page 3 87 Preset Call Forward see page 3 22 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 Call Park A User may place Park an active intercom or CO IP call in a special holding location Park Orbit for easy access from any station in the system The system has 50 holding locations Park Orbits CONDITIONS If the selected Park Orbit returns a busy signal the user may simply dial another Park Orbit without disconnecting A Parked call will recall to the station that parked the call should the Call Park Timer expire The normal Hold R
340. Tone The Wake Up alarm ring signal follows the Ring Table If the User does not answer the Wake Up Alarm ring it is repeated according to the Wake Up Retry Counter with the interval of Wake Up Retry Timer NOTE The value N of the Wake Up Retry Counter means that N repetition of Wake Up Retry can occur after the first Wake Up Alarm ring occurs The wake up alarm ring will recur according to the Wake up Retry Time and continues during Wake Up Alarm Ring Timer If no action is taken by the User until the end of the Wake Up Retry Counter the ring signal is presented at the Attendant Station with a display designating the Station number that did not respond to Wake Up Alarm Time hh mm must be entered in the Military format 24 hour The Daily Alarm will reset and repeat each day until erased cancelled however One Time Alarm will reset and cancel automatically When registering Wake up Time if user dials 1 then the One Time Alarm will be set or if User dials 2 then the Daily Alarm will be set OPERATION System Attendant To register a Wake Up Alarm 1 Press the TRANS PG N button 2 Dial 045 Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial the desired Station range for a single station enter the same Station Number twice Enter Time for Alarm hh mm 5 Fora Daily reminder Repeating Alarm dial 6 Press HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programm
341. UNCOND CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and 3 Max 16 digits digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is unconditional DAY CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to 4 Max 16 digits be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Digit Conversion 3 76 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 251 NIGHT CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Night when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT BTN RANGE Max 16 digits DEFAULT TIMED CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT Max 16 digits D1 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR Max 16 digits D1 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR Max 16 digits D1 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR Max 16 digits D2 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits
342. URE 113 REMARK 82 Door Open 1 RELATED FEATURES Loud Bell Control LBC see page 3 116 Door Phone An intercom box can be connected to the System and located in a convenient place at your facility for receiving page announcements and intercom calls Additionally the intercom box can signal assigned Stations using the Auto Dial feature in the System CONDITIONS An Intercom box can be a member of the Page Zone group To receive Intercom box calls set the Auto Dial Digit and Pause timers TRANS PGM 138 An Intercom box can be answered automatically using Hands free mode when in ICM Answer Mode TRANS PGM124 The Intercom box has the CALL button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Door Phone 3 81 OPERATION To call an intercom box perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Chapter 3 System Features 2 Dial the Station number of intercom box or press the programmed flexible button for the Intercom box 3 After answering the call from the Intercom box announce the call To place a call from an intercom box Press the CALL button and assigned station will ring ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Station Auto Dial Attribute TRANS PGM 138 FLEX 1 2 see details on page A 38 TRANS PGM 138 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO DIAL DGT Digits will b
343. VERFLOW SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute 7 0 Release Release ACD call when group status is Overflow Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward OVERFLOW FWD DEST When Overflow Service type is 8 l Forward applied destination can be assigned MAX QUEUING COUNT This entry defines MAX queuing 9 00 99 10 call count If queuing ACD Call count is over the max q count ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10 57 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL after conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines usage 5 0 Of
344. VLAN sets Virtual LAN tag and priority for Ethernet frame e Diffserv sets Diffserv Code Point priority for IP packet e IPSec enables IPSec to establish IPSec tunnel and encryption of IP packet e SRTP enables Secure RTP for RTP packet payload using AES Advanced Encryption Service CONDITIONS For Web Admin the password is encrypted using the Java Virtual Encryption plug in A Java Virtual Machine MS or Sun must be installed in the User s PC to support password encryption Security and priority characteristics can be set for all devices local or remote The implementation of IPSec employs a proprietary Key exchange protocol from the MP to the System device OPERATION System Once configured Operation of Security and Priority is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Web Password Encryption TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 1 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION The Web Admin password can 1 0 Off 0 Off be encrypted for security using RC 6 block encryption A Java VM 1 On must be installed on the user s PC Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 One Digit Service 3 128 Chapter 3 System Features One Digit Service When a User calls a Station and receives a Busy signal the User can access the following features by dialing one digit e Camp on e Call Wait e Voice Over e Intrusion e Pilot
345. X gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN DTIM HS RX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 DTI M HF RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 422 TRANS PGM 422 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from SLTM 1 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from IP PHONE HS 4 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from IP PHONE HF 5 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 DTIM RX HF RTP GAIN DTIM HF RX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables I P Phone HS RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 423 I P Phone HF RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 424 WIT RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 425 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 430 436 A 157 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 425 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WIT RX RTP GAIN WIT RX gain from IP PHONE HF 5 0 63 34 WIT RX RTP GAIN WIT RX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 WIT RX RTP GAIN WIT RX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 426 TRANS PGM 425 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain f
346. a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determines the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant ATD CALL BY STA NO This entry defines attendant call 8 l Off by dialing attendant member 0 the call for attendant follows normal call 1 the call for attendant follows attendant group call RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 9 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 10 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants
347. about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state will be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute2 PGM 214 see details on page A 79 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 On change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL after conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines u
348. aced CO line access is disabled If COS is set to 1 there are no restrictions OPERATION System Dialing restrictions are automatically applied based on COS assignments Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 66 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Station COS TRANS PGM 137 see details on page A 37 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS Station s COS in Day mode 1 00 15 1 NIGHT COS Station s COS in Night mode 2 00 15 1 TIMED COS Station s COS in Timed mode 00 15 1 Table Data System Time Table TRANS PGM 253 see details on page A 107 TRANS PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT defines the comment of the Time 1 32 characters none Table SYSTEM TIME ZONE defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0 73 0 Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS defines Daylight Saving Time of Time On Off Off Table RING MODE defines the ring mode of Time Table 4 0 Day 0 Day 1 Night 2 Timed AUTO RING MODE defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time 5 On Off Off Table Weekly Time Table TRANS PGM 254 see details on page A 108 TRANS PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 1 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Tuesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 2
349. ad entries on page C 105 STA RANGE VIEW Once a connection is made to the System the 2 Station number assigned to DTIM SLTM will be displayed IP ADDRESS Displays the IP Address of the IP phone Phontage F W IP ADDRESS Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP 4 phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security 5 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 139 Chapter 3 System Features Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 104 FLEX 2 see details on page A 12 TRANS PGM 104 BTN RANGE REMARK MAX NO OF IP PHONE that can be registered to the System 2 32 Slot Assignment amp Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 TRANS PGM 103 see details on page A 11 and page A 11 TRANS PGM 101 BTN RANGE REMARK SLOT ASSIGNMENT refer to Board Type Code table below 1 SLOT 02 enter device port number 2 TRANS PGM 103 BTN RANGE REMARK CO LINE BOARD 1 l STATION BOARD 2 88 SIP Phone 99 IP Phone or Phontage VMIB BOARD 3 l Registration with I D Password The System can be programmed to register a Phontage or SIP Phone using an ID amp Password Devices with matching ID amp Password can be registered regardless of the Database Protection Switch position OPERATION Registration is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING
350. ailable A secondary NTP server address can be defined should the first server not respond If set the system adjusts for the local time zone assigned in the system as the Standard System Time as well as Daylight Savings Time DST OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Battery Back up Memory 3 14 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Network Time Date TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 5 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NETWORK DATE TIME USE If set to ON the System updates the 5 0 Off 0 Off Date amp Time with Network Date amp Time when the System Date amp 1 On Time is different NTP Active use Web Admin TRANS PGM 233 NTP Sever Address use Web Admin TRANS PGM 233 Standard System Time Local Time Zone use Web Admin TRANS PGM 233 RELATED FEATURES Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Automatic System Daylight Savings Time see page 3 12 System Clock Set see page 7 42 Battery Back up Memory The system database is protected from power loss by a long life 10 year lithium dry cell battery Should local power fail the battery will maintain the system memory and proper operation of the system clock CONDITIONS The Initialization switch must be in the ON position to enable Memory Battery Back up Otherwise should
351. al is sent to station after the programmed delay e Noring Ring signal is not sent to station but only LED flashes When the DN receives an incoming call the DN button LED will flash Red regardless of the ring delay option However the LCD of a station modified to display the incoming call after it receives a ring signal can be automatically answered just by going off hook However before the station receives a ring signal the incoming DN call cannot be answered automatically by going off hook but the station user should press the flashing DN button manually Access Option When a station has multiple DN buttons each DN button can have a different access option All Call No restriction e Dial After Seizure No restriction about incoming ringing but when making outgoing calls with this button user should seize the DN by pressing this button even if this button is assigned to prime number button e Incoming Only Outgoing call is not possible with this button When there is incoming call to a DN the DN button LED will flash in red color regardless of the ring delay option However the LCD of station is changed to display the incoming call after it receives ring signal and the call can be answered automatically just by going off hook However before the station receives ring signal the incoming DN call cannot be answered automatically by going off hook but the station user should press the flashing DN button manually R
352. all If Caller or Called Release is 2 Called Release set CO line is released when caller or called party released the call INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 17 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 170 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALLING NUM PLAN Select Calling number plan 4 0 Unknown Unknown of ISDN SETUP message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private CALLED NUM PLAN ID Select Called number 5 0 Unknown Unknown plan of ISDN SETUP message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private BEARER CAPABILITY Select Bearer Capability of 6 0 Speech Speech ISDN SETUP message 1 Unrestricted 2 Restricted 3 3 1KHz Audio 4 7KHz 5 Video ISDN LINE TYPE The system will encode voice 7 0 A law A law using the A law or u law PCM format and should be 1 U law set to match the ISDN Back bone type SENDING COMPLETE IE If set will send 8 0 Off Off Sending Complete IE to ISDN SETUP message 1 On MAKE TRANSIT CLI When no CLI is sent with a 9 0 Off Off transit call system will initiate a CLI to CO direct 1 On transit call
353. all Time Restriction The System can be programmed to limit the length of calls at specified stations When a specified Station places a call the system initiates the Call Restrict timer and 15 seconds prior to timer expiration a warning tone is delivered At expiration the system terminates the call returning the external CO IP line to idle Call time restriction can be applied differently according to call types Local call Long Distance call or international call CONDITIONS The warning tone can be provided periodically or once as programmed Once activated the Call Warning Tone timer continues timing while the call is connected to the system even if the call is transferred or picked up at another station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Call Time Restriction 3 41 OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Chapter 3 System Features Call Duration Restrict Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 4 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL DURATION RESTRICT restricts CO Call Duration to station 4 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable Tenant Data Call Duration Restriction TRANS PGM 284 285 see details on page A 131 TRANS PGM 284 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NORMAL CO LINE Determines call restriction for 1 0 No
354. all from a room room cut setting is checked If room cut is registered the call is released OPERATION Front Desk To register cancel room cut information 1 Dial the PGM button 31 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range Press the SAVE button Designate whether to use trunk call 0 Allowed 1 Not Allowed Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 7 Otherwise you may hear an error tone oa amp Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 ICM Call Barring Appendix B Hotel Management Guest Station E ICM Call ICM Call Not Allowed Allowed l Type Service Front Attendant Office Same Different Same Different Station Desk Extension Group Group Group Group Guest O X O O O O O Option Station Service O O O O Option Station Front O O O O Option Desk Attendant O O O O Option Office Extension Option Option Option Option O NOTE CONDITIONS Release 1 7 h April 2012 One Time CO Call Use B 13 Appendix B Hotel Management Basically a guest station can call hotel guest stations in the same PMS group except PMS group 0 In other words if ICM Call is not allowed a guest station can call guest stations only included in its PMS grou
355. amming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 176 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 15 1 Normal 4 queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for forward 16 000 300 secs 30 destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuingtone 17 01 19 Not Assigned number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNC This entry defines second queuing 18 001 255 Not Assigned prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 19 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 20 000 100 secs 0 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during second 21 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 22 01 12 none second queuing annc Pause time TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING This entry defines if a call is routed to 1 0 After Greeting After Greeting a destination during greeting tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT This entry defines queue count 2 00 99 00 Release 1 7 YW vertical M
356. amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Station Cl ass of Service TRANS PGM 137 A 37 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 135 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STA NO HIDDEN If this is set to ON station number is 14 0 Off Off not displayed at calling or called party LCD 1 On This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display Station number CALL TRANSFER CLI When a STA makes transfer call 15 O Transferor Transferor call SETUP message will contain an transferor or 1 Transferred transferred CLI Station Class of Service TRANS PGM 137 All stations are assigned a Class of Service COS which determines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls Separate COS assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Mode system operation Maximum level of COS privileges is 16 0 15 These privileges are represented in Toll Exception Table TRANS PGM CODE 250 By default all stations are assigned with a Station COS of 1 no restrictions for all three modes The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or Toll restrictions 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 137 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 Fora single station enter the same number twice 3 Press desired Flex button number 1 3 Flex button 1
357. and must be programmed to be operational Upto 2 ARS pats can be assigned for each CO Group Access code ARS digits should be contained in the CO Group Access Code and will be applied when feature is initiated ARS can be used in coordination with Last Number Redial Station Speed Dial and System Speed Dial If ARS is operated with Digit Conversion Table Dialed or Converted Digit will be provided to CO line after ARS service OPERATION If set Alternative Route Selection operation is automatic PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan CO Group Access Code PGM 114 see page A 21 PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit By Range 1 Start CO Grp Access Code amp End CO Grp Access Code CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit 2 CO Grp Access Code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP CO Line Data Automatic Network Dialing CONDITIONS ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Group Access Code 5 3 Chapter 5 CO IP PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan CO Group Access Code PGM 114 see page A 21 PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit By Range 1 Start CO Grp Access Code amp End CO Grp Access Code CO GRP ACCESS CODE Edit 2 CO Grp Access Code CO Line Data CO Group Access Code AND Digit PGM 180 FLEX 4 see page A 61 PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND
358. ansferred to CO 2 if the CO 2 does not answer within the CO to CO transfer recall timer both CO lines are disconnected Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 32 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone While on a CO IP call to perform a Screened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS 2 Place a CO IP call in the normal manner 3 When answered announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS 2 Place CO IP call in the normal manner 3 Hang up to complete the transfer Single Line Phone While on a CO IP call to perform a Screened Call Transfer 1 Press for hook switch 2 Place CO IP call in the normal manner 3 When answered announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Press for hook switch 2 Place CO IP call in the normal manner 3 Hang up to complete the transfer ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Number Data Offnet Forward Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 3 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OFFNET FORWARD ACCESS a station must be allowed Off Net 3 0 Disable Enable Fwd to forward external incoming calls outside the system or 1 Enable otherwise establish a CO to CO connection Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp P
359. ard QSIG specification path reservation mode OPERATION To activate Call Offer 1 Diala Station number on another System when busy tone is received press the Call Wait button or Call Wait Feature Code 2 The Busy Station will receive an Off Hook Muted Ring the calling station will hear a ring back tone instead of a busy tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features To answer the Call Offer OR ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network a Release 1 7 xY April 2012 System Networking 3 223 Chapter 3 System Features Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8 digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0 Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of
360. art Ti Duration Dialed No Count Call Cost Remark 12 27 13 10 01 00 00 32 000182343507951 0 Q Unanswered 2 27 13 30 01 00 01 23 000182343507951 3 1500 12 28 21 22 02 00 10 18 000182343507953 31 15500 Charge Time Charged STA Item Bar Cost tax 12 28 21 32 COFFEE SHOP COFFEE 5000 100 12 29 10 10 FRONT DESK COKE 3000 30 ltem Charge Tax rate Sum 1 ROOM CHARGE 300000 30000 10 00 330000 rate 02 GOLD 2 CALL CHARGE 17000 17010 00 17170 3 BAR CHARGE 8000 130 8130 4 PRE PAID 20000 Method of payment VISA TOTAL 35300 WON NOTE Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Print Room Status through RS 232C B 29 Appendix B Hotel Management HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN SERVICE STATION 101 Check In 94 12 26 16 Current time 94 12 31 11 5 days Star Time Q Duration Dialed No Count Call Cost Remark 12 27 13 10 01 00 00 32 000182343507951 0 0 Unanswered 2 27 13 30 01 00 01 23 000182343507951 3 1500 12 28 21 22 02 00 10 18 000182343507953 31 15500 ltem Charge Tax rate Sum 1 CALL CHARGE 17000 170 10 00 17170 2 PRE PAID 0 TOTAL 3 17170 WON NOTE Currency Unit SMDR Fraction depends on Admin Programming 232 Print Room Status through RS 232C This feature allows printing room status through RS 232C CONDITIONS Data for the service stations within room range input will not be printed If room is vacant then only maid status will be printed Room status is printed thr
361. artical 7 Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 273 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Pre Programmed Data Station VMIB Attribute TRANS PGM 108 page A 14 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK IP ADDR Public IP Address required for remote user and 1 10 10 10 1 Web admin IPv4 format SUBNET MASK Used to register a Phonatge to the System by 2 255 255 0 0 entering its User ID and Password ROUTER IP ADDR IP Address of router for external network 3 10 10 10 254 WAN IP access Required for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access FIREWALL IP ADDR When the system is installed behind a NAPT 4 0 0 0 0 server the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field Also use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices DNS IP ADDR IP Address of Domain Name Server which MBX 5 0 0 0 0 IP will use to resolve URLs to an IP address The DNS provides the resolution after receiving the name from MBX IP H 323 PORT H 323 UDP Port 6 1720 SIP PORT SIP UDP Port 5060 DHCP USAGE If this field is set to ON the system gets the 8 Off IP address from the DHCP Server when it is booting DIFFSERV Diff Serv pretag value 9 04 Station Data Station VMIB Attribute TRANS PGM145 page A 40 TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS Permits station access
362. arties quickly press the hook switch twice within 2 seconds all parties will be connected To establish an ad hoc conference Conference Member Manual Add is set OFF 1 Establish the first call 2 Press the hook switch the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives a dial tone 3 Dial the Conference Member Add Code Place the second call 5 When connected the called party is put into conference and calling party also returns to conference 6 Repeat steps 2 5 above to add additional parties Conference Member Add Code should be dialed at least once Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 52 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Conference Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 2 Chapter 3 System Features see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 133 CONFERENCE ACCESS enable Conference call BTN RANGE 0 Disable 1 Enable DEFAULT Enable Tenant Data Conference Member Manual Add TRANS PGM 281 FLEX 1 see details on page A 128 TRANS PGM 281 CONF MEMBER MANUAL ADD Determines if conf member manual add will be used when set to ON each CONF member can be added using the CONF button when set to OFF each CONF member will be added automatically BTN RANGE DEFAULT 1 On RELATED FEATURES Automatic Speaker Select see page 6 4 Hold Recall see page 3 102 U
363. arts to ring the name is 18 Max 16 digits displayed on the ringing station s LCD APPLY OPTION The Apply Option can be applied 19 O All O All according to the caller 1 Station 2 CO Line 3 Diable TRANS PGM 252 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DISPLAY CONV DIGIT If itis set to ON the station LCD is updated 1 On Off Off to the dialed digits when alerting message is received from the PX after dialing PRINT CONV DIGIT If it is set to ON the dialed digits are printed 2 On Off Off to the SMDR Do Not Disturb DND A Station enabled with the Do Not Disturb DND feature can be placed in DND to block incoming ringing for CO IP and Intercom calls transfers and paging announcements CONDITIONS A station will receive an error tone if unable to access DND If DND is enabled pressing the DND button while ringing will activate One Time DND An Attendant may cancel DND for Stations on the System DND service is available for use by Attendants Recalls for CO IP calls will override the DND feature A station in DND is out of service for all incoming calls including Station Group calls A station in DND is ignores calls forwarded to the station if the last station in a Call Forward chain is in DND the call will ring at the previous Station in the chain When calling a Station in DND the Digital Phone display will indicate the DND status Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide
364. ary can be selected by Secretary Choice option There are three options 1 First Idle 2 Longest Idle An Executive cannot be a Secretary to another Executive And a Secretary cannot be an Executive to another Secretary The Executive may use Call Forward to send calls to stations other than the Secretary Message wait station can be the Executive or the first Secretary A Secretary can call his executive Ifa Secretary Station B assigns unconditional call forward to another station Station C the forward destination station can make a call to the Executive Station A When calls are forwarded to subsequent stations ex Station C assigns call forward to Station D E or F Executive Call Service is not supported OPERATION MBX IP Phone To activate deactivate Executive Secretary forward from the Executive Phone Press the DND button to toggle Executive Secretary Forward Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Executive Secretary by Exec Sec Assignment 3 86 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station DND Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 4 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DND ACCESS enables DND to be activated by the station 4 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Station Group Executive Secretary Assign TRANS PGM 241 see details on page A 102 TRANS PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXECUTIVE NUMBER
365. assword Station Number IP Address F W IP Address RTP Security 106 NI OD om A WwW N gt Das Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP IP ADDRESS PLAN SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 23 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN NUMBERING PLAN TYPE A 15 Default Numbering Plan Type 110 1 SYSTEM NUMBERING PLAN A 15 Prefix Code Prefix Code Additional Digits 111 Sys No Plan Index 001 to 150 Flex01 1 Flex02 2 Flex03 3 Flex04 4 Sys No Plan Index 001 to 150 Flex05 5 Flex06 6 Flex07 7 Flex08 8 Flex09 9 Flex10 0 Flex11 Flex12 Sys No Plan Index 001 to 150 Flex01 2 Flex02 2 Flex03 2 Flex04 2 Flex05 2 Flex06 2 Flex07 0 Flex08 2 Flex09 0 Flex10 0 Flex11 1 Flex12 2 Ave Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012
366. assword TRANS PGM 226 see details on page A 86 TRANS PGM 226 BTN RANGE DEFAULT USER PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in Web 1 12 digits none Admin and cannot access Keyset Administration functions ADMIN PASSWORD Includes configurable database access in 2 12digits none Web Admin and can access Keyset Admin MAINT PASSWORD Includes full and unlimited access to 3 12digits none database and maintenance functions RELATED FEATURES Web Administration see page 3 197 Multi Level Admin Access see page 3 195 Multi Level Admin Access Access to the System Admin database is password protected Up to three 3 levels of access to the database can be established by assigning a different password to each level e The Maintenance level has access to the entire database all maintenance routines and defines the Admin Access Authority of the two remaining passwords e A User password can only access specific database items and cannot access Station Program pages e The Admin password has access to specific database items as well as Station Program pages In Web Admin the Maintenance password user can establish the Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 196 Chapter 3 System Features Access Authority for each password selecting the Admin Program Codes available to each password level CONDITI
367. at left messages in any desired order or the normal oldest first order Placing an Intercom call to a Station will cancel any existing MWI from that Station A Station can support up to 99 VMS messages Ifa Station requests a Call Back at a Busy Station a Call Back Request Station will check the Busy Station s status every 5 sec and receives Call Back Ring when the Status Check Timer is expired after the Busy Station returns to Idle For this reason Call Back ring may be delayed after a Busy Station returns to Idle and when several Stations request a Call Back at a Busy Station the Call Back Ring may not be provided sequentially Operation Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom Digital Phone To leave a Message Wait To leave a Message Wait To leave a Call Back queue for a station To respond to a Call Back Recall Request To retrieve Station MWIs MWI 05 VMS 03 ENTER MWI 1 VMS 2 To return a Call from the Current Station Message Fuartiral i Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 Message Wait Call Back 4 13 Chapter 4 Intercom SLT To leave a MWI 1 While receiving a Ring Back tone or No Answer on a Call Announce H or P mode press the Hook Switch 2 Dial the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang up the MWI is activated To leave a MWI 1 While receiving a DND tone press the Hook Switch 2
368. ate Alphanumeric Entry Chart C 106 Index Release 1 7 XW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 16 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Manual Layout 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter describes the manual and provides a table that shows the system capacities available in the MBX IP System Software Manual Layout Organization Features are arranged alphabetically in seven different major groupings that follow two basic chapters 1 Introduction and 2 Directory Number 3 System features 4 Intercom features 5 CO IP features 6 Digital Phone features 7 Attendant features 8 Single Line Telephone features 9 SIP features This book also includes three appendices that contain specific information System Programming tables Appendix A Hotel Management Appendix B and Quick Reference tables Appendix C Feature I nformation Each section is an alphabetical listing of features with the description and operation of each The structure is divided into 6 parts when they apply e The description below the chapter title explains the nature of those features e CONDITIONS explains known interactions and constraints related to the feature e OPERATIONS gives detailed step by step operation of the feature for Digital Phones and SLTs e PROGRAMMING lists database
369. ate Mode Change DD MM YY or MMDDYY 17 LCD Time Mode Change 12 Hour 24 Hour 18 Set Backlight 0 3 21 ICM Ring Type 22 TRK Ring Type 23 Ring Download LIP Series Only 24 Back Ground Music 31 Temporary COS Auth Code required 32 Retrieve COS Auth Code required 33 COS Override Walking COS Auth Code required 34 Register Password 35 Call Log Protect 36 SMS Message Protect LIP Series LDP6000 Series 41 MSG number xx Set Pre defined Message 0 9 MSG User Custom Deactivation 42 Create a Station User Message 43 Send SMS Message LIP Series LDP6000 Series 44 Receive SMS Message LIP Series LDP6000 Series 51 x Activate a mobile phone X 1 2 52 x Register the mobile number X 1 2 Release 1 7 Xv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK DECT Program Code Chart USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Two Way Record 6 27 Chapter 6 Digital Phone USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK 53 x Register the mobile CLI number X 1 2 54 Rm amp Auth Code Start a Conf Room 55 Rm amp Auth Code Close a Conf Room 71 Register Station ICLID 72 View Station ICLID 91 System Version 92 System IP Address Additionally a Station User Program Menu display is provided
370. atically blocked ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Data Line Security TRANS PGM 123 FLEX 6 see details on page A 26 TRANS PGM 123 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DATA SECURITY disables override and camp on tones to the 6 0 Off Off station to avoid occurring error when sending data 1 On Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Delayed CO IP Ring 3 57 Chapter 3 System Features Delayed CO IP Ring Determines if the CO IP Ringing will be sent immediately on receipt or delayed The delay can be up to 30 system ring cycles allowing other stations to answer the call CONDITIONS Delay Ring can be assigned for a station The station will receive immediate ringing if no delay is entered when programming Ring assignments If stations are assigned for immediate ring the call will be routed using the incoming CO Alternate programming The delay is applied only when ring service type is Ring RING OPERATION System When assigned Delay Ring operation is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Station Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 167 see details on page A 51 TRANS PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE If service type is set as 0 2 1 0 Ring Assign All Ring ring option is applied to ring assigned stations 1 Feature Otherwise if service type is set to 3 feature code 2 Circular is activated on incoming call The service type 3 F
371. ation Data Station VMIB Attributes TRANS PGM 145 page A 40 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS Permits station access to VMIB 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX Selected language type prompt is 2 1 3 1 played to the user when accessing the VMIB AUTO RECORD SERVICE Determines if user can record a 3 0 Disable Disable conversation with another user internal external It can be used 1 Enable without two way record button TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS When allowed the station can 4 O Disable Disable activate the Two way record feature to record a conversation 1 Enable TWO WAY RECORD DEVICE Determines the save location of 5 VM Boards Two Way recorded wav files VM Boards or Phontage When Phontage is selected recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC REC MSG BACKUP STA When station has new voice mail saved 6 l on the VM internal boards this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number Phontage user can backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC BACKUP MSG DELETE When enabled Phontage user can delete 7 0 Disable Disable all voice mail in VM internal boards 1 Enable VMIB MSG TYPE Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved 8 0 LIFO LIFO in either a FIFO first i
372. ation Groups VM Group Assignment TRANS PGM 200 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE this entry defines the type of station group 1 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Terminal 2 Circular 3 Ring 4 Longest Idle 5 Voice Mail GROUP NAME this entry defines the name of a group 2 Max 16 chars Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 91 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT NO this entry assigns a tenant of a station group 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE IDX Time Table index 4 1 9 1 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External MEMBER ASSIGN this entry assigns stations as members 6 of a station group VM Group Attribute Assignment TRANS PGM 203 see details on page A 69 TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM PUT MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 1 1 9 1 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Put Mail dial code VM GET MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 2 1 9 2 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Get Mail dial code VM BUSY INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an index
373. ation number if the User dials a Station number Group Queuing Service is finished and a call is routed to the dialed destination OPERATION If set Greeting Queuing Tone Service operation is automatic CONDITIONS SIP ISDN Terminal does not support CCR feature Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 169 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Chapter 3 System Features Station Group Attribute TRANS PGM 201 202 see details on page A 65 and page A 68 TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE this entry defines the type of greeting 1 1 Normal 1 tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING PLAY this entry defines greeting play time 2 000 180 secs 000 GREETING TONE NO This entry defines greeting tone 01 19 Not Assigned number in case greeting type is normal GREETING PRT ANNC This entry defines greeting prompt 4 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case greeting type is PROMPT ANNC GREETING REPEAT NO This entry defines greeting repeat 5 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 6 000 100 secs 0 before greeting repeat Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012
374. ations that have the shared P DN For example DND call forward and other DN based status notifications will be displayed at all same DN programmed stations LED of DN Button LED states of DN buttons are as follows e Green ON DN being used by my station e Red ON DN being used by another station Amber flash Held DN e Green Flash Ringing DN e Red Flash DN in DND status or DN in Call Forward DN Tenant Group COS Each DN can be programmed with its own Tenant group or COS information So Tenant group and COS can be different for each call depending on the DN used for the calls If a station has DN buttons with different tenant groups the station can make and receive calls using the different tenant groups Additionally if the DN buttons have different COS a station can have different COS according to the DN button selected Branch Line When a station is using a MADN type DN other stations cannot access the same DN However if a branch line option is set to the DN another Station can access the busy DN interrupting its call and establishing a conference call for all users Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 2 4 Chapter 2 Directory Number DN Incoming Ring Option When multiple stations have the same DN button each station can have a different ring delay option e Immediate Ring Ring signal is sent to station with no delay e Delayed Ring Ring sign
375. ative Destination Incoming CO Alternative 170 Outgoing CO Attribute 1 Outgoing CO Attribute 171 Outgoing CO Attribute 2 173 Outgoing CO Alternative Destination Outgoing CO Alternative 174 CO Inter Digit Timer CO Inter Digit Timer 175 DTMF Sending Delay Timer DTMF Send Interval 177 CO COS Assignment CO COS Assignment 179 CO to CO Attribute CO to CO Attribute 180 CO Group Access Code Attribute CO Group Access Code 181 Alternative Ring Table Alternative Ring Table STATION GROUP 200 Station Group Assign Station Group Assign DATA 201 Greeting Queuing Attribute Station Group Attribute 202 Station Group Attribute 203 VM Group Attribute Voice Mail Group 204 Pickup group Index Call Pick up Group 205 Page group Index Page Group 206 Command Conference Group Index Command Conference Group 208 PTT Group Index PTT Group 209 Interphone Group Index Interphone Group 210 Pilot Hunt Group Index Pilot Hunt Group 211 Pilot Hunt Group Forward SYSTEM DATA 220 System Timer 1 System Timer Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM CODE PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU a Release 1 7 x April 2012 DATABASE INDEX C 5 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PGM PGM NAME WEB SUB MENU CODE TABLE DATA
376. ble CO line ARS 1 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 7 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used ARS DGT 2 Second alternate CO Group Access 8 Max 8 digits code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line ARS 2 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 9 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Call Time Restriction 3 40 Chapter 3 System Features CO Line Group TRANS PGM 160 FLEX 3 4 see details on page A 45 TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTGOING GRP NO Set CO Group Number to 3 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 apply to outgoing calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 INCOMING GRP NO Set CO Group Number to 4 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 apply to incoming calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 H 323 Data H 323 Routing Attribute TRANS PGM 360 see details on page A 146 TRANS PGM 360 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT 1 destination numbers associated with the H 323 routing 1 Max 8 digits system DEST IP ADDR destination IP address associated with the H 323 2 0 0 0 0 routing system Station Data CO Group Access TRANS PGM 150 see details on page A 43 CO I P C
377. by the Multi Call Forward Service Count attribute tenant based No Answer Forward employs the Station No Answer Forward Timer The No Answer Call Forward Timer can be adjusted at the TRANS PGM 141 FLEX 4 A Station should have Off Net Forward access privilege to assign a CO Access code and External Phone number to the forward destination OPERATION Digital Phone To activate Call Forward Unconditional or Busy No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive a dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial 1 4 Forward Code as appropriate 4 Dial the station or station group to receive calls OR 5 Dial CO Group Access code and desired external phone number 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save 7 Replace the handset return to idle To activate Call Forward Remote Follow me 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button to receive Dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial 0 Call Forward code 4 Dial the Station s Authorization Code Station number password 5 Dial 1 4 Forward condition 6 Dial the destination station or station group OR Dial CO Group Access code and desired external phone number 7 Press HOLD SAVE button to save 8 Replace the handset return to idle To deactivate Call Forward Press flashing FWD button Call Forward will deactivate FWD LED button is turned OFF Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 201
378. calls the system employs the call duration cost pulse and decimal values to establish a call cost estimate The cost is updated periodically at intervals of the Elapsed Call Timer Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 188 CONDITIONS Chapter 3 System Features If enabled Call Cost display begins after the SMDR Start Timer expires or at receipt of the first Call Meter Pulse Once connected to the system the call duration includes the total time the call is connected including periods when the call is on hold in queue etc To enable Call Cost Display the SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse and SMDR Decimal must be assigned when not assigned call duration is provided by the System _SMDR MAX record message number is 5000 alarm message is automatically received at the Attendant Station if recorded number is 4000 or 4500 OPERATION System When set Call Cost is estimated automatically and output to Digital Phone displays and the SMDR RS 232 port ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Metering Type TRANS PGM 160 FLEX 12 see details on page A 45 TRANS PGM 160 METERING TYPE According to PSTN service type metering type can be selected among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be applied to ISDN lines BTN 12 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
379. ce Mail Dial Table which contains the No answer dial code VM DISCONNECT For external analog Voice Mail groups an index 5 1 9 9 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Disconnect dial code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 89 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDI TYPE This entry defines SMDI Type 6 0 Type1 Type 1 1 Type 2 SMDI CLI INFO This entry defines SMDI CLI Information 7 0 Off Off If this is enable system sends SMDI with CLI 1 On Voice Mail Dialing Table TRANS PGM 269 see details on page A 116 TRANS PGM 269 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOICE MAIL 1 Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive 1 0 Prefix P call to record a message 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 2 Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 2 0 Prefix PHH playback recorded messages 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 3 Busy Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 3 0 Prefix P 3P receive a call while the user is busy 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 4 DND Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 4 0 Prefix P 4P receive a call while the user is in DND 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 5 No Answer Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 5 0 Prefix P 5P receive a call when the user did not answer 1 Suffix
380. cess to voice mail after checking the user s password If the user does not answer the call the system quits the call Also by programming the notification can be retried after the time interval and retry count settings have been changed CONDITIONS Analog CO lines cannot be used for this feature since there is no explicit signal when the call is answered Only CO party can receive the notification call So the notification phone number should start with a CO access code OPERATION Digital Phone To enable disable outcall notification 1 Press the TRANS 7 3 or dial the Outcall Notification feature code 2 Dial 1 to enable or 0 to disable 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 4 4 Return to idle after hearing a service set tone To set a value for outcall notification attempts 1 Press the TRANS 7 4 or dial the Outcall Attempts feature code 2 Dial one digit number of attempts 1 9 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 4 Return to idle after hearing service set tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Outcall Notification 3 132 Chapter 3 System Features To set a value for outcall notification interval for a retrial case 1 Press the TRANS button 7 5 or dial the Outcall Interval feature code 2 Dial two digit minute information 01 60 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 4 Return to idle after hearing service set tone To set a phone number for outcal
381. ck release mechanism When a Station receives the Door Bell signal the Station User may dial the Door Open code to activate the contact CONDITIONS One relay contact is available The contacts are rated at 1 amp 24 VDC OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a DOOR OPEN button TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 Door Open Feature Code HOLD SAVE To activate the relay contact 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial the Door Open code 3 Hang up to return the phone to idle OR Lift the handset or press SPEAKER Press the programmed DOOR OPEN button 3 Hang up to return the phone to idle ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Door Open Access TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 13 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DOOR OPEN enable to use door open feature 13 O0 Disable Disable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Door Phone 3 80 Chapter 3 System Features System External Contact Control TRANS PGM 228 see details on page A 87 Door Open Timer TRANS PGM 222 FLEX 1 see details on page A 84 TRANS PGM 222 BTN RANGE DOOR OPEN TMR Sets the minimum contact closure time 1 05 99 100 msec required to activate the contact assigned as a door open contact DEFAULT 20 Numbering Data Door Open Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 20 BTN FEAT
382. code 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print ALL SMDR records all of SMDR 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 015 SMDR print code 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 191 Chapter 3 System Features To delete All SMDR records all of SMDR 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 016 SMDR delete code 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button ADMIN PROGRAMMING System SMDR Attributes TRANS PGM 232 see details on page A 91 TRANS PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDR SERVICE SMDR Service Option 1 0 Not Use 0 Not Use On Line Off Line SMDR SMDR Interface 1 On Line Email Service can be enabled 2 Off Line 3 On Line Off Line 4 SMDR Interface 5 SMDR E Mail 6 Off Line amp E Mail 7 On Off Line amp E Mail 8 Interface amp E Mail OUTGOING REPORT Outgoing Call Report 2 0 Off 0 Off Option for SMDR Service 1 On If this option is set outgoing call will be included at SMDR data INCOMING REPORT Incoming Call Report 3 0 Off 0 Off Option for SMDR Service 1 On If this option is set incoming call will be included at SMDR data ICM REPORT Internal Call Report Option for 4 0 Off 0 Off SMDR Service If this option is set internal call 1 On will be included at SMDR data LOST CALL REPORT Outgoing or Incoming 5 0 Off 0 Off Lost Call Report Opti
383. ct message type 1 MWI Check a list of missed calls 2 VMS Check VM message 3 Check MWI detail through Volume Up Down 4 Press the HOLD button to select an appropriate item Guest Station Single Line Telephone To leave message wait when there is no answer Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management To leave message wait in DND mode To make a call when message wait is received To leave call back when the other party is in talk state To make a call when a reserved ring is received Bath Alarm CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To enable bath alarm for room Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Register Change Authorization Code B 21 Appendix B Hotel Management 1 Dial the PGM button 45 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range of room Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range 3 Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 5 Otherwise you may hear an error tone To disable bath alarm for room 1 Dial the PGM button 46 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range of room Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range 3 Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 5 Otherwise you may hear an err
384. d number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNC This entry defines second queuing 18 001 255 Not Assigned prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 19 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 20 000 100 secs 0 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during second 21 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided MOH FOR ANNC This entry defines MOH option during 22 01 12 none second queuing annc Pause time Station Group Attributes TRANS PGM 202 see details on page A 68 TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING This entry defines if a call is routed to 1 0 After Greeting After Greeting a destination during greeting tone is played 1 In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT This entry defines queue count 2 00 99 00 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 160 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE This entry defines forward type 0 Not 3 0 Not Used used 1 Unconditional a call is routed to a forward destination 1 Uncond unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow a call is routed to a 2 Q Overflow forward destination when a queue is overflow 3 Tmeout a 3 Time out call is routed to a forward
385. d CO 8 8 9 76 Sys Memo 675 675 675 77 DISA Tone Service 678 678 678 78 All Feature Cancel 679 679 679 79 Add Conf Member 680 680 680 80 System Alarm Reset 565 565 565 81 Fault Alarm Reset 564 564 564 82 Door Open 1 1 1 83 Keypad Facility HE HE HE 84 T Net Log In Out 586 586 586 Release 1 7 Wv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 Release 1 7 h S April 2012 FIXED FUNCTION USER PROGRAM CODES C 17 Appendix C Quick Reference Fl XED FUNCTI ON USER PROGRAM CODES Fixed Function Codes in the two tables that follow are digit sequences users and the Attendant may dial while in the USER PROGRAM MODE STATION USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK 11 Intercom Answer Mode 1 H 2 T 3 P 12 Name User Name Creation 2 digits for each character 13 Time Set Wake up Alarm Time HH MM 24 hour clock 14 Cancel Wake up Alarm 15 Set Display Language 00 14 16 LCD Date Mode Change DD MM YY or MMDDYY 17 LCD Time Mode Change 12 Hour 24 Hour 18 Set Backlight 0 2 21 ICM Ring Type 22 Trunk Ring Type 23 Ring Download 23 is BGM on digital phones amp Ring Download on IP phones 24 Back Ground Music 31 Temporary COS Auth Code required
386. d destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state will be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute2 PGM 214 see details on page A 79 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 On change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL after conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines usage 5 0 Off 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 0n ACD Call
387. d modes If the destination is a ring table all features of ring table can be applied PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 27 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CHARGE MODE If FREE the external call 11 0 Free Report though CO line is not printed saved to SMDR 1 Report even though SMDR is enabled If REPORT the external call though CO line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes METERING TYPE According to PSTN 12 00 None None service type metering type can be selected 01 12KHz among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 02 16KHz can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be 03 50KHz applied to ISDN lines 04 SPR 05 PPR 06 NPR 07 AOC O Standard 08 AOC 1 Italy amp Spain 09 AOC 2 Finland 10 AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12 AOC 5 Netherlands Outgoing CO Alternative Attribute PGM 173 see details on page A 57 PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ALT DEST Abnormal case can be selected as error type F1 Recall No Answer F2 Transfer No Answer F3 No Answer NO ANSWER DISCONNECT The CO call is disconnected Every destination is set to Disconnect by default 1 NO ANSWER ATTENDANT The CO call is routed to 2 Att
388. d to function as a 3 0 Bell 1 Alarm doorbell instead of an alarm 1 Alarm ALARM SIGNAL MODE The assigned stations will receive a 4 0 Once 1 Repeat Repeating signal or single burst ONCE of the alarm tone 1 Repeat External Control Contacts TRANS PGM 228 The MPB includes 1 contact which can be used to control external devices The contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions As a Loud Bell Contact LBC the contact will activate when the assigned station receives an external call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables NOTE Music Sources TRANS PGM 229 Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 RS 232 Port Settings TRANS PGM 230 A 89 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 229 ICM BOX MUSIC CH assigns the music source for ICM BOX BTN RANGE 00 NO BGM 01 Internal Music 02 External Music 03 VMIB BGM 1 04 VMIB BGM 2 05 VMIB BGM 3 06 VMIB BGM 4 07 SLT MOH 1 08 SLT MOH 2 09 SLT MOH 3 10 SLT MOH 4 11 SLT MOH 5 DEFAULT 1 INT MOH TYPE assigns the music for internal MOH 00 Romance 01 Turkish March 02 Green Sleeves 03 Fur Elise 04 Carmem 05 Waltz 06 Pavane 07 Sichiliano 08 Sonata 09 Spring 10 Campanella 11 Badinerie 12 Blue Dance VMIB MOH assigns the VMIB Prompt index of VMIB Slot YY for VMIB MOH X
389. de and digits 12 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 13 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T2 CHANGED The digits to be dialed in Day 3 Time 2 14 Max 16 digits when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 15 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR DNT TIME INDEX Day Night Timed Time Table Index 16 1 9 none none LCR TIME INDEX LCR Time Table Index 17 1 9 none none Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP HARDWARE Direct Inward System Access DI SA CONDITIONS y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 51 Chapter 5 CO IP DISA callers are subject to COS dialing restrictions If Authorization Codes are required and the code matches a Station Authorization Code the Station COS will apply The System will disconnect an Outgoing DISA call if the Unsupervised Conference timer expires or Disconnect Supervision is received a D
390. default the WLAN phone is assigned a PTT button e The Station may be assigned and Logged In to the default active PTT group in the System database OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a PTT Flex button Press TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 PTT SAVE To Log In to a PTT group 1 Dial the PTT Log in out code 2 2 Dial the desired PTT Group Number To Log Out of the PTT group s 1 Dial the PTT Log in out code 2 Dial To place a Page to the active PTT Group 1 Press and hold the PTT Flex button 2 Make the desired Page announcement after hearing confirmation tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 4 Intercom PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Station Group Data Station Data RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Alternative Route Selection 5 1 Chapter 5 CO IP Chapter 5 CO IP This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the CO IP features available in the MBX IP System Software Alternative Route Selection This feature is enabled if there are several paths in order to connect toward a destination System If a selected path is not available for some reason All Busy Line Fault etc Alternative Route Selection ARS will connect calls using another designated path CONDITIONS ARS is optional
391. ding preceding digits of some 1 1 8digits Prefix code length more numbering plan code digit can be 8 at max MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Net Call Forward Unconditional Busy No Answer A User can remotely forward to another Station immediately over the network NOTE The System supports both Rerouting and Join methods according to Admin Programming CONDITIONS If both the Originating and Forwarded To Stations are located within the same System the Networking Path will be cleared the Forwarded Call will be setup as Intercom Call The System does not check the status of the diverted to station in DND CFW or Empty Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 OPERATION To activate Net Call Forward To deactivate Net Call Forward ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Chapter 3 System Features Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 231 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used fo
392. e CONDITIONS CO IP lines placed on hold with Automatic Hold are placed in the assigned Hold Timer Hold Timer can be assigned by Tone time in the Tone Table There is no limit on the number of calls that can be placed on hold using Automatic Hold OPERATION Digital To use Automatic Hold Press CO OR LOOP KEY button while on an active Station or CO IP call the call is placed on Hold Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 3 105 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Chapter 3 System Features Automatic Hold Access TRANS PGM 123 FLEX 3 1 see page A 26 TRANS PGM 123 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PRIME NUMBER BTN among My DN and several Sub DNs 1 01 48 01 which are assigned to station flex buttons determines the first seized DN when the user initiates a call If prime button is not set of invalid the system scans sequentially from flexible button 1 to flexible Button 48 and take the unused and valid flexible button as prime button NOTE DN buttons of associated DSS box cannot be a prime number button ZONE NO this menu represents a station belonging to what zone 2 1 9 1 AUTO HOLD enables Auto Hold for the station With Auto Hold 3 0 Off Off enabled the system will place an active external call on hold if the 1 On user presses a CO IP or DSS button ENBLOCK DIAL when On the user dialed digits are stored at the 4 0 Off
393. e 13 7 15 10 T1 SEIZE TIME T1 seize time 14 0 127 3 T1 RLS TIME T1 release time 15 0 127 7 T1 RING DET TIME T1 ring detect time 16 2 9 2 T1 RING STOP TIME T1 ring stop time 17 10 60 60 I SDN Board Clock Priority TRANS PGM 301 In the MBX IP System Clock synchronization is controlled by the pre programmed ISDN Clock priority The first ISDN board becomes the Clock Master board and if some error occurs to the Clock Master board the next board automatically takes on the role as Clock Master After the original master board recovers the Clock Master board is changed again If there is no available ISDN board to become a Clock Master board the System is synchronized with the internal clock Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables IPP Board Attribute TRANS PGM 305 Reset Board TRANS PGM 310 as Release 1 7 Y April 2012 NETWORKING DATA TRANS PGM 320 321 A 141 Appendix A System Programming Tables NETWORKING DATA TRANS PGM 320 321 Net Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 The Network Basic Attributes are displayed and the TRANS PGM 320 table provides general descriptive information and input ranges 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 320 Press the Flex 1 10 for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 Use the dial pad to enter
394. e SAVE button to store the data entered Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Incoming CO Normal DI SA Attributes TRANS PGM 168 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Incoming Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 169 A 53 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 168 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO ACCESS FROM DISA If this feature is set to ON CO to CO 1 0 Off Off call can be made from DISA line 1 On DISA TO CO PASSWORD When making CO to CO call from 2 0 Off Off DISA line password can be requested 1 On DISA RETRY COUNT When DISA call is failed to route desired 3 1 9 3 destination the call can be retried as much as Retry Count PRESET FORWARD TIME If the CO is not answered in Preset 4 00 20 sec 00 Forward Time it will be routed to assigned ring Table PRESET FWD RING TEL Preset Forward ring Table index can be 5 01 80 assigned Refer to TRANS PGM 181 CO Incoming Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 169 When a DID or DISA is routed to an abnormal destination the call can be rerouted to alternate destination The destination is separately defined for Day Night Timed mode according to several conditions 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 169 2 Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range Fora single CO Line enter the same
395. e System OPERATION Refer to the Phone User Guide to initiate Broker Call SIP SMS The SIP phone can Send and Receive SMS messages with other Stations CONDITIONS Ifthe SIP phone has a SMS Function it will not operate correctly if the SMS message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System OPERATION Refer to the Phone User Guide for SMS Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 SI P Voice Mail Notification CONDITIONS OPERATION SI P Video Call CONDITIONS OPERATION Chapter 9 SIP Phone Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 ACD Basic Feature 10 1 Chapter 10 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Automatic Call Distribution feature provides the service to distribute calls to agents in an efficient way Each agent can set or change own specific state and get ready to receive the ACD calls And supervisor can be assigned to each group and they can change the ACD group status Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of ACD Group 20 50 Number of Supervisor 1 1 Number of Sub Supervisor 3 3 Number of Agents 50 50 Max Queue Count 99 99 Max Steps for Queue Announcement 5 5 ACD Agent Priority 20 1 20 20 1 20 ACD Basic Feature ACD calls are analyzed first by the system to find an appropriate agent who will receive the call System s
396. e Table 4 0 Day 0 Day 1 Night 2 Timed AUTO RING MODE defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time 5 On Off Off Table Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Auto Service Mode Control 3 11 Chapter 3 System Features Weekly Time Table TRANS PGM 254 see details on page A 108 TRANS PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 1 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Tuesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 2 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ TDE _ _ Wednesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 3 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ TDE _ _ Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 4 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Friday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 5 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Saturday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 6 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Sunday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode 7 0000 2359 Day 9 00 end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Holiday Time Table TRANS PGM 256 see details on page A 110 TRANS PGM 256 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALENDAR TYPE Defines Cale
397. e and will take on the attributes defined for the Agent s Station number When the Agent logs off the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive and the Agent s calls can be forwarded to the User entered destination A different Agent may then login using the inactive Hot Desk phone CONDITIONS The Hot Desk station can be programmed to log out automatically if no action has occurred by the Agent for the duration of the Hot Desk Log out timer An active logged in Agent can login to another inactive Hot Desk phone however this will log off Agent activity from the previous Hot Desk location An Agent may only logout from an activated Hot Desk phone The Flex button map of the Hot Desk station is fixed and will not take on the configuration associated with the Agent s station The number of Hot Desk phones is limited by the physical station port number Hot Desk users are limited by the additional station number of the System capacity Each Hot Desk phone and Hot Desk user Agent requires a separate station number DN in the system When a Dummy Terminal seizes a SADN type number Sub DN the Hot Desk feature cannot be supported If an agent logs out without registering call forward destination Attendant feature code is automatically registered so that calls to off duty agents are directed to attendant OPERATION To program a Hot Desk phone 1 2 In Admin Programming assign digital phone as Hot Desk Dummy Terminal Assign the
398. e dialed automatically 1 Max 16 digits AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME Auto dial pause time 2 00 30 0 ICM Answer Mode TRANS PGM 123 FLEX 5 see details on page A 26 TRANS PGM 123 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM ANSWER MODE selects Handsfree Privacy or Tone ring 5 1 Handsfree Tone ICM Signaling mode 2 Tone 3 Privacy RELATED FEATURES Door Open see page 3 79 Release 1 7 Wve MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Emergency Call Emergency Alert 3 82 Chapter 3 System Features Emergency Call Emergency Alert Regardless of Station dialing restrictions COS the user may dial assigned Emergency numbers as needed CONDITIONS The CO Line Group Access Code and digits to be dialed should be assigned to the emergency changed digit If the dialed number for the Emergency code is the same as the Numbering code including station in the system the Emergency code has the preference Assigning emergency code the emergency code with same dialed digit previous assigned cannot be as assigned In emergency code table the field tenant may be leaved empty This emergency code with empty tenant will be adapted to all stations of all tenants OPERATION System The system will automatically override any toll restrictions and process an assigned Emergency number call Emergency Alert To Program an Emergency ALert button on a flex key Press the TRANS PGM button 1 code 563 When a station
399. e handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 System Speed Dial see page 3 150 Last Number Redial LNR see page 3 110 HARDWARE Digital Phone Speakerphone Digital Phones equipped with a Speakerphone can use the telephone hands free in two way conversations CONDITIONS If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled at the Station pressing a DSS DN CO Line Access Code or Speed Dial button will automatically activate the Speakerphone The MUTE button LED indicates the status of the Microphone when lit the Microphone is inactive When Group Listen is enabled pressing the SPEAKER button while using the handset will send audio to both the Handset and Speaker However only the Handset microphone will be active in order to activate the Speakerphone Microphone the Handset must be On Hook Each Digital Phone equipped with Speakerphone is allowed denied Speakerphone operation based on System Database Admin Programming When Headset operation is assigned for the Station the Speakerphone is disabled and the SPEAKER button activates the Headset audio path instead of the Speaker Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To activate the Speakerphone To switch from Handset to Speakerphone To terminate a Speakerph
400. e set to have one of 9 digit conversion Tables There are 300 entries for each digit conversion table The Digit Conversion Table allows up to 16 digits to be programmed as dialed digit and converted digit The following features have higher priority over digit conversion AND Automatic Network Dialing Automatic CO Seize Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Digit Conversion 3 75 Chapter 3 System Features In Call log dialed digit is displayed on the station s LCD The Digit Conversion Table can be applied by Apply Option All Station CO Line Disable OPERATION Digit Conversion is applied automatically according to ADM programming ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Digit Conversion Table Index TRANS PGM 131 FLEX 3 page A 104 TRANS PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT CONVERSION TBL specify Digit conversion table for 3 1 9 1 station CO Data Digit Conversion Table Index TRANS PGM 160 FLEX 6 page A 104 TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DGT CONVERT TBL Set Digit Conversion Table index 6 1 9 2 Table Data Digit Conversion Table TRANS PGM 251 TRANS PGM 252 page A 104 TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T TYPE The Apply time type to be applied when the 1 0 Unconditional Unconditional dialed digit is dialed 1 Follow DNT 2 Follow LCR DIALED DIGITS The dialed digits 2 Max 16 digits
401. e the prompt similar to the followint This is the voice mail system There is a message for recorded name or mailbox number xxxxxxxx And then Enter your password followed by pound prompt will be heard If the called party enters the station number its password the system will check the validity of the password entered If the verification is successful the called party will hear the main menu of voice mail and can access its own voice mail After that all the mailbox features will be available The System will retry 3 times before disconnecting the call ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see page 3 97 Station Data TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTCALL NOTIFICATION enables or disables the outcall 21 0 Off Off notification feature 1 0n If you are using outcall notification on analog trunks this field MUST be set to ON OUTCALL ATTEMPTS the number of attempts to try to reach 22 1 9 the outcall number OUTCALL INTERVAL the interval time in between attempts 23 01 60 mins OUTCALL PHONE NUMBER the phone number to dial Outcall 24 Up to 24 digits destination HARDWARE AAFU and or VMIB Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages 3 134 Chapter 3 System Features Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages When
402. e type is FOLLOW LCR Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Digit Conversion Options TRANS PGM 252 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Time Tab le Attributes TRANS PGM 253 A 107 ak wn gt Appendix A System Programming Tables Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 252 Dial Digit Conversion Table Number 1 9 Press the Flex button 1 2 Use the dial pad to enter the dialed number Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 252 BTN RANGE DISPLAY CONV DIGIT If itis set to ON the station LCD is updated to the dialed digits when alerting message is received from the PX after dialing On Off DEFAULT Off PRINT CONV DIGIT If it is set to ON the dialed digits are printed to the SMDR 2 On Off Off Time Table Attributes TRANS PGM 253 The system can automatically select the Ring and COS Mode based on the system time table Three Ring and COS modes are supported Day Night and Timed modes Each Time Table has a ring mode relating to the different ring assignments COS and answering method for the system The ring mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode amp weekly timetable based on the Time Table The Attendant may change the system mode selection from
403. e types of SMDI messages listed below Within each message is an Action Code which defines the function or required action of the AA VM system Fields within the messages also define the called calling station and station status The various message types and definition of the fields are shown in the chart below Type message cr If MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr lf Y Type Il message cr If MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp sp cr If4Y Type Ill message cr If MD ggg mmmm a sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr If Y Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 94 Message Field Definitions Chapter 3 System Features Field Description Values cr Carriage Return If Line Feed MD Message Desk ggg Message Desk Number AA VN system Default 001 Mmm Message Desk terminal Range 0001 9999 VM port A Action Code XXX X Called Station Number or Station Calling the VM Group yy y Calling Station Number Sp ASCII Space Character Ay End of SMDI Message Control Y 0x19 The following table provides detailed information on the meaning and function of the various SMDI messages used SMDI Messages Action Reason Purpose in band Message SMDI Message Code Code Type MD 001 0001 A Unconditional forward to VM Put Mail P Il A XXXXX yyyyy B Called Station busy Busy Mail P 3P Il B Xxxxx
404. ease 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 63 Chapter 3 System Features CO Dialing Type TRANS PGM 160 FLEX 10 see details on page A 45 TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected DTMF Pulse R2MFC 10 0 DTMF DTMF 1 PULSE 2 R2 RELATED FEATURES Speed Dial see page 3 146 Dialing Restrictions Class of Service Dialing privileges can be assigned for each DN at a Station and CO line up to 16 privileges The Class of Service COS feature is applied in the following cases e When an internal station dials out through a CO line e When an external caller tries to make another external call using DISA or DID The dialing privileges are the result of the interaction of the Station and CO Class of Service COS assignments as shown in the following tables Users placing an outgoing call or dialing after answering a call will be allowed the dialing privileges assigned Station CO COS Dialing Restriction 0 Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed incoming and transferred calls are allowed 1 No restrictions are placed on dialing 2 15 Assignments in each toll table are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers Toll Tables Each Toll Table permits entry of 100 Allow codes and 100 Deny codes Each code can contain up to 16 digits including digits 0 9 e Toll Table process As digits
405. eat Repeating signal or single burst ONCE of the alarm tone 1 Repeat RELATED FEATURES Door Open see page 3 79 HARDWARE Digital Phone External contact connected to Alarm input of MPB refer to MBX IP Hardware amp Installation Manual Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Authorization Codes Password 3 5 Chapter 3 System Features Authorization Codes Password An Authorization Code is tied to a DN and provides a means to control access to Walking COS or DISA and may be required for outgoing CO IP Lines based on the configuration of the database When users dial a valid Authorization Code the system invokes the Station COS The Station Authorization Code includes the associated station number and the assigned code A Station Authorization Code is specifically related to a given station and intended for a single user The Administrator and Attendants are permitted to assign any Authorization code including codes for another station Normal users may only assign the Station Authorization code for the specific station CONDITIONS A user may enter an Authorization Code from any station to place a CO IP call using Walking COS An Authorization code may include any dial pad digit except and OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Station Authorization Code 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 34 Authorization Code Program 3 Dial the
406. eature OPERATION If Programmed Station Call Coverage is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 Flex Button Assign TRANS PGM 126 see details on page A 29 DN Flex Button Ring Option TRANS PGM 126 FLEX 2 see details on page A 30 DN Flex Button Access TRANS PGM 126 FLEX 3 see details on page A 30 System Groups Stations can be grouped for call routing dialing call pick up or other various purposes The following groups can be defined Station Group Terminal Circular Ring Longest Idle VM Pilot Hunt Group Pick Up Group PTT Group Command Conference Group Interphone Group Paging Group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 154 Chapter 3 System Features Station Group Stations can be grouped so incoming calls may be routed to an idle station in the group The different types of Station Groups are described Terminal Group Calls to a station in a Terminal Station Group that encounter an unavailable or go unanswered will be routed through the hunt process The call will proceed to the next listed station in the group until reaching the last listed station The queued call may be taken out of the group if set to forward to an overflow destination Circular Group Calls to a station in the Circular Group will go to the station if unavailab
407. eature Code determines where the incoming call will ring first Options are ring to a station s or ring to a feature such as auto attendant hunt group etc FEATURE CODE If Service type is set to 2 Valid Feature Code Feature Code and valid feature code is refer to assigned then assigned feature is activated TRANS PGM 115 when there is an incoming call NOTE Feature Code is not applied to rerouted calls FEATURE DELAY If Service type is set to 3 00 30 00 Feature code it can be delayed Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Delayed Auto Attendant 3 58 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT 100 0 Assigned station and delay value can 4 be displayed Volume Up Down key is used to scroll data MEMBER ASSIGN To change station s ring 5 Start Station amp End assign status enter desired station range Max Station 30 stations can be assigned DELAY Enter delay value if delay is 0 station 5 1 0 9 Sta 100 Port 0 delay 0 will start to ring immediately If delay value is Others not assigned deleted the station will not ring Otherwise if delay is 1 9 the station will start to ring after delay time 3 times of delay value Delayed Auto Attendant An incoming CO IP call can be routed to the VMIB Auto Attendant either immediately upon detection or after a delay time up
408. ecall process is then initiated A Parked call will indicate busy at all appearances OPERATION Digital Phone To park an active external call 1 Press the TRANS button 2 Dial Call Park Feature Code 3 Dial the Call Park No 00 49 4 Return to idle To retrieve a parked call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial Call Park Feature Code 3 Dial the Call Park No 00 49 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Park 3 25 Chapter 3 System Features Single Line Phone To park an active external call 1 Press the hook switch 2 Dial Call Park Feature Code 3 Dial the Call Park No 00 49 4 Return to idle To retrieve a parked call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Call Park Feature Code 3 Dial the Call Park No 00 49 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Call Park Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 36 Call Parking Location 541 xx Parking Location 00 49 Tenant Data Call Park Hold Tone Time see page A 133_use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 58 59 TRANS PGM 290 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TONE TIME Determines the amount of time tone is provided 2 1 600 10 RELATED FEATURES Hold see page 3 101 Hold Recall see page 3 102 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Pick Up 3 26
409. ed Service Digital Network ISDN 5 73 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT D3 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 13 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T2 CHANGED The digits to be dialed in Day 3 Time 2 14 Max 16 digits when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 15 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR DNT TIME INDEX Day Night Timed Time Table Index 16 1 9 none none LCR TIME INDEX LCR Time Table Index 17 1 9 none none NAME When DID destination starts to ring the name is 18 Max 16 digits displayed on the ringing station s LCD APPLY OPTION The Apply Option can be applied 19 O All O All according to the caller 1 Station 2 CO Line 3 Diable HARDWARE PRIB ISDN CLI When programmed the IDSN will send CLI information on incoming and outgoing Calls On Incoming Calls CLI information is delivered to the Calling Party System On Outgoing Calls CLI information is delivered to the Called Party System and also from the Called Party System to the MBX IP CONDITIONS Ifa CO line is using Representative CLI that information is sent before other CLI options Ifa Station that p
410. ee page 3 187 Traffic Analysis see page 3 250 Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 HARDWARE RS 323 device to capture SMDR System Admin Programming Keyset Administration The System database can be accessed and modified using the Keypad and Flex buttons of a Digital Phone The Digital Phone LCD is employed to view items on the System database The user may be required to enter a password for access to Keyset Admin Based on a set up of Multi level passwords the User may have access to specified System database program codes For detailed information on database administration and maintenance refer to the Admin Programming Manual CONDITIONS Only stations assigned with Admin access can enter and change System database items As a default the First station Station 100 Administrator and or Attendant can access the database OPERATION Keyset Administration operation is detailed in the Admin Manual Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 195 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Admin Access TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 5 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT KEYSET ADMIN Determines if the station is allowed to access 5 0 Disable Disable administration in programming 1 Enable Default Station 100 only System Admin Access Authority use Web Admin System P
411. efines usage of 11 0 Off 0 Off Agent Auto Work option when agent log in 1 On LOGIN HANDSET This entry defines usage of 12 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log in 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode LOGOUT HANDSET This entry defines usage of 13 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log out 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode 4 Logon Mode LOGOUT RESTRICTION This entry defines 14 0 Not use 0 Not use restriction of Logout State Agent 1 CO outgoing 2 All call CO ANSWER TIME This entry defines when the 15 0 Queued to group 0 Queued to group ACK message is sent to caller party 1 Agent Answer INFO DATA PRINT This entry defines usage of 16 0 Off 0 Off ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not 1 On Information Traffic data will be printed at Information Print Port Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Supervisor Functions ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10 51 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution d Supervisor can change max Queuing Count and also can change Queuing Service Announcement Step Supervisor also can make rule how to handle ACD call when all of queuing announcement service is over And After Queuing Fo
412. elease 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 67 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA INTERCOM BUSY DIGIT A 101 237 J Step Call A 101 237 1 EN DIS Disable Digit 1 Service 2 Not Assign Not Assign Call Back Camp On Call Wait Voice Over Intrusion Hunt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Digit 2 Service 3 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Call Back 2 Camp On 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over 5 Intrusion 6 Hunt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 Digit 3 Service 4 Not Assign Not Assign Call Back Camp On Call Wait Voice Over Intrusion Hunt Digit 4 Service 5 Not Assign Not Assign Call Back 2 Camp On 3 Call Wait 4 Voice Over 5 Intrusion 6 Hunt Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 69 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BIN RANGE
413. elease 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Account Code 3 1 Chapter 3 System Features Chapter 3 System Features This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the numerous features available in the MBX IP System Software Account Code Station users may enter a non verified variable length up to 12 digits identifier for tracking specific calls The identifier or Account Code is output as part of the Station Message Detail Record SMDR for the call CONDITIONS Ifan Authorization Code is entered as the Account Code the SMDR record will show the station number or the bin number for a System Authorization Code rather than the user entered Authorization Code for security purposes OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button for ACCOUNT CODE operation Press TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 Account Code Feature Code Account Code HOLD SAVE To enter an Account Code using an ACCOUNT CODE button prior to placing a call when account code is not entered in the button 1 Lift the handset Press the account code button Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits Press Intercom dial tone is heard ak whr Place the CO IP call as normal Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Account Code 3 2 Chapter 3 System Features Using the programmed AC
414. elects one of the free agents and then directs the ACD call to the agent selected Each agent registered in admin has to log in first to receive an ACD call If all the agents are in busy status or in logout status the next ACD calls will be queued When one of the agents goes to ready state or idle state the queued ACD call is routed to the agent in ready state While an ACD call is being queued queuing announcement will be served e ACD Group has 5 types of status Normal Forward Overflow Night Holiday Each status of ACD calls can be handled at the same time e Each ACD group can have one Supervisor and three Sub Supervisors A Supervisor or Sub Supervisor can monitor the state of an agent and can also check the group s call traffic e Each ACD group can have a maximum of 50 agents To answer the ACD call agents have to log in Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CONDITIONS OPERATIONS Agent Log In OR Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Bc riral Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 ACD Basic Feature 10 3 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution 4 If Password Check When Agent Login is set in admin PGM214 Flex8 agent has to enter password on log in If password is correct and agent is in log out state agent enters into log in state Agent Log Out 1 Dial ACD Agent Log In Out feature code OR 2 Press flex button reg
415. em Speed Dial A 110 257 1 Max 32 Digits System Speed Name 2 Max 16 Ch Toll Free 3 11 On 0 Off Off Tenant Number 4 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 EMERGENCY CODE TABLE A 111 258 Emergency Table Index 01 50 Dialed Digit 1 Max 16 Digits Changed Digit Max 16 Digits Tenant Number A 111 258 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 ANNOUNCEMENT TABLE A 111 259 Announcement Table Index 001 100 First 1 VMIB Slot 2 Announce Num Second 1 VMIB Slot 2 Announce Num Third 1 VMIB Slot 2 Announce Num Fourth 1 VMIB Slot 2 Announce Num CCR 1 100 Release 1 7 Xv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 75 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Digit 4 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign TABLE DATA Digit 5 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit 6 A 112 260 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign
416. endant NO ANSWER CO RING ASSIGN The CO call is 3 l routed according to Ring Assign Table see PGM 167 NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL If destination is set to 4 01 80 Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table See PGM 181 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Digit Sending Mode OPERATION PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO COS OPERATION PROGRAMMING CO Line Data g Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Line Service 5 29 CO COS Assign PGM 177 see details on page A 60 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Day mode 1 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 00 15 0 DID Name Service When there s DID call if name is programmed in Digit Conversion Table and dialed digit is matched the name is displayed on ringing Station s LCD OPERATION If programmed did name is displayed to DID destination station s LCD PROGRAMMING Table Data DID Name PGM 251 see details on page A 104 PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T TYPE The Apply time type to be applied when the 1 0 Unconditional Unconditional dialed digit is dialed 1 Follow DNT 2 Follow LCR DIALED DIGITS The dialed digits 2 Max
417. enied the ability to place intercom calls to Stations in other groups on a Group by Group basis Each Tenant Group has an Attendant Group If a user dials 0 Attendant Call Feature Code the call is routed to the assigned Attendant Group Additionally the assigned Attendant member can control the Day Night Ring mode for Stations in the group switching from Day to Night mode Each Group is assigned a separate Auto Ring Mode Table for changing the Ring and COS mode automatically during the Day and Night service mode as applicable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS OPERATION System ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Station Data CO Line Data as Release 1 7 AS i April 2012 Universal Answer UA 3 257 Chapter 3 System Features Universal Answer UA UA allows a user to be alerted via an external loud bell and answer defined CO IP calls by dialing a UA code While primarily intended for alternate answering UA will also function in other modes providing UA in all service modes Calls will appear on the CO IP appearance or a DN button An External Control Contact can be assigned to activate an external Loud Bell to alert users of incoming calls Digital Phones may program a Flex button as a UA button CONDITIONS System will search a CO line for UA from first accessible CO line OPERA
418. ent The maximum own code length is 16 PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Outgoing CO Own Code PGM 170 FLEX 12 see details on page A 54 PGM 170 BTN RANGE DEFAULT REPRESENTATIVE CLI When Use Represent 12 Max 16 CID PGM170 F 10 is set to ON representative CLI is sent when digits making outgoing call regardless of other CLI attribute Incoming CO Own Code PGM 165 FLEX 9 see details on page A 48 PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OWN CODE Own Code 9 Max 16 digits CO IP Ring Assignment Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system detects an incoming call on specified CO IP lines Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring operation mode In addition the audible signal at the station can be delayed by 1 to 30 ring cycles allowing other stations to answer the call first CONDITIONS Separate assignments are made for Stations to ring in the Day Night and or Timed Ring mode Audible Alerting for an Incoming VoIP call is based only on the derived IP Address A Busy Station receives Muted Ring or Call Waiting tones as appropriate for the Station s Off hook Ring Assignment The system Ring mode can be selected manually or automatically Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Automatic mode Manual mode OPERATION System PROGRAM
419. ent when the voice mail is to 5 0 Prefix P 5P receive a call when the user did not answer 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 6 Error Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 6 0 Prefix P 6P receive a call when a dialing error exists 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 7 7 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 8 8 0 Prefix 1 Suffix Any digits VOICE MAIL 9 Disconnect Mail code sent when the voice mail is to 9 0 Prefix disconnect a call 1 Suffix Any digits Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 93 Chapter 3 System Features System Voice Mail Interface Select TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 3 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM SMDI ENABLE If it is set to ON system interfaces SMDI 3 0 Off 0 Off protocol with external Voice Mail If OFF system interfaces In band 1 On message with external Voice Mail RELATED FEATURES AA VM Group SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface see details on page 3 87 HARDWARE External AA VM system SMDI Simplified Msg Desk I nterface The system may employ SMDI protocol to communicate with an adjunct AA VM system When a call is routed to an AA VM SLT port the system will send SMDI messages over the assigned SMDI RS 232 port informing the AA VM of the characteristics of the call SMDI Protocol There are thre
420. entries that may be required for proper feature operation e RELATED FEATURES lists related information to aid in understanding the feature HARDWARE lists hardware required for proper feature operation Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Capacities 1 2 System Capacities Chapter 1 Introduction The MBX IP Series is available in the configurations shown in the table below SYSTEM CAPACITY CHART Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Rack No 2 3 Slot No per Rack 6 6 Total Port Extension CO line 200 414 if IP Phone DECT Cordless phone not included Number of extension Port 120 324 Number of extension 180 Ext 120 DN 60 648 Ext 324 DN 324 Number of CO Line 80 240 Number of Tenant Group Numbering Plan 5 Extension 8 Digits 9 Extension 8 Digits Feature 8 Digits Feature 8 Digits Trunk 8 Digits Trunk 8 Digits Attendant 5 Tenant 5 Tenant DSS BLF Console 5 5 Conference Members 3 Groups 13 Members 3 Groups 13 Members Internal Page Zone 15 30 System Speed Dial 1000 2000 32 digits 32 digits Station Speed Dial 50 32 digits 50 32 digits Call Log Outgoing Incoming Missed Call 100 32 digits Not protected 100 32 digits Not protected Save Number Redial SNR 1 32 digits 1 32 digits Number of SMDR Reco
421. er A station receives the Alarm Signal either as a single tone burst repeated at 1 minute intervals or a continuous tone The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the User s phone by dialing the Alarm Stop code or pressing the ALARM STOP button if assigned To rearm the Alarm function the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated When used as a Door Bell assigned stations receive an Alarm Signal each time the external contact is activated reset is not required CONDITIONS The Alarm contacts must be dry no voltage or current source connected A station with LCD assigned to receive Alarm Door Bell signals will show ALARM as appropriate If alarmis active during station busy mute ring will be served to assigned station and then after conversation when station go to idle the alarm signal will be sent to assigned station again Assigned stations can be changed using Alarm Assign TRANS PGM121 Flex12 Only Stations assigned with Alarm ring can terminate the alarm signal IP Phone and normal digital Phone stations can be assigned as alarm stations In signal mode station will return alarm ringing again if an assigned station user does not reset the alarm signal prior to the station returning to idle When the alarm is ringing the alarm signal must be reset so phone operation will be fully functional fixed or flex buttons do not operate and the user cannot hear the dial tone during alarm
422. er 14 AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state will be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute2 PGM 214 see details on page A 79 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 0n change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL after conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING
423. er IGNORE CALLER CLIR When receive a call with CLIR 8 0 Off Off option ignore the option and display CID 1 On MOBILE EXTENSION CLI When mobile extension 9 0 Caller No Caller No makes a call CLI is determined by this option 0 Caller 1 Mobile Sta No No 1 Mobile Station No 2 Caller No Mobile Staton No 2 Caller Mobile Sta LONG CLI 1 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1 10 24 digits Long CLI 1 is sent LONG CLI 2 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2 11 24 digits Long CLI 2 is sent LONG CLI 3 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 3 12 24 digits Long CLI 3 is sent CLI NAME DISPLAY If this is set to ON Name matched 13 0 Off Off with CLI will be displayed 1 0n This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display CLI name with CLI STA NO HIDDEN If this is set to ON station number is 14 0 Off Off not displayed at calling or called party LCD 1 On This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display Station number CALL TRANSFER CLI When a STA makes transfer call 15 0 Transferor Transferor call SETUP message will contain an transferor or transferred CLI 1 Transferred Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO Line Data Chapter 5 CO IP HARDWARE ISDN Supplementary Services ISDN Call Deflection y 4 Release 1 7
424. ercom differential ring ID usually 1 4 3 000 254 On is valid CO DIFF RING ID set the CO line differential ring ID usually 1 4 4 000 254 Off is valid Digit Conversion When a User dials digits the dialed digits are converted according to the Digit Conversion Table before the Numbering Plan is checked Digit conversion is performed on outside incoming CO calls in addition to converting User dialed digits Time Zone for Digit Conversion The pressed digits can be converted into a different digit stream according to the time zone Always Day Night Timed zone and LCR Day Time zone There can be up to 9 conversion matrices in the LCR Day Time zone while 3 conversion rules are possible in the Day Night Timed zone Digit conversion is performed only when there is a conversion rule that applies based on the specific time the digits are pressed Dummy CO Dial Tone The CO line is seized following digit conversion Therefore it is impossible to receive a CO dial tone when digit conversion is programmed To remove any inconveniences of users the system can be configured to provide a dummy CO dial tone after one of the dialed digits is pressed Digit information Display Before or After Conversion Each Station can be programmed to display either the dialed digits or the digits after conversion SMDR also can print either dialed digits or the digits after conversion CONDITIONS Each DN and CO line can b
425. ered the Hold Recall process is initiated CONDITIONS The transferring station may camp on a call on to a busy station To prevent Toll abuse CO IP lines without an active call either incoming or dialed digits on outgoing cannot be transferred For outgoing CO Line calls the system will monitor the CO Line for dial tone to prevent Toll abuse when an IP Line is seized the system does not monitor for dial tone OPERATION Digital Phone While on a CO IP call to perform a Screened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS 2 Dial the station to receive the transfer 3 At answer or splash tone announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer OR 5 Press the DSS BLF button for the desired station 6 When answered or when splash tone is heard announce the call 7 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS 2 Dial the station to receive the transfer 3 Hang up to complete the transfer OR Press the DSS BLF button for the desired station Hang up to complete the transfer Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 31 Chapter 3 System Features Single Line Phone While on a CO IP call to perform a Screened Call Transfer 1 2 3 4 Press for hook switch Dial the station to receive the transfer When answered or when splash tone is heard announce the call Han
426. erflowed To use Queuing Timeout Forward Destination 1 Dial the Attendant Call code 2 The call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode NOTE Calls will be Routed to the Forward Destination when Queuing Time has expired To use Queuing Overflow or Timeout as Forward Destination Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Forward Destination Overflow Service 7 27 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 que
427. eries SIP Phones DECT Cordless Phones Edge 700 8 24 Button Digital Phones Edge 8000 8012 8024 IP Phones 8312 8324 IP Phones SBX IP 8 24 Button Digital Phones STS 24 Buton Digital Phones Triad amp infinite 8 12 24 Button Digital Phones Vodavi Uniphone 8 30 Button Digital Phones CONSOLES Edge 100 12 24 DSS Consoles The SHIFT button does not function on all phone types IBX 24 48 64 DSS Consoles The SHFT function does not operate on the DSS consoles Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 2 1 Chapter 2 Directory Number DN Chapter 2 Directory Number DN Directory Number DN is the telephone number for internal users which can be used exclusively by only one station or can be shared by multiple stations Terms TYPES OF DN e SADN NORMAL Single Assign Directory Number SADN that can be used by only one station e SADN HOTDESK Single Assign Directory Number SADN for Hot Desk Usage e MADN Multi Assign Directory Number MADN that can be used by one or multiple stations CATEGORY OF DN e My DN is assigned on flexible button 1 by default It can be moved to a different flexible button but cannot be deleted e My DN M DN each station must have at least one unique number that cannot be used by another station minimum requirement automatically assigned by board configuration Otherwise it is not possible
428. erified the Toll Restriction for the CO IP line When a CO line is seized the system will monitor the line for dial tone The System selects lines from a group using the Round Robin First Choice or Last Choice method based on Admin Programming Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Access 3 38 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To place an outgoing CO call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press desired CO line and enter CO ACCESS CODE OR 3 Dial the CO line or CO Access Code 4 Dial the desired number To place an outgoing IP call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press desired CO line and enter CO ACCESS CODE OR 3 Dial the CO line or CO Access Code 4 Dial the desired number registered in H 323 Routing Attribute TRANS PGM 360 then the outgoing call will be made to the assigned IP Address To receive an IP call If a call is received from the assigned IP Address in H 323 Incoming Attribute it is routed to the assigned incoming CO Group To answer an incoming CO IP call 1 2 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button OR Press DN button and lift the handset to speak privately Single Line Phone To place an outgoing CO IP call 1 2 3 Lift the handset Dial the CO line or CO Access Code Dial the desired number To answer an incoming CO IP call
429. erred recalled DISA SUPERVISION TMR DISA Supervision Timer 12 1 9 sec VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR Determines the amount of time 13 0 9 sec 0 paused before playing VMIB announcement INCOMING TIME TABLE The time Table index to be applied 14 1 9 none none to incoming CO Call CO DELAY ANSWER TMR For Incoming calls on the ISDN 15 0 100 100msec 0 Line this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message OFFNET FWD USAGE ISDN lines can be set to use Call 16 O Join Join Deflection Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these feature 1 Call Deflection 2 Call Rerouting CO Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 167 Each CO line is assigned to stations or a feature code for an incoming call Ring Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring modes The Ring signal can be set for immediate or delayed ringing allowing other stations to be assigned ringing and answered prior to a delayed station If DISA Tone Service feature code is assigned DISA service is activated at the CO line 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 167 2 Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range Fora single CO Line enter the same number twice For MBX IP 100 acceptable range is 01 80 for MBX IP 300 the acceptable range is 001 240 3 Select Day mode and press the desired Flex button refer to the following Table Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 5 Press th
430. es after a busy CO line returns to idle Therefore Queue Recall ring may be delayed after a busy CO line returns to idle In addition when several stations request CO Queuing to a busy CO line the Queue Recall Ring may not be provided sequentially OPERATION Digital Phone To request to be placed in queue for a busy CO IP line 1 Press the desired CO GROUP ACCESS CODE button or dial the CO Group Access Code Press the MSG CALLBK button a confirmation tone is received 3 Hang up the MSG CALLBK LED will flash Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Queuing 3 46 Chapter 3 System Features To cancel the queue from the queued station Press the MSG CALLBK button the MSG CALLBK LED extinguishes Single Line Phone To request to be placed in queue while receiving the All Lines Busy signal 1 Press the hook switch 2 Enter the Call Back Feature code To cancel the queue from the queued station 1 Lift the handset 2 Enter the Call Back Cancel Feature code System When a CO IP line becomes available A distinctive Queue Recall is sent to the station with the oldest queued call the appropriate CO IP line button LED will flash the CO IP line and station will appear busy to all other users ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data CO Queuing Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 1 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 133 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO
431. et Agent cans turn on or turn off Auto Answer function with ACD Agent Auto Work feature code 3 Administrator can define log in agent s headset mode when agent goes to log in PGM214 Flex14 If Handset Mode When Agent Login admin is set as Headset or Handset or Ear Mic when agent goes to log in state this agent s headset mode is changed to defined value 4 Administrator can define log out agent s headset mode when agent goes to log out PGM214 Flex15 If Handset Mode When Agent Logout admin is set as Headset or Handset or Ear Mic when agent goes to log out state this agent s headset mode is changed to defined value 5 Administrator can define log out agent s call restriction PGM214 Flex16 Administrator can restrict all of call and also only restrict outgoing call If defined value is all of call log out agent cannot make any call PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Agent Log in Log out Default Setting 10 41 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOLIDAY SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 5 0 Release Release call when group
432. et for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring Table Tone or Pilot Hunt No Answer When an Incoming Call goes unanswered it can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring Table Tone or Pilot Hunt Transfer No Answer When an Incoming Call goes unanswered after an unscreened transfer the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt or Transfer Station Recall No Answer When an Incoming Call goes unanswered after a recall on a CO call the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring Table Tone or Pilot Hunt Vacant If dialing analysis determines an Incoming CO Call is to a vacant number the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table or Tone DND If an Incoming CO call is attempted to a DND User the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone or Pilot Hunt Handset Lifted If an Incoming CO Call is received at a Station where the handset is lifted Off Hook the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone or Pilot Hunt Blocking If an Incoming Call is placed to a Blocked User the call can be set for routing destination Disconnect ATD CO Ring Assign Alt Ring table Tone or Pilot Hunt CONDITIONS Thi
433. etermines the amount of time the attendant receives recall after which the system will disconnect the call 00 24 hrs 00 ACNR PAUSE TMR This timer establishes the time between ACNR attempts 005 300 secs 030 PAGE TIME OUT TMR Determines the maximum duration of a page after which the caller and Page Zone are released 000 300 secs 15 PAUSE TMR A Timed pause of this duration is used in Speed Dial and during other automatically dialed digits sent to the PSTN 1 9 secs VM PAUSE TMR When the system sends a Pause to Voice Mail using In band signals the Pause interval is defined by this timer 1 9 secs VMIB MSG MIN TMR This timer sets the minimum duration allowed for a voice mail message in the system s VMIB Messages shorter than this period are not stored 1 9 secs VMIB MSG MAX TMR This timer sets the maximum duration allowed for the User Greeting in the system s VMIB 00 999 secs 60 CALL WAIT WARN TMR Determine the call wait indication tone repeat time 010 1800 secs 030 CAMP ON WARN TMR Determine the camp on indication tone repeat time 10 010 1800 secs 030 YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 CO IP Access 3 37 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CCR INTER DGT TMR Inter digit timer used with Custome
434. f 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 On ACD Call GROUP Q CNT DISPLAY This entry defines 6 0 Off 0 Off display of Queuing count of ACD call 1 On Q CNT INTERVAL This entry defines display 7 0 Real Time 0 Real Time interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec LOGIN PASSWD CHECK This entry defines check 8 0 Off 0 Off the password when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AGENT STATE This entry defines usage of 9 0 Ready state 0 Ready state default Agent State option when agent log in 1 DND state 2 Work state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER This entry defines usage 10 0 Off 0 Off of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log in 1 On LOGIN AUTO WORK This entry defines usage of 11 0 Off 0 Off Agent Auto Work option when agent log in 1 0n Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Call Traffic ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Call Traffic 10 59 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution a Total Calls Count b Unanswered Call Coun c Average Call Time 00 00 minute second d Average Ring Time 00 00 minute second e Busy Count and Time 00 00 00 hour minute second f Number of calls count in Current Queue g Average Queued Time 00 00 minute second and Longest Queued Time
435. feature is set to ALERTING Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about Alerting Message R2 ANI SVC REQ if this feature is set to ON to R2 line 6 0 Off Off system request ANI digits CLI data to the calling party 1 On ICLID SERVICE if this feature is set to ON incoming 7 0 Off Off call is routed according to ICLID Table TRANS PGM 1 On 262 OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI if this feature is set to 8 0 Off Off ON original caller s CLI is sent when there is transit call 1 On OWN CODE Own Code 9 Max 16 digits CLI PREFIX CODE prefix code is inserted ahead of 10 Max 2 digits received CLI data according to call type Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO Incoming Attributes II TRANS PGM 166 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Ring Assignment TRANS PGM 167 A 51 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call 9 000 255 min 000 without supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected WAIT CLRFWD TIME Clear Forward Waiting Time 10 001 300 sec 300 MAX RING TIME Max Ring Time for when incoming CO 11 015 300 sec 120 calls are transf
436. ff 1 0n 0 Off Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables System Date Time TRANS PGM 233 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Button LED Flash Rate TRANS PGM 234 A 95 Appendix A System Programming Tables 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SET SYSTEM TIME DATE Sets the system time 1 HH MM SET SYSTEM TIME DATE Sets the system date 2 MMDDYY DST ENABLE MODE Enables DST feature for System 3 0 Off 0 Off Time 1 0n DST START TIME The DST start time Web See DST Table 2nd Sunday of Only March at 2 00 AM DST END TIME The DST end time See DST Table 1st Sunday in Nov at 2 00 AM Button LED Flash Rate TRANS PGM 234 The LED Color and Flash Rate for various functions and states can be assigned to any one of 15 System signals The various functions and states are shown in the Tables refer to COLOR and FLASH RATE Tables 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 234 2 Enter the Function range to change the LED Color or Flash rate refer to Tables 3 Press the Flex button 1 and dial 1 3 for LED color OR Press the Flex button 2 and dial 00 14 for LED flash rate 5
437. follow the settings for Night Service If Auto Service Status Change is set as Manual Change PGM212 Flex5 supervisor can change group status manually Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution OPERATIONS Group Forward Status Manually by Supervisor OR Night Status Manually by Supervisor OR Holiday Status Manually by Supervisor OR ACD Call Operation when Group Forward Status ACD Call Operation when Group Overflow or Night or Holiday Status PROGRAMMING Station Port Puortiral b Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 ACD Group Service Status 10 11 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Station Port Attribute PGM 124 see details on page A 27 PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MSG WAIT INDICATION this menu determines the 1 01 48 MW Remind Tone way to notify a station to wait message APPLY DIFF RING determine user s differential ring 2 1 9 All Ring mode Applying to all ring mode or normal ring mode ICM DIFF RING ID set the intercom differential ring 3 000 254 On ID usually 1 4 is valid CO DIFF RING ID set the CO line differential ring ID 4 000 254 Off usually 1 4 is valid COS APPLY OPTION determine whether the 5 0 SUB DN SUN DN applied COS is the COS of SUB DN or COS of MY DN 1 MY DN when station accesses SUB DN HOOK FLASH WHEN
438. from 1 to 324 for MBX IP 300 from 1 to 108 for MBX IP 100 Station number with station bin index greater than My DN s bin index is Sub DN Sub DN is used for MADN or SADN MADN can have 10 different stations as its members but SADN has only 1 member In addition to Sub DN which is used for SADN can be configured as a hot desk agent number If Sub DN is used for hot desk agent station is not allocated explicitly for Sub DN member Only when a terminal login to hot desk with Sub DN Sub DN has terminal s station number My DN as its member To set the terminal type 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 130 2 Use the dial pad to enter the station number 3 Press the desired Flex button 1 2 Flex 1 to configure station number type Dial 1 3 to configure station number type Type 1 SADN Normal Type 2 MADN Type 3 SADN Hot Desk Agent Press the SAVE button to store the data entries NOTE Type cannot be changed for My DN numbers Flex 2 to display station member view Station Number Attributes TRANS PGM 131 135 Station Number Attributes define features and functions available to the station number Generally the entry will turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable Refer to the following tables for a description of the features and the input required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 131 for Station Number Attributes 1 132 for Station Number Attributes 2 133 for Station Number Attribu
439. ft at Executive Station or Secretary 1 First Secretary EXECUTIVE message left at Executive station FIRST SEC message is left at the first secretary Executive Executive Access TRANS PGM 242 Each Executive can be allowed or denied access to other Executives As a default calls between executives are disabled 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 242 2 Use the dial pad to enter a bin no 3 Press desired Flex button number 1 2 Flex 1 access for 1 to 24 Flex 2 access for 25 to 48 4 Press the desired Flex button to toggle access LED ON access allowed LED OFF access not allowed 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TABLES DATA TRANS PGM 250 269 Toll Tables TRANS PGM 250 Based on Table entries Stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries If entries are only made in the Allow Table only those numbers entered can be dialed all other dialed numbers will be restricted Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Digit Conversion Tables TRANS PGM 251 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Digit Conversion Tables TRANS PGM 251 A 105 Appendix A System Programming Tables 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 251 Dial Digit Conversion Table Number 1 9
440. g VMIB announcement Release 1 7 XX vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP Outgoing CO Line Option CONDITIONS ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 15 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION If set Outgoing CO Line operation is automatic PROGRAMMING CO Data CO Line Data PGM 160 see details on page A 45 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE Displays physical line type of 1 Display Only selected CO line SVC TYPE Set CO line type as DID or 2 0 Normal Normal Normal 1 DID OUTGOING GRP NO Set CO Group 3 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to outgoing calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 INCOMING GRP NO Set CO Group 4 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to incoming calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 TENANT NO Set Tenant group number to 5 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 apply to CO lines 1 3 MBX IP 100 DGT CONVERT TBL Set Digit Conversion 6 1 9 2 Table index SIGNAL TYPE Set Answer Signal Type 7 0 No Signal No Signal 1 Send Wink IC 2 Wait Seize Ack OG 3 Send Wink amp Wait Sz Ack 4 Send amp Wait Sans 5 Send Wink amp Send Answer IC 6 Wait Ack amp Send Answer OG 7 Send All amp Wait All RLS TIMING If Release Timing is set to first 8 0 First Release First RLS release CO line is released when one party 1 Caller Release release the c
441. g path to transfer the call and the old connecting path of transferring station is cleared CONDITIONS If both of the transferred and destination Stations are located on the same system the networking path is cleared the transfer call will be setup as an Intercom call The Transfer will be canceled when the transferring Station User presses the flashing CO line access code or TRANS button Net Transfer calls do not recall at the origination Station The User will hear an error tone if the Networking Path is unavailable Net transfer is not activated at a Busy station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION To perform a Screened Transfer to another Station on a different Networked System To perform an Unscreened Transfer to another Station on a different Networked Station ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan CO Line Data a gt Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 System Networking 3 213 Chapter 3 System Features CO to CO Attribute TRANS PGM 179 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while stations are 1 0 Off On connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group the station 1 On can transfer the call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is connected to 2 0 Off On outgoing CO call of firs
442. g tone will be served as alarm to Attendant 15 0 Off 1 0n 0 Off SMDR CONN TYPE This assigns port to be used for SMDR Interface SMDR Interface is served through LAN or SIO 16 0 SIO 1 LAN 0 SIO SMTP MAIL SERVER ADDRESS SMTP Mail Server IP Address Web Only SMTP MAIL SERVER PORT SMTP Mail Server Port Number SMDR REPORTED MAIL ADDRESS SMDR User Mail Address Max 64 characters SMDR SMTP MAIL SERVER ID SMTP Mail Server User ID SMDR SMTP MAIL SERVER PASSWORD SMTP Mail Server User Password SMDR SMTP SENDER ADD Sender Address of Reported SMDR E Mail Max 64 characters SMDR SMTP SEND WEEKLY SET Select SMDR Mail Send Day N A Monday Sunday N A SMDR MAIL SEND DAILY SET Sets time of day for SMDR data to be sent on a daily basis 00 for no daily records 01 23 for hour of the day 00 23 00 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Admin Programming 3 194 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDR MAIL AUTO SEND MODE If the Web 0 Off 1 On SMDR buffer is full the system can automatically Only 1 On send a notification by e mail SMDR MAIL AUTO DELETE MODE Deletes 0 Off 1 0n SMDR records after sending e mail 1 0n RELATED FEATURES Call Cost Display s
443. g up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer 1 2 3 Press for hook switch Dial the station to receive the transfer Hang up to complete the transfer RELATED FEATURES Hold Recall see page 3 102 Call Transfer CO IP see page 3 31 Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 Call Transfer CO IP A Station may be permitted to transfer a CO IP call to another CO IP line establishing an Unsupervised Conference between the two external parties If the receiving party is called through an ISDN or VoIP path the Transfer Hold Recall Timer is initiated and if it expires Hold Recall is initiated CONDITIONS A call using the service of 2 CO lines and not providing call disconnection detection will be disconnected following the expiration of the Unsupervised Conference timer The system provides Transfer Recall on ISDN and VoIP calls providing Answer Supervision If during a transfer to an external party the user presses the CO IP line of the original call the outgoing call is disconnected and the original call is connected to the user The CO to CO transfer can be enabled or disabled by using the Transit Option on CO line basis and also by using offnet forward option on station basis If the transferred call is not answered by the destination Station the call is routed to the Transfer No Answer Destination of the CO Alternative Destination When CO 1 is tr
444. ge PROGRAMMING Station Data Station Group Data Tenant Data Web Admin p i Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Paging 4 17 Chapter 4 Intercom System Data Paging Time out Timer TRANS PGM 220 FLEX 4 see details on page A 83 TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PAGE TIME OUT TMR Determines the maximum duration of a 4 000 300 15 page after which the caller and Page Zone are released secs Numbering Plan Internal Page Calling Answer Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 15 Internal Page Answer Meet Me Page 547 Page Auto Answer TRANS PGM 115 FLEX 69 see details on page A 22 RELATED FEATURES Meet Me Page Answer see page 4 17 HARDWARE External Amplifier amp Speakers Meet Me Page Answer Any station may respond to a Meet Me Page request over an Internal or External Page Zone The user answers the page from any Station and is connected to the Paging Party The Paging Party can answer the page by pressing the HOLD SAVE fixed button and other users can answer by dialing the Page Auto Answer Feature Code or Internal Page Answer Feature Code Page Answer Dial Codes Page Type MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Page Auto Answer 546 546 Internal Page Answer 547 547 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012
445. gits time seting for Forward destination TIMED FORWARD TYPE determines the Timed seting for 5 0 Not Used Not Used Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans TIMED FWD DESTINATION determines the Timed seting for 6 Max 8 digits Forward destination Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables ACD Group TRANS PGM 212 ACD Group Capacities Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Release 1 7 h S April 2012 ACD Group Attribute TRANS PGM 213 A 77 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forward 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 5 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute TRANS PGM 213 Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls or internal calls will search
446. group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line Max 4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4 First Station group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 Broker Call 8 1 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone Broker Call Broker Call allows an SLT User to engage in 2 Calls alternating between the two Parties so that the conversation with each Party is private There are two types of Broker Call e Transfer Broker Call 2nd Call is originated by the SLT user e Call Wait Camp On Broker Call 2nd Call is delivered to the SLT through a Call Wait CONDITIONS After a Hook Switch Flash if the Call results in an Error Busy No Answer or an Abnormal State the SLT User may shortly press Hook Switch to retrieve the Held Call During a Transfer Broker Call if the SLT User goes On Hook the Broker Call Parties are connected Call Transfer During a Transfer Broker Call if the active caller disconnects from the SLT User the Held Party if another Station is connected to the SLT During a Call Wait Broker Call if the SLT User goes On Hook the Active Call is disconnected and the Held Call will Recall to the SLT During a Call Wait Broker Call if the Active Party disconnects from the SLT the SLT User
447. h is currently being used and Dial a phone number of an empty room to be used and Decide whether to swap rooms 0 Confirm 1 Cancel Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear service set tone Otherwise you may hear an error tone Ao oe ONS Maid Status Maid status can be registered from front desk guest station and PMS The following maid status settings are supported 1 TO_BE_CLEANED UNDER_CLEANING READY_FOR_SELL OUT_OF_SERVICE UNDER_REPAIR REPAIR_COMPLETED 7 ROOM_OCCUPIED CONDITIONS Ooo WwW DY Itis possible to register maid status individually or entirely from PMS Itis possible to register maid status from front desk From guest room maid status can be registered for itself Itis impossible to register maid status from an office station or a service station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 OPERATION Front Desk To change Maid Status Digital Phone To change Maid Status SLT To change Maid Status Appendix B Hotel Management Release 1 7 WY vertical April 2012 Room Charge Status Print B 25 OPNAR Appendix B Hotel Management Make hook flash Designate Maid Status 1 7 Make hook flash Designate MAID ID 0000 9999 Make hook flash If it is successful you may hear a service set tone Otherwise you may hear an error an tone Room Charge Status Print
448. hapter 4 Intercom Message Wait Call Back Station Message Wait Call Back When a Called Station does not answer or is in DND a Station User can activate a Message Wait Indication MWI to request a Call Back A Station may receive a MWI from any number of other Stations in the System The Station receiving the MWIls can return the calls using the MSG CALLBK button When a Busy Station is called the Calling User may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call Back When the Called Station returns to Idle the System notifies the Initiating Station with Call Back ring When the User answers the previously Busy Station is called When a Message is waiting the MSG CALLBK button LED will flash when MWI is received at a SLT the MW lamp will flash CONDITIONS A Message Wait Call Back Return Call will always ring at the Receiving Station overriding the Intercom Signaling mode selected A Station can leave only one Call Back request The MSG CALLBK button LED will continue to flash until all MWIs and Call Back Requests have been serviced including Voicemails Ifa Station is attempting to leave a message and the System MWI queue is full the oldest MWI will be deleted A MWI Reminder Tone can be enabled to remind the user of MWls A Station in Call Forward can leave a MWI A MWl is left at the Originally Called Station even if the call is Forwarded A Digital Phone with LCD may Call Back to Stations th
449. he VIP guest by pressing HOLD SAVE button CONDITIONS This feature is only available for attendants VIP guests are determined depending on guest grade designated upon check in There can be maximum 20 VIP wake up logs in system The log is deleted once the attendant presses SAVE button while checking VIP wake up logs OPERATION To make a VIP WAKE UP button PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 VIP Wake Up Feature Code SAVE To check and serve VIP wake up call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial VIP Wake Up Feature Code or press VIP WAKE UP button 3 Wake up information and current status of VIP guest is displayed on LCD If there re multiple wake up calls the information can be scrolled by using the VOL UP VOL DOWN keys 4 Press the SAVE button to call the VIP guest 5 If the guest answers the call announce the wake up feature Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Fidelio Hotel Feature optional with license MBX IP MBX IP 3000 3001 rr os Case 2 P ms Internet heath Case 1 cg m Remote Local J k Network a We eeeee Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Fidelio Hotel Feature optional with license B 47 Appendix B Hotel Management Feature Category Specific Features Guest Data Check In Check Out Room Change
450. he table on page C 1 Use the table to determine the two digits that must be entered from the dial pad for each character Required Data Entries During initialization a default database is established refer to Initialization section on page A 1 and Quick Reference tables in Appendix B However there are several data entries which MUST be completed to assure proper operation of the system The system employs the Country Code refer to TRANS PGM 100 on page A 8 to establish tone and gain plans specific to the country Also the MPB IP address sub net mask and Default Gateway Router IP address refer to TRANS PGM 108 on page A 14 must be assigned for proper external IP call operation and WAN access as well as remote Web Admin access Data Entry Mode All data entry is accomplished from an Admin Station or station assigned for data entry Station Port Attributes TRANS PGM CODE 121 Flex button 5 After DB initialization Station 100 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables To enter the PROGRAM MODE TRANS PGM i To select a program Procedures for Data Entry PRE PROGRAMMED DATA TRANS PGM Codes 100 to 108 Location Program TRANS PGM 100 To change the Country Code p i Release 1 7 Cal April 2012 Location Program TRANS PGM 100 A 9 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS
451. hen an incoming call is assigned to be answered by a DID DISA Auto Attendant or Station Hunt group announcement The Language Selection announcement is played in multiple phrases one in each of the equipped languages with a request for the caller to input a digit to select the appropriate language The system then employs the defined announcement DID DISA etc recorded for the selected language CONDITIONS Multi language support is available with the VMIB AAIB Separate announcements must be recorded by the Attendant for each language supported Multi language announcement must be stored in announcement table TRANS PGM 259 first And then the announcement index can be programmed in other announcement entries for multiple language support OPERATION System System automatically plays the Language Selection announcement and plays prompts in the selected language To record a VMIB Multi Language Selection announcement at the Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 062 Record VM Announcement code Dial the VMIB Slot number Dial the VMIB Multi Language selection Announcement number 01 70 Dial the Language Type number 1 3 Press the key After the beep tone record the desired message ONO R WN Press the HOLD SAVE button to stop recording and save the message Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Multiple Language Selection 3 121 AD
452. her stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External MEMBER ASSIGN this entry assigns stations as members 6 l of a station group Station Group Greeting Queuing Attribute TRANS PGM 201 see details on page A 65 TRANS PGM 201 GREETING TYPE this entry defines the type of greeting tone BTN RANGE Normal Prompt Annc INT MOH EXT MOH VMIB MOH1 VMIB MOH2 VMIB MOH3 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 ONDAN DEFAULT GREETING PLAY this entry defines greeting play time 000 180 secs 000 Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 158 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TONE NO This entry defines greeting tone 3 01 19 Not Assigned number in case greeting type is normal GREETING PRT ANNC This entry defines greeting prompt 4 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case greeting type is PROMPT ANNC GREETING REPEAT NO This entry defines greeting repeat 5 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 6 000 100 secs 0 before greeting repeat QUEUING TYPE This entry defines the type of queuing tone 7 1 Normal 3 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1
453. igit 5 Service A 73 209 1 Station Digit 6 Service Station Digit 7 Service Station Digit 8 Service Station Digit 9 Service Station PILOT HUNT GROUP A 74 210 Pilot Hunt Call Service 1 0 All Call All Call 1 Intercom Call 2 External Call Service Type 2 0 Terminal Circular 1 Circular Time Table Index 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 Pilot Hunt Member Assignment 4 PILOT HUNT GROUP II A 75 211 l Day Forward Type 1 10 Not Used Not Used 1 Unconditional 2 Busy 3 No Answer 4 Busy No Answer Day Forward Destination 2 Night Forward Type 0 Not Used Not Used 1 Unconditional 2 Busy 3 No Answer 4 Busy No Answer Night Forward Destination 4 ar Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 55 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA Message Wait Alert Tone Timer A 84 222 2 0 60 1min 0 Inter Digit Timer 3 0 300 1sec 15 Incoming CO Inter Digit Timer 4 1 60 1sec
454. igits 13 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T2 CHANGED The digits to be dialed in Day 3 Time 2 14 Max 16 digits when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 15 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 3 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR DNT TIME INDEX Day Night Timed Time Table Index 16 1 9 none none LCR TIME INDEX LCR Time Table Index 17 1 9 none none NAME When DID destination starts to ring the name is 18 Max 16 digits displayed on the ringing station s LCD APPLY OPTION The Apply Option can be applied 19 0 All O All according to the caller 1 Station 2 CO Line 3 Diable Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Linked Station Pairs Group 3 114 Chapter 3 System Features Digit Conversion option TRANS PGM 252 see details on page A 106 TRANS PGM 252 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DISPLAY CONV DIGIT If itis set to ON the station LCD is updated 1 On Off Off to the dialed digits when alerting message is received from the PX after dialing PRINT CONV DIGIT If it is set to ON the dialed digits are printed 2 On Off Off to the SMDR LCR Time Table TRANS PGM 255 see de
455. il 2012 CO Attribute I Il Ill TRANS PGM 160 162 A 47 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LINE LENGTH LCO line length 6 0 0km Okm 1 3km 2 5km 3 7km ZONE NO Zone number of CO lines 7 1 9 1 PROMPT LANGUAGE VMIB Prompt Index 1 3 1 GAIN TABLE IDX Determines Gain Table for CO line 9 1 3 1 CO Attributes I 11 TRANS PGM 162 TRANS PGM 162 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO ACCESS MODE CO lines can be set to blocked or CO 1 0 Blocked Line Normal CO line or Dedicated line 1 Normal CO Line Line 2 Dedicated Line DIGIT SENDING MODE CO lines can be set to send digit 2 0 Overlap Overlap with overlap or enblock method 1 Enblock MAX DGT LEN Number of dialed digits can be limited 00 32 32 OVERLAP MIN DGT LEN Number of minimum digits can 4 00 32 00 be limited for overlap dialing CHECK PASSWORD Reserved for Password Password 5 0 Off Off can be requested when the CO line is seized 1 On R2 CONNECT MODE R2 line connection mode 6 0 End to End End to End 1 Link by Link R2MFC BACKWARD VAL R2MFC Backward Value 01 15 01 DUMMY DIAL TONE When CO line is seized dummy dial 8 0 Off Off tone can be provided for in case if PSTN does not provide it 1 On T1 NORMAL MODE Determines if Loop or Ground is 9 0 Loop Loop selected for each T1 Digital lines 1 Ground T1 DID MODE Determines if IMM Wink De
456. ill be available Fidelio lock key for Hotel PMS and Fidelio interface will be available Release 1 7 ds i April 2012 Hotel Service Type B 3 Appendix B Hotel Management The MBX IP system supports hospitality features like check in check out management of guest room information Guest name Guest Class of Service Maid Status Mini bar etc convenient features for hotel guests Wake up DND Message Wait Bath Alarm etc and efficient hotel operation and services through interworking with PMS Property Management System system In the MBX IPsystem hotel features and office features are available in one software package Basically the hotel features are available only for hotel stations like guest station front desk and service station But other normal call features like call transfer call forward camp on message wait and etc are common to both hotel and office stations It is also possible to allow or deny calls between hotel and office stations This configuration would be very useful in case there is a client who wants to have an office solution and hotel solution at the same time with only one physical telephony system Hotel Service Type Each extension of the MBX IP is assigned its own hotel service type and typical features and services are provided depending on the allocated hotel service type There are 4 hotel service types Office Station Guest Station Front Desk and Service Station
457. imed Mode Change 513 108 DID DISA Restriction 685 CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 114 MBX IP System provides CO Group Access Codes 73 in MBX IP 300 25 in MBX IP 100 Each code can be edited by Admin Programming Each CO Group Access Code has its attributes refer to TRANS PGM Code 178 1 Press the TRANS PGMN button and dial 114 2 Press Flex button 1 to edit whole CO Grp access code by range 3 Enter desired access code by range OR 4 Press Flex button 2 to edit one CO Grp access code Use the Volume up down buttons to scroll to the next previous index 5 Enter desired access code Press the SAVE button to update changed data Check if newly entered number is available refer to Prefix Code plan TRANS PGM Code 111 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Group Number TRANS PGM 115 OR ACD Group Number TRANS PGM 118 y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 STATION DATA TRANS PGM Codes 120 152 A 23 OR Appendix A System Programming Tables Press Flex button 2 to edit one ACD Group Number Use the Volume Up Down buttons to scroll to the next previous index Enter desired ACD Group number Press the SAVE button to update changed data Check if newly entered number is available number according to Prefix Code plan TRANS PGM
458. imers Il TRANS PGM 221 A 84 System Timers Il TRANS PGM 222 A 84 System Attributes TRANS PGM 223 A 85 System Password TRANS PGM 226 A 86 Alarm Attributes TRANS PGM 227 A 87 External Control Contacts TRANS PGM 228 A 87 Music Sources TRANS PGM 229 A 88 RS 232 Port Settings TRANS PGM 230 A 89 Serial Port Function Selections TRANS PGM 231 A 90 SMDR Attributes TRANS PGM 232 A 91 System Date Time TRANS PGM 233 A 94 Button LED Flash Rate TRANS PGM 234 A 95 ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes TRANS PGM 235 A 99 Mobile Attributes TRANS PGM 236 A 100 One Digit Service Attributes TRANS PGM 237 A 101 Release 1 7 XW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 12 Dummy Dial Tone Digit TRANS PGM 240 A 101 Executive Secretary Assign TRANS PGM 241 A 102 Executive Executive Access TRANS PGM 242 A 103 TABLES DATA TRANS PGM 250 269 A 103 Toll Tables TRANS PGM 250 A 103 Digit Conversion Tables TRANS PGM 251 A 104 Digit Conversion Options TRANS PGM 252 A 106 Time Table Attributes TRANS PGM 253 A 107 Weekly Time Table TRANS PGM 254 A 108 LCR Time Table Attrib
459. ing Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features To erase Wake Up Alarm Digital Phone To register Wake Up Alarm To stop the Alarm when alerting To erase Wake Up Single Line Phone To register Wake Up To stop the Alarm when alerting Puoaortiral Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Wake up Alarm 3 285 Chapter 3 System Features To erase Wake Up Alarm 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Program Mode Access code confirmation tone is heard 3 Dial 14 Erase Wake up code 4 Press Hook flash and a conformation tone is provided ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Wake Up Time TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 8 page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WAKE UP SET sets wake up time 8 HH MM Repeat Wake up TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 9 page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WAKEUP REPEAT enables daily repeating alarm 9 0 Off Off 1 0n Table Data Wake Up Answer Tone use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 65 page A 138 INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 65 Wake up Answer Tone This is provided when station answers wake up ring Wake Up Indication Ring use Web Admin TRANS PGM 265 FLEX 10 page A 115 INDEX RING NAME REMARK 10 Wakeup Indication Ring Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Tenant Data THIS PAGE INTE
460. ing Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 152 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Speed Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 1 page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SPEED ACCESS gives station speed dial bins access authority 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Table Data System Speed Dial Table TRANS PGM 257 page A 110 TRANS PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYS SPD DIAL The System Speed Dial Digits 1 Max 32 digits SYS SPD NAME The System Speed Dial Name 2 Max 16 characters TOLL FREE Assignment to apply toll free 3 0 Off 0 Off 1 On TENANT NO The tenant number to be applied to the System 4 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 Speed Access 1 5 MBX IP 100 RELATED FEATURES Dial by Name see page 3 60 Last Number Redial LNR see page 3 110 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover see page 3 62 Saved Number Redial SNR see page 6 18 Speed Dial Pause Insertion see page 3 146 System Speed Dial see page 3 150 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Call Coverage 3 153 Chapter 3 System Features Station Call Coverage The DN button at a Station can be set for incoming calls only by disabling outgoing calls If the MADN type DN button has a delayed ring option the button will operate as a call coverage button This feature must be programmed by the Administrator individual users cannot set this f
461. ions amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 211 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 0 0 0 0 BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 10 0 Off 1 0n On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Net Transfer A Station User can transfer any kind of CO call to a Station on other systems by pressing the TRANS button and dialing a transfer destination Station as a Call Transfer within the same system There are two kinds of Transfer Screened and Unscreened NOTE There are two kinds of standard transfer method in QSIG and H 450 Transfer by Join and Transfer by Rerouting The main difference is how the connecting path is controlled between the transferring and transfer destination Stations Transfer by join uses an additional connecting path for transferring the call to another station Transfer by rerouting uses a new connectin
462. isconnect Warning tone is provided 15 seconds prior to disconnect If a DISA caller encounters a System All Lines Busy Busy tone is received for 5 seconds before ICM Dial tone is presented again and the DISA caller may try another call LEDs associated with the DISA CO Line appearance will provide normal status indications at all Stations except Attendants the LED for the line at an Attendant Station will flutter at 240 ipm when Busy Ifa DISA Caller accesses a CO IP Line the Transit option is applied CO to CO Attribute this function can make a call recovered after conversation during an assigned time OPERATION System Incoming calls enabled for DISA service e The System will recognize the Incoming call e The System will answer the call and connect the caller to the Intercom Dial tone or AA announcement e The Call will be processed based on the entered digits programming DISA Caller To remotely access System resources 1 Place call to the System DISA facility 2 Onreceipt of the Intercom Dial tone AA Announcement dial as desired PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan DISA Tone Service PGM 113 CO Line Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP as Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 53 Chapter 5 CO IP
463. isconnected and the circuits in use are returned to idle CONDITIONS Separate Timers are assigned for the various types of hold System Transfer etc Hold Timer can be assigned by Tone time in the Tone Table The route destination after a Hold recall ring is programmed in Incoming Outgoing CO Alternate The following destinations can be assigned Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign Alternative Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Transfer Station Transfer Call Only OPERATION Hold Recall operation is automatic Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hold 3 103 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Incoming CO Alternate TRANS PGM 169 see page A 53 TRANS PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive 1 F1 Busy Disconnect DAY F2 No Answer 1 sec NIGHT 2 F8 Invalid Disconnect F4 Transfer No Answer 1 sec F5 Recall No Answer TIMED 3 F6 DND aom F7 Out Of Service ii F8 Error 1 Disconnect 2 Attendant 3 CO Ring 4 Alt Ring Table 5 Tone 6 Pilot HuntGroup Outgoing CO Alternate TRANS PGM 173 see page A 57 TRANS PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ALT DEST Abnormal case can be selected as F1 Recall No Answer error type F2 Transfer No Answer F3 No Answer NO ANSWER DISCONNECT The CO call is 1 l disconnected Every destination is set to Di
464. istered as ACD Agent Log In Out feature code 3 If agent is in log in state agent is put into log out state ACD Call Operation 1 Ifan ACD call arrives system automatically finds an idle agent not in DND and not in Work Mode 2 If there are more than one idle agents system check the priority of each agent and then one of longest idle agents will be chosen from the highest priority group 3 If there is no available agent the ACD call will be queued and ACD announcement service is started PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan PGM113 see details on page A 17 ACD Numbering Plan PGM118 see details on page A 22 PGM 118 BTN RANGE REMARK ACD GROUP RANGE ACD Group Number edit 1 Start ACD Group Number amp by range End ACD Group Number ACD GROUP NO ACD Group Number edit 2 ACD Group Number Station Port Station Port Attribute PGM124 see details on page A 27 PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MSG WAIT INDICATION this menu determines the 1 01 48 MW Remind Tone way to notify a station to wait message APPLY DIFF RING determine user s differential ring 2 1 9 All Ring mode Applying to all ring mode or normal ring mode ICM DIFF RING ID set the intercom differential ring 3 000 254 On ID usually 1 4 is valid Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distributi
465. ive CLI Service 5 77 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Auto Called Number Redial ACNR 6 2 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 7 Auto Release of Speaker 6 4 Automatic Speaker Select 6 4 Background Music BGM 6 5 Call Log Display 6 6 CO Line Name Display 6 8 One Time DND 6 9 Group Listening 6 10 Intercom Signaling Mode 6 11 Mute 6 13 Off Hook Signaling 6 14 On Hook Dialing 6 15 Prime Line Immediately Delayed 6 16 Differential Ring 6 17 Saved Number Redial SNR 6 18 Speakerphone 6 19 Station Flexible Buttons 6 21 Station Flexible LED Flash Rates 6 22 Station ICLID Call Routing 6 23 Station User Programming amp Codes 6 24 Two Way Record 6 27 Answering Machine Emulation AME 6 30 Voice Over
466. ive CO IP Line Ringing This feature applies to all digital and analog CO Lines The ICLID received from the CO IP Line must be a telephone number to match a station ICLID List Each Station can have 10 ICLID numbers individually OPERATION Digital Phone To assign ICLID at the Station 1 Press PGM button and Dial 71 then the empty ICLID bin automatically will be allocated 2 Enter ICLID and press SAVE button 3 Enter the Routing Destination and press the SAVE button NOTE Routing Destination can be a Station number Hunt Group number or VMIB Forward code To view the assigned ICLID at the Station 1 Press PGM button and dial 72 ICLID information is displayed 2 Press VOLUMN UP DOWN to view the ICLID List Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone To delete the assigned ICLID on the Station Station User Programming amp Codes User Program Code Chart p 3 Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Station User Programming amp Codes 6 25 Chapter 6 Digital Phone USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK 11 Intercom Answer Mode 1 H 2 T 3 P 12 Name User name creation 2 digits for each character 13 Time Set wake up alarm time HH mm 24 hour clock 14 Cancel Wake up Alarm 15 Set language for the display 00 14 16 LCD D
467. l 1 Int Call 2 Ext Call DEFAULT All Call PICK UP MEMBER ASG assigns stations as members of a station 2 pickup group Page Group TRANS PGM 205 Under Page Group Assignments members are assigned to the Page Group refer to the programming table below for a description of the functions and data entries required Page Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 15 30 Members in a Group 50 50 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 205 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Page Group 01 15 for the MBX IP 100 and 01 30 for the MBX IP 300 The system will display the member of Page group NOTE For group members enter a station or station range For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number For a range enter the first and last station number in the range 3 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry i i Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Command Call Group TRANS PGM 206 Command Call Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 NOTE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 PTT Group TRANS PGM 208 A 73 PTT Group TRANS PGM 208 Appendix A System Programming Tables Each
468. l a call is routed to a forward destination 1 Uncond unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow a call is routed to a 2 Q Overflow forward destination when a queue is overflow 3 Tmeout a 3 Time out call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is 4 All expired 4 All a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired APPLY TIME TYPE This entry defines a time to apply 4 0 ALL ALL forward type 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED FWD DESTINATION This entry defines a forward 5 Max 16 digits None destination Trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR This entry defines a wrap up timer A 6 000 600 010 member is available when this timer is expired after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR This entry defines no answer 7 05 60 15 timer about each member If this timer is expired a call is routed to the next member RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 0 timer If this timer is expired a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 9 0 With Answer With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W o Answer Table Data Tone Frequency Cadence TRANS PGM 264 see details on page A 114 Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 see details on page A 111 TRANS PGM 259 BTN RANGE DEFAULT The VMIB slot amp Prompt No to be u
469. l 2012 System Networking 3 201 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING T Net Data T Net Attributes TRANS PGM 330 see aa on page A 143 TRANS PGM 330 Se BTN RANGE DEFAULT T NET ENABLE enable T NET function 1 0 Off Off ow 1 On oe CM Attributes ranggi 331 see details on page A 143 Se 331 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CH REGISTER determines if the LM will attempt registration 1 0 Off On with the CM tahi e set to ON for proper registration 1 On CH IP A SS This field defines the IP address of the CM that 2 IPv4 0 0 0 0 will 6G d by the LM address KNPKTS PORT In the TNET environment the IP KTS protocol 3 0001 9999 5588 naling UDP port is defined at present this field is not used do not change this port number CH TOTAL PORT Determines if the total number of Ports the LM 4 000 999 000 will request will be allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM this value must be equal to or less than the port count in the CM for the LM devices POLLING COUNT This field defines the maxi K failures 5 00 99 05 an LM considers a WAN fault POLLING INTERVAL This field defin ron time between 6 00 99 02 LM to CM polling attempts Y S Fail over PSTN Altriby S TRANSIPGM 333 see details on page A 144 TRANS PGM 333 BTN RANGE DEFAUL 0 Off 1 0n Determines if Fail over operation is 1 ENABLE re abled from the CM or LM enabled
470. l 9 Disconnect 9 i TENANT DATA ATD GROUP ASSIGNMENT A 118 270 Group Type 1 10 Terminal Terminal 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle Group Name Max 16 Ch CO Attendant Number Station Member 4 Station 100 ATD GROUP ATTRIBUTES A 118 271 Greeting Tone Type 1 0 Normal Normal 1 Prompt 2 Annc 3 Int MOH 4 Ext MOH Greeting Play Timer 2 000 180 1sec 0 Greeting Tone No 3 101 19 4 Greeting Prompt Announcement Table No 4 001 255 3 Greeting Repeat Count 5 000 100 0 Greeting Repeat Delay Timer A 118 271 6 000 100 1sec Da ae Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 83 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Group Name A 123 275 2 Max 16 Ch Member 3 Station NIGHT ATD GROUP ATTRIBUTES A 123 276 Greeting Tone Type 1 0 Normal Normal 1 Prompt 2 Annc 3 Int MOH 4 Ext MOH Greeting Play Timer 2 000 180 1sec Greeting Tone No 01 19 4 Greeting Prompt Announcement Table No 001 255 TENANT DATA Greeting Repeat Count 000 100 3 Greeting Repeat Delay Timer 6 000 100 1sec 0 Queuing Tone Type 0 Normal Int MOH 1 Prompt 2 Annc 3 Int MOH 4 Ext MOH Greeting Queuing Timeout Timer 8 010
471. l MBX IP System provides local survivability and may provide PSTN back up service ail over for internal calls that normally route over the WAN based on configuration UO certain operating conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon for Emergency calls Alt rnative arrangements should be made for access to Emergency services CONDITIONS oe A VOIB channel in the Vertical gage IP System is required Ina Centralized Network the maximum number of channels available is the maximum number of channels supggt ed by the central MBX IP system Ina Centralized T N amp rmiscellaneous functions Relay support MOH BGM Alarms and External Pa e not supported When NAPT ag Sher firewall functions are implemented packet relay for RTP packets is required peacket relay requires VoIP channels for each simultaneous call desired The locaGMiBX IP System will take over operation of registered devices if the Central officabes not respond to three consecutive poll attempts over a period of 10 102 S ds once connection to the WAN is re established the central office will K amp tomatically re gain control lt The MBX IP system can be installed behind a NAPT however Fixed NAT Port S forwarding is required for the host to be reachable using remote devices OPERATION System Operation of Centralized Network is automatic when configured and defined Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide Apri
472. l Management Program Menu Menu Sub Menu Hotel Feature 4 Hotel Room Setting 1 Room Wake Up Register 2 Room Wake Up Cancel 3 Room DND Setting 4 Room Message Wait 5 Room Bath Alarm Enable 6 Room Bath Alarm Disable 7 Room Author Code 8 Room Prepaid Money 5 Hotel Room Swap Setting 6 Hotel Room Maid Status 7 Hotel Room Charge Status 1 Room Charge Print 2 Room Status Print 3 Delete SMDR Service Station 8 Hotel Room Rate 1 Room Rate Register 2 Room Rate Assign 3 Room Part Time Fee 4 Room Bar Mini bar Charge 9 Hotel Room Call Rate 1 Room Call Rate Register 2 Room Call Rate Assign 0 Hotel Misc Program 1 Hotel Name 2 Set Call Forward Front Desk Front desk is a terminal that can be used in hotel front desk It provides more hotel features than the guest station Features like check in check out guest info setting and display room swapping and etc are supported for front desks Front desk can provide hotel services to the hotel guests and service stations CONDITIONS Front desk program menus are available only from front desks There can be multiple front desks and there is no limit on the number of front desks y 4 Release 1 7 Yv MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Managemen
473. l Wait tone For Digital Phone users the HOLD button LED will flash The called station can respond by either e Answering the waiting call which places the active call on Hold first Activating One Time DND e Ignoring the Camp On tone CONDITIONS The user may only Call Wait to a station in the busy mode a user may not Call Wait at a station in DND conference or receiving a Page etc A Call Wait tone is sent each time the calling user presses the programmed Call Wait button OPERATION Digital Phone To activate a Call Wait while receiving Intercom busy tone Press the Call Wait button called and calling stations will receive the Call Wait tone To answer a Call Wait after receiving the Call Wait indication Press the HOLD button the first active call is placed on hold and the station is connected with the Call Waiting station Digital Phone Single Line Phone To activate a Call Wait while receiving Intercom busy tone Press the Call Wait button called and calling stations will receive the Call Wait tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 One Digit Service 3 130 To answer a Call Wait after receiving the Call Wait indication Press the hook switch the first active call is placed on Hold and the station is connected with the Call Waiting station ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Call Wait Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 7 see de
474. l notification 1 Press the TRANS button 7 6 or dial the Outcall Phone Number feature code 2 Dial the phone number including CO access code Max 24 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 4 Return to idle after hearing service set tone Single Line Phone To enable disable outcall notification 1 Dial the Outcall Notification feature code 2 Dial 1 to enable or 0 to disable 3 Press the hook switch to save 4 Replace the handset return to idle To set a value for outcall notification attempts 1 Dial the Outcall Attempts feature code 2 Dial one digit number of attempts 1 9 3 Press the hook switch to save 4 Replace the handset return to idle To set a value for outcall notification interval for a retrial case 1 Dial the Outcall Interval feature code 2 Dial two digit minute information 01 60 3 Press the hook switch to save 4 Replace the handset return to idle To set a phone number for outcall notification 1 Dial the Outcall Phone Number feature code 2 Dial the phone number including CO access code Max 24 3 Press the hook switch to save 4 Replace the handset return to idle Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Outcall Notification 3 133 Chapter 3 System Features Called Party To retrieve voice messages after receiving notification call 1 5 When the called party answers the notification call the system will announc
475. laces or answers the CO call has a CLI number programmed only the CLI number of the station is sent as CLI information similar to Long CLI option of ipLDK system Ifa CO line is not using Representative CLI and the Station is not using a programmed CLI number then the CO Own Code Station number is used as CLI information Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION PROGRAMMING Station Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 75 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 135 BTN RANGE DEFAULT COLR WHEN ANSWER COLR Connected Line Id 5 0 Off Off Restriction an ISDN service removes connected party ID 1 On sent from the PSTN to the calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the CONNECT message If enabled here the system will send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station answers an ISDN call CLI NUMBER When not restricted FLEX 4 amp 5 above 6 24 digits this entry is added to the number sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT message in place of the station number CFWD CLI REDIRECT When an incoming ISDN call is 7 0 CLI CLI forwarded by the ISDN the call SETUP message will 1 Redirect contain an original and redirected CLI This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display the original or redirected numb
476. lay Wink is 10 0 Immediate Wink selected for each T1 DID lines 1 Wink 2 Delay Wink Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO CID Attributes TRANS PGM 163 CO Incoming Attribute I II TRANS PGM 165 166 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Incoming Attribute I Il TRANS PGM 165 166 A 49 Appendix A System Programming Tables 5 Press the SAVE button to store the changed data CO Incoming Attributes TRANS PGM 165 TRANS PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NAME incoming CO line name can be assigned 1 Max 16 chars SCREEN INDICATOR determines if screen indicator 2 0 Off user provided Off will be inserted in ISDN messages not screened 1 On user provided verified and passed CALLING TYPE for Incoming calls on the ISDN Line 3 0 Unknown Subscriber this parameter defines the Type of Number Plan 1 International provided in Connected Party Information Element of the 2 National ISDN call CONNECT message 3 Subscriber 4 Not Used CALLING NUM PLAN select connected number plan 4 0 Unknown Unknown of ISDN CONNECT message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private SEND PROGRESS IND if this feature is set to ALL 5 0 NO NO Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about All 1 ALL Message 2 ALERTING If this
477. ld during a phone conversation CONDITIONS After placing call on Hold the station returns to an idle state and the user can make another call Ifthe Station is in the off hook state when making a call on hold the dial tone is heard OPERATION Digital Phone To place an active CO Call on Hold Press the HOLD button To retrieve the Held CO Call Press the CO OR LOOP KEY button associated with the held CO and then the CO call is connected again If you are just using a DN button press HOLD again to return to the call you placed on hold Single Line Phone To place an active CO Call on Hold 1 Press the Hook switch during a conversation 2 Dial System Hold Code a confirmation tone is heard 3 Place the handset Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hold 3 102 Chapter 3 System Features To retrieve the Held CO call Lift the handset the Station is connected with the held party ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Hold Recall When a user places a CO IP call on hold a hold timer is activated If the timer expires the held call will recall at the station for the duration of the I Hold Recall timer If the call remains unanswered at timer expiration the Attendant will then receive recall for the Attendant Recall timer If still unanswered after timer expiration the CO IP call is d
478. le TRANS PGM 321 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 TNET CENTRALIZED NETWORKING TRANS PGM 330 335 A 143 Appendix A System Programming Tables TNET CENTRALI ZED NETWORKING TRANS PGM 330 335 In a Centralized Control TNET Transparent Networking remote devices may be registered to a Central MFIM CM and to a Local MFIM LM In this way the CM maintains control of the remote device Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail 2 sec polling error the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices Calls between the systems CM amp LM can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail over operation The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail over operation TNET Basic Attributes TRANS PGM 330 Each MFIM in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in order to function as part of the network 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 330 2 Press Flex 1 3 Use the dial pad to enable or disable TNET Central Control networking 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data TRANS PGM 330 BTN RANGE DEFAULT T NET ENABLE enable T NET function 1 0 Off Off 1 On TNET CM Attributes TRANS PGM 331 Each LM Local MFIM which is part of a Central Control Network must be defined with the IP Address of the CM Central MFIM as well as the
479. le or unanswered in the hunt no answer time the call will be directed to the next station defined in the group The call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried The queued call may be taken out of the group if set to forward to an overflow destination Ring Group An incoming call to any station in the Group will cause all stations in the group to ring and any station in the group may answer the call Multiple calls can be received by a Station Ring Group and can be serviced in any order according to Station availability The queued call may be taken out of the group if set to forward to an overflow destination Longest Idle UCD Group Calls are sent to the group by dialing the Hunt group Number or assigning CO lines to directly terminate at the group Calls are directed to the Station in the group that has been idle for the longest time If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received for the group the call may be routed to an alternate location or may continue to wait queue for a station in the group to become available The queued call may be taken out of the group if set to forward to an overflow destination Station VM Group Can be enabled to support an external Auto Attendant Voice Mail AA VM system that employs SLT ports to interface with the system An External AA VM group is assigned for either Circular Terminal or Longest Idle hunt The External AA VM may employ either in band
480. leting Service Station s SMDR Record B 30 Room Rate B 30 Room Rate Register Assign B 30 Fee For Part Time B 31 Register Bar and Mini bar Charge B 34 Call Rate B 36 Call Charge Rate Register Assign B 36 Register Hotel Name B 38 Set Call Forward B 38 Additional Tax Fields B 39 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 15 Guest Name Info Display B 40 Dial One Digit Service B 40 Room Monitor Baby Listening B 41 Call Answer Recognition not available in U S B 42 Form Feed Button B 44 VIP Guest Call B 44 VIP Guest Wake Up Call B 45 Fidelio Hotel Feature optional with license B 46 Appendix C Quick Reference DATABASE INDEX C 1 DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN C 8 FIXED FUNCTION USER PROGRAM CODES C 17 DEFAULT VALUES C 21 USER ENTRY GUIDES C 105 Alphanumeric Entry Chart C 105 Altern
481. ling Mode see page 6 11 Group Call Pick up see page 3 28 Group Call Pick Up A Station can answer Pick Up incoming and transferred intercom CO and IP calls ringing at another station in the same station group All ringing calls except Private Queue Callbacks are subject to Pick up by other stations in the same group Digital phone users may assign a Flex button as a GROUP CALL PICK UP button CONDITIONS To pick up a CO IP call the station must have an idle appearance button When several calls are ringing at a station simultaneously Call Pick up will connect the first call received Queue callback calls are not subject to Call Pick up receives error tone Only ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick up Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station When a station belongs to multiple groups calls received are routed to the group with the lowest station number OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a GROUP CALL PICK UP button PRESS TRANS PGM FLEX Button Feature Type 1 Group Pickup Feature Code HOLD SAVE To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER 2 Dial Group Call Pick up code OR 3 Press the programmed Group Call Pick up button Single Line Phone To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Group Call Pick up code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description O
482. ll be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute II TRANS PGM 214 TRANS PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 0n change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 ACD Group Announcement TRANS PGM 215 A 81 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 214 LOGIN HANDSET This entry defines usage of Agent Headset option when agent log in BTN 12 RANGE 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode DEFAULT 1 Handset Mode LOGOUT HANDSET This entry defines usage of 13 0 Headset mode 1 Handset Mode Agent Headset option when agent log out 1 Handset Mode 2 Eac Mic Mode 3 Bluetooth mode 4 Logon Mode LOGOUT RESTRICTION This entry defines 14 0 Not use 0 Not use restriction of Logout State Agent 1 CO outgoing 2 All call CO ANSWER TIME This entr
483. lls showing on DN buttons or through other available DN numbers that are stored in that station even while on a call However if the DN is in use it is not possible to receive a call through that DN number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 2 3 Chapter 2 Directory Number DN NOTE the status of a physical station and each DN is maintained independantly If the Station is idle the normal ring will be provided Otherwise off hook signaling is activated The Station User can answer an incoming call by pressing the flashing DN flex button or by going off hook without selecting a DN flex button If there are multiple incoming calls at the same time going off hook allows the user to seize P DN if it is ringing or to seize first ringing DN in the order of button number btn 1 first btn 2 second Even when there are incoming calls at a station the User can make an outgoing call by pressing an idle DN button and dialing the called party number P DN PrimeDN Feature P DN is automatically seized first when a station user goes off hook or dials while on hook when receiving or making calls P DN can be either M DN or S DN If P DN is not assigned explicitly the first DN button becomes P DN in the order of button number The same DN can be used as P DN for multiple stations If the state of shared P DN is changed in this case the status of P DN will be updated to all the st
484. ltiple names one per LCD line up to 16 characters Ifa user selects a directory with no entries or there is no match to the user entry an Empty List message is displayed and the error tone is provided Dial by Name is only available to Digital Phones with a display other users will receive an error tone if an attempt is made to access Dial by Name A user may both scroll and enter characters to search a directory Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dial By Name 3 61 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To use Dial by Name on a two line phone 1 Press the SPEED button twice 2 Dial the desired directory 1 Station Speed 2 System Speed 3 Station Name 3 Search the directory using the VOL UP VOL DOWN button or by entering characters 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to place the call To use Dial by Name on a three line phone 1 Press the DIR Soft button 2 Dial the desired directory 1 Station Speed 2 System Speed 3 Station Name 3 Search the directory using the VOL UP VOL DOWN button or by entering characters 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to place the call To program the station user name 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 12 User Name Program code 3 Enter the name up to 16 characters refer to Station Speed Dial for character entry 4 Press HOLD SAVE Single Line Phone To p
485. ly is connected OPERATION To initiate a Command Group One Way 1 Dial the One Way Command Group Call feature code 2 Enter the Command Group number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 185 Chapter 3 System Features To initiate a Command Group Conference 1 Dial the Conference Command Group Call feature code 2 Enter the Command Group number ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Command Group Access TRANS PGM 152 see details on page A 44 Station Group Command Conference Group use Web Admin TRANS PGM 206 Numbering Plan Command Group TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 20 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 65 Command Call Conf 580 Interphone Group To call Stations using a simple one touch digit Stations can be gathered into an Interphone Group up to 10 members OPERATION To use the Interphone Group feature 1 Dial Interphone Group Access feature code 2 Dial One Digit ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Group Interphone Group TRANS PGM 209 see details on page A 73 TRANS PGM 209 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DGT DESTINATION this entry defines the digit destination of 1 Station Number Interphone group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 186 Chapter 3 System Features Numbering Plan Interphone Group Acce
486. me refer to Alphanumeric Chart on page C 1 4 Press the Hook Switch the confirmation tone will be heard To delete the Name at the SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Name Register Feature Code 3 Press the Hook Switch confirmation tone will be heard RELATED FEATURES Dial by Name see page 3 60 Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone sortical Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 SIP Terminal Registration 9 1 Chapter 9 SIP Phone Chapter 9 SIP Phone SI P Terminal Registration The System supports the SIP based videophone LVP 2000 as well as other third party SIP phones Compatible SIP phones support the Internet Engineering Technical Committee standard RFC3261 for real time communications over the Internet Once registered the System will deliver services to the SIP Phone Operation of the SIP Phone generally follows the steps outlined for an SLT CONDITIONS The SIP Phone not supporting standard SIP protocol is not supported Support for 3rd party SIP phones requires a license The 3rd party applications supporting standard SIP protocol can be registered The System checks the SIP status periodically if the System does not receive the REGISTER message from the SIP Phone in Registration Time the SIP Phone registration attempt is cancelled A VOIB cha
487. mes Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP RELATED FEATURES a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Release Guard Time 5 41 CO Line Release Guard Time Chapter 5 CO IP To assure that the PSTN switching equipment has sufficient time to restore to the Idle condition the System will hold CO Lines in a Busy State to Users after release of a CO Line by a Station The time between Station disconnect and when the System changes the CO Line status from Busy to Idle is the CO Line Release Guard Time If CO receives Release Ack signal from PSTN before Release Guard Timer expired then the CO line is released instantly OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Incoming CO Release Guard Timer PGM 166 FLEX 8 see details on page A 50 PGM 166 RLS GUARD TIME If CO release signaling is not completed successfully CO line is disconnected when timer expires BTN 8 RANGE 00 15 sec DEFAULT 01 Outgoing CO Release Guard Timer PGM 171 FLEX 5 see details on page A 57 PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT RLS GUARD TIMER If CO release signaling is not completed 5 00 15 02 successfully CO line is disconnected when the timer expires System Data LCO Release Gua
488. ming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Group 7 9 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 277 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 3 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 Not used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determines the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system an
489. ming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Silent Monitor by Supervisor OR CONDITIONS PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Station Group Das gt Release 1 7 April 2012 ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10 55 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 5 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 l Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination NIGHT SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 3 0 Release Release call when group status is Night Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward NIGHT FWD DEST When Night Service type is Forward 4 applied destination can be assigned HOLIDAY SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 5 0 Release Release call when group status is Holiday Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST When Holiday Service type is 6 l Forward applied destination can be assigned O
490. mp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Numbering Plan P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 267 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Message Retrieval Options see details on page 3 269 Remote Message Retrieval see details on page 3 267 Multiple Voice Mailbox Support see details on page 3 122 HARDWARE VMIB Remote Message Retrieval The System permits remote Users access to their Mailbox After accessing the VMIB Voice Mail operation follows the local procedures CONDITIONS The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options apply The conditions associated with DISA DID apply OPERATION Remote Caller To access Voice Mailbox from a remote location 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO Line assigned for answer by a VMIB Auto Attendant OR 3 Dial a Station Group number assigned for answer by a VIMB Auto Attendant 4 Upon answer dial VIMB Access Feature Code the Request for Mail Box Number prompt will be presented 5 Follow local access procedures OR Dial a number and reach your VM greeting At your VM greeting press Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING
491. n the MUTE button LED will illuminate and the microphone Handset Speakerphone Headset will be muted disabling audio transmission to the other party To activate the Microphone Press the illuminated MUTE button the MUTE button LED will be extinguished and the microphone is activated transmitting audio to the connected party PROGRAMMING Station Data Headset Ring PGM 121 FLEX 3 see details on page A 24 PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HEADSET RING in Headset mode this item 3 O Speaker Speaker selects device to receive incoming ring signals 1 Headset Speaker Headset or Both 2 Both RELATED FEATURES Speakerphone see page 6 19 Group Listening see page 6 10 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Off Hook Signaling CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING Station Data a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 On Hook Dialing 6 15 Chapter 6 Digital Phone HARDWARE Digital Phone On Hook Dialing Digital Phones equipped with a Speakerphone can allow Users to place as well as receive calls while the Handset is On Hook Once the User activates the Speakerphone by pressing the SPEAKER button or Automatic Speaker Select Dial tone is received and the User may dial the desired number CONDITIONS Ifthe Outgoing call is not Answered the User must press the illuminated SP
492. n Speed Dial 50 32 digits 50 32 digits Call Log 100 32 digits 100 32 digits Outgoing Incoming Missed Call Not protected Not protected Save Number Redial SNR 1 32 digits 1 32 digits y 4 Release 1 7 x MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of SMDR Records 5000 5000 Authorization Code Max 12Digits 180 Extension Max 12Digits 648 Extension CO Group No 24 72 Station Group 20 50 member Group 50 50 member Group Pickup Group 20 100 member Group 50 100 member Group Command Call Group 10 12 member 1 initiator Group 10 12 member 1 initiator Group Interphone Group 10 10 member Group 10 10 member Group Page Group 15 50 member Group 30 50 member Group PTT Group 10 50 member Group 10 50 member Group Conference Room 9 9 Number of Hot Desk Agent 60 324 Station Name Information 16 Characters 16 Characters Digit Restriction COS 16 COS 16 Allow Deny Entry per COS 100 Allow Deny Entry per COS 100 Max Digit 16 Max Digit 16 Digit Translation Table No 9 Table No 9 Number of Digit 16 300 per 1 table Number of Digit 16 300 per 1 table No Of Bar Record 3000 7000 License for Hotel Lock Key Note PMS lock key for Hotel PMS interface w
493. n and dial 220 for System Timers 221 for System Timers II 222 for System Timers Ill 3 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Timer data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the Timer data entry System Timers TRANS PGM 220 Press the Flex button for the desired Timer refer to Tables 2 3 6 1 1 to 3 TRANS PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO CO TRANS TMR Determines the answer waiting time 1 000 300 secs 030 when CO line is transferred to another CO line If not answered in this time transferred CO call is disconnected HOT DESK LOGOUT TMR Determines the amount of time the 2 00 24 hrs 00 attendant receives recall after which the system will disconnect the call ACNR PAUSE TMR This timer establishes the time between 3 005 300 secs 030 ACNR attempts PAGE TIME OUT TMR Determines the maximum duration of 4 000 300 secs 15 a page after which the caller and Page Zone are released PAUSE TMR A Timed pause of this duration is used in Speed 5 1 9 secs 3 Dial and during other automatically dialed digits sent to the PSTN VM PAUSE TMR When the system sends a Pause to Voice 6 1 9 secs 3 Mail using In band signals the Pause interval is defined by this timer VMIB MSG MIN TMR This timer sets the minimum duration 7 1 9 secs 4 allowed for a voice mail message in the system s VMIB Messages shorter than this period are not stored VMIB MSG MAX TMR This timer sets the maximum duration 8 00 999 secs 6
494. n external call through the system the CLI of the corresponding station is used The Mobile Extension features are supported via system digital lines only Message Wait and Callback cannot be activated for use with a mobile phone The Mobile Extension feature is not supported over a distributed network environment When an incoming ISDN DID call is received the system will access an ISDN line and place a call to the mobile phone an ISDN line must be available for the system to notify the mobile user of the incoming call Hold and Transfer Recalls to the mobile phone are sent to mobile phone and Mobile Extension and Mobile phone simultaneously Station Group calls can be routed to the active Mobile Extension OPERATION Digital Phone To activate a registered mobile extension from the user s station 1 Press the TRANS PG M button 2 Dial 51 Mobile Extension code 3 Dial mobile phone index 1 or 2 4 Dial digit 1 to activate 0 to deactivate 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Mobile Extension 3 118 Chapter 3 System Features To register a mobile phone number 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 52 Mobile Extension Registration code 3 Dial mobile phone index 1 or 2 4 Dial the mobile phone number with CO access code 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To place a call from the mobile extension using the system
495. n first out or LIFO last in first out order 1 FIFO based on this entry VMIB NEW MSG NO Display the number of new messages 9 l VMIB SAVE MSG NO Display the number of saved messages 10 Numbering Plan VMIB Access Code TRANS PGM 113 page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 39 VMIB Access 523 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Delete All VM Messages OPERATION To delete all a user s VM Messages ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data p Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 279 Chapter 3 System Features Direct VM Transfer Internal External Calls can be directly transferred to a designated Station Voice Mail Box CONDITIONS VMIB Access option must be ON If VMIB channel is all used recalling is served to transferring station OPERATION To activate Direct VM Transfer 1 While ona CO ICM Call 2 Press Trans button and dial the Direct VM Transfer feature code 3 Dial desired Station Number 4 Go on hook VM Transfer will be completed ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Direct VM Transfer Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 20 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 89 Direct VM Transfer 683 NomadSP Message Backup and Delete MBX IP Soft
496. n when max queue has been Overflowed To use Queuing Timeout Forward Destination 3 Dial the Station Group Number 4 The call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode NOTE Calls will be Routed to the Forward Destination when Queuing Time has expired Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 174 To use Queuing Overflow or Timeout as Forward Destination 5 Dial the Station Group Number Chapter 3 System Features 6 The Call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode NOTE or Max Queue is overflowed ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data The Call will be routed to the Forward destination when Queuing Time expires Station Group Attribute TRANS PGM 201 202 see details on page A 65 and page A 68 TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE this entry defines the type of greeting 1 1 Normal 1 tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING PLAY this entry defines greeting play time 2 000 180 secs 000 GREETING TONE NO This entry defines greeting tone 3 01 19 Not Assigned number in case greeting type is normal GREETING PRT ANNC This entry defines greeting prompt 4 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case greeting type is PROMPT ANNC GREETING REPEAT
497. nce No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 Release 1 7 h S April 2012 DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN C 13 Appendix C Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 1 Attendant Call 0 9 9 2 Conference Room 1 571 571 571 3 Conference Room 2 572 572 572 4 Conference Room 3 573 573 573 5 Conference Room 4 574 574 574 6 Conference Room 5 575 575 575 7 Conference Room 6 576 576 576 8 Conference Room 7 577 577 577 9 Conference Room 8 578 578 578 10 Conference Room 9 579 579 579 11 Internal Page 543 543 543 543 00 xx 00 All Call Page Xx Page Group 12 Personal VM Page 544 544 544 13 Announcement Page For Attendant 545 545 545 14 Page Auto Answer 546 546 546 15 Internal Page Answer Meet Me Page 547 547 547 16 External Page 548 548 548 17 Internal External Page All 549 549 549 18 Call Forward Register 554 554 554 554 Type Destination 19 Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register 514 514 514 514 Type Destination 20 Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel 515 515 515 21 DND Status Change 516 516 516 22 DND Delete 517 517 517 23 Account Code 550 550 550 24 CO Flash 551 551 551 25 Last Number Redial 552 552 552 26 Station Speed PGM 553 553 553 27 Speed Dial 555 555 555 28 MWI
498. ndant Group Can be assigned as Hunt Group and covers Attendant Calls when all Attendants in a Tenant are in DND status or the System is in Night Ring mode e Forward Destination This can be assigned as Station Hunt Group Telephone Number and it covers Attendant Call according to the Forward type of the Attendant group CONDITION The first Attendant System Attendant is assigned as Station 100 default and others are not assigned Attendant Calls using the Attendant Call Code is routed to first available Attendant according to Attendant Group Type Terminal Circular Ring Longest idle A member in Attendant Group can use all DN features Ifa member in the Attendant Group sets DND FWD Preselected Msg Attendant Call will not be received LIP Digital LDP series set for SADN type can be assigned as the member of an Attendant Group The Tenant of an Attendant member should be the same as Attendant Group OPERATION If set Attendant Group operation is automatic PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Group 7 3 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the g
499. ndant Queuing Annoucement The System can provide CCR Service during queuing announcement according to the CCR option Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants CONDITIONS OPERATION PROGRAMMING Tenant Data voaortiral Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7 21 Chapter 7 Attendants Station Group Attribute PGM 201 202 see details on page A 65 PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE this entry defines the type of greeting 1 1 Normal 1 tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING PLAY this entry defines greeting play time 2 000 180 secs 000 GREETING TONE NO This entry defines greeting tone 01 19 Not Assigned number in case greeting type is normal GREETING PRT ANNC This entry defines greeting prompt 4 001 255 Not Assigned annc Number in case greeting type is PROMPT ANNC GREETING REPEAT NO This entry defines greeting repeat 5 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 6 000 100 secs 0 before greeting repeat YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants
500. ndar Type for Holiday Table 1 Lunar Gregorian Gregorian HOLIDAY DATE Defines Holiday Date for Holiday Table 2 MM DD None Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Automatic System Daylight Savings Time 3 12 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Direct Inward System Access DISA see page 5 50 Day Night Timed Ring Mode see page 7 37 CO Ring Assignment see page 5 37 LBC Loud Bell Control see page 3 116 Dialing Restrictions see page 3 63 Automatic System Daylight Savings Time The system can automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time DST When DST is enabled the system will adjust the system time forward one hour at the DST Start time and back one hour at the DST End time The system time is sent for display to all devices and terminals and is the basis of the various system time based features Wake up Alarm etc CONDITIONS The DST Start and End times are set by the Web Admin interface only The interval between the DST Start and End times must be at least 7 days OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System System Time TRANS PGM 233 FLEX 1 see details on page A 94 TRANS PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSTEM TIME DATE sets the system time 1 HH MM System Date TRANS PGM 233 FLEX 2 see details on page A 94 TRANS PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSTEM TIME
501. nes the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant ATD CALL BY STA NO This entry defines attendant call 8 l Off by dialing attendant member 0 the call for attendant follows normal call 1 the call for attendant follows attendant group call RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 9 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 10 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Table Data Tone Frequency Cadence TRANS PGM 264 see details on page A 114 Release 1 7 WY vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 168 Chapter 3 System Features CCR Service with Queuing Announcement The System can provide CCR Service during queuing announcement according to the CCR option A CCR Table defines a dialed digit 0 9 and to a designated route each individual digit corresponds with a route Station Station Group CO Group Access Code Internal Page Zone Voice Mail Access Code CCR Access Code VMIB Announcement CCR Access and Drop Code VMIB Announcement Conference Room Net Number In addition the System will monitor digits for a system numbering plan eg st
502. nes the name of a group 2 Max 16 chars TENANT NO this entry assigns a tenant of a station group 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE IDX Time Table index 4 1 9 1 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 5 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External MEMBER ASSIGN this entry assigns stations as members 6 l of a station group Station Group Greeting Queuing Attributes TRANS PGM 201 Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing announcements time Refer to the table below for the descriptions of the attributes LCD displays and data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 201 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number 620 639 for the MBX IP 100 and 620 669 for MBX IP 300 3 Press the Flex button for the desired attribute refer to the following Table Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Station Group Greeting Queuing Attributes TRANS PGM 201 A 67 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE This entry defines the type of queuing tone 7 1 Normal 3 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MO
503. ng assigned stations Otherwise if set to 3 feature code is 1 First Idle activated for incoming calls 2 Circular 3 Feature Code CO RING ASSIGN Destination stations can be edited using 2 00 30 or one a range or one by one If press Flex 1 4 and then dial station range up to 30 stations or edit one station number station number Release 1 7 XX vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP DI D DISA Restriction CONDITIONS OPERATION To change DID DISA restriction status from each station terminal toggle PROGRAMMING Station Data Numbering Plan a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO IP LINE PRESET FORWARD 5 35 Chapter 5 CO IP DID DISA Restriction PGM 113 FLEX 108 see details on page A 21 BTN FEATURE PGM 113 REMARK 108 DID DISA Restriction 685 CO 1P LINE PRESET FORWARD Each CO IP Line can be assigned a Ring No Answer Preset Forward destination An incoming call on the CO IP line will be routed to the designed Ring Destination following expiration of the CO IP Line Preset No Answer Forward Timer Preset Forward destination determined according to the Ring Assignment Table CONDITIONS This feature can be set for each Normal type CO Line not DID type CO Lines CO IP Line Preset Forward is available only when Incoming CO Ring Group destination is DN
504. ng Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Answering Machine Emulation AME NOTE CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a flexible button as AME To assign LED Blinking Mode Da Release 1 7 x April 2012 Answering Machine Emulation AME 6 31 Chapter 6 Digital Phone To assign Speaker Hearing Mode Press the AME button 2 Press 2 Speaker Hearing Mode To Delete AME Feature 1 Press the AME button 2 Press 0 Disable To Answer a call in LED Blinking Mode 1 When a call has been forwarded to VMIB the AME Button will blink 2 Press AME button to go to Speaker Hearing mode 3 Press AME button to communicate without saving conversation OR 4 Press Mute Button to communicate with saving conversation To Answer a call in Speaker Hearing Mode 1 When a call is forwarded to VMIB press the AME button to communicate without saving conversation OR 2 Press Mute Button to communicate while saving the conversation PROGRAMMING Station VMIB Access PGM 145 FLEX 1 see details on page A 40 PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS Permits station access to VMIB 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable HARDWARE Digital Phone VMIB Feature Server or External SMDI based AA VM system Phontage or UCS Client Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Voice Over C
505. ng Port 1 15 6 3 Ring Port 1 15 7 4 Ring Port 1 15 8 Forward Call Ring CO 6 15 Ring Port 1 15 9 2nd Ring Port 1 15 10 3 Ring Port 1 15 11 4 Ring Port 1 15 12 Transfer Call Ring Station 7 1 Ring Port 1 15 5 24 Ring Port 1 15 6 3 Ring Port 1 15 7 4 Ring Port 1 15 8 TABLE DATA Transfer Call Ring CO 8 18t Ring Port 1 15 9 21d Ring Port 1 15 10 3 Ring Port 1 15 11 4 Ring Port 1 15 12 Call Back Indication Ring 9 15E Ring Port 1 15 1 20d Ring Port 1 15 1 3 Ring Port 1 15 1 4 Ring Port 1 15 1 Wakeup Indication Ring 10 1S Ring Port 1 15 1 20d Ring Port 1 15 1 3 Ring Port 1 15 1 4 Ring Port 1 15 1 Revertible Ring A 115 265 11 15t Ring Port 1 15 1 20d Ring Port 1 15 1 3 Ring Port 1 15 1 4 Ring Port 1 15 1 Paging Call Ring 12 1S Ring Port 1 15 5 20d Ring Port 1 15 5 3 Ring Port 1 15 5 4 Ring Port 1 15 5 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 81 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT Voice Mail 5 Error 5 1 Prefix P 5P 2 Suffix Voice Mail 6 DND 6 1 Prefix P 6P 2 Suffix Voice Mail 7 7 1 Prefix 2 Suffix Voice Mail 8 8 1 Prefix 2 Suffix Voice Mai
506. ng the Secretary s station immediately When the secretary answers the call the call can be put on Hold The secretary will be able to inform the executive that there s a held call on a button requiring an additional button programmed for hands free access to the Executive DN When the secretary presses the button it would be possible to tell the executive to answer the held call The Executive s DN button may have a delayed ring option instead of no ring option the executive will hear the ring signal after programmed delay Since two stations executive and secretary ring after delay time either Executive or Secretary can receive the call This setting helps when the Secretary is not at their desk temporarily CONDITIONS An Executive may have multiple Secretaries and a Secretary may have multiple Executives each is considered a separate Executive Secretary pair Ifthe Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive the caller will receive a busy tone Ifan Executive has multiple Secretaries calls will automatically route to the Executive s first idle Secretary The Executive may use Call Forward to send calls to stations other than the Secretary Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Executive Secretary by DN Directory Number 3 84 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION To program Executive Secretary Forward 1 Assign a DN as MADN to be used as
507. ngle Line Phone To hear Date amp Time Prompt 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial System Voice Memo Announcing Date Time code 3 Announcement for Time is heard Date is May 2nd Time is xx xx pm To hear Station Number Prompt 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial System Voice Memo Announcing Station Number code 3 Announcement for Station is heard This is station 150 To hear Station Settings 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial System Voice Memo Announcing Station Configuration code 3 Status for Station is reported Items that will be reported are as follows e Station number e Station IP Address e Station Mac Address e Station ICM Mode Handsfree Tone Privacy e Listed message x the number of all messages waiting e Wake Up Time hh mm e Do Not Disturb e Queued CO IP xx e Locked temporary COS change e COSx Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Numbering Plan P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Wake up Alarm 3 283 Chapter 3 System Features Wake up Alarm This feature allows a User or Attendant to set a Wake Up time or desired time to be alerted When the time is reached the System will signal with an audible and visual notification CONDITIONS When receiving a Wake Up signal lifting the handset will return Wake Up Answer
508. nload the System database via USB memory USB upload download can be executed from the Attendant Station OPERATION Attendant To download the System Database using the Attendant Keyset 1 Insert the USB memory to the USB port in MPB board 2 Press the PGM button 3 Dial 092 Attendant Station Program code the display will be as shown DB DOWNLOAD TO USB PRESS OK SAVE KEY 4 Press the HOLD OK button to download the database DB DOWNLOAD TO USB PLEASE WAIT 5 Following download the result is displayed and Keyset will return to Idle DB DOWNLOAD TO USB DOWNLOAD SUCCESS Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 To upload the System Database using the Attendant Keyset MOUNT USB MEMORY PLEASE WAIT DB FILE NUM TOTAL 2 PRESS 0 1 TO VIEW FILE 0 MBX IPDB_ALL090101 adm PRESS HOLD TO UPGRADE 209 DB UPLOAD FROM USB UPLOAD SUCCESS CONDITIONS PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Chapter 7 Attendants P ee i Release 1 7 AS vertical April 2012 USB DB Up Download From To USB 7 47 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 PGM 270 ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group BTN RANGE 0 Terminal 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle DEFAULT 0 ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant
509. nnel is needed for the SIP Phone to Place or Receive Calls OPERATION Web Admin _ To register a SIP Phone 1 Select IP Phone Registration Table 2 Enter the Auth ID Password and User ID of SIP Phone 3 Click the Save button SIP Phone 1 Configure SIP Phone settings ex IP address Subnet mask Gateway Telephone number Proxy Address Expiration Timer etc the Telephone is the Station number to be assigned to Phone by System and the Proxy Address is the System MPB IP address 2 Boot the SIP Phone which will activate registration with the System Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 9 SIP Phone SIP Name Registration SIP Placing Calls CONDITIONS OPERATION To place an Intercom Call p i Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 SIP Call Pick Up 9 3 Chapter 9 SIP Phone To place an External Call 1 Dial the CO Access Code and telephone number 2 Press the OUTGOING button on SIP Phone SI P Call Pick Up The SIP phone can Pick Up Intercom or Incoming CO Line Calls for other Stations CONDITIONS For SIP Phone Features ex Receive Calls etc to work the phone must be enabled with those features and be able to place a call using its own function OPERATION To answer an Incoming call When Ringing is received and caller number is displayed lift handset or press ANSWER button on SIP Phone SIP Hold Call The S
510. nsupervised Conference see page 3 53 Broker Call see page 8 1 Conference Room see page 3 47 Consultation Conference A Digital phone user may establish a conference while talking with a party as a screened transfer which results in a 3 party conference OPERATION Digital Phone To set up a Consultation Conference Dnt Release 1 7 Y vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 53 Chapter 3 System Features Press the TRANS button while talking with an internal or external party Make a call to another internal or external party Talking on a second call press the CONF button Then 3 party conference will be established RELATED FEATURES Multi Party Voice Conference see page 3 50 Unsupervised Conference A Digital phone user may establish a conference with external parties and exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without supervision from the user The system will disconnect the Unsupervised conference if disconnect is detected with only two parties connected or at expiration of the Unsupervised Conference timer A Disconnect Warning tone is provided fifteen seconds prior to expiration of the timer If enabled either party in an Unsupervised Conference can request the Unsupervised Conference timer be extended The party enters the Timer Extension feature code and a digit 1 to 9 indicating the Timer extension
511. nt TRANS PGM 103 FLEX 2 see details on page A 11 TRANS PGM 103 BTN STATION BOARD 2 RANGE 88 SIP Phone 99 IP Phone or Phontage REMARK Revertible Ring This feature can be used to identify the extension DN especially when a SLT is in use Additionally the User can verify the incoming ring signal is working correctly OPERATION To listen to Revertible Ring 1 Lift the Handset or press SPEAKER 2 Dial the station DN confirmation tone is heard 3 Replace Handset go on hook incoming ring will be presented 4 Lift Handset or press SPEAKER confirmation tone is heard ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 146 Chapter 3 System Features Ring Table Revertible Ring Web Admin TRANS PGM 265 11 TRANS PGM 265 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Revertible Ring Web Admin Only 11 Speed Dial Speed Dial Pause I nsertion A pause dialing command may be inserted in a Station or System Speed Dial number When encountered the System will stop dialing the Speed Dial number for the assigned pause duration Multiple pauses HOLD button depressions may be inserted into a Speed Dial number CONDITIONS Timed pause is used only with analog CO lines OPERATION System When set Pause operation is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Speed Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 1
512. nu Table A 2 S W Upgrade A 6 System Management A 6 Station Admin Programming A 7 LCD amp Button Functions A 7 Alphanumeric Data Entries A 7 Required Data Entries A 7 Data Entry Mode A 7 Procedures for Data Entry A 8 PRE PROGRAMMED DATA TRANS PGM Codes 100 to 108 A 8 Location Program TRANS PGM 100 A 8 Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 A 11 Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 103 A 11 DECT IP Phone SIP Phone Port Assignment TRANS PGM 104 A 12 IP Phone Phontage Registration Table TRANS PGM 106 A 12 DTIM SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 A 13 IP Address Plan TRANS PGM 108 A 14 System Information TRANS PGM 109 A 14 NUMBERING PLAN DATA TRANS PGM Codes 110 to 116 A 15 Numbering Plan Type TRANS PGM 110 A 15 System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 A 15 Flexible Station Number TRANS PGM 112 A 16 FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN TRANS PGM 113 A 17 CO Group Access Code TRANS PGM 114 A 21 Station Group Number TRANS PGM 115 A 22 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 10 ACD
513. number twice For MBX IP 100 acceptable range is 01 80 for MBX IP 300 the acceptable range is 001 240 3 Select Day mode and Dial Error Type refer to Following Table 4 Press the desired Flex button refer to Following Table 5 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 6 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO Outgoing Attributes TRANS PGM 170 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Outgoing Attributes TRANS PGM 170 A 55 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 170 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SCREEN INDICATOR Determines if screen 1 0 Off user provided not Off indicator is used in ISDN message screened 1 On user provided verified and passed SENDING CALLER NO Sending Caller number 2 0 Off On message of ISDN 1 On CALLING TYPE For outgoing calls on the ISDN 3 0 Unknown Subscriber Line this parameter defines the Type of Number 1 International Plan provided in Calling Party Information Element 2 National of the ISDN call SETUP message 3 Subscriber 4 Not Use CALLING NUM PLAN Select Calling number plan 4 0 Unknown Unknown of ISDN SETUP message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private CALLED NUM PLAN ID Select Called number 5 0 Unknown Unknown plan
514. number in the range only Digital LDP LIP model can be assigned 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entered TRANS PGM 275 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NIGHT ATTD GR TYPE NightDetermines the type of Night 1 0 Terminal 0 Terminal Attendant group 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle NIGHT ATTD GR NAME Determines the name of the night 2 Max 16 Attendant group NIGHT MEMBER ASG Assigns Stations as members of a Night 3 l Attendant group Night Attendant Group Greeting Queuing TRANS PGM 276 Each night attendant group has available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing announcements time The table provides descriptions for the attributes and the data entries required Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Night Attendant Group TRANS PGM 275 277 A 125 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the greeting is repeated QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUIN
515. o flexible Button 48 and take the unused and valid flexible button as prime button NOTE DN buttons of associated DSS box cannot be a prime number button BTN 1 RANGE 01 48 DEFAULT 01 Basic Features To use DN features or to receive incoming calls or make outgoing calls DN must be programmed on a Flex button except in the case of an analog phone does not have flex buttons One DN is stored in each station by default which is M DN If there is no DN button at all it is not possible to call a number or get a call from others Making Calls When making outgoing calls a Station User can select a DN number either by pressing the appropriate DN flex button by going off hook using the handset or by dialing while the phone is on hook P DN is seized automatically if the DN button is not explicitly pressed as in the case of going off hook or on hook dialing However if the P DN is busy at that time P DN can be shared by other stations the first idle DN button is selected in the order of button number button 1 first button 2 second etc Once a DN is selected for an outgoing call the tenant group number calling station number CLI COS and other DN related information are applied for the duration of the call For example if a different DN is selected for two outgoing calls it is possible to have different tenant groups or COS for each call Receiving Calls A physical station can receive additional ca
516. o station in hold 57 Normal Hold Tone Attendant Reserved Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION BOARD DATA TRANS PGM 300 310 ISDN Board Attribute TRANS PGM 300 Release 1 7 h S April 2012 ISDN Board Clock Priority TRANS PGM 301 A 139 Appendix A System Programming Tables 3 Press the Flex button 1 8 for the desired setting refer to Table use the dial pad to enter the required data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data TRANS PGM 300 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CRC CHECK Enable CRC check T 1 T0 Disable Enable 1 Enable NT TE MODE After change the board is automatically restarted 2 0 TE TE 1 NT PORT1 TEI MODE TEI mode of BRIB Port 1 3 N A N A PORT2 TEI MODE TEI mode of BRIB Port 2 4 NA N A PORT3 TEI MODE TEI mode of BRIB Port 3 5 N A N A PORT4 TEI MODE TEI mode of BRIB Port 4 6 N A N A T1 MODE T1 Mode D4 ESF 7 0 D4 0 1 ESF T1 LINE MODE T1 Line Mode B8ZS AMI 8 0 B8ZS B8ZS 1 AMI T1 PAUSE TIME T1 Pause Time 9 1 9 2 T1 PLS RATE T1 PLS Rate 10 0 3 0 T1 RLS GRD TIME T1 release guard time 11 0 60 20 T1 DT DELAY TIME T1 DT Delay time 12 2 50 10 T1 WINK TIME T1 Wink tim
517. ode CONDITIONS Callback and Call Forward will ring in the tone mode regardless of ICM Signaling Mode selected by the User The ICM Signaling Mode Selection does not affect Page announcements By default the ICM Signaling Mode is Tone ring and is stored in battery protected memory OPERATION Digital Phone To change ICM Signaling Mode 1 Press the PGM button the SPEAKER button LED will light steady 2 Dial 11 Station User Program code and a confirmation tone is received 3 Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code 1 H 2 T or 3 IP 4 Press the SAVE button Select the HTP switch or button to select the desired mode Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone PROGRAMMING Tenant RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Mute 6 13 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Mute A Digital Phone can turn off audio transmission from the Handset Speakerphone or Headset Microphone Mic Mute CONDITIONS Changing from Speakerphone to Handset or vice versa while the phone is Muted will re activate the phone microphone transmitting audio Returning to Idle or placing another CO IP or Intercom call will cancel Mute and re establish audio transmission from the phone OPERATION Digital Phone To Mute the Microphone While on a call press the MUTE butto
518. of ISDN SETUP message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private BEARER CAPABILITY Select Bearer Capability of 6 0 Speech Speech ISDN SETUP message 1 Unrestricted 2 Restricted 3 3 1KHz Audio 4 7KHz 5 Video ISDN LINE TYPE The system will encode voice 7 0 A law A law using the A law or u law PCM format and should be 4 U law set to match the ISDN Back bone type SENDING COMPLETE IE If set will send 8 0 Off Off Sending Complete IE to ISDN SETUP message 1 On P PEI R Release 1 7 AS vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Outgoing Attributes Il TRANS PGM 171 A 57 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO Outgoing Attributes II TRANS PGM 171 TRANS PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CPT DETECT If this feature is set to ON CPT Call Processing 1 0 Off On Tone is detected and the line can be dropped 1 On UNSUP CONF EXTEND If this feature is set to ON 2 0 Off Off Unsupervised Conf Timer can be extended by dialing feature 1 On code after warning tone is heard PROVIDE RING BACK TN If this feature is set to ON dummy 3 0 Off Off ring back tone is heard by system when CO line is seized 1 On BLF USAGE If this feature is set to ON flex button LED will be 4 0 Off On flashing
519. of the IP phone Phontage 3 F W IP ADDRESS Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP 4 phone Phontage RTP SECURITY Enable RTP Security 5 Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 104 FLEX 2 see details on page A 12 TRANS PGM 104 BTN RANGE REMARK MAX NO OF IP PHONE that can be registered to the System 2 32 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 141 Chapter 3 System Features Slot Assignment amp Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 101 TRANS PGM 103 see details on page A 11 and page A 11 TRANS PGM 101 BTN RANGE REMARK SLOT ASSIGNMENT refer to Board Type Code table below 1 SLOT 02 enter device port number 2 TRANS PGM 103 BTN RANGE REMARK CO LINE BOARD 1 l STATION BOARD 2 88 SIP Phone 99 IP Phone or Phontage VMIB BOARD 3 l Registration with Station Number System allows IP Phone registration if the IP Phone Station number matches the Station number designated regardless of the Database Protection Switch position CONDITIONS By default the IP Phone Registration by STA Number is ON OPERATION Registration is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Info Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 104 FLEX 2 see details on page A 12 TRANS PGM 104 MAX NO OF IP
520. oing packets When the external VoIP connection can only support g 729 and the system codec is g 723 the DSP must implement a complex trans coding operation which requires 2 DSP channels In all other cases trans coding only requires a single channel per call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Last Number Redial LNR 3 110 Chapter 3 System Features CONDITIONS The system codec for the VOIB can be changed anytime within an IP call The VOIB DSP can generate and detect in band DTMF and Call Progress tones in support of DISA functionality For complex trans coding g 723 g 729 the VOIB DSP will require 2 channels OPERATION System IP Trans coding is automatic HARDWARE VOIB8 or VOIB24 Last Number Redial LNR The last number dialed is stored up to 32 digits in the station s Last Number Redial LNR buffer The user may request the system redial the last dialed number without the need to dial the number Digital Phone users can display stored LNR numbers on the phone LCD using the REDIAL or SPEED button and VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons to select the number to dial from the list and place a call CONDITIONS For Digital Phones with LCD display the LNR redial buffer will store duplicate numbers unless dialed consecutively When the CO IP line used for the original call is busy the System will select an idle line from the same CO IP line Gro
521. om IP PHONE HS 4 0 63 34 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables VOIB TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 436 SLT Ring Cadence TRANS PGM 440 STL CO Ring Cadence y 4 Release 1 7 x April 2012 SLT Ring Cadence TRANS PGM 440 A 161 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 440 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO RING REPEAT Determines the number of times the SLT CO 1 0 255 255 ring will repeat 255 means infinite repetition CO RING TIME UNIT Determines the duration in msec for 2 0 10 msec 100 ON OFF ring time 1 100 msec CO RING 1 ON Determines the first ON ring duration 3 0 255 010 CO RING 1 OFF Determines the first OFF ring duration 4 0 255 040 CO RING 2 ON Determines the second ON ring duration 5 0 255 000 CO RING 2 OFF Determines the second OFF ring duration 6 0 255 000 CO RING 3 ON Determines the third ON ring duration 7 0 255 000 CO RING 3 OFF Determines the third OFF ring duration 8 0 255 000 CO RING 4 ON Determines the fourth ON ring duration 9 0 255 000 CO RING 4 OFF Determines the fourth OFF ring duration 10 0 255 000 SLT ICM Ring Cadence TRANS PGM 440 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM RING REPEAT Determines the number of times the SLT ICM 1 0 255 255
522. on Station Group ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Basic Feature 10 5 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ACD Group Assignment PGM 212 see details on page A 76 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME ACD Group Name 1 Start ACD Group Number amp End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE ACD Group Status 2 0 Normal Normal 1 Group Forward 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination NIGHT SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 3 0 Release Release call when group status is Night Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward NIGHT FWD DEST When Night Service type is Forward 4 applied destination can be assigned Release 1 7
523. on 5 0 Off Off ARS is set ARS digit is dialed instead of CO 1 On Group Access code when there is no available path ARS DGT 1 Alternate CO Group Access code to 6 Max 8 digits be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find available CO line ARS 1 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 7 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used ARS DGT 2 Second alternate CO Group Access 8 Max 8 digits code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line ARS 2 OGR DGT When alternate CO Group 9 0 Off Off Access code is used this field defines if original 1 On digits or converted digits are used CO Line Flash Analog CO Lines recognize a brief open or ground connection Flash as a request for a new dial tone When used behind a PBX a CO Line Flash is often used to activate a PBX feature or Call Transfer CONDITIONS Stations may Flash on a CO Line defined for PABX operation and will experience COS dialing restrictions if a PABX Trunk access code is dialed During Flash the LED for the CO Line button will remain lit A Flash may be stored as a part of a Station or System Speed Dial number While connected to an Internal Call or Dial Tone pressing the CO Flash button will re access the ICM Dial tone Flash function is not available on Digital CO Lines like ISDN VoIP and R
524. on Program Menu is displayed Dial 0 to access the Attendant Station Program codes Display Menu Use the VOL UP VOL DOWN or NAVI UP NAVI DOWN button to display the PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group 1 0 Terminal 0 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line Max 4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4 First Station group RELATED FEATURES Station Message Detail Recording SMDR see page 3 187 Traffic Analysis see page 3 250 Temporary Station COS Lock see page 3 68 Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 System Clock Set see page 7 42 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 HARDWARE Digital Phone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Call Queuing CONDITIONS OPERATION To call the Attendant PROGRAMMING Tenant Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Day Night Timed Ring Mode 7 37 Chapter 7 Attendants Day Night Timed Ring Mode The System Clock automatically controls Ring Mode Ring assignments are applied based on the Time of Day and Day of Week Three modes of ring Ring Assignments a
525. on for SMDR Service If this 1 On option is set CO lost call will be included at SMDR data RECORD TYPE If set to on LD calls are 6 0 All Call 0 All Call identified by the LONG DIST CALL DGT 1 LD Counter the system can record all outgoing calls or only long distance calls Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 192 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 232 LONG DIST CALL DGT CNT Dialed numbers which exceed the assigned LD Digit count are considered long distance calls for SMDR BTN RANGE 07 15 DEFAULT 07 CURRENCY UNIT The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference Max 3 characters COST PER PULSE When metering is provided by the PSTN the cost per metering pulse can be assigned 6 digits 000000 SMDR FRACTION Determines the position of the decimal in the Cost per Pulse starting from the right most digit 10 0 5 HIDDEN DIALED DGT Determines the number of dialed digits to hide for security purposes and replaced with Button 13 below defines whether leading or trailing digits are hidden In addition the station must be assigned for SMDR HIDE TRANS PGM CODE 131 button 7 11 0 9 HIDDEN DGT POSITION When HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT is enabled button 12 above this field determines if leading or trailing
526. on number Dial the Station Authorization code password Dial end mark Place call as normal ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dialing Restrictions 3 72 Chapter 3 System Features Station COS TRANS PGM 137 see details on page A 37 TRANS PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS Station s COS in Day mode 1 00 15 1 NIGHT COS Station s COS in Night mode 2 00 15 1 TIMED COS Station s COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 1 CO IP CO COS TRANS PGM 177 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS CO COS in Day mode 1 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Night mode 2 00 15 0 DAY COS CO COS in Timed mode 3 00 15 0 System Toll Exception Table TRANS PGM 250 see details on page A 104 TRANS PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE allow digits 1 Max 16 digits DENY TABLE deny digits 2 Max 16 digits TENANT Tenant groups to apply the table entry 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 5 MBX IP 100 RELATED FEATURES Class of Service see page 3 63 Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Day Night Timed Ring Mode see page 7 37 Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Differential Ring 3 73 Chapter 3 System Features
527. on the Phone display to assist the User in setting the Station User Program Code Features and Functions The VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons are used to scroll through the Menu items and the Dial Pad is used to enter a selection OPERATION Digital Phone To activate a Station User Program Code Feature or Function 1 Press the PGM button the Station User Program Menu is displayed 2 Use the VOL UP VOL DOWN to display the desired menu item OR 3 Dial the desired Station User Program Code and additional entries as required Two Way Record A Digital Phone User can record any active conversation to the Station User s Internal External Mailbox or to a Phontage Hard Disk drive or UCS Client where applicable A RECORD button must be assigned to access this feature and record Normal Incoming Outgoing Calls CONDITIONS The RECORD button LED will flash at 120 ipm while recording Two Way Recording feature is a manual recording while the feature Call Recording is an automatic recording method This feature is available when using the VMIB Feature Server or an external AA VM using SMDI communications mode When an external AA VM system uses in band DTMF mode Two Way Record is not available Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a flexible button as a RECORD button To activate Two Way Record NOT
528. onday Sunday N A SMDR MAIL SEND DAILY SET Sets time of day for SMDR data to be sent on a daily basis 00 for no daily records 01 23 for hour of the day 00 23 00 SMDR MAIL AUTO SEND MODE If the SMDR buffer is full the system can automatically send a notification by e mail Web Only 0 Off 1 0n 1 0n SMDR MAIL AUTO DELETE MODE Deletes SMDR records after sending e mail 0 Off 1 0n 1 0n CO IP Line Data Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Calling Called Party I dentification CLI P COLP Digital Phone Display LINE XXX RINGING 03438502821 CLI Serial output a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 69 Chapter 5 CO IP e CCCCCCCC Called Station DD D Speed Dial Name e EEE Speed Dial Bin Number 3 or 4 e FFFFFFFF Answering Station The System will also compare the identification to the Speed Dial bins If a match exists the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number CO IP Name Display The System will send calling and answering party identification in the appropriate messages to the ISDN based on the database Identification messages may be restricted and not reported to the far end user Calling Line Identification Restric
529. one call PROGRAMMING Station Data RELATED FEATURES wa Release 1 7 vertica April 2012 Station Flexible Buttons 6 21 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Station Flexible Buttons The Digital Phone incorporates a field of Flex buttons as well as the Fixed Feature buttons The Flex buttons are assigned in the System database to access features functions and resources of the System Specifically Flex buttons can be assigned as Empty button No system database assignment DSS button used to place One touch ICM calls to a designated Station and display Station status A Flex Numbering Plan button activates the feature associated with the assigned digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan A DN Flex button accesses and dials the assigned number An External Telephone Number including CO Access Code to make external call A CO Line Appearance button provides access to the individual CO Line assigned to the Flex button The CO Line button LED provides the status of the CO Line Fixed button activates the feature associated with the fixed button With the exception of CO Line buttons Flex buttons can be assigned at the station by the end user If allowed in the database the user can also assign or reassign CO Line buttons CONDITIONS Fixed button programming is supported when the Phone does not already have the same Fixed button If a Fixed button or Dial Number button is set to not all
530. onference 1 Any Station in the Net Conference can hang up during the conference 2 After all parties disconnect the net conference will be cancelled and the network path will be cleared ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 see details on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 0n NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 3 0 Off Off 1 0n NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for 4 0 UUS UUS QSIG supplementary service message 1 FAC NET CC RETAIN If this value is set to ON the signaling of call 5 0 Off Off completion retain mode is executed Used for networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features
531. op the holding line if system detects Hook Flash and then On Hook during dialing state 3 Hold Release HARDWARE SLT Howler Tone When an SLT station goes Off Hook and does not initiate dialing for the duration of the Dial Tone Timer delays dialing between digits in excess of the Inter Digit Timer or stays Off Hook at the completion of activating a Feature or Program the Station will present the Howler tone as an Error indication and the Call attempt will be abandoned In order to complete the Call the User must return to On Hook and restart the Call CONDITIONS Howler Tone is sent after Error tone Lock out occurs when Howler tone starts OPERATION System The System will deliver a Howler tone automatically as required Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone PROGRAMMING Station RELATED FEATURES SLT Message Wait I ndication CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING Station Data HARDWARE a Release 1 7 Y Sr UCA April 2012 SLT Name Registration 8 5 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone SLT Name Registration A SLT user has the capability to program the User Name so that a Calling Station with an LCD can see the associated Name instead of the Station number OPERATION SLT To register a name at the SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Name Register Feature Code 3 Enter na
532. or Announce GREETING REPEAT NO Determines the number of times 5 000 100 3 the Greeting will repeat GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the length of time the 6 000 100 seconds 0 timer will pause before the greeting is repeated Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Night Attendant Group 7 13 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q TYPE This entry defines the type of second 14 1 Normal 4 INT MOH queuing tone 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 SECOND Q TIMER This entry defines the timer for 15 000 300 seconds 30 forward destination SECOND TONE NO This entry defines second queuing 16 01 19 Not Asg tone number in case queuing type is normal SECOND PRT ANNCThis entry defines second queuing 17 001 255 Not Asg prompt annc Number in case queuing type is PROMPT ANNC SECOND REPEAT NO This entry defines second queuing 18 000 100 3 repeat number SECOND RPT DELAY This entry defines the pause timer 19 000 100 seconds 0 before second queuing repeat SECOND CCR This entry defines CCR option during 20 0 1 0 second queuing announcement
533. or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features BLF Presentation CONDITIONS OPERATION y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 247 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Chapter 3 System Features Network Basic Attribute TRANS PGM 320 FLEX 6 10 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 999 9000 Manager 9 UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 999 9001 Manager 9 DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Application BLF Manager Software Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Centralized Voice Mail CONDITIONS OPERATION ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network a Release 1 7 x April 2012 System Networking 3 249 DECT
534. or tone To reset Bath Alarm Ring 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial station no or press associated DSS button at system attendant station If bath alarm condition is already cleared bath alarm ring will be removed Otherwise bath alarm ring will not be removed Register Change Authorization Code At front desk it is possible to register or change the authorization code of hotel guest stations CONDITIONS A user may enter an authorization code from any station to place a CO IP call using walking COS feature An authorization code may include any dial pad digit except and The total number of Authorization Codes in system is 648 in MBX IP 300 and 180 in MBX IP 100 OPERATION Front Desk To Register Change Authorization Code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Register Change Prepaid Money CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To Register Change Prepaid Money Appendix B Hotel Management Release 1 7 XY vertical April 2012 Room Swapping B 23 Appendix B Hotel Management Room Swapping This feature allows a user to change the room without additional check out and check in procedure The existing information will be delivered to the new room CONDITIONS The new room must be checked out before room swapping OPERATION Front Desk To swap rooms Dial the PGM button 5 Dial a phone number of room whic
535. ork State Changing Function with ACD Agent Auto Work feature code If Auto Work State Changing Function is set after conversation or after ringing or after outgoing call agent state automatically changes to Work State Changing condition can be set at Agent Auto Work Mode admin PGM 214 Flex 4 4 Log In DND State Agent is log in but agent is set as DND DND agent does not receive ACD call DND is not changed automatically agent has to change own state to Ready state or Work state Supervisor or Sub Supervisor can monitor DND agent and then can change their DND state to Ready or Work State 1 Agent can set own state to DND State with ACD Agent DND feature code 2 If agent dial ACD Agent DND feature code or press flex button registered as ACD Agent DND feature code agent state goes to Ready State Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 OPERATIONS Agent Work State OR Agent Auto Work Mode OR Agent DND State OR ACD Call Operation when agents no answer OR OR Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution voaortiral Release 1 7 AS vertical April 2012 ACD Agent State 10 35 PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Feature Numbering Plan PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Group ACD Group Assignment PGM 212 see details on page A 76
536. ostic Maintenance 3 60 Chapter 3 System Features Diagnostic Maintenance The System software incorporates various diagnostic and maintenance routines that may be called remotely or locally through the System RS 232 Serial ports a TCP IP connection using a Web browser established over IP networks Routines that can be accessed include trace functions at the device level commands for diagnostics and maintenance and tools for manipulation at the OS level An optional Network Management System NMS application is available providing remote access to the system for maintenance and diagnostics Dial By Name A name up to 16 characters may be assigned to each Station and System Speed dial In addition each station may be assigned a 16 character name When assigned a user may place an intercom call to another station or select a Station or System Speed dial using the name The user selects from one of three Dial by Name directories and enters characters employing 2 dial pad buttons for each character The system finds and displays the nearest match to the user entries The user may continue entering characters or scroll the directory at any point using the VOL UP VOL DWN button and select a name to call The number associated with a selected name is displayed by using the TRANS button CONDITIONS Available characters are A to Z space and period refer to Station Speed Dial for character entry The LCD will display mu
537. otected restricting parties allowed to enter Up to 9 Conference Rooms can be set up and each can support up to maximum 13 party CONDITIONS Once established a Conference Room will remain opened until the Room is deleted Phontage and UCS Client may also create delete and join a Conference Room for operation instructions refer to the Phontage or UCS Client User Guide Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 48 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To set up a Conference Room 1 Enter the Create Conference Room Feature Code 2 Dial the desired Conference Room number 571 579 3 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room Max 6 digits 4 Press HOLD SAVE to establish the Room To join a Conference Room 1 Dial the Conference Room Number 2 Dial the Conference Room password and for end mark if password is less than 6 digits if the password is 6 digits dialing is not needed To delete a Conference Room 1 Enter the Delete Conference Room Feature Code 2 Dial the Conference Room number 571 579 3 Dial the Conference Room password and for end mark if password is less than 6 digits if the password is 6 digits dialing is not needed 4 Press HOLD SAVE to delete the Conference Room To transfer a call to a Conference Room 1 Press the TRANS button 2 Dial the Conference Room Number 3 Dial
538. ough RS 232C port and printed format is as follows Status S ROOM CHECK_IN GUEST_NAME COS ICM GRP WAKE AUTH PRE PAID C RT CHARGE C 0100 12 29 23 C H Kim 1 Yes oo No 20000 12345 C 0102 12125 18 C B Choi 1 No QOZOQ NO 0 1 500000 C 0103 12129 15 1 5 Lee 1 No 08 00 Yes o 2 500 D 0104 Vacant c 0105 Vacant S means maid status and C clean and D dirty C RT means call charge rate PRE PAID and CHAGE fields use the SMDR fraction in PGM 232 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management OPERATION Front Desk To print Room Status Deleting Service Station s SMDR Record CONDITIONS Front Desk To delete Service Station s SMDR record Room Rate Room Rate Register Assign Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Fee For Part Time B 31 Appendix B Hotel Management OPERATION Front Desk Room type and rate program 1 Dial the PGM button 81 The LCD will display the room cost and room type name of the first entry in the room rate table RATE 00 0000000 _ 2 Dial a desired room rate bin number 00 19 if you want to program another entry LCD will display the room cost and room type name of the selected entry 3 Press Flex button 1 and dial room cost 7 digits 4 Press Flex button 2 and enter room type name Max 6 characters 5 Press SAVE button to update the database permanently Go to step 2
539. ouncement is provided 1 W o Answer Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 3 178 System Groups Chapter 3 System Features Pilot Hunt Group A Station can be grouped for Pilot Hunt Feature Users may select incoming calls in the group to re route to other stations local or networked station groups the VMIB according to ring mode Day Night Timed A member of the Pilot Hunt Group may have Pilot Hunt Ring Access authority set for call coverage on another member Station in a group CONDITIONS Pilot Hunt Ring Access of a member should be enabled to receive the Pilot Hunt Group calls Pilot Hunt Group members can register a Forward as a Day destination using the Pilot H CFW Register feature code Ifa Station s busy service is set to Pilot Hunt and the Station is in conversation with an internal external party and another station calls the call is routed to an idle member in the same Pilot Hunt OPERATION If programmed Pilot Hunt Group is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Data Call Forward Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 2 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD ACCESS enables Call Forward to be activated by the 2 0 Disable Enable station 1 Enable Pilot Hunt Ring Access TRANS PGM 134
540. ource while it is Idle Music from the source is received over the Speaker and will be disabled during Ringing Paging or when the Station is Off Hook CONDITIONS Speaker volume can be adjustable at the Station using the VOL UP VOL DOWN keys on the Digital Phone Silence is provided if no BGM Source is assigned Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To listen to Background Music RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Call Log Display CONDITIONS ee ee Release 1 7 x vertical April 2012 Call Log Display 6 7 Chapter 6 Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To access the Call Log menu 1 Press the LOG Soft button on the Digital Phone a similar display will be presented gt 01 gt 107 02 M 106 SEND SELECT EXIT Symbol Description gt Outgoing Dialed Call Incoming Answered Received Call M Missed Lost Call 2 Press the VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons to select the Call Log to display gt 01 gt 107 02 M 106 SEND SELECT EXIT 3 Press the SEND button to make a call press SELECT to check the detailed information or press EXIT to return to Main Menu selections HARDWARE Digital Phones with 3 Soft keys Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone CO Line
541. outgoing 3 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME if an 4 000 300 sec 060 outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after RIs Time Before disconnecting a warning tone is provided INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call STATION INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while stations 6 0 Off On are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the 1 On station can transfer the call to second CO group ATD INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is 7 0 Off On connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the ATD can 1 On transfer the call to second CO group INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE If incoming 8 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME If an 9 000 300 sec 060 incoming CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after Rls Time Before disconnected warning tone is provided
542. ow User modification according to Admin Programming the User cannot change the button DN button can be assigned or changed by Admin Programming The station can only change the ring option of DN button OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button at the station 1 2 3 4 Press the PGM button Press the desired Flex button Select the type 1 Telephone number or Feature code 2 Fixed Button 0 Delete Select the desired button type using the VOL UP VOL DOWN key to assign a Fixed button OR Dial the desired number to create the Telephone number button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone To change the ring option of DN button PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Station Data RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Station Flexible LED Flash Rates CONDITIONS OPERATION System ee ee Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 Station ICLID Call Routing 6 23 Chapter 6 Digital Phone PROGRAMMING System Data LED Data PGM 234 see details on page A 95 Station Data Station Flexible Button PGM 126 see details on page A 29 HARDWARE Digital Phone Station I CLI D Call Routing The Station can employ Incoming Calling Line ID ICLID to determine appropriate routing for Incoming External Calls CONDITIONS Ifthe received ICLID does not match an entry in the Station ICLID List the Station will rece
543. owing Digital phones and Optional Boards are available for use with the MBX IP 100 and 300 Systems Digital Phones e Edge 8012 8024 IP phones e Edge 700 8 amp 24 button digital phones e 30xx Vodavi digital phones e STS digital phones e 90 Tr90 infintie Triad digital phones e Comdial 80xx 83xx E100 digital phones Optional Boards e BTU IP 8000 Series e MU FU MFU BTU USB LDP 7000 Series DSS e DSS LSS IP 8000 Series IP 8012DSS IP 8012LSS e Digital 48DSS e LDP 7048DSS Door Phone e LDP DPB Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 6 Digital Phone Auto Called Number Redial ACNR CONDITIONS OPERATION System Digital Phone To activate ACNR OR To cancel ACNR while phone is in Idle state To cancel ACNR during an ACNR attempt Release 1 7 Y vertical April 2012 Auto Called Number Redial ACNR 6 3 Chapter 6 Digital Phone PROGRAMMING System Data ACNR Pause Timer PGM 220 FLEX 3 see details on page A 83 PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACNR PAUSE TMR This timer establishes the 3 005 300 secs 030 time between ACNR attempts Tenant Data ACNR Retry Counter PGM 280 FLEX 4 see details on page A 128 PGM 280 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACNR RETRY COUNT Determines the ACNR 4 0 5 3 retry count Station Data ACNR Access PGM 133 FLEX 5 see details on page A 33 PGM 133 BTN RANGE DE
544. p If however ICM Call is permitted a guest station can call guest stations which belong to other PMS groups Regardless of ICM Call Barring a guest station can make calls to all service stations front desks and attendants Generally a guest station cannot call office extension If however Call Office from Hotel Room of Hotel Normal Information is permitted office extension can be called Regardless of ICM Call Barring a service station can call other service stations front desks and attendants Generally a service station cannot call office extension If however Call Office from Hotel Service of Hotel Normal Information is permitted office extension can be called Regardless of ICM Call Barring a front desk can call guest stations service stations front desk and attendants Generally a front desk cannot call office extension If however Call Office from Hotel Front of Hotel Normal Information is permitted office extension can be called Regardless of ICM Call Barring a hotel attendant can call guest stations service stations front desks and attendants Generally a hotel attendant cannot call office extension If however Call Office from Hotel Attendant of Hotel Normal Information is permitted office extension can be called OPERATION Front Desk To register ICM Call Barring 1 2 oa Pw Dial the PGM button 32 2 Dial a room phone number or a phone number range Press between phone numbe
545. p Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward Pilot Hunt 3 20 Chapter 3 System Features The Pilot Hunt Ring access privilege can be assigned on a per Station basis if the Pilot Hunt Ring access of the station is disabled that station will not receive Pilot Hunt ringing Ifa user activates the call forward feature using the Pilot Hunt Call Forward code it is applied to the Day Forward destination OPERATION Digital amp Single Line Phone To activate Call Forward Unconditional or Busy No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive dial tone Dial Pilot Hunt Call Forward Code Dial 1 4 Call Forward code as desired Dial the station or station group to receive calls Press the HOLD SAVE button to save 6 Replace the handset return to idle a fF ON To deactivate the Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel Code ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Call Forward Access TRANS PGM 132 FLEX 2 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL FORWARD ACCESS enables Call Forward to be activated 2 0 Disable Enable by the station 1 Enable Pilot Hunt Ring Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 6 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PILOT HUNT RING permits station to receive pilot hunt ring 6 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP
546. p Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management To remove DND from sub directory number S DN Guest Station Single Line Telephone To register DND To cancel DND Message Wait Registration Cancellation CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To register cancel a message Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Message Wait Registration Cancellation B 19 Appendix B Hotel Management 7 If itis successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 8 Otherwise you may hear an error tone Guest Station Digital Phone To leave message wait when there is no answer 1 Press the CALL BK button A confirmation tone is heard 2 Hang up the call 3 The receiver s CALL BK button LED blinks To leave message wait in DND mode 1 Press the CALL BK button A confirmation tone is heard 2 Hang up the call 3 The receiver s CALL BK button LED blinks To leave call back when the other party is in talk state 1 Press the CALL BK button A confirmation tone is heard 2 Hang up the call To make a call when a reserved ring is received 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 A call is made to the extension previously reserved To make a call when message wait is received 1 Press the blinking CALL BK button Then the following screen is displayed MWI 00 VMS 00 2 In order to check a type of waiting message dial 1 2 and sele
547. pe Flex button 2 to configure ring option Flex button 3 to configure access mode For Flex Button 1 To configure button type use the dial pad to select button type 1 3 Type 1 to assign Fixed type button to Flex button Type 2 to assign Station Number DN to Flex button Type 3 to assign Dialed Number to Flex button For Fixed Button Use the dial pad to select one of the following 1 redial 6 button 2 speed 7 transfer 3 conference 8 recall 4 mute 9 PTT 5 call back Press the SAVE button to store the data entered If a station already has the same fixed type button an error tone is heard and the data is not saved Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables For Station Number DN Button For Dialed Number Button Flex Button 2 to configure ring option Flex Button 3 to configure access mode Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 Station Number Information TRANS PGM 130 A 31 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Number I nformation TRANS PGM 130 In accordance with the station number s physical characteristics the station number is divided into My DN and Sub DN My DN is only a role of SADN Single Assign Directory Number and only one My DN is assigned to a physical terminal In MBX IP system the scope of station number used for My DN is predefined station bin index
548. pendix A System Programming Tables 4 Use the dial pad to enter the desired data refer to Table 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SETUP MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 323 1 0 Normal Fash Mode Normal or Fast Start mode 1 Fash Mode TUNNEL MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 245 2 0 Off On Encapsulation Tunneling 1 On DTMF SEND MODE during a connection DTMF digits can be 3 O Inband Inband sent In band or Out of band H 245 1 RFC2833 2 Out DIFF SERV Diffserv pre tagging for Voice packet 4 0 63 4 NOTE High values may cause high packet discard levels G 711A CODEC usage of G 711A Codec Type 5 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 711U CODEC usage of G 711U Codec Type 6 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 729 CODEC usage of G 729 Codec Type 7 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use G 723 CODEC usage of G 723 1 Codec Type 8 0 Not Use Not Use 1 Use GK USED used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used 9 0 Off Off amp 1 On rn H 323 Incoming Attributes TRANS PGM 362 To get the direct H 323 the From IR adess and the CO Group number to be routed should be assigned Ne 1 Press the TRANS PGM awn and dial 362 Enter Bin Number eS 2 3 Press the desired fex button and enter the appropriate data 4 Press the SAVE button to store the new data RS S e Wo YY Release 1 7
549. perations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Pick Up 3 29 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Feature Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 17 Station Group Data Station Group Attributes Pick up Option TRANS PGM 200 FLEX 5 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at 5 0 Disable Disable other stations in the group 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External Call Pick up Group Attributes TRANS PGM 204 see details on page A 70 TRANS PGM 204 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICK UP CONDITION this entry defines pick up condition 1 0 AllCall AllCal All Internal External 1 Int Call 2 Ext Call PICK UP MEMBER ASG assigns stations as members of a station 2 pickup group RELATED FEATURES Intercom Signaling Mode see page 6 11 Group Call Pick up see page 3 28 Station Group see page 3 154 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 30 Chapter 3 System Features Call Transfer Call Transfer Station CO IP calls can be transferred to other stations on the same System Calls can be transferred without announcing the call unscreened or with announcement screened When a call is transferred the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated If the timer expires before the call is answ
550. phone NomadSP or UCS Clients can be notified of voice mail for a Registered Station on MIB boards Softphone users can check their own voice mail and hear recorded voice mail of registered stations Also Softphone users can backup voice mail to their PC and then can manage their voice mails User can delete voice mail on VMIB boards according to their assigned authority CONDITIONS Phontage backup will be operated when messages are saved at VMIB boards If Backup Message Delete is executed voice mails at target station will be deleted in VMIB boards OPERATION Message Backup and Delete function is automatic refer to Softphone User Guide for user operation Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data System Voice Memo CONDITIONS OPERATION Digital Phone To hear Date amp Time Prompt To hear Station Number Prompt ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 281 Chapter 3 System Features To hear Station Settings 1 1Dial System Voice Memo Announcing Station Configuration code 2 Status for the Station is reported Items reported are as follows e Station IP Address e Station Mac Address e Station ICM Mode Handsfree Tone Privacy e Listed message x x number of all messages waiting e Wake Up Time hh mm e Donotdisturb COS x Si
551. r 11 01 30 secs 03 Call Routing function WEB PSWD GUARD TMR If no data packets are received 12 001 999 mins 5 during a Web Admin connection for the Guard time a password check will be initiated by the system RELATED FEATURES Hold Recall see page 3 102 Call Transfer Station see page 3 30 Unsupervised Conference see page 3 53 CO I P Access Stations can access outgoing CO IP lines based on CO IP Group Access programming Digital Phones may use flexible buttons assigned to access a specific CO line using a CO ACCESS CODE for outgoing calls CONDITIONS When a user dials a CO Access Code the system will search the assigned CO group for an idle CO IP line if there is no idle CO IP line then the system will search the 1st CO IP Group for an idle CO IP line the user will receive a busy tone A telephone user not allowed access to a CO IP line will receive an error tone when access is attempted the station may receive transferred calls despite denied access on the line but will not be able to flash or use the CO IP line for an outgoing call A station denied access to a CO IP line but assigned to receive CO IP line calls may answer incoming calls The user may transfer calls but cannot make an outgoing call on the CO IP line CO IP lines placed on hold may be retrieved by dialing the Retrieve Held CO IP code and the CO IP line number The Tx path to a station will be muted until the system has v
552. r Net Calls When the System detects a fatal error from the Network the System sends digit streams to the Network using the Alternate Dial bin not a Net Call The CO Call Restriction Timer is also applied to Net Call TRANS PGM180 FLEX 14 OPERATION To configure Net Call Numbering Plan programming Press TRANS PGM 111 Prefix Code 1 Prefix code for Networking Numbering HOLD SAVE To perform a Net Call 1 2 Lift Handset or press the SPEAKER button dial tone will be provided Dial a Station number on another System or press the NET DSS button for the other System The Station seizes the network CO Line according to the Net Routing Table and the System sends a modified digit stream The called System receives a digit stream sent by the Calling Party and analyzes it using the net routing table to determine the right destination sending it to the Called Party ring signal Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 206 Chapter 3 System Features 5 When Net Call is established a network CO Line is used when Net Call is cleared the network CO Line is released 6 The Network CO button LED will be extinguished when Net Call is cleared Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 207 ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Chapter 3 System Feat
553. r a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial by Name directory OPERATION Digital Phone To dial using a System Speed Dial 1 Lift handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the desired bin number Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Speed Dial 3 151 Chapter 3 System Features Single Line Phone To dial using a System Speed Dial 1 2 3 Lift handset Dial SLT Speed Dial access code Dial the desired bin number Attendant To program a System Speed Dial number 1 NO fF WD Press the TRANS PGM button Press the SPEED button Dial the Speed Dial bin number Dial the CO IP Group Access code Dial the number to be stored Press the HOLD SAVE button If desired enter a name refer to the Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press the HOLD SAVE button To program a Station Speed Dial number using the 3 soft key LCD display phones 1 Oo ON Oa PF wN Press the DIR Soft key Dial 1 or Press the OK Soft key Press the ADD Soft key Dial the Speed Dial bin number or Press the OK button Dial the CO IP Group Access code Dial the number to be stored Press the HOLD SAVE button If desired enter a name refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press HOLD SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programm
554. r networking 1 On supplementary signaling type of the call completion BLF USAGE Used to set Networking BLF service 6 0 Off Off 1 0n TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 7 9000 9999 9000 Manager UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF 8 9000 9999 9001 Manager DURATION OF BLF STS Duration for sending the BLF status 9 01 99 10 message to the BLF Server BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 10 0 0 0 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking Reserved Network Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 321 see details on page A 142 TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE Select Number Type 1 0 Net Net 1 Transit NUM PLAN CODE X means any digits can be inserted between 2 8digits 0 9 Select MUTE button to input X CO GROUP NO CO Group Number 01 72 AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0 Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features CO Transit In CONDITIO
555. rd 2 Overflow 3 Night 4 Holiday 5 Not Service TENANT NO ACD Tenant Number 3 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 1 5 MBX IP 100 TIME TABLE INDEX ACD Group Time Table 4 1 9 1 AUTO MODE ACD Group Status changed 0 Not Use Not Use according to System Time Table Index 1 Night Auto 2 Holiday Auto 3 Night Holiday Auto SUPERVISOR NUM ACD Group Supervisor 6 l assign MEMBER ASSIGN ACD Group Agent assign 7 ACD Group Attribute1 PGM 213 see details on page A 77 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB SUP ASSIGN This entry assigns Sub Supervisor in 1 ACD Group GROUP FWD DEST When ACD Group status is Group 2 Forward Status all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination NIGHT SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute ACD 3 0 Release Release call when group status is Night Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward NIGHT FWD DEST When Night Service type is Forward 4 applied destination can be assigned Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10 19 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case
556. rd Timer PGM 221 FLEX 6 see details on page A 84 PGM 221 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LCO RLS GUARD TMR when an analog CO Line is returned to 6 00 60 010 idle the system will deny access for this time to assure the PSTN minutes returns the CO circuitry to idle Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP CO Ring Detect CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING System Data CO Transit Service a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Transit Service 5 43 CONDITIONS Chapter 5 CO IP The CO transit service can be set through Admin programming of optional permissions The System provides an inter working feature for all CO Lines ForaR2 CO to R2 CO call set for link by link or end to end transit Fora PRI CO to PRI CO call all messages are Forwarded transparently OPERATION If set CO Transit Service operation is automatic PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO to CO Attributes PGM 179 see details on page A 60 PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while stations are 1 0 Off On connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group the station 1 On can transfer the call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is connected to 2 0 Off On outgoing CO call of first CO Group the ATD can transfer the 1 On call to second CO group OUT
557. rd Type 3 0 All Call All Call 1 Long Distance Long Distance Call Digit Counter 4 07 15 07 Print Incoming Call 5 1 On 0 Off Off Print Lost Call 6 1 On 0 Off Off SMDR Currency Unit 7 SMDR Cost per Metering Pulse 8 SMDR Fraction 9 0 5 0 SMDR Transfer Charge Mode 10 0 Individual Individual 1 Integrate Transferring 2 Integrate Transferred SMDR Attendant Charge Mode 11 10 Normal Charging Normal Charging 1 Attendant Charging 2 Transferred Charging SMDR Dialed Digit Hidden Number 12 0 9 0 Darr Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 61 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA NTP Primary Server Address NTP Secondary Server Address Standard Time Zone A 94 233 l LED FLASHING RATE A 95 234 l CALLBK Intercom 1 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 30 IPM Flash Off On IPM CALL BK CO Line 2 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 120 IPM Flash Off On IPM CALL BK MSG Wait 3 Flex1 Color RED Red Green Amber Flex2 Flash 120 IPM Flash Off On IPM MUTE Transmission 4 Flex1
558. rds 5000 5000 Ave Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Capacities 1 3 SYSTEM CAPACITY CHART Chapter 1 Introduction Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Authorization Code Max 12 Digits Max 12 Digits 180 Extension 648 Extension 400 System 800 System CO Group No 24 72 Station Group 50 member Group 50 member Group Pickup Group 20 100 member Group 50 100 member Group Command Call Group 10 12 member 1 initiator Group 10 12 member 1 initiator Group Interphone Group 10 10 member Group 10 10 member Group Page Group 15 50 member Group 30 50 member Group PTT Group 10 50 member Group 10 50 member Group Conference Room 9 9 Number of Hot Desk Agent 60 324 Station Name Information 16 Characters 16 Characters Digit Restriction COS 16 COS 16 Allow Deny Entry per COS 100 Max Digit 16 Allow Deny Entry per COS 100 Max Digit 16 Digit Translation Table No 5 Table No 5 Number of Digit 16 Number of Digit 16 300 per 1 table 300 per 1 table ar Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Phones amp Consoles Supported 1 4 Chapter 1 Introduction Phones amp Consoles Supported These are the phone models supported by the MBX IP systems 5000 s
559. re provided Day Night and Timed The Attendant controls the System Ring Service mode changing from Auto Service Mode to Day Night or Timed Service mode Based on the Service Mode selected different Ring Assignments COS and Answering Privileges are invoked for System Users CONDITIONS Only Attendants can change Day Timed Night Ring Mode for the System manually and program the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table A Station can receive Incoming Calls for CO Lines based on the Database assignments and the System mode Day Night Timed when the Call arrives When the Auto Ring Selection Table is programmed Ringing COS and CO IP Access mode are changed automatically based on Times assigned in the Table The Attendant always has manual control of System mode by Enabling Disabling the Auto Service Mode Control OPERATION Attendant To modify Day Timed Night Ring Mode manually Attendant Only 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Press the PGM button Dial 0 8 1 Day Night Program code Select Tenant Number 0 All or 1 9 Select Ring mode O AUTO 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED OR Dial the Day Night Program Feature Code Select Tenant Number 0 All or 1 9 Select Ring mode O AUTO 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 TIMED To set Day Timed Night Ring Mode automatically Auto Service Mode Control 1 2 3 4 Press the PGM button Dial 0 8 1 Day Night Program code Select Tenant Number 0 All or 1 9 Select Auto Ring mode O AUTO
560. re the data entries Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Port Attributes TRANS PGM 121 124 Station Attributes TRANS PGM 121 a Release 1 7 AS April 2012 Station Port Attributes TRANS PGM 121 124 A 25 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HEADSET RING in Headset mode this item selects device to receive 3 O Speaker Speaker incoming ring signals Speaker Headset or Both 1 Headset 2 Both GROUP LISTEN enables Group Listen feature audio is sent to both 4 0 Off Off the handset and speaker with the handset microphone active and 1 On speakerphone microphone OFF KEYSET ADMIN when an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO 5 0 Disable Disable call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released 1 Enable NO TOUCH ANS permits station to receive pilot hunt ring 6 O0 Off Off 1 0n HOWLING TONE sets Anonymous Call Restrict service 7 O Off On 1 0n DUMMY TERMINAL this item defines whether a station is used for hot 8 0 Off Off desk terminal If you want to use a station as hot desk this field must be 1 On set to ON PORT BLOCK if this value is set to ON Station is blocked so it is 9 0 Off Off impossible to use that station 1 On GAIN TABLE IDX this feature allows 3 kinds
561. receives an Error tone after the SLT User goes On Hook a Recall will be received If after a Hook Switch Flash the User takes no action for duration of the Dial Tone Timer the SLT will receive an Error tone once the SLT goes On Hook the SLT will receive a Recall automatically OPERATION SLT To activate a Transfer Broker Call Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 To activate a Call Wait Broker Call PROGRAMMING Station Data Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone RELATED FEATURE Hook Flash Mode Das Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Howler Tone 8 3 Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone Hold Release During the conversation when a SLT user hook flashes the previous line is placed on hold if the SLT user hangs up without being transferred the previous line will be disconnected automatically PROGRAMMING Station Data Hook Flash Mode PGM 132 FLEX 7 see page A 33 PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOOK FLASH MODE determine the operation when 7 0 Flash Normal Flash Normal SLT user press hook flash button during conversation 0 1 Flash Ignore FLASH NORMAL Hook Flash can be detected In 2 Flash Drop addition it will be operated normal case flow 1 FLASH IGNORE Hook Flash cannot be detected All of hook flash will be ignored at any time 2 FLASH DROP When Hook Flash is detected the line will be disconnected 3 HOLD RELEASE Dr
562. reeting is repeated QUEUING TYPE Determines the type of Queuing Tone 7 1 Normal 4 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 QUEUING TIMER Determines the Greeting Queuing 8 010 300 sec 030 Timeout Timer QUEUING TONE NO Determines the Queuing Tone 9 01 19 00 number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal QUEUING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Queuing 10 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when the Queuing Type is set to Prompt or Announce QUEUING REPEAT NO determines the Queuing Repeat 11 000 100 3 number GREETING RPT DELAY Determines the Pause Timer 12 000 100 seconds 0 before Queuing is repeated QUEUING CCR This entry defines CCR option during 13 0 1 0 queuing announcement is provided Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Group 7 5 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 3 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 Not used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when
563. refer to Following Table Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 175 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FIRST DTMF DELAY delay time before sending first digit 1 00 90 100 msec 05 SECOND DTMF DELAY delay time before sending next 2 00 90 100 msec 02 digit after sending first digit DTMF tone THIRD DTMF DELAY delay time before sending next digit 3 00 90 100 msec 02 after sending second digit DTMF tone FORTH DTMF DELAY delay time before sending next digit 4 00 90 100 msec 02 after sending third digit DTMF tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables CO COS Assignment TRANS PGM 177 CO to CO Transfer Attributes TRANS PGM 179 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Group Access Code Attribute TRANS PGM 180 A 61 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while stations are 1 0 Off On connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group the station 1 On can transfer the call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is connected to 2 0 Off On outgoing CO call of first CO Group the ATD can transfer the 1 On call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE if
564. rflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determines the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant ATD CALL BY STA NO This entry defines attendant call 8 l Off by dialing attendant member 0 the call for attendant follows normal call 1 the call for attendant follows attendant group call RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 9 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 10 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Table Data Tone Frequency Cadence PGM 264 see details on page A 114 CCR Service for Atte
565. ril 2012 Headset Compatibility 3 100 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To change operation from Speakerphone to Headset 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 61 Headset select code 3 Dial the appropriate selection 0 Headset 1 Speakerphone 2 Ear Microphone 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To change the device to receive ring signals 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 62 Ring select code 3 Dial the appropriate selection 1 Speakerphone 2 Headset 3 Both 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To place answer calls using the headset Press the SPEAKER with the phone in Headset mode ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Speaker Headset Ring Mode TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 3 see page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HEADSET RING in Headset mode this item selects device to 3 0 Speaker Speaker receive incoming ring signals Speaker Headset or Both 1 Headset 2 Both Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hold 3 101 Chapter 3 System Features Speakerphone Headset TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 2 see page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HEADSET MODE selects Speakerphone mode Headset mode or 2 0 Speaker Speaker Ear Mic Mode 1 Headset 2 E MIC RELATED FEATURES Speakerphone see page 6 19 Paging see page 4 15 Hold The user can place a CO IP line or Station on Ho
566. rime Number Button TRANS PGM 123 FLEX 1 see details on page A 26 TRANS PGM 123 PRIME NUMBER BTN among My DN and several Sub DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons determines the first seized DN when the user initiates a call If prime button is not set of invalid the system scans sequentially from flexible button 1 to flexible Button 48 and take the unused and valid flexible button as prime button NOTE DN buttons of associated DSS box cannot be a prime number button BTN 1 RANGE 01 48 DEFAULT 01 Flex Button Assign TRANS PGM 126 see details on page A 29 Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 RELATED FEATURES Intercom Caller see page 4 2 Controlled ICM Signaling see page 6 19 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Loud Bell Control LBC 3 116 Chapter 3 System Features Loud Bell Control LBC The hardware is equipped with a relay that activates an External Control Contact The contact is assigned to one of several functions including a Loud Bell Control If used as a Loud Bell Control the contact will activate when e External Page is accessed e Assigned Station receives a call LBC CONDITIONS A Single Assign Directory Number SADN can be assigned for the LBC feature ASIP Station cannot be assigned for LBC feature One relay contact is available rated at 1 amp
567. ring will repeat 255 means infinite repetition ICM RING TIME UNIT Determines the duration in msec for 2 0 10 msec 100 msec ON OFF ring time 1 100 msec ICM RING 1 ON Define the first ON ring duration 3 0 255 006 ICM RING 1 OFF Define the first OFF ring duration 4 0 255 002 ICMCO RING 2 ON Define the second ON ring duration 5 0 255 002 ICM RING 2 OFF Define the second OFF ring duration 6 0 255 040 ICM RING 3 ON Define the third ON ring duration 7 0 255 000 ICM RING 3 OFF Define the third OFF ring duration 8 0 255 000 ICM RING 4 ON Define the fourth ON ring duration 9 0 255 000 ICM RING 4 OFF Define the fourth OFF ring duration 10 0 255 000 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 ACNR Tone Cadence TRANS PGM 441 Appendix A System Programming Tables DB I NITI ALI ZATION TRANS PGM 499 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DB INITIALIZATION TRANS PGM 499 A 163 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 499 INIT STATION DATA Initializes Station based data except flexible button data BTN RANGE Desired station range initialize whole data when no range DEFAULT INIT STATION DATA Initializes flexible button data 4 INIT STATION DATA Initializes CO line based data INIT STATION DATA Initializes S
568. rogram the station user name 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Name Register Code 3 Enter the name up to 16 characters refer to Station Speed Dial for character entry 4 Press the hook switch confirmation tone is received Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover 3 62 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Speed Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 1 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SPEED ACCESS gives station speed dial bins access authority 1 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 HARDWARE Digital Phone w Display Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover On a pulse dial CO line the user can request the system to change the signaling mode from pulse to DTMF allowing the user to access outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as banking services voice mail etc CONDITIONS Ina Speed Dial the will automatically insert a pause before dialing the remaining digits This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available in the Redial features For VoIP calls pulse dialing is not available switchover is not required or supported OPERATION To switch from pulse to DTMF while on a pulse CO line Dial signaling change to DTMF ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Rel
569. rogramming Guide April 2012 Call Transfer 3 33 Chapter 3 System Features CO Line Data CO to CO Attributes TRANS PGM 179 see details on page A 60 TRANS PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while stations are 1 0 Off On connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group the station 1 On can transfer the call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is connected to 2 0 Off On outgoing CO call of first CO Group the ATD can transfer the 1 On call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE if outgoing 3 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME if an 4 000 300 sec 060 outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after RIs Time Before disconnecting a warning tone is provided INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call STATION INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while stations 6 0 Off On are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the 1 On station can transfer the call to second CO group ATD INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is 7 0 Off
570. rom SLTM 1 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain from DTIM HS 2 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain DTIM HF 3 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain from IP PHONE HS 4 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain from IP PHONE HF 5 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain from WIT 6 0 63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN VOIB RX gain from VOIB 7 0 63 34 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 430 436 Each device can adjust its own RTP TX gain to another device refer to the following tables for RTP TX gain adjustment of devices 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 SLTM TX RTP GAIN DTIM HS TX RTP GAIN DTIM HF TX RTP GAIN IP Phone HS TX RTP GAIN IP Phone HF TX RTP GAIN WIT TX RTP GAIN VOIB TX RTP GAIN Press the desired Flex button refer to the tables below 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables SLTM TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 430 DTI M HS TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 431 DTI M HF TX RTP Gain TRANS PGM 432 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 RTP RX Gain TRANS PGM 430 436 A 159 Appendix A System Programming Tables I P Phone HS TX RT
571. roup TRANS PGM 210 Pilot Hunt Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 NOTE a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute TRANS PGM 211 A 75 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 210 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME TABLE INDEX Time Table index 3 1 9 1 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of a Pilot Hunt group 4 l Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute TRANS PGM 211 Each Pilot Hunt group has available attributes relating to forward the following table provides descriptions for the attributes and the data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 211 2 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group 01 20 for the MBX IP 100 and 01 50 for the MBX IP 300 The system will display the attribute of Pilot Hunt group Press the desired Flex button Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 211 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY FORWARD TYPE determines Day time seting for Call 1 0 Not Used Not Used Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans DAY FORWARD DESTINATION determines Day time seting 2 Max 8 digits for Forward destination NIGHT FORWARD TYPE determines the Night time seting 3 0 Not Used Not Used for Call Forward type 1 Uncond 2 Busy 3 No Ans 4 Busy No Ans NIGHT FORWARD DESTINATION determines the Night 4 Max 8 di
572. rs SCREEN INDICATOR determines if screen indicator 2 0 Off user provided Off will be inserted in ISDN messages not screened 1 On user provided verified and passed CALLING TYPE for Incoming calls on the ISDN Line 3 0 Unknown Subscriber this parameter defines the Type of Number Plan 1 International provided in Connected Party Information Element of the 2 National ISDN call CONNECT message 3 Subscriber 4 Not Used CALLING NUM PLAN select connected number plan 4 0 Unknown Unknown of ISDN CONNECT message 1 SDN Telephony 2 Data 3 Telex 4 National 5 Private SEND PROGRESS IND if this feature is set to ALL 5 0 NO NO Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about All 1 ALL Message 2 ALERTING If this feature is set to ALERTING Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about Alerting Message R2 ANI SVC REQ if this feature is set to ON to R2 line 6 0 Off Off system request ANI digits CLI data to the calling party 1 On Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 CO Line Service 5 33 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ABSWER WAITING CALL If this feature is set to ON system 6 0 Off Off sends answer when call is waited 1 On UNIVERSAL
573. rs when entering a phone number range Press the SAVE button Designate whether to use ICM 0 Allowed 1 Not Allowed Press the SAVE button If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD Otherwise you may hear an error tone One Time CO Call Use By the request of guest front desk can enable one time CO call to an intercom only station In this time calling station s COS is temporally changed to that of the charged station s COS Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management CONDITIONS No STACO TIME START DIALED COUNT 0001 104 01 00 01 25 12 29 94 06 16 0001054507950 35 OPERATION Front Desk To enable ICM Only station to dial outside calls Room Setting Wake Up Registration Cancellation CONDITIONS COST Remark 500 R0112 Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Wake Up Registration Cancellation B 15 Appendix B Hotel Management When wake up is registered cancelled from Attendant Front Desk Guest Station or PMS wake up service result is notified to PMS OPERATION Attendant To register wake up for a room 1 Daey 7 Dial Wake up Register feature code or PGM button 045 Press a phone number range of desired room s Dial four digits of desired time suitable for 24 HR mode If wake up is required to be repeated dial Press the SAVE but
574. rvisor and Sub Supervisor can check and monitor agent s status And also Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can overhear agent s conversation 1 Agent Status Monitor by Supervisor on Digital Phone a Supervisor can check agent s state with ACD Supervisor Agent State Check feature code If supervisor dial or press flex button registered as ACD Supervisor Agent State Check feature code first agent state will be displayed on LCD Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Porte hove Forward Deameamen Dtzten rember we Page Service newese Com DARM F oram De rtn ston tee hoides Benne Aewsse Cae Motetay Forward Ceemeater tpa Overtow Service nesese Con Overton foreent Destination tee Mex Queues Court v Swart erte Ae Oet T mesasce Forward Destinaten Ate Queuing Theater Peter lagert No Anawer Gerace vet we Agent hio Aare wer Forward Oe stnaten cater hunde w P 4 Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10 53 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution OPERATIONS Group Forward Night Holiday Status Change by Supervisor 1 2 3 Dial ACD Supervisor Group Forward Night Holiday Status feature code OR Press flex button registered as ACD Supervisor Group Forward Night Holiday Status feature code Group Status will be changed ACD Group Management or A
575. rward Destination can be changed 2 Supervisor and Sub Supervisor Answer the Queued ACD call Supervisor and Sub Supervisor can find queued ACD call count on the LCD And if ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature code is saved at flex button this flex button s color will be changed to steady on 1 First Queued ACD call Answer by Supervisor a When there are queued ACD call if Supervisor or Sub Supervisor press ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature codes Total queued ACD call count and sub menu will be displayed on LCD b If supervisor choose Check First Queued Call menu CLI of first Queued call will be display At that time if supervisor choose Answer option queued ACD call will route to Supervisor 2 First Queued ACD call Reroute a When there are queued ACD call if Supervisor or Sub Supervisor press ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer feature codes Total queued ACD call count and sub menu will be displayed on LCD b If supervisor choose Check First Queued Call menu CLI of first Queued call will be display At that time if supervisor choose Reroute option current registered Forward Destination after Queuing Announcement will be displayed c If press HOLD or button queued ACD call will be rerouted to registered destination OR d If dial other Tel Number and then press HOLD or button queued ACD call will be rerouted to new dialed Tel Number 3 Supervisor and Sub Supervisor Monitoring Agent Supe
576. rwise if set to 3 feature code is 1 First Idle activated for incoming calls 2 Circular 3 Feature Code CO RING ASSIGN Destination stations can be edited using 2 00 30 or one a range or one by one If press Flex 1 4 and then dial station station number range up to 30 stations or edit one station number FEATURE CODE If set to Feature Code and valid feature 3 Valid Feature code is assigned then assigned feature is activated when Code Refer to there is an incoming call PGM115 NOTE Feature Code is not applied to rerouted calls FEATURE DELAY If Service type is set to Feature code it 4 00 30 secs 00 can be delayed SYSTEM GROUP DATA TRANS PGM 200 215 Stations can be grouped for call routing dialing call pick up or various purposes Release 1 7 YW verti MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Group TRANS PGM 200 NOTE NOTE Station Group Capacities Appendix A System Programming Tables ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Release 1 7 h ST April 2012 Station Group Greeting Queuing Attributes TRANS PGM 201 A 65 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE this entry defines the type of station group 1 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Terminal 2 Circular 3 Ring 4 Longest Idle 5 Voice Mail GROUP NAME this entry defi
577. s a Net Call the System provides the name registered at the Station to the Called Party between Systems OPERATION If set CNIP operation is automatic ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE REMARK PREFIX CODE leading preceding digits of some 1 1 8digits Prefix code length more numbering plan code digit can be 8 at max MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Voice Network y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 217 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DIGIT AND Automatic Network Dialing Digit 4 10digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 5 0 Off Off message or not 1 0n DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager
578. s feature can be set for each incoming CO Group The destination is set differently according to Day Night and Time modes Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION PROGRAMMING CO Line Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 21 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected 10 0 DTMF DTMF DTMF Pulse R2MFC 1 PULSE 2 R2 CHARGE MODE If FREE the external call 11 0 Free Report though CO line is not printed saved to SMDR 1 Report even though SMDR is enabled If REPORT the external call though CO line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes METERING TYPE According to PSTN 12 00 None None service type metering type can be selected 01 12KHz among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 02 16KHz can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be 03 50KHz applied to ISDN lines 04 SPR 05 PPR 06 NPR 07 AOC 0 Standard 08 AOC 1 Italy amp Spain 09 AOC 2 Finland 10 AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12 AOC 5 Netherlands Incoming CO Line Attributes PGM 165 166 see details on page A 48 PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NAM
579. s placed in a fault mode If on hook dialing is used the station will receive an error tone for one 1 second and the phone will return to idle automatically OPERATION System Auto Call Release of Intercom calls If a station places an intercom call and the called station does not answer in the Intercom Call Release Time the call is terminated and the calling user receives an error tone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Automatic Pause Insertion 3 7 Chapter 3 System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data System Ring Table Normal Call Ring use Web Admin TRANS PGM 265 see details on page A 115 Howler Tone TRANS PGM 121 FLEX 7 see details on page A 24 TRANS PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOWLING TONE sets Anonymous Call Restrict service 7 0 Off On 1 On Automatic Pause I nsertion In addition to a manually entered Pause the system will automatically pause dialing to allow for potential connection delays The pause will be inserted when any of the following occur e Flash is encountered in a Speed Dial number e Pulse to Tone Switchover is encountered in a Speed Dial or Redial number e Connect message is received on an ISDN Line CONDITIONS An automatically inserted pause is not counted as a digit in a Speed Dial number The LCD of the Digital Phone will show a P when a pause is encountered When the System inserts a Pau
580. s the TRANSYPGM button and dial 401 2 Press the Kred Flex button refer to Table 3 Use tai pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 4 lt S e SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 401 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SLT RX GAIN SLT RX gain from DKT 1 0 63 32 SLT RX GAIN SLT RX gain from SLT 2 0 63 32 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables er ao oe AS x S D O DECT RX Gain FRANS PGM 402 6 se co S I P Phone RX Gain TRANS PGM 403 Release 1 7 Sr UCA April 2012 Analog C O RX Gain TRANS PGM 404 A 151 Appendix A System Programming Tables 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 403 2 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 4 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 403 BTN RANGE DEFAULT IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from DKT 1 0 63 26 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from SLT 2 0 63 33 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from DECT 3 0 63 26 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from IPDEV 4 0 63 26 IP PHONE RX GAIN IP PHONE RX gain from Analog CO 5 0 6
581. s the 0 Off 0 Off Date amp Time with Network Date amp Time when the System Date amp 1 On Time is different CLI PRINT If set to ON CLI information is printed 6 0 Off 0 Off 1 On TLS FOR WEB Enables Transport Layer Security TLS for Web 7 0 Off 0 Off access 1 On WEB SERVER PORT Web Server port number 8 1 65535 80 YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Remote Device Zone Management 3 143 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DB AUTO DOWNLOAD WEEK Determines when system 9 0 Off 0 Off database downloads to USB automatically 1 On DB DOWNLOAD TIME Sets the time for system database 10 00 23 00 download to USB automatically UC SERVER IP ADDRESS UC Server IP Address 11 l CTI SERVER IP ADDRESS CTI Server IP Address 12 MODEM ASC CO LINE Modem Associate CO Line 13 001 240 000 IP PHONE REG BY STA NUM Enables IP phone registration by 14 0 Off 0 Off station number 1 On Remote Device Zone Management Remote devices in particular those not reachable by the System are managed by grouping devices by various characteristics in a Zone Placing devices into Zones simplifies management allowing definition of common characteristics to the devices within the zone Zone attributes include e Nation Code e Language e RTP Relay e RTP Relay group
582. sage 5 0 Off 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 0n ACD Call Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Queuing Service 10 21 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Call Queuing Service If all of agents are busy or all of agents are not log in next ACD call will be queued Max queue count can be changed by Administrator or Supervisor When ACD call is queued system gives Queuing announcement Each group can serve max 5 queuing announcements and can define how many announcements can be served Queuing Announcement Service Step PGM 213 Flex 7 And also each group can have the rule how to handle the queued call after finish the Queuing Announcement In that case ACD call can be released or forwarded to registered destination If queued count display option admin is set PGM 214 Flex 8 queued count will be displayed to Supervisor and Sub Supervisor and all of agent keyset An Administrator can
583. sconnect by default NO ANSWER ATTENDANT The CO call is routed to 2 l Attendant NO ANSWER CO RING ASSIGN The CO call is 3 l routed according to Ring Assign Table see TRANS PGM 167 NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL If destination is set to 4 01 80 Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table See TRANS PGM 181 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Hold 3 104 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER TONE If destination is set to Tone the 5 Error Busy tone is heard NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP The CO call is 6 routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination NO ANSWER RING The call is routed to the same 7 destination again NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred 8 l station again Only possible for Transfer No Answer case Table Data CO Hold Tone Timer see page A 137 use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 FLEX 55 RELATED FEATURES Call Transfer see page 3 30 CO IP see page 3 37 Automatic Hold While on an active CO IP call the system will place the call on hold automatically The station can be programmed to support CO IP to CO IP Automatic Hold In this case pressing a CO IP button while on a CO IP call will place the active call on hold and access the selected CO IP lin
584. se P indication is not shown OPERATION System The system automatically pauses dialing after an appropriate event as listed above RELATED FEATURES Auto Called Number Redial ACNR see page 6 2 Last Number Redial LNR see page 3 110 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover see page 3 62 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Automatic Privacy Branch Line 3 8 Chapter 3 System Features Automatic Privacy Branch Line Privacy is insured in all communications on the system If desired the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature allowing an uninvited station to join in an existing external conversation In such a case a conference is established The Privacy feature restricts the intrusion call wait camp on OHVA at a busy station while the Branch Line can restrict a conference call by pressing DN button in use CONDITIONS With Automatic Privacy disabled privacy is still assured on all intercom and conference calls Only one station can intrude on an active call An intrusion tone can be provided to the call indicating another station has accessed the line OPERATION Digital Phone To intrude into a call when Privacy is disabled Make a call to busy station and then press the appropriate code for intrusion call wait camp on OHVA when receiving busy tone To change privacy mode in conversation Press the DND button during a
585. se Carmen Waltz Pavane Sichiliano Sonata Spring Campanella Badinerie Blue Danube VMIB MOH 1 Assignment 3 Announcement VMIB MOH 2 Assignment 4 Announcement VMIB MOH 3 Assignment 5 Announcement VMIB MOH 4 Assignment 6 Announcement SLT MOH 1 Assignment 7 Station SLT MOH 2 Assignment 8 Station SLT MOH 3 Assignment 9 Station SLT MOH 4 Assignment 10 Station SLT MOH 5 Assignment 11 Station RS 232 SETTING A 89 230 Baud Rate 1 1 9600 Baud 115200 Baud 2 19200 Baud 3 38400 Baud 4 57600 Baud 5 115200 Baud Page Break 2 1 On 0 Off Off Line Per Page 001 199 66 XON XOFF 0 XOFF XOFF 1 XON Release 1 7 Wve MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DEFAULT VALUES C 59 Appendix C Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYSREM DATA Trace Print A 90 231 6 0 Serial Port Serial Port 1 Modu Port 2 TCP 1 3 TCP 2 4 TCP 3 5 TCP 4 6 TCP 5 ADMIN Data Print 7 0 Serial Port Serial Port 1 Modu Port 2 TCP 1 3 TCP 2 4 TCP 3 5 TCP 4 6 TCP 5 SMDR ATTRIBUTES A 91 232 SMDR Save Enable 1 1 On 0 Off Off SMDR Print Enable 1 On 0 Off Off Reco
586. sed and modified using a Digital Phone the LAN interface or an ISDN PRI line Both the LAN and ISDN access the System Web server delivers the database as a set of Web pages to the a Web browser Under the proper conditions both also allow for remote access to the System database e For remote access with a LAN interface the System must be assigned a remotely accessible IP address The IP address should be fixed either as a public IP address or through a NAPT server with port forwarding The User s browser should be pointed to the System IP address and the TCP port assigned in the System database When accessed the System will return the Administration Web page From this page selecting Admin amp Maintenance will return the login page where the user must enter a registered password Based on the password entered the user is permitted access to specified System program codes refer to Admin Programming Manual CONDITIONS For Web Admin a password can be encrypted using the LG Nortel Java Virtual Encryption plug in A Java Virtual Machine MS or Sun must be installed on the User PC to support password encryption OPERATION Operation is detailed in the Admin Programming Manual ADMIN PROGRAMMING Pre programmed Data System IP Address Plan TRANS PGM 108 see details on page A 14 TRANS PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK IP ADDR Public IP Address required for remote user and 1 10 10 10 1 Web admin IPv4 format SUB
587. sed for playing the VMIB 1 4 VMIB Slot 00 18 amp Announcement No Prompt No 01 70 CCR Index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No 1 100 Release 1 7 Ave tic 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 173 Chapter 3 System Features CCR Table TRANS PGM 260 see details on page A 112 TRANS PGM 260 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CCR TABLE The destination of CCR input digit the destination 1 12 Max 8 digits can be a Station number Station group number or Feature code NOTE For Feature codes refer to the Numbering Plan for the applicable codes Forward Destination Overflow Service This can be assigned as Station Hunt Group Telephone Number covering Station Group Call according to the Forward type of the Station Group There are 4 kinds of Forward type in an Station Group Unconditional Queuing Overflow Queuing Timeout Queuing Overflow or Queuing Timeout The Overflow Destination can be programmed as Station Station Group External number NET Destination OPERATION To use the Unconditional Forward Overflow Destination 1 Dial the Station Group Number 2 The Call is Routed to the Forward Destination To use the Queuing Overflow Forward Destination 1 Dial the Station Group Number 2 The Call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode NOTE The Call will be Routed to the Forward Destinatio
588. sed for the Trace 6 0 5 COM output ADMIN Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the ADMIN 7 0 5 COM Report output SMDR Attributes TRANS PGM 232 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and outgoing calls Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including output records for all calls or Long Distance LD only call cost per pulse when using call metering etc refer to Table for a description of each Attribute LCD displays and the data entries required 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 232 2 Select the desired Flex button refer to the following Table 3 Use the dial pad to enter the desired data 4 To save SMDR Attribute data press the SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables a Release 1 7 x April 2012 SMDR Attributes TRANS PGM 232 A 93 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 232 SMDR FRACTION Determines the position of the decimal in the Cost per Pulse starting from the right most digit BTN 10 RANGE 0 5 DEFAULT HIDDEN DIALED DGT Determines the number of dialed digits to hide for security purposes and replaced with Button 13 below defines whether leading or trailing digits are hidden In addition the station must be assigned for SMDR HI
589. sed to determine if Gatekeeper will be used 9 0 Off Off 1 0n SIP SIP User ID Data use Web Admin PGM 370 SIP CO Service use Web Admin PGM 371 RELATED FEATURES System Networking see page 3 200 HARDWARE VOIB Session I nitiation Protocol SIP Service When assigned to support Session Initiation Protocol SIP VolP channels provide protocol conversion between SIP and H 323 This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external SIP Networks for call services In addition to the IETF RFC 3261 SIP draft standard System s VoIP channels support other SIP related RFCs including e RFC 2617 HTTP Authentication Basic amp Digest e RFC 3515 Refer Method e RFC 3264 Offer Answer Model e RFC 3265 SIP Basic Call Flow Examples e RFC 3891 SIP Replaces Header Using the SIP database assignments the System will register and authenticate with the SIP Proxy Server permitting the System to interoperate employing SIP to establish manage and terminate real time voice sessions with external parties Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION System PROGRAMMING SIP Web Admin Web Admin HARDWARE IP WAN Dialing After Answer CONDITIONS OPERATION System To make IP Call To receive IP Call PROGRAMMING H 323 p p Release 1 7 Y ST UCal April 2012 IP WAN Dialing After Answer 5 63
590. set tone is heard and the extension is monitored To clear extension monitoring 1 Hang up the monitored station or press the active SPEAKER button 2 The extension goes on hook and extension monitor is finished Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management To monitor a guest station Call Answer Recognition not available in U S Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Call Answer Recognition not available in U S B 43 Appendix B Hotel Management OPERATION When a call is made from a guest station and the call is disconnected without answer the call will be displayed on the guest s bill as follows HOTEL NAME TOTAL CHARGE IN ROOM Guest Name Check In 94 12 26 16 Check Out 94 12 51 11 5 days Start Tj Duration Dialed No Count Call Cost Remark 12 27 13 10 01 00 00 32 000182343507951 1 D 12 27 13 30 01 00 01 23 000182343507951 3 1500 12 28 21 22 02 00 10 18 000182343507953 31 15500 Charge Time Charged STA Item Bar Cost tax 12 28 21 32 COFFEE SHOP COFFEE 5000 100 12 29 10 10 FRONT DESK COKE MIN BAR 3000 30 ltem Charge Taxfrate sum 1 ROOM CHARGE 300000 30000 10 00 330000 rate 02 GOLD 2 CALL CHARGE 17000 170 10 00 17170 3 BAR CHARGE 8000 130 8130 4 PRE PAID 20000 Method of payment VISA TOTAL 335300 WON NOTE Currency Unit SMDR Fraction depend on PGM 2
591. signment the user should reset the system manually Board Type Code STATION BOARD CODE CO LINE BOARD CODE VMIB BOARD CODE DSIB 11 VOIU 31 VMIB 51 DTIB12 12 VOIB8 32 AAIB 52 DTIB24 13 VOIB24 33 VSF 53 SLIB12 14 LCOB4 34 SLIB24 15 LCOB8 35 WTIB 16 LCOB12 36 DTIM8 17 PRIB 37 SLTM4 8 18 SLTM32 19 Logical Slot Assignment TRANS PGM 103 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 103 2 Press the Flex button 1 3 to change slot order 3 Enter slot numbers Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables NOTE DECT I P Phone SIP Phone Port Assignment TRANS PGM 104 I P Phone Phontage Registration Table TRANS PGM 106 a Release 1 7 Y April 2012 DTIM SLTM Registration Table TRANS PGM 107 A 13 Appendix A System Programming Tables TRANS PGM 106 MAC ADDRESS Used to register an IP Phone to the System by entering its MAC Address Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page C 1 BTN RANGE REMARK USER ID Used to register a Phonatge to the System by entering its User ID and Password USER PASSWORD Used to register a Phonatge to the System by entering its User ID and Password STA NUMBER VIEW Once a connection is made to the System the current Station number will be displayed IP ADDR
592. ss Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 19 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 56 Inter Phone Group Access 534 Paging Group A Station is permitted to access page facilities for each Paging Group to connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all System Paging Groups CONDITIONS Only SADN can be assigned as the member of a Paging Group SIP Station cannot be assigned as member of a Paging Group OPERATION To perform an Internal Page 1 Dial INT Page code 2 Dial Page Group number 01 30 To perform an External Page 1 Dial EXT Page code ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Page Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 2 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PAGE ACCESS permits station to make page 2 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Meet Me Access TRANS PGM 134 FLEX 3 see details on page A 34 TRANS PGM 134 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MEET ME ACCESS enables meet me feature when there is a 3 O Disable Enable page 1 Enable Page Group Access TRANS PGM 151 see details on page A 43 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 187 Chapter 3 System Features Station Group Page Group TRANS PGM 205 see details on page A 71 TRANS PGM 205 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PAGE MEMBER ASG assign stations as members of a Page
593. ssage Detail Recording SMDR see page 3 187 Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Day Night Timed Ring Mode see page 7 37 USB Upgrade The Attendant can upgrade the System via USB memory USB upgrade could be executed using the Attendant Keyset Before upgrading a User must save the System ROM file GS55 56 MXXXX rom in USB memory Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 OPERATION Attendant To upgrade the System using the Attendant Keyset MOUNT USB MEMORY PLEASE WAIT ROM FILE NUM TOTAL 2 PRESS 0 1 TO VIEW FILE 0 GSS6MA0Aa rom PRESS HOLD TO UPGRADE 0 GS56MA0Aa rom PRESS HOLD TO UPGRADE SOFTWARE UPGRADE USB UPGRADE SUCCESS CONDITIONS PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Chapter 7 Attendants P ee i Release 1 7 AS vertical April 2012 USB DB Up Download From To USB 7 45 Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group Assign PGM 270 see details on page A 118 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE Defines the type of Attendant group 1 0 Terminal 0 1 Circular 2 Ring 3 Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME Defines the name of attendant group 2 Max 16 CO ATD NUMBER Defines attendant call number for CO line Max 4 MEMBER ASG Assigns stations as members of an Attendant 4 First Station group USB DB Up Download From To USB The Attendant can upload dow
594. status is Holiday Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST When Holiday Service type is 6 l Forward applied destination can be assigned OVERFLOW SERVICE This entry defines how to reroute 7 0 Release Release ACD call when group status is Overflow Status 1 Announcement 2 Forward OVERFLOW FWD DEST When Overflow Service type is 8 Forward applied destination can be assigned MAX QUEUING COUNT This entry defines MAX queuing 9 00 99 10 call count If queuing ACD Call count is over the max q count ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status QUEUING ANNC STEP This entry defines queuing 10 1 5 1 announcement play service step One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call REPEAT COUNT This entry defines total queuing 11 0 No Repeat No Repeat announcement repeat service count If this entry is defines as 1 One Time One or More Times service Queuing Announcement will be 2 Three Times played from 1st to defined Step And then from Repeat 3 Five Times Position Queuing Announcement will be restarted to defined 4 Ten Times step until Repeat Count 5 Twenty Times REPEAT POSITION This entry defines Repeat 12 1 5 1 Announcement Start Position FWD AFTER QUEUING This entry defines reroute usage 13 0 Off Off after queuing time over 1 On Q FWD DEST Reroute destination after queuing time over 14 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description
595. stom Message 1 2 3 4 Lift the handset Dial SLT Programming code Dial 41 Display Message code Enter the Message contents up to 16 characters refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page C 105 Press the hook switch confirmation tone is received Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Registering IP Devices amp Fractional Module Tables 3 137 Chapter 3 System Features System Attendant To activate Display Messages for other stations 1 NOOR WN Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 051 Attendant Display Message code Dial the desired Station range To scroll through the available messages press VOL UP VOL DOWN button Dial the Message number 0 9 or for User s Custom Message Dial auxiliary input hh mm mm dd etc as needed Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel active Display Messages for other stations 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PG M button Dial 052 Attendant Display Message Cancel code Dial the desired Station range Press the HOLD SAVE button RELATED FEATURES Do Not Disturb DND see page 3 77 Call Forward see page 3 15 Speed Dial see page 3 146 HARDWARE Digital Phone required receiving Display Messages Registering I P Devices amp Fractional Module Tables Registration with MAC Address Using the defined MAC address registration the system allows IP Phones DTIM and SLT
596. sts of 1 digit and 4 additional digits then there cannot be another prefix of 10 digits with 4 additional digits The additional digits of a Prefix Numbering Plan cannot be more than 4 When a Prefix Numbering Plan consists of more than 4 digits the preceding digits of the prefix code are placed at more than 4 digits from end digit called Master Prefix Digits can be up to 3 in the MBX IP 100 system and 5 in MBX IP 300 system When a conflicting Prefix is identified the existing non conflicting Numbering Plan is used until correctly updated If Numbering Plan type 7 is selected all numbering codes are deleted the first user should assign the Prefix Numbering plan After configuring the prefix the user can assign Station Number CO Group Access Code Extra Numbering and Feature code for use when user wants to reconfigure all numbering codes OPERATION System The System implements Feature activation based on the selected Flexible Numbering Plan ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 110 see details on page A 15 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Flexible Numbering Plan 3 98 Chapter 3 System Features Prefix Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE REMARK PREFIX CODE leading preceding digits of some 1 1 8digits Prefix code length more numbering plan code digit can be
597. swer the 9 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan Attendant Call PGM 113 see details on page A 17 BTN FEATURE PGM 113 REMARK 1 Attendant Call 0 HARDWARE Digital Phone Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants Night Attendant Group CONDITIONS OPERATION PROGRAMMING Tenant Data y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Night Attendant Group 7 11 Chapter 7 Attendants Night Attendant Group Greeting Queuing Tone PGM 276 see details on page A 123 PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TYPE Determines the type of Greeting Tone 1 1 Normal 1 Normal to be used 2 Prompt 3 Annc 4 INT MOH 5 EXT MOH 6 VMIB MOH1 7 VMIB MOH2 8 VMIB MOH3 9 VMIB MOH4 10 SLT MOH1 11 SLT MOH2 12 SLT MOH3 13 SLT MOH4 14 SLT MOH5 GREETING TYPE Determines the type of Greeting Tone 1 0 Normal 0 Normal used 1 Prompt 2 Annc 3 INT MOH 4 EXT MOH GREETING PLAY Determines the Greeting Play time 2 000 180 sec 000 GREETING TONE NO Determines the Greeting Tone 01 19 04 number when greeting type is set to Normal GREETING PROMPT ANNC Determines the Greeting 4 001 255 Not Asg Prompt Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt
598. t OPERATION Front Desk Service Station CONDITIONS Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Multiple Front Desks B 7 Appendix B Hotel Management The calls from service stations to office stations can be allowed or denied At hotel service station a guest can make an outgoing CO call with password by using Walking COS feature or by using One Time CO Call Enable Feature OPERATION To call Hotel Service Station 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial the service station number as a normal intercom call Multiple Front Desks Multiple front desks can be activated via programming A station becomes a front desk if it is assigned a hotel service type as front desk CONDITIONS There is no limit on the number of front desks If there are multiple front desks they can be put into one station hunt group so that the multiple front desks can receive calls from guest stations or service stations Ifthe attendants are programmed to be front desks the attendants will be able to cover office stations and hotel stations In this case calls between office stations and front desks should be enabled Simultaneous front desk programming is possible in iPECS MG system Only the latest update will be effective if multiple front desks program the same settings OPERATION Front desk features and program menu are available from front desk Check In It allocates a guest room to each guest changes the
599. t CO Group the ATD can transfer the 1 On call to second CO group OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE if outgoing 3 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME if an 4 000 300 sec 060 outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call is disconnected after release time when release type is set to RIs after Rls Time Before disconnecting a warning tone is provided INCOMING CALL TRANSFER DIRECTLY if this feature 5 0 Off Off is set to ON CO incoming call can be transferred directly 1 On without any stations or ATD to transfer the call STATION INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while stations 6 0 Off On are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the 1 On station can transfer the call to second CO group ATD INCOMING CALL TRANSFER while ATD is 7 0 Off On connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group the ATD can 1 On transfer the call to second CO group INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE If incoming 8 0 None None CO call can be transferred to other CO call release type can 1 Release after be set If set to None it is not disconnected Release Timer INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME If an 9 000 300 sec 060 incoming CO call is transferred to CO call and CO to CO call is started the call
600. t for ESTI standards ETS 300 237 238 256 257 260 261 361 362 363 364 CONDITIONS To use the networking features software lock key installation is required there are two types of software lock keys for QSIG based networking and VOIP based networking Unified Dialing Plan UDP specifies that each Station can have a unique number up to 8 digits in the Networked Systems depending on the Numbering Plan An Alternative Speed Dial route can be used to place a call but is not a Networked call so Distributed Control Network features are not available OPERATION Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured and defined ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE leading preceding digits of some 1 1 8 digits numbering plan code MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code REMARK Prefix code length more digit can be 8 at max Voice Network Voice Network TRANS PGM 320 see details on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 On NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage
601. t to defined Step And then from Repeat 3 Five Times Position Queuing Announcement will be restarted to defined 4 Ten Times step until Repeat Count 5 Twenty Times REPEAT POSITION This entry defines Repeat 12 1 5 1 Announcement Start Position FWD AFTER QUEUING This entry defines reroute usage 13 0 Off Off after queuing time over 1 On Q FWD DEST Reroute destination after queuing time over 14 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Call Indication 10 49 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q CNT DISPLAY This entry defines 6 0 Off 0 Off display of Queuing count of ACD call 1 On Q CNT INTERVAL This entry defines display 7 0 Real Time 0 Real Time interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call 1 10sec 2 20sec 3 30sec 4 40sec 5 50sec 6 60sec LOGIN PASSWD CHECK This entry defines check 8 0 Off 0 Off the password when agent log in 1 On LOGIN AGENT STATE This entry defines usage of 9 0 Ready state 0 Ready state default Agent State option when agent log in 1 DND state 2 Work state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER This entry defines usage 10 0 Off 0 Off of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log in 1 0n LOGIN AUTO WORK This entry d
602. t used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determines the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 8 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 9 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Tenant Attributes TRANS PGM 280 281 One System can be divided as several systems each Station and CO line are assigned to a specific Tenant group Release 1 7 YW vertical
603. tails on page A 109 TRANS PGM 255 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ZN For each day of the week a Day Zone 1 to 3 is 1 FLEX 1 7 Zone 1 All days assigned The active Day Zone is the Zone assigned to the current 1 3 of the week day of the week Flex button 1 7 DAY ZONE 1 This entry defines the time zone of day zone 1 2 00 24 00 24 when Day Zone 1 is active DAY ZONE 2 This entry defines the time zone of day zone 2 3 00 24 when Day Zone 2 is active DAY ZONE 3 This entry defines the time zone of day zone 3 4 00 24 when Day Zone 3 is active RELATED FEATURES Digit Conversion see page 3 74 CO IP Access see page 3 37 Station Flexible Buttons see page 6 21 Linked Station Pairs Group One MADN can be assigned to 10 stations at max so 10 stations can make a linked group not only paired If all of the stations set the DN to their Prime DN all of 10 stations act like the same station If one of the stations uses the number other stations cannot use the same number Only different Sub DN can be used at the same time CONDITIONS Ifa member of MADN presses the DND button while ringing only the member station s ringing is stopped Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Linked Station Pairs Group 3 115 OPERATION This is automatically supported by the system database ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Chapter 3 System Features P
604. tails on page A 141 TRANS PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 1 0 Off Off 1 0n NET CNIP ENABLE The name of the calling station is sent to the 2 0 Off On called System between MBX IP systems CNIP is displayed at the 1 On called party Stations display based on the programming Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features P d p Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Networking 3 229 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE REMARK PREFIX CODE lea
605. tails on page A 33 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 133 CALL WAIT ACCESS enable to leave a call wait when a called station does not answer or in DND state BTN RANGE 0 Disable 1 Enable DEFAULT Enable Tenant Data Intercom Busy One Digit Attributes TRANS PGM 237 see details on page A 101 TRANS PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT STEP CALL determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable DIGIT 1 when accessing a busy tone User may dial for one of 2 0 N A the one touch services DIGIT 2 3 DIGIT 3 4 0 N A DIGIT 4 5 1 Call Back DIGIT 5 6 2 Camp On 3 Call Wait aes 7 4 Voice Over DIGIT 7 8 5 Intrusion DIGIT 8 g 6 Hunt DIGIT 9 10 DIGIT 0 11 DIGIT 12 Call Wait DIGIT 13 Voice Over Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Outcall Notification 3 131 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Do Not Disturb DND see page 3 77 Intercom Call ICM Call see page 4 2 Voice Over see page 6 32 Outcall Notification This feature provides a way to notify the arrival of voicemail messages to the specified telephone number If the user enables the notification of mailbox and programs a phone number including CO access code the system will give a call by dialing the programmed number and allows ac
606. tation Group based 6 data INIT STATION DATA Initializes System based data 7 INIT STATION DATA Initializes SMDR data 8 INIT STATION DATA Initializes System Timers 9 INIT STATION DATA Initializes Table based data 10 INIT STATION DATA Initializes Tenancy Group based 11 data INIT STATION DATA Initializes Networking data 12 INIT STATION DATA Initializes SIP data 13 Release 1 7 Y MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Release 1 7 vertical April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management System Capacity and License The following tables list the specifications for both types of MBX IP systems Items MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 KSU No 2 3 Slot No per KSU 6 6 Total Port Extension CO line 200 414 if IP Phone DECT not included 564 if IP Phone DECT included Number of extension Port 120 324 Number of extension 180 Ext 120 DN 60 648 324 x 2 Number of CO Line 80 240 Number of Tenant Group 5 9 Numbering Plan Extension 8 Digits Feature 8 Digits Extension 8 Digits Feature 8 Digits Trunk 8 Digits Trunk 8 Digits Attendant 5 Tenant 5 Tenant DSS BLF Console 5 5 Member of conference 13 party 13 party Internal Page zone 15 30 System speed dial 1000 32 digits 2000 32 digits Statio
607. te 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Wednesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 3 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED 4 0000 2359 Day 9 00 mode end times Nite 18 00 TDS _ _ TDE _ _ Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features P d gt Release 1 7 Y April 2012 System Database Backup To USB 3 255 Chapter 3 System Features System Database Backup To USB The complete system database can be downloaded to a USB memory drive automatically This can be scheduled to run once a week ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data DB Auto Download Weekly TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 9 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DB AUTO DOWNLOAD WEEK Determines when system 9 1 7 represent 0 Off database downloads to USB automatically Mon Sun DB Download Time TRANS PGM 223 FLEX 10 see details on page A 85 TRANS PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DB DOWNLOAD TIME Sets the time for system database 10 00 23 00 download to USB automatically HARDWARE USB Interface Tenant Group One System can be divided into several systems each Station and Co line is assigned to a specific Tenant Group Stations in a group are allowed or d
608. ter conversation agent state will be 3 Call Ring OG changed to work state 2 CALL RING after conversation or after ringing agent state will be changed to work state 3 CALL OG after conversation or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state 4 CALL RING OG after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call agent state will be changed to work state ANNOUNCEMENT USE This entry defines usage 5 0 Off 0 Off of Announcement when agent answer incoming 1 0n ACD Call Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Group Service Status 10 9 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Group Service Status ACD group has 5 status settings Normal Forward Overflow Night Holiday Status 1 Normal status is a general service status 2 Forward status ACD call will be forcibly forwarded to registered destination 3 Overflow status will be changed automatically from Normal status
609. tes 3 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes TRANS PGM 131 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Station Number Attributes TRANS PGM 131 135 A 33 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes II TRANS PGM 132 TRANS PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORCED HANDSFREE ACCESS when placing an 1 0 Disable Disable intercom call a user can change the ICM signaling mode 1 Enable Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode FORWARD ACCESS enables Call Forward to be activated 2 0 Disable Enable by the station 1 Enable OFFNET FORWARD ACCESS a station must be allowed 3 0 Disable Enable Off Net Fwd to forward external incoming calls outside the 1 Enable system or otherwise establish a CO to CO connection DND ACCESS enables DND to be activated by the station 4 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable INTRUSION ACCESS enables intrusion to gain access to 5 0 Disable Disable an active call 1 Enable MOBILE EXT ACCESS enables mobile extension ability 6 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable HOOK FLASH MODE determine the operation when SLT 7 0 Flash Normal Flash Normal user press hook flash button during conversation 0 FLASH 1 Flash Ignore NORMAL Hook Flash can be detected In addition
610. the Conference Room password and for end mark if password is less than 6 digits if password is 6 digits dialing is not needed 4 Hang up to complete the transfer Single Line Phone To set up a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset Dial Conference Room Create Code Dial the desired Conference Room number 1 9 Dial the Conference Room password or ee ON Press the hook switch Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Conference 3 49 Chapter 3 System Features To join a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Conference Room Number 3 Dial the Conference Room password and for end mark if the password is less than 6 digits if password is 6 digits dialing is not needed To delete a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Conference Room Delete Code 3 Dial the Conference Room number 1 9 4 Dial the Conference Room password and for end mark if the password is less than 6 digits if password is 6 digits dialing is not needed 5 Press the hook switch ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Conference Access TRANS PGM 133 FLEX 2 see details on page A 33 TRANS PGM 133 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONFERENCE ACCESS enable Conference call 2 0 Disable Enable 1 Enable Numbering Data Conference Room Create Delete Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 19 BTN FEATURE REMARK 49 Create Conf Room 527 Conf Room
611. the Secretary station and to other Stations needing to know the Executive s status Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 IP Trans coding 3 109 Chapter 3 System Features To Active or Deactivate In Room Indication Press the DN button the DND status of the DN will toggle and the LED signal will be changed at the same time ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan DND Status Change Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 21 DND Status Change 516 Station Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 FLEX 1 see details on page A 31 Flex Button Assign TRANS PGM 126 see details on page A 29 Station Auto Dial Attributes TRANS PGM 138 see details on page A 38 TRANS PGM 138 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO DIAL DGT Digits will be dialed automatically 1 Max 16 digits AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME Auto dial pause time 2 00 30 0 IP Trans coding The system employs either the IEEE g 711 g 729 or g 723 codec to digitize and compress voice signals for RTP packets between devices IP Phone or terminals on DTIM SLTM incorporate DSP functions to support codec conversion Available VOIBs include DSP circuitry used to support trans coding converting codecs for incoming VoIP calls to devices The VOIBs will trans code the incoming voice codec g 711 g 723 g 729 to the System codec and reverse the process for outg
612. time when release type is set to RIs after Rls Time Before disconnected warning tone is provided Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP as Release 1 7 x April 2012 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signal Sending 5 55 Chapter 5 CO IP RELATED FEATURES VMIB Auto Attendant see page 7 37 Day Night Timed Ring Mode see page 7 37 Dialing Restrictions see page 3 63 Authorization Codes Password see page 3 5 Unsupervised Conference see page 3 53 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail see page 3 258 Auto Service Mode Control see page 3 10 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signal Sending CO Lines can be assigned for Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF signaling CONDITIONS e The System will mute the User s voice transmission to reduce interference while sending DTMF tones OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO COS PGM 177 Outgoing CO Line Inter Digit Timer PGM 174 H 323 Multi Route Service The system can set up several destination IPs for one prefix The destination IP is selected circularly when user tries to make a H 323 call CONDITIONS This feature is for only VoIP H 323 OPERATION Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Release 1 7
613. tion There are some options to support the Incoming CO line e Progress Indicator Send e CID Prefix Code Add to prefix code before CLI e Own Code Add to Transit CID Own code can be added to incoming CLI when external User places an outgoing call through CO Line in the System e Provide Dial Tone Dial Tone can be provided to a Station if PX is not given the dial tone e CPT Detect System can release the CO Line by detecting the External User s disconnection Own Code Own code is added before the Station number when CLI information is available Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP CONDITIONS PROGRAMMING CO Line Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 CO Line Service 5 11 Chapter 5 CO IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected 10 0 DTMF DTMF DTMF Pulse R2MFC 1 PULSE 2 R2 CHARGE MODE If FREE the external call 11 0 Free Report though CO line is not printed saved to SMDR 1 Report even though SMDR is enabled If REPORT the external call though CO line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes METERING TYPE According to PSTN 12 00
614. tion Admin Programming A 7 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Admin Programming LCD amp Button Functions While in the PROGRAM MODE the Liquid Crystal Display LCD and Flex button LEDs of an Admin Station are used to guide and indicate status of the feature The dial pad is most often used to enter data after selecting a data item using the Flex buttons In some cases pressing a Flex button will toggle the entry with the Flex button LED indicating the status ON OFF For PROGRAM CODES with multiple Flex button selections the volume controls VOL UP and VOL DOWN buttons may be used to select the next or previous item The SPEED button is generally employed as a delete button to erase existing entries however where noted it may be used to confirm a range input Pressing the CONF button will return the screen to the 1st step of the data entry procedure for the PROGRAM CODE without storing unsaved entries The SAVE button is used to store data after entry If there are no conflicts in the entered data a confirmation tone will be received and the data stored If a conflict exists an error tone is provided and newly entered data is not saved Generally corrected data may be entered and stored without restarting the entry procedure from the 1st step Alphanumeric Data Entries In some cases an alphanumeric entry is required Two 2 dial pad digits represent each character of an alphanumeric entry as shown in t
615. tion and Connected Line Identification Restriction may be enabled in the System database CONDITIONS This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a subscription service OPERATION Operation of this feature is automatic PROGRAMMING System Data CLI Print PGM 223 FLEX 6 see details on page A 85 PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI PRINT If set to ON CLI information is printed 6 0 Off 0 Off 1 On Keypad Facility The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element IE may enable the User to activate certain ISDN services ex Off Net Forward To access this facility the Station must be enabled and have a Flex button programmed for KEYPAD FACILITY When activated the digits dialed by a User are sent in the Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE CONDITIONS This feature can be activated or deactivated only after a CO Line ISDN is seized Once activated the system will continue to send dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE messages regardless of ISDN messages in the connected mode DTMF tones are not sent to the connected party only the keypad message is sent Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 5 CO IP OPERATION Digital Phone To program a KEYPAD FACILITY button To activate the keypad facility after seizing an ISDN line PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan
616. tions amp Programming Guide April 2012 Call Forward Preset 3 22 Chapter 3 System Features RELATED FEATURES Station Authorization Code see page 3 5 DND see page 3 77 Dialing Restriction see page 3 63 Station Group see page 3 154 Intercom Signaling Mode see page 6 11 Call Forward Preset see page 3 22 Call Forward Preset Call Forward Preset calls to a Station are forwarded to a pre determined destination assigned in the system database Preset Call Forward can define separate treatment of CO IP calls and intercom calls In addition separate busy and no answer treatments are defined Internal Unconditional all intercom calls are immediately forwarded Internal Busy Intercom calls that encounter a busy are forwarded immediately Internal No Answer Intercom calls which are not answered in the No Answer time or busy are forwarded External Unconditional all external calls immediately forward External Busy external calls that encounter a busy are forwarded immediately External No Answer external calls not answered in the No Answer time or busy are forwarded In addition calls can be directly forwarded to the Users Voice Mail box using Call Forward Preset Preset Call Forward condition and type can be selected as listed Unconditional all calls to the station are forwarded internally or externally immediately upon receipt Busy if the station is busy all
617. to VMIB 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX Selected language type prompt is 2 1 3 1 played to the user when accessing the VMIB AUTO RECORD SERVICE Determines if user can record a 3 0 Disable Disable conversation with another user internal external It can be used 1 Enable without two way record button Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features Web Admin RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE P d Release 1 7 Y April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 275 Chapter 3 System Features Voice Mailbox Settings The User can program personal Mailbox settings including a security password and a greeting When a user presses 8 while retrieving messages the Mailbox Setting prompt To edit your greeting press 1 To edit your password press 2 To return to Main Menu press 9 is played CONDITIONS Ifthe User is external remote the User must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis time if not the call is released If the dialed number is not recognized the Invalid Entry prompt is played The User must assign a password Authentication Code up to 12 digits before access to the mailbox will be allowed NOTE NOTE Greeting does not need to be recorded OPERATION To program Mailbox settings while using the Voice Mailbox Press 8 Mailbox se
618. to a feature such as auto attendant hunt group etc 3 Feature Code FEATURE CODE If Service type is set to 2 Valid Feature Code Feature Code and valid feature code is refer to assigned then assigned feature is activated TRANS PGM 115 when there is an incoming call NOTE Feature Code is not applied to rerouted calls FEATURE DELAY If Service type is set to 3 00 30 00 Feature code it can be delayed 100 0 Assigned station and delay value can 4 be displayed Volume Up Down key is used to scroll data MEMBER ASSIGN To change station s ring 5 Start Station amp End assign status enter desired station range Max Station 30 stations can be assigned DELAY Enter delay value if delay is 0 station 5 1 0 9 Sta 100 Port 0 delay 0 will start to ring immediately If delay value is deleted the station will not ring Otherwise if delay is 1 9 the station will start to ring after delay time 3 times of delay value Others not assigned Table Data Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 see details on page A 111 TRANS PGM 259 BTN The VMIB slot amp Prompt No to be used for playing the VMIB 1 4 Announcement No RANGE DEFAULT VMIB Slot 00 18 amp Prompt No 01 70 1 100 CCR Index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No 5 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Diagn
619. to be sent to PX in Timed when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW DNT D1 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 7 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Least Cost Routing LCR 3 113 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT D1 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 8 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D1 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 9 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 1 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 10 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 1 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T2 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 11 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 2 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D2 T3 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and digits 12 Max 16 digits to be sent to PX in Day 2 Time 3 when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is FOLLOW LCR D3 T1 CHANGED The CO Group Access Code and d
620. to make outgoing calls or receive incoming calls My DN is assigned on flexible button 1 by default It can be moved to a different flexible button but cannot be deleted e Sub DN S DN station can have more numbers but M DN All numbers except M DN are called S DN NOTE S DN can be shared by other stations if it is MADN type PRIME DN If multiple numbers are used by a station one DN can be selected to have higher priority over others When only one number exists it becomes P DN which will be seized first for outgoing calls answered first if there s are multiple incoming calls and used for idle status display for DND Forward Absent Message and so on that can be set independently for each DN RELATED PROGRAMMING System Data Numbering Plan Station Number TRANS PGM 112 see details on page A 16 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 2 2 Station Data Station Number Type TRANS PGM 130 Flex 1 see details on page A 31 Chapter 2 Directory Number DN MADN Member TRANS PGM 130 Flex 2 see details on page A 31 Prime Number Button TRANS PGM 123 Flex 1 see details on page A 26 TRANS PGM 123 PRIME NUMBER BTN among My DN and several Sub DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons determines the first seized DN when the user initiates a call If prime button is not set of invalid the system scans sequentially from flexible button 1 t
621. ton If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD Otherwise you may hear an error tone To cancel wake up for a room 1 Dial Wake up Cancel feature code or PGM button 046 2 Press a phone number or a phone number range of desired room s 3 Check current wake up time 4 Press the SAVE button 5 If it is successful you may hear a service set tone check the result through the phone LCD 6 Otherwise you may hear an error tone Front Desk To register wake up for a room 1 2 NOH Pw 1 Dial Wake up Register feature code or PGM button 41 Press a phone number range of desired room s Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range Press the SAVE button Dial 1 to register wake up Dial four digits of desired time suitable for 24 HR mode If wake up is required to be repeated dial Press the SAVE button Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management To cancel wake up for a room Guest Station Digital Phone To register wake up time To cancel wake up time Guest Station Single Line Telephone To register wake up time To cancel wake up time Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Do No Disturb Registration Cancellation B 17 Appendix B Hotel Management 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial Single Line Telephone Wake up Cancel
622. ton 1 and dial the call charge rate 3 digits Press SPEED button to erase the data 4 Press Flex button 2 and enter the name of rate Max 6 characters 5 Press SAVE button to update the database permanently Go to step 2 to program another entry To assign call charge rate to rooms 1 Dial the PGM button 92 2 Dial a phone number or a phone number range Press between phone numbers when entering a phone number range 3 Press the SAVE button 4 LCD displays currently assigned index of call charge rate table of the first room in selected range For example if selected rooms are 100 105 the LCD will display as follows 100 105 0 090 HOLIDA 5 Diala desired call charge rate bin number 0 5 6 Dial to erase the bin number 7 Press SAVE button to update the database permanently Go to step 2 to assign a room rate to another room s Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix B Hotel Management Register Hotel Name CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To register hotel s name Set Call Forward CONDITIONS OPERATION Front Desk To activate call forward for the room s OR Release 1 7 YW vertical April 2012 Additional Tax Fields B 39 Appendix B Hotel Management 6 Press the SAVE button 7 Replace the handset return to idle To deactivate call forward for the room s 1 Dial the PGM button
623. ttendant follows normal call 1 the call for attendant follows attendant group call RING NO ANS TMR This entry defines ring no answer 9 0 180 seconds 0 timer If this timer expires a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type PROVIDE ANNC This entry defines if system answer the 10 0 With Answer 0 With Answer call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided 1 W O Answer Attendant Recall Unanswered or Abandoned CO IP Calls that remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer Hold Timer as applicable will Recall at the Station that placed the Call on Hold If the Call remains unanswered for the assigned Recall Time the first available Attendant will also receive the Recall The Attendant and Station will simultaneously receive the recall signal for the Attendant Recall Timer period after which the System will disconnect the Call and return the CO IP Line to Idle Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants OPERATION System PROGRAMMING CO Line Data a 7 Release 1 7 AS April 2012 Attendant Recall 7 31 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 173 BTN NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL If destination is set to 4 Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table See PGM 181 01 80 RANGE
624. ttings the Mailbox Setting prompt is presented To modify the Password 1 Dial 2 the Password Entry prompt will be presented Please enter your new password and press when finished 2 Enter desired new password and then press the key the Reenter Password prompt will be presented Please re enter your password to confirm and press when finished 3 Enter the new password again then press the key the Password Confirmation prompt is presented Your password is saved To modify the Greeting 1 Dial 1 the Greeting Option prompt will be presented To listen to your current Greeting press 5 To Record a new Greeting press 7 To return to the Main Menu press 9 2 Dial 5 to hear your Greeting OR 3 Dial 7 the Record Greeting prompt is presented At the tone record your new greeting press when done After the beep record Greeting speaking in a normal voice 5 When finished press the key the Greeting Confirmation prompt is presented Your greeting is saved Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 3 System Features To modify Mailbox Settings RELATED FEATURES HARDWARE Call Forward from VMIB CONDITIONS OPERATION To activate Call Forward while using the VM To deactivate Call Forward Release 1 7 XX vertical April 2012 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail 3 277 ADMIN PROGRAMMING St
625. tures TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT RLS TIMING If Release Timing is set to first 8 0 First Release First RLS release CO line is released when one party 1 Caller Release release the call If Caller or Called Release is 2 Called Release set CO line is released when caller or called party released the call INC OUT MODE Each CO lines can be set 9 0 Incoming Only Both to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is 1 Outgoing Only allowed only 2 Allow Both DIALING TYPE Signal type can be selected 10 0 DTMF DTMF DTMF Pulse R2MFC 1 PULSE 2 R2 CHARGE MODE If FREE the external call 11 0 Free Report though CO line is not printed saved to SMDR 1 Report even though SMDR is enabled If REPORT the external call though CO line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes METERING TYPE According to PSTN 12 00 None None service type metering type can be selected 01 12KHz among 00 12 to manage call charge 01 06 02 16KHz can be applied to LCO lines 07 12 can be 03 50KHz applied to ISDN lines 04 SPR 05 PPR 06 NPR 07 AOC 0 Standard 08 AOC 1 Italy amp Spain 09 AOC 2 Finland 10 AOC 3 Australia 11 AOC 4 Belgium 12 AOC 5 Netherlands Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 209 Chapter 3 System Features CO Line Attribute TRANS PGM 161 see details on page A
626. twork I SDN ISDN Advice of Charge AOC CONDITIONS OPERATION System PROGRAMMING System Data a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 5 65 Chapter 5 CO IP SMDR Attributes PGM 232 see details on page A 91 PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDR SERVICE SMDR Service Option 1 0 Not Use 0 Not Use On Line Off Line SMDR SMDR Interface 1 On Line Email Service can be enabled 2 Off Line 3 On Line Off Line 4 SMDR Interface 5 SMDR E Mail 6 Off Line amp E Mail 7 On Off Line amp E Mail 8 Interface amp E Mail OUTGOING REPORT Outgoing Call Report 2 0 Off 0 Off Option for SMDR Service 1 0n If this option is set outgoing call will be included at SMDR data INCOMING REPORT Incoming Call Report 3 0 Off 0 Off Option for SMDR Service 1 On If this option is set incoming call will be included at SMDR data ICM REPORT Internal Call Report Option for 4 0 Off 0 Off SMDR Service If this option is set internal call 1 On will be included at SMDR data LOST CALL REPORT Outgoing or Incoming 5 0 Off 0 Off Lost Call Report Option for SMDR Service If this 1 0n option is set CO lost call will be included at SMDR data RECORD TYPE If set to on LD calls are 6 0 All Call 0 All Call identified by the LONG DIST CALL DGT 1 LD Counter the system can record all outgoing calls or only long distance calls LONG DIST CALL DGT CNT Dialed numbers 7
627. uing announcement is provided Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 7 Attendants a Release 1 7 x April 2012 Attendant Recall 7 29 Chapter 7 Attendants PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE Determines the Forward type to use 3 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 0 Not used 1 Unconditional call is routed to a forward 1 Uncond destination unconditionally 2 Queuing overflow call is 2 Q Overflow routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows 3 3 Time out Queuing timeout call is routed to a forward destination 4 All when queuing time expires 4 Queuing all call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires APPLY TIME TYPE Determines the time setting for 4 0 All 0 All applying the Forward type 1 Day 2 Night 3 Timed FWD DESTINATION Determines the forward destination 5 Max 16 digits trunk access code should be included WRAP UP TMR Determines the Wrap up Timer a 6 000 600 100ms 5 member is available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle MEMBER NO ANS TMR Determines the No Answer 7 05 60 seconds 15 timer if this timer expires a call is routed to the next attendant ATD CALL BY STA NO This entry defines attendant call 8 l Off by dialing attendant member 0 the call for a
628. umber twice 3 Press the desired Flex button refer to the following Table Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry TRANS PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS Permits station access to VMIB 1 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX Selected language type prompt is 2 1 3 1 played to the user when accessing the VMIB AUTO RECORD SERVICE Determines if user can record a 3 0 Disable Disable conversation with another user internal external It can be used 1 Enable without two way record button TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS When allowed the station can 4 O Disable Disable activate the Two way record feature to record a conversation 1 Enable TWO WAY RECORD DEVICE Determines the save location of 5 VM Boards Two Way recorded wav files VM Boards or Phontage When Phontage is selected recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC REC MSG BACKUP STA When station has new voice mail saved 6 l on the VM internal boards this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number Phontage user can backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to the hard disk of the Phontage program installed PC BACKUP MSG DELETE When enabled Phontage user can delete 7 0 Disable Disable all voice mail in VM internal boards 1 Enable VM
629. up to place the call Using LNR will cancel Automatic Called Number Redial if active The LNR is stored in volatile memory so it is not protected in case of a power failure Manually dialing a Flash during an outgoing call will cause only those digits dialed after the Flash to be stored in the LNR buffer LNR applies to both CO and VoIP calls Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Last Number Redial LNR 3 111 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To use LNR using REDIAL button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the REDIAL button 3 Press the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to highlight the desired number 4 Press HOLD SAVE or REDIAL to dial the number highlighted To use LNR with SPEED button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEED button 2 Dial Single Line Phone To use LNR 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Last Number Redial code ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Redial Method TRANS PGM 281 FLEX 6 see details on page A 130 TRANS PGM 281 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CODEC TYPE System Codec type 6 1 G711 1 G711 2 G723 3 G729 4 G722 RELATED FEATURES Saved Number Redial SNR see page 6 18 Station Speed Dial see page 3 147 System Speed Dial see page 3 150 Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Least Cost Routing LCR
630. ups can be added as Pick Up Groups with Pick Up Attributes Pick up Groups can be set to pick up all calls internal calls only or external calls only OPERATION To use Group Call Pickup Dial the Group Call Pick Up feature code To use Direct Call Pickup 1 Dial Direct Call Pick Up feature code 2 Dial DN number to pick up the call ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Group Station Group TRANS PGM 200 FLEX 5 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 PICKUP OPTION stations can pickup group calls ringing at other stations in the group BTN RANGE 0 Disable 1 All Call 2 Intercom 3 External DEFAULT Disable Pickup Group TRANS PGM 204 Numbering Plan see details on page A 70 TRANS PGM 204 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PICK UP CONDITION this entry defines pick up condition 1 0 All Call All Call All Internal External 1 Int Call 2 Ext Call PICK UP MEMBER ASG assigns stations as members of a station 2 l pickup group Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 183 Chapter 3 System Features Group Pick Up Code TRANS PGM 113 see details on page A 18 BTN FEATURE TRANS PGM 113 REMARK 33 Group Call Pickup 564 RELATED FEATURES Group Call Pick Up see page 3 28 Push To Talk PTT Group Each Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more of the System Push To Talk
631. ures System Numbering Plan TRANS PGM 111 see details on page A 16 TRANS PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE leading preceding digits of some 1 1 8 digits numbering plan code MORE DIGITS number of digits following the 2 0 4 Prefix code REMARK Prefix code length more digit can be 8 at max CO Line Data CO Line Attribute TRANS PGM 160 see details on page A 45 TRANS PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE Displays physical line type of 1 Display Only selected CO line SVC TYPE Set CO line type as DID or 2 0 Normal Normal Normal 1 DID OUTGOING GRP NO Set CO Group 3 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to outgoing calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 INCOMING GRP NO Set CO Group 4 01 72 none MBX IP 300 01 Number to apply to incoming calls 01 24 none MBX IP 100 TENANT NO Set Tenant group number to 5 1 9 MBX IP 300 1 apply to CO lines 1 3 MBX IP 100 DGT CONVERT TBL Set Digit Conversion 6 1 9 2 Table index SIGNAL TYPE Set Answer Signal Type 7 0 No Signal No Signal 1 Send Wink IC 2 Wait Seize Ack OG 3 Send Wink amp Wait Sz Ack 4 Send amp Wait Sans 5 Send Wink amp Send Answer IC 6 Wait Ack amp Send Answer OG 7 Send All amp Wait All Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 208 Chapter 3 System Fea
632. user 1 No Ring AUTO IDLE SERVICE If this value is set to AUTO system 11 0 Auto Auto provides Auto Idle service 1 Manual Station Attributes IV TRANS PGM 124 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables y 4 Release 1 7 Y April 2012 Station Flexible Button Assignment TRANS PGM 126 A 29 Appendix A System Programming Tables Station Flexible Button Assignment TRANS PGM 126 Flex buttons for each Digital Phone and DSS Console can be assigned a function Type and an associated Value For assignments to a DSS Console enter the DSS console station number and enter the desired button number For Serial DSS the button numbers are decided by the order of Serial DSS The button number starts from 49 at the first Serial DSS 97 at the 2nd Serial DSS 48 is added to the button number when desired Serial DSS order is increased Each console contains entries for up to 48 buttons even though the console may only have 12 buttons In this case assignments for buttons 13 to 48 are ignored 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 126 2 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 Fora single station enter the same number twice 3 Dial the desired Flex button number 001 240 Press the desired Flex button 1 3 Flex button 1 to configure button ty
633. usic source The MOH can be either an internal or external source connected to either of the MOH inputs Additionally a message recorded in the VMIB can be employed as MOH along with Background Music BGM The Attendant records the VMIB announcement for MOH and VMIB MOH is assigned as the MOH source Separate messages can be recorded for each of the 3 languages supported by the system CONDITIONS There are 5 kinds of MOH 1 Normal Tone 2 Prompt 3 Announcement 4 VMIB MOH 5 SLT MOH MOH can be activated by programming the Hold Tone for MOH within the Tone Table Plugging in the BGM RCA jack on the front panel of the MPB and the BGM input on the rear panel RJ 11 jack are common however the external music source should only be connected to one of the inputs Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Music On Hold MOH 3 124 Chapter 3 System Features OPERATION System When set Operation of MOH is automatic To record a VMIB announcement for MOH 1 Press the TRANS PGN button Dial the VMIB Record Feature Code Dial the VMIB Slot number Dial the VMIB Multi Language selection Announcement number oe GN Dial the Language Type number only required with multi language support the current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt Press the key After the beep tone record the desired message 8 Press the HOLD S
634. utes TRANS PGM 255 A 109 Holiday Time Table TRANS PGM 256 A 110 System Speed Table TRANS PGM 257 A 110 Emergency Code Table Attributes TRANS PGM 258 A 111 Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 A 111 Customer Call Routing Table TRANS PGM 260 A 112 Customer Call Routing Table TRANS PGM 262 A 113 CLI Conversion Table TRANS PGM 263 A 114 CLI Conversion Table TRANS PGM 264 A 114 Ring Table TRANS PGM 265 A 115 Ring Freq Cadence Table TRANS PGM 266 A 116 Voice Mail Dialing Table TRANS PGM 269 A 116 TENANTS DATA TRANS PGM 270 290 A 117 Attendant Group TRANS PGM 270 272 A 118 Night Attendant Group TRANS PGM 275 277 A 123 Tenant Attributes TRANS PGM 280 281 A 127 Tenant Group Access TRANS PGM 283 A 130 CO Call Restriction TRANS PGM 284 285 A 130 Call Prefix Table TRANS PGM 286 288 A 132 Tenant Tone Table TRANS PGM 290 A 133 BOARD DATA TRANS PGM 300 310 A 138 ISDN Board Attribute TRANS PGM 300 A 138 ISDN Board Clock Priority TRANS PGM 301 A 139 IPP Board Attribute TRANS PGM 305 A 140 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 13 Reset Board TRANS
635. vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution ae Release 1 7 x April 2012 ACD Basic Feature 10 7 Chapter 10 ACD Automatic Call Distribution PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO ANS OPTION This entry defines no answer 15 0 Not use Not use Agent No Answer case about ACD call 1 Forward 1 Not use 2 DND state 2 Forward call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND amp Forward 3 DND Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state 4 DND amp Forward Agent state will be change to DND state and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination AGENT NO ANS DEST When Agent No Answer option is 16 Forward applied destination can be assigned ACD Group Attribute2 PGM 214 see details on page A 79 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK This entry defines 1 0 Off 0 Off check the supervisor password when supervisor 1 On change group status AGENT AGENT CALL This entry defines agent to 2 0 Allow 0 Allow agent call restriction 1 Direct call 2 Forward call WORK MODE TIMER This entry defines wrap up 3 001 240 60 timer of Agent Work State AUTO WORK MODE OPTION This entry defines 4 0 Call 0 Call when change the agent work state It is applied 1 Call Ring when only agent has auto work option 2 Call OG 1 CALL af
636. when CO line is programmed on the button 1 On RLS GUARD TIMER If CO release signaling is not completed 5 00 15 02 successfully CO line is disconnected when the timer expires UNSUP CONF TIMER When there is conference call without 6 000 255 min 000 supervisor or there is any CO to CO call the call is disconnected after the timer expires The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected MAX TRANSFER RING TIMER Max Ring Time when 7 001 300 sec 120 outgoing CO is transferred recalled OUTGOING TIME TABLE The time Table index to be applied 8 1 9 none none to outgoing CO Calls CO Outgoing Alternate Destination TRANS PGM 173 Calls can be routed to an alternate destination that can be separately defined for Day Night Timed mode according to several conditions 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 173 2 Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range Fora single CO Line enter the same number twice For MBX IP 100 acceptable ra nge is 01 80 for MBX IP 300 the acceptable range is 001 240 Select Day mode and Dial Error Type refer to Following Table Press the desired Flex button refer to Following Table Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute Press the SAVE button to store the data entry oak amp Release 1 7 vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables
637. when all agents are busy and also ACD queue is full Administrator or Supervisor can make rule release overflow announcement or forward 4 amp 5 Night and Holiday status can be changed automatically by system time table or can be changed manually by Supervisor In each status Administrator or Supervisor can make rule how to handle the AC call ACD calls can be released immediately or can be served with Night or Holiday Announcement or can be forwarded to the registered destination In case of Forward Night or Holiday status these kinds of status can be set manually by a System Administrator or group Supervisor And also in case of Night or Holiday status if Auto service change admin is set PGM 212 Flex 5 group status can be changed automatically according to the system time table CONDITIONS Group status can be changed only by supervisor or administrator Supervisor can change the rule for ACD group in its Station Web Program If Password Check When Service Mode Changed is set in admin PGM214 Flex9 supervisor has to enter the correct password when supervisor wants to change the group status Group Forward Night Holiday Status If Auto Service Status Change is set in admin PGM212 Flex5 group status will be changed automatically from Normal to Night or Holiday status according to system time table If Auto Service Status Change is set in admin PGM212 Flex5 and the System Time is in Timed mode ACD will
638. work Dialing Digit 10 digits DIGIT REPEAT Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP 0 Off Off message or not 1 On DIGIT SENDING Select digit sending mode Overlap or Enblock 6 0 Overlap Overlap 1 Enblock VOIP CPN INFO 1 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 7 l 2 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 BLF SYSTEM IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX 8 l 0 0 0 0 IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Networking 3 205 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF SYSTEM PORT UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 9 l 9500 Manager FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 10 0 Off On Non firewall IP address If the destination system is in same VPN 1 On then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Net Call A Station user can make a call to a Station on another System by dialing just the Station number as an Intercom call within the same System CONDITIONS Net call must be used without seizing a CO line User hears an error tone if there is no idle networking path In spite of ICM mode the called party receives a ringing signal fo
639. x 3 1 9 3 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Busy dial code YW vertical Release 1 7 MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 System Groups 3 161 Chapter 3 System Features TRANS PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM NO ANSWER INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups 4 1 9 4 an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the No answer dial code VM DISCONNECT For external analog Voice Mail groups an index 5 1 9 9 to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Disconnect dial code SMDI TYPE This entry defines SMDI Type 6 0 Type1 Type 1 1 Type 2 SMDI CLI INFO This entry defines SMDI CLI Information 7 0 Off Off If this is enable system sends SMDI with CLI 1 On Table Data Announcement Table TRANS PGM 259 see details on page A 111 TRANS PGM 259 BTN RANGE DEFAULT The VMIB slot amp Prompt No to be used for playing the VMIB 1 4 VMIB Slot 00 18 amp Announcement No Prompt No 01 70 CCR Index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No 5 1 100 Tenant Data Tone Table use Web Admin TRANS PGM 290 Numbering Plan Station Group Number TRANS PGM 115 see details on page A 22 TRANS PGM 115 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION GROUP RANGE Edit by Range 1 Start Station Group Number amp End Station Group Number STATION GROUP NUMBER Edit 2 Station Group Number
640. xible button 1 to flexible Button 48 and take the unused and valid flexible button as prime button NOTE DN buttons of associated DSS box cannot be a prime number button ZONE NO this menu represents a station belonging to what zone 2 1 9 1 AUTO HOLD enables Auto Hold for the station With Auto Hold 0 Off Off enabled the system will place an active external call on hold if the 1 On user presses a CO IP or DSS button ENBLOCK DIAL when On the user dialed digits are stored at the 4 0 Off Off Digital Phone until explicitly sent by the user When sent all dialed 1 On digits are sent to the system in a block Enblock mode is only available to Digital Phones with soft keys ICM ANSWER MODE selects Handsfree Privacy or Tone ring 5 1 Handsfree Tone ICM Signaling mode 2 Tone 3 Privacy DATA SECURITY disables override and camp on tones to the 6 0 Off Off station to avoid occurring error when sending data 1 On PROGRESS INDICATOR if this value is set to ON Progress 7 0 Off Off Indicator Information is included to Setup message Origin is 1 On non ISDN FAX MODE if this value is set to ON Bearer Capability 8 0 Off Off information with 3 1Khz is provided to PX 1 On DTMF WHEN REDIAL if this value is set to ON DTMF tone is 9 0 Off On heard to the station user while redial Reserved 1 On MUTE RING SERVICE if this value is set to MUTE RING system 10 0 Mute Ring Mute Ring provides MUTE RING to
641. y defines when the 15 0 Queued to group 0 Queued to group ACK message is sent to caller party 1 Agent Answer INFO DATA PRINT This entry defines usage of 16 0 Off 0 Off ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not 1 On Information Traffic data will be printed at Information Print Port INFO PRINT INTERVAL This entry defines print 17 001 250 001 10 sec interval seconds of Information Traffic data INFO CLR AFTER PRT If this value is ON after 18 0 Off 0 Off print Information traffic data previous data will be 1 On deleted ACD Group Announcement TRANS PGM 215 The system provides 9 types of tone Each tone may be assigned to normal tone VMIB prompt Announcement or internal external music 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 215 2 Enter announcement table using dial pad 3 To program tone dial tone index 1 9 Please refer to the Announcement INDEX Table of Web Admin TRANS PGM 215 for Announcement index 4 Press the Flex button Flex 1 Tone Type Flex 2 Tone Time Flex 3 Tone port index Please refer to the TONE PORT Table Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Appendix A System Programming Tables SYSTEM DATA TRANS PGM 220 242 a Release 1 7 x April 2012 System Timers TRANS PGM 220 A 83 Appendix A System Programming Tables 1 Press the TRANS PGM butto
642. y the Gov ernment is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of the Rights in Tech nical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 and or in similar or successor clauses in the FAR or in the DOD or NASA FAR Supplement Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States Contractor manufacturer is Vertical Communications Inc 10 Canal Park Suite 602 Cambridge MA 02141 2249 Release 1 7 April 2012 REVISION HISTORY Release Date Documentation Changes Page No Release 1 7 April 2012 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Manual Layout 1 1 Organization 1 1 Feature Information 1 1 System Capacities 1 2 Phones amp Consoles Supported 1 4 Chapter 2 Directory Number DN Terms 2 1 Basic Features 2 2 Chapter 3 System Features Account Code 3 1 Alarm Signal Door Bell 3 3 Authorization Codes Password 3 5 Auto Call Release 3 6 Automatic Pause Insertion 3 7 Automatic Privacy Branch Line 3 8 Auto Service Mode Control
643. yed CO IP Ring 3 57 Delayed Auto Attendant 3 58 Diagnostic Maintenance 3 60 Dial By Name 3 60 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover 3 62 Dialing Restrictions 3 63 Class of Service 3 63 Day Timed amp Night Station COS 3 65 Temporary Station COS Lock 3 68 Walking COS 3 71 Differential Ring 3 73 Digit Conversion 3 74 Do Not Disturb DND 3 77 Door Open 3 79 Door Phone 3 80 Emergency Call Emergency Alert 3 82 Executive Secretary by DN Directory Number 3 83 Executive Secretary by Exec Sec Assignment 3 85 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 87 Release 1 7 YW vertical MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 Contents TOC 3 AA VM Group 3 87 In band DTMF Signaling 3 90 SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface 3 93 Flexible Numbering Plan 3 97 Green Power Save 3
644. yyyyy C Disconnect connected party Disconnect RREEKK Il C XXxxx yyyyy D Direct Fwd to VM group Get Mail PHH ll D Xxxxx yyyyy E Error invalid number Error P 5P Il E xxxxx yyyyy H Two way Record Record None Il H xxxxx yyyyy l DND DND P 6P Il Xxxxx yyyyy N No Answer No Answer P 4P Il N XxXxxx yyyyy Direct CO IP ring to VM group AA None Ill R XXXxXx yyyyy Release 1 7 h ST MBX IP Description Operations amp Programming Guide April 2012 External Auto Attendant Voice Mail 3 95 CONDITIONS Chapter 3 System Features Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be modified using Admin Programming refer to Admin Programming Manual Only one AA VM Group can be defined in the system multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation The calling number will display with SMDI CLI INFO attribute TRANS PGM203 FLEX 7 OPERATION System The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Groups VM Group Assignment TRANS PGM 200 see details on page A 64 TRANS PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE this entry defines the type of station group 1 0 Not Assign Not Assign 1 Terminal 2 Circular 3 Ring 4 Longest Idle 5 Voice Mail GROUP NAME this entry defines the name of a group 2 Max 16 chars TENANT NO this entry assigns a tenant of a station group 3 1 9

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

NEC X401S Mechanical Drawings  Smeg CT29-2  994-0089 D400 Substation Gateway Hardware User`s Manual  L`innovation technologique au service du développement durable    User Manual  Italiano  USER MANUAL  1010 User Manual - Time Electronics  Gold GXW15 Benutzerhandbuch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file